M002-RLR-MEP-SPE-27005 Rev 3

CONTENTS
1 Definitions and Abbreviations: 14

2 Purpose: 15
3 Scope: 15
3.1 Scope of work: 15
4 General Clauses: 15
4.1 General Clauses 15
4.2 Local Market Availability 15
5 Fire Suppression: 16
5.1 Codes and Standards 16
5.2 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties: 17
5.2.1 Part 1 General 17
5.2.2 Part 2 Products 18
5.2.3 Part 3 Execution 21
5.3 21 0500 Common work Results or Fire Suppression: 22
5.4 21 0523 General Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping: 30
5.5 21 0553 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment: 47
5.6 21 1200 Fire-Suppression Standpipes: 49
5.6.3 PART 3 EXECUTION 60
5.7 21 1300 Fire Suppression Sprinklers: 61
5.8 21 2200 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing System: 73
Document No. Revision Title

M002-RLR-MEP-SPE-27005 3 DD2 - Qatar University Station WP11.2 - MEP Specifications
P. O. Box 23452, Doha, State of Qatar; Ahmad Bin Ali Business Centre, 1st Floor , Room 2, Building 289, St.230, C Ring Road, Doha
Tel: ++974 4471 9853; Fax: ++974 4421 9210; Email: rizzani@qatar.net.qa
Joint Venture: Rizzani de Eccher Spa
Lotte Engineering & Construction Co. Ltd.
Redco International Trading & Contracting W.L.L. Page 3 of 611
5.9 21 3000 Fire Pumps: 85
5.10 21 3000 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping: 108
6 MEP Plumbing & Drainage: 117
6.1 22 0519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping: 117
6.2 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: 120
6.3 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation: 123
6.4 22 1005 Plumbing Piping: 126
6.5 22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specialties: 135
6.6 22 3000 Plumbing Equipment: 140
6.7 31 3219.23 Geotextile: 146

6.8 33 0513 Manholes and Structures: 148
6.9 33 4923.13 Underground Storm Drainage Water Retention Tanks: 150
6.10 46 6000 Water Treatment Equipment: 154
7 Smoke Management: 155
7.1 08 9000 Sand Trap Louvers and Vents: 155
7.2 23 0713 Duct Insulation: 160
7.3 23 3101 Ducts and Casings Smoke Management: 165
7.4 23 3301 Air Duct Accessories Smoke Management: 174
7.5 23 3417 Centrifugal Fans Smoke Management: 180
7.6 23 3413 Axial Fans Smoke Management: 190

7.7 23 3701 Air Outlets and Inlets Smoke Management: 200
7.8 08 5000 Motorized Smoke Vent: 205
7.9 08 5001 Automatic Smoke Curtain: 210
8 Ventilation and Air Conditioning: 213
8.1 23 0513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC equipment: 213
8.2 3 0516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping: 217
8.3 23 0519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping: 221
8.4 23 0548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: 226
8.5 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: 230
8.6 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: 234

8.7 23 0713 Duct Insulation: 246
8.8 23 0716 HVAC Equipment Insulation: 250
8.9 23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation: 254
8.10 23 0913 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: 258
8.11 23 2113 Hydronic Piping: 268
8.12 23 2114 Hydronic Specialties: 282
8.13 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps: 287
8.14 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping: 290
8.15 23 2500 HVAC Water Treatment: 299

8.16 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings VAC: 304
8.17 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories VAC: 309
8.18 23 3319 Duct Silencers: 314
8.19 23 3416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans: 318
8.20 23 3433 Air Curtains: 323
8.21 23 3514 Dust Collection Equipment: 325
8.22 23 3600 Air Terminal Units: 329
8.23 23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets VAC: 332
8.24 23 4000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices: 336
8.25 23 6313 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers: 337

8.26 23 6426 Rotary-Screw Water Chillers: 340
8.27 23 7313 Modular Central-Station Air-Handling Units: 348
8.28 23 8124 Computer Room Air Conditioners - Floor Mounted: 366
8.29 23 8127 Small Split-System Heating and Cooling: 394
8.30 23 8129 Variable Refrigerant Volume HVAC System: 397
8.31 23 8200 Convection Heating and Cooling Units: 405
9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: 412
9.1 26 0500 Common Work Results for Electrical: 412
9.1.1 Part 1 Scope of Electrical Services Installation. 412
9.1.2 Part 2 Fixing to Building Structure 412
9.1.3 Part 3 Painting and Finishes 412
9.2 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: 416
9.3 26 0526 Bonding System: 424

9.3.1 PART 1 GENERAL 424
9.4 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems: 431
9.5 26 0534 Conduits: 433
9.6 26 0535 Surface Raceways: 441
9.7 26 0536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: 443
9.8 26 0537 Boxes: 446
9.9 26 0540 Underfloor Ducts: 449
9.10 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems: 454
9.11 26 0918 Remote Control Switching Devices: 458
9.12 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices: 462

9.13 26 0919 Enclosed Contactors: 464
9.14 Switchboards: 465
9.15 26 2416 Panelboards: 487
9.15.1 part 1 general 487
9.16 26 2419 Motor-Control Centers: 502
9.17 26 2501 Low-Voltage Busways: 504
9.18 26 2717 Equipment Wiring: 510
9.19 26 2726 Wiring Devices: 512
9.20 26 2813 Fuses: 519
9.21 26 2818 Enclosed Switches: 521

9.22 26 2913 Enclosed Controllers: 523
9.23 26 2916 Electronic Soft-Start Controllers: 525
9.23.2 Part 2: Product 526
9.23.3 Part 3: Execution 529
9.24 26 2923 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers: 530
9.25 Central Battery System: 533
9.26 26 3513 Low Voltage Power Factor Correction: 535
9.26.2 Part 2 products 537
9.27 26 3600 Transfer Switches: 540
9.28 26 4113 Lightning Protection System: 545
9.29 26 4300 Surge Protective Devices: 550
9.30 26 5013 Luminaire Schedule: 553

9.31 Interior Lighting: 558
9.32 14 2010 Passenger and Service Elevators: 564
9.33 14 2010 Escalators: 573
10 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems (FRD): 582
10.1 28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems: 582

1 Definitions and Abbreviations:
Table 1: Definitions and Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition
Rizzani de Eccher S.p.A, Lotte Engineering and Construction, Redco
RLR
International in joint venture
VAC Ventilation and Air Conditioning
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air conditioning Engineers
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
AHRI Air conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute
QCS Qatar Construction Specifications
MEP Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing
AHU Air Handling Unit
HAP Hourly Analysis Program
TFM Transfer Function Method
IAQ Indoor Air Quality
STL Sand Trap Louver
DDC Direct Digital Control
SCH Schedule
CRAC Computer Room Air Conditioner
CRAH Computer Room Air Handler
FCU Fan Coil Unit
CAV Constant Air Volume
DX Direct Expansion
CHW Chilled Water
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
FAHU Fresh Air Handling Unit
AHC Air Handling unit for Ceiling installation
FAHC Fresh Air Handling unit for Ceiling installation
BACS Building Automation Control System
DB Distribution electrical board
MDB Main Distribution Board
SPS Station power substation
TPS Traction power substation
SMDB Sub-Main distribution board
MCC Motor control center
UPS Uninterrupted Power System
MCCB Moulded case circuit breaker
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker
VFD Variable frequency drives
APFC Automatic power factor correction

2 Purpose:
This document relates the works and materials to be used in the construction of Qatar
University Station of the Red Line North Elevated and At Grade Metro in Doha.
3 Scope:
3.1 Scope of work:

The intention of this document is to give an outline of the design development to supplement
the drawing submission as listed in Qatar University Station - Submission Lists - DD2 .
This specifications considers the MEP System of the Qatar University Station.
For all these areas the current specifications includes the MEP Systems design progress on
the following disciplines:
 Electrical System
 Ventilation and Air Conditioning (VAC)
 Smoke Management System
 Plumbing and Drainage System
 Fire Protection
 Fire Detection
4 General Clauses:
4.1 General Clauses

A. It is the sub-contractor's responsibility to check latest local Qatar codes & regulations
and International Standards mentioned in them and Supply & install the products that
satisfy them. If contradictions arise in between them and this document, they must be
communicated immediately to the Contractor and the Engineer through a technical
and economical report analyzing the contradiction.
4.2 Local Market Availability

A. The sub-contractor shall procure materials and products that available in Qatar
market, where this is in conflict with the specified standards the sub-contractor shall
propose alternative standard, as long as it does not conflict with the approved
design, ER , Qatar construction standards and QCD. All alternatives shall be equal
and approved.

5 Fire Suppression:
5.1 Codes and Standards:

The standards upon which fire suppression specifications are based, in the following order of
priority:
A. NFPA 130 including its referred standards.
B. Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards (QCDFSS) including their referred
standards.
C. Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS) including their referred standards, QCS
2014 Section 23: Fire Fighting and Fire Alarm Systems. The following standards are
referred to in this Part:
ANSI B16.1 ................ Cast iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings
ANSI B16.5 ................ Pipe flanges and flanged fittings
ASTM A 47 ................. Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 106 ............... Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
ASTM A 135 ............... Specification for Electric-Resistant-Welded Steel pipe
ASTM A 183 ............... Specification for Carbon Steel track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 197 ............... Specification for Cupola Malleable Iron
ASTM A 234 ............... Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and
Alloy for Moderate and Elevated temperatures
ASTM A 395 ............... Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining
Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures
ASTM A 536 ............... Ductile Iron Castings
BS 750........................ Underground fire hydrants and surface box frames and covers
BS EN 1561 ............... Specification for grey iron castings
BS EN 1563 ............... Iron castings with spheroidal or nodular graphite
BS 5163 ..................... Double flanged cast iron wedge gate valves for waterworks
purposes
BS 5423 ..................... Portable fire extinguishers
BS 6575 ..................... Fire blankets
BS EN 671 ................. Fixed fire fighting systems – Hose systems
NFPA 13 ..................... Installation of Sprinkler Systems
In addition to the above, all aspects of the fire fighting system shall comply with applicable
national and international codes and standards including, but not limited to, those issued by the
following organisations:
A. Civil Defence Department
B. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA)
C. British Standards (BS)
D. Loss prevention Council Board (LPCB

5.2 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties:
5.2.1 Part 1 General

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire blankets.
C. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
D. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish (see architectural
specifications).
B. Section 21 1200 - Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Cabinet enclosure for extinguishers
and blankets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
B. QCS 2014 - Qatar Construction Specifications, 2014 edition.
C. NFPA 130, Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail Systems, 2014
edition
D. QCDFSH, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Handbook.
E. QCDFSS, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards, 2008 edition
F. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015 edition.
G. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire
Protection Association; 2013.
H. EN 3-7: 2004 + A1: 2007 - Portable fire extinguishers. Characteristics, performance
requirements and test methods.
I. EN 3-8: 2006 - Portable fire extinguishers. Additional requirements to EN 3-7 for the
construction, resistance to pressure and mechanical tests for extinguishers with a
maximum allowable pressure equal to or lower than 30 bar.
J. EN 615: 2009 - Fire protection. Fire extinguishing media. Specifications for powders.
(other than class D powders)
K. EN 10130: 2006 - Cold rolled low carbon steel flat products for cold forming.
Technical delivery conditions.
L. EN 1869:1997 - Fire blankets.
M. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening
coordination requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification
requirements.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of
extinguisher ingredients.
5.2.2 Part 2 Products

2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of EN 3-7: 2004 +
A1: 2007 and EN 3-8: 2006 applicable codes, whichever is more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labelled by EN 3-7, EN 3-8, EN 615 and EN 10130 for the
purpose specified and indicated.
B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Cartridge Operated: Spun shell.
2. Stored Pressure Operated: Deep Drawn.
3. Class: A:B:C.
4. Size and classification as scheduled.
PORTABLE MANUAL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
TOTAL OPERATION
SHORT FIRE
CAPACITY WEIGHT TIME DRAWING REMARKS
DESCRIPTION RATING
(KG) (SECONDS)
Including:
Metallic cabinet with
door and fire luminiscent
6KG DRY signals.
6KG ABC
CHEMICAL 27A-183B-C 9,3 22
EXTINGUISHER
POUDRE
Including:
9KG DRY signals.
9KG ABC
CHEMICAL 34A-233B-C 13,3 26
EXTINGUISHER
POUDRE
C. Carbon Dioxide Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class: B:C.

TOTAL OPERATION
SHORT FIRE
DESCRIPTION RATING
(KG) (SECONDS)
Including:
signals.
2KG C02
2KG CO2 34B-C 12,3 22
EXTINGUISHER
Including:
signals.
5KG C02
5KG CO2 89B-C 16,8 25
EXTINGUISHER
2.02 WHEELED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Dry Chemical Type Wheeled Trolley Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with
pressure gage.
1. Class A B C.
TOTAL OPERATION
SHORT FIRE
DESCRIPTION RATING
(KG) (SECONDS)
Including:
TROLLEY FRAME AND
WHEELS.
25KG ABC Fire luminiscent signals.
EXTINGUISHER 25KG ABC 34A-233B-C 42,5 30
TROLLEY
B. CO2 Carbon Dioxide Type Wheeled Trolley Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with
pressure gage.
1. Class B C.

TOTAL OPERATION
SHORT FIRE
DESCRIPTION RATING
(KG) (SECONDS)
Including:
TROLLEY FRAME AND
WHEELS.
10KG C02 Fire luminiscent signals.
EXTINGUISHER 10KG CO2 188B-C 29,7 30
TROLLEY
Including:
TROLLEY FRAME AND
WHEELS.
20KG C02 Fire luminiscent signals.
EXTINGUISHER 20KG CO2 188B-C 80 42
TROLLEY
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type.
1. Sized to accommodate accessories.
2. Trim less type.
3. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form
perimeter trims and door stiles.
C. Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors
for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.
D. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket
glazing.
E. Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick acrylic. Set in resilient channel
gasket glazing.
F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.
G. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
H. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
I. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fire Blanket: Fire retardant treated wool; red, 62 x 84 inch (1 575 x 2 135 mm) size.
1. Provide fire blanket labelled by EN 1869:1997 for the purpose specified and
indicated.
B. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
C. Extinguisher Theft Alarm: Battery operated alarm, 10 second delay for disarming,
activated by opening cabinet door.

D. Cabinet Signage
5.2.3 Part 3 Execution

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, inches (1200 mm) from finished
floor to inside bottom of cabinet.
C. Secure rigidly in place.
D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
END OF SECTION

5.3 21 0500 Common work Results or Fire Suppression:

A. Pipe, fittings, sleeves, escutcheons, seals, and connections for sprinkler, standpipe
and fire hose, and combination sprinkler and standpipe systems.
A. Fire stopping.
B. General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping.
C. Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment: Piping identification.
D. Fire-Suppression Standpipes: Standpipe design.
E. Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler systems design.
F. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Piping identification.
A. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; the American Society of Mechanical

Engineers; 2012.
B. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing,
and Fusing Qualifications; the American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
C. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250; the American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.
D. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; the American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
E. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011.
F. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings; the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/ASME B16.5).
G. ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings; The American
H. ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-welding and Threaded; The American
I. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; the American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
J. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
K. ASME B16.25 – Butt welding Ends; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2012.
L. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe; The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.
M. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999
(Reapproved 2014).
N. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
O. ASTM A135/A135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel
Pipe; 2009 (Reapproved 2014).
P. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon
Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2013.
Q. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic
Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service; 2014e1.
R. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984 (Reapproved
2009).
S. ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use; 2013.
T. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).
U. ASTM B75/B75M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube; 2011.
V. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
W. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric);
2013.
X. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fibber Blanket Insulation and
Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2013.
Y. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Fire stop Systems;
2013a.
Z. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2015.
AA. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2013.
AB. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2013.
AC. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2010.
AD. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;
American Welding Society; 2011-AMD 1.
AE. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010 w/Errata.
AF. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems;
American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5).
AG. AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings; American Water Works
Association; 2012 (ANSI/AWWA C110).
AH. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2012 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
AI. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water; American
Water Works Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
AJ. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association;
2011 (ANSI/AWWA C606).
AK. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2016.
AL. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire

AM. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.
AN. EN 671 – Hose Systems.
AO. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and
ratings.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and
wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support
details, and piping connections.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag
numbering.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts
lists.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Valve Stem Packings: Two for each type and size of valve.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified
this section.
1. Minimum three years experience.
2. Approved by manufacturer.
C. Conform to UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey requirements.
D. Valves: Bear UL, FM, and Warnock Hersey label or marking. Provide manufacturer's
name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified as suitable for the
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labelling in place.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place
until installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
A. Sprinkler Systems: Conform to NFPA 13.
B. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX.
D. Hose reels with semi-rigid hose shall generally comply with BS EN 671-1.
E. Hose with lay-flat hose shall generally comply with BS EN 671-2.
2.02 BURIED PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, ASTM A135/A135M Schedule 10, ASTM
A795 Standard Weight, or ASME B36.10M Schedule 40, black, with AWWA
C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.
1. Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, butt welded, ASME B16.25, butt weld
ends, ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel or alloy steel, ASME B16.5,
steel flanges and fittings, or ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and
threaded; with double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings.
3. Joints: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D.1M.
4. Casing: Closed glass cell insulation.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and
washers.
2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: black.
1. Steel Fittings.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ASME B16.1, flanges and flanged fittings and ASME B16.4,
threaded fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, threaded fittings and ASTM A47/A47M.
4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and
lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
galvanized for galvanized pipe.
5. Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-
ring pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical
engagement onto pipe.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and
lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers;
galvanized for galvanized pipe.
2.04 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Vertical Piping:
1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch (25 mm) above finished floor.
2. Provide sealant for watertight joint.
3. Blocked out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) angle set in silicon
adhesive around opening.
4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) angle ring or square set in
silicone adhesive around penetration.
B. Plastic, Sheet Metal, or Moisture-Resistant Fibber: Pipe passing through interior
walls, partitions, and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are specified below.

C. Pipe Passing Through Below Grade Exterior Walls:
1. Zinc coated or cast iron pipe.
2. Provide watertight space with link rubber or modular seal between sleeve and
pipe on both pipe ends.
D. Pipe Passing Through Quarry Tile, Terrazzo, or Ceramic Tile Floors:
1. Brass pipe.
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate.
E. Pipe Passing through Concrete Beam Flanges, except where Brass Pipe Sleeves are
specified:
1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.
F. Pipe Passing Through Mechanical, Laundry, and Animal Room Floors above
Basement:
1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.
G. Not required for wall hydrants for fire department connections or in drywall
construction.
H. Penetrations in concrete beam flanges are permitted but are prohibited through ribs or
beams without prior approval from the Architect.
2.05 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe
and wall/casing opening.
2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3. Elastomeric element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
2.06 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Tyco Fire Protection Products: www.tyco-fire.com.
2. Viking Group Inc: www.vikinggroupinc.com.
B. Material:
1. Fabricate from nonferrous metal.
2. Chrome-plated except when 300 series, ASTM A269/A269M stainless steel is
provided.
3. Metals and Finish: Comply with ASME A112.18.
C. Construction:
1. One-piece for mounting on chrome-plated tubing or pipe and one-piece or split-
pattern type elsewhere.
2. Internal spring tension devices or setscrews to maintain a fixed position against a
surface.
2.07 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch (15 to 40 mm): Malleable iron, adjustable
swivel, split ring.
B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches (80 mm): Cast iron hook.
E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp.
F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.08 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Victaulic Company; Fire Lock Style 009H: www.victaulic.com.
B. Rigid Mechanical Couplings for Grooved Joints:
1. Dimensions and Testing: Comply with AWWA C606.
2. Minimum Working Pressure: 300 psig (2065 kPa).
3. Housing Material: Fabricate of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536.
4. Housing Coating: Factory applied orange enamel.
5. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30
degrees F (minus 34 degrees C) to 230 degrees F (110 degrees C).
6. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc electroplated steel

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance
with NFPA 13.
B. Install standpipe piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 14.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumbs and parallel to building structure. Maintain
gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other
work.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
G. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides
of reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe
over 4 inches (100 m).
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished
covering and adjacent work.
2. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
3. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) minimum vertical adjustment. Design
hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
4. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
5. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to
maintain top of pipe level.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe
support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
K. Structural Considerations:
L. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
M. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors, walls, and partitions and seal pipe
and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation
required.
1. Underground Piping: Caulk pipe sleeve watertight with lead and oakum or
mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with bitumen sealed metal
components.
2. Aboveground Piping:
a. Pack solid using mineral fibber conforming to ASTM C592.
b. Fill space with an elastomeric caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch (15 mm) where
penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
3. All Rated Openings: Caulk tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM
E814 in accordance with Section 07 8400 (See Architecture Specs).to prevent
the spread of fire, smoke, and gases.
4. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically
expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components.
N. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:
1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and
exterior concrete walls at piping entrances into building.
2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping
and sleeve inner diameter or penetration diameter.
3. Locate piping in centre of sleeve or penetration.
4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space
between sleeve and piping.
5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.
6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
O. Escutcheons:
1. Install and firmly attach escutcheons at piping penetrations into finished spaces.
2. Provide escutcheons on both sides of partitions separating finished areas
through which piping passes.
3. Attach plates at the underside only of suspended ceilings.
4. Use chrome plated escutcheons in occupied spaces and to conceal openings in

construction.
P. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components
are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary
joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently
provided.
Q. Die cut threaded joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and
linseed oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of work, clean all parts of the installation.
B. Clean equipment, pipes, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge that
may have accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.
END OF SECTION

5.4 21 0523 General Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping:

A. Two-piece ball valves with indicators.
B. Bronze butterfly valves with indicators.
C. Iron butterfly valves with indicators.
D. Check valves.
E. Bronze OS&Y gate valves.
F. Iron OS&Y gate valves.
G. NRS gate valves.
H. Trim and drain valves.
I. Feeder Pipe Valve.
J. Pressure Reducing Valve.
A. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe and fittings.
B. Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
C. Fire-Suppression Standpipes.
D. Fire Suppression Sprinklers.
E. Site Water Utility Distribution Piping.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene diene monomer.
B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.
C. NRS: Non-rising stem.
D. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
E. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
F. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.
A. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
B. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2010.
C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
D. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing,
and Fusing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
E. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association;
2015 (ANSI/AWWA C606).
F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection

Association; 2016
H. NFPA 13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Low-Rise
Residential Occupancies; National Fire Protection Association; 2013.
I. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
listings at database.ul.com.
J. UL 262 - Gate Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 312 - Check Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
L. UL 789 - Indicator Posts for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
M. UL 1091 - Butterfly Valves for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
N. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturer’s catalogue information.
Submit performance ratings, rough-in details, weights, support requirements, and
piping connections.
B. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
A. Manufacturer:
1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.
2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Where listed products are specified, provide products listed, classified, and labelled
by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), FM Global, or testing firm acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX.
D. Installer and Maintenance Contractor Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years documented experience.
2. Trained and approved by manufacturer to design, install, test and maintain the
equipment specified herein.
3. Complies with manufacturer's certification requirements.
4. Complies with manufacturer's insurance requirements.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads and flange faces.
3. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.
4. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt.
a. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps.
b. Maintain caps in place until installation.
2. Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation.
a. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point
temperature.
b. If outdoor storage is unavoidable, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use the following precautions for handling:
1. Use sling to handle large valves, rigged to avoid damage to exposed parts.
2. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. UL Listed: Provide valves listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the
following headings and bearing the UL mark:
1. Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment.
a. Level 1: HCBZ - Indicator Posts, Gate Valve.
b. Level 1: HLOT - Valves.
c. Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control.
d. Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves.
e. Level 3: HMER - Check Valves.
f. Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves.
2. Main Level: VDGT - Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices.
a. Level 1: VQGU - Valves, Trim, and Drain.
B. FM Global Approved: Provide valves listed in FM P7825 Approval Guide under the
following headings:
1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:
a. Indicator posts.
b. Valves:
1) Gate valves.
2) Single check valves.
3) Miscellaneous valves.
C. ASME Compliance:
1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads on threaded-end valves.
3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
D. Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.
E. Comply with NFPA 13, NFPA 13R, and NFPA 14 for valves.
F. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as
required.
G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
H. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Worm-gear actuator with hand wheel for quarter-turn valves, except trim and
drain valves.
2. Hand wheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.
3. Hand-lever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves 2 NPS (50 DN) and smaller.

2.02 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A. UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global standard for indicating valves
(butterfly or ball type), Class Number 1112.
B. Description:
1. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
2. Body Design: Two piece.
3. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.
4. Port Size: Full or standard.
5. Seat: PTFE.
6. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
8. Actuator: Worm gear or travelling nut.
9. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.
10. End Connections for Valves 1 NPS (25 DN) through 2 NPS (50 DN): Threaded
ends.
11. End Connections for Valves 2-1/2 NPS (65 DN): Grooved ends.
2.03 BRONZE BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A. UL 1091 and FM Global Approved for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class
Number 1112.
B. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
C. Body Material: Bronze.
D. Seat: EPDM.
E. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
F. Disc: Bronze with EPDM coating.
G. Actuator: Worm gear or travelling nut.
H. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.
I. End Connections for Valves 1 NPS (25 DN) through 2 NPS (50 DN): Threaded ends.
J. End Connections for Valves 2-1/2 NPS (65 DN): Grooved ends.
2.04 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS
A. UL 1091 and FM Global Approved for indicating valves (butterfly or ball type), Class
Number 112.
C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, polyamide, or coating.
D. Seat: EPDM.
E. Stem: Stainless steel.
F. Disc: Ductile iron, nickel plated.
G. Actuator: Worm gear or travelling nut.
H. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.
I. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.

2.05 CHECK VALVES
A. UL 312 and FM Global Approved for check valves, Class Number 1045.
C. Type: Centre guided check valve.
D. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron.
E. Centre guided check with elastomeric seal.
F. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel.
G. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.
2.06 BRONZE OS&Y GATE VALVES

A. UL 262 and FM Global Approved for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y and
NRS-type gate valves).
C. Body and Bonnet Material: Bronze or brass.
D. Wedge: One-piece bronze or brass.
E. Wedge Seat: Bronze.
F. Stem: Bronze or brass.
G. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.
H. Supervisory Switch: External.
I. End Connections: Threaded.
2.07 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES
C. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.
E. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.
F. Stem: Brass or bronze.
G. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.
H. Supervisory Switch: External.
I. End Connections: Flanged.

2.08 NRS GATE VALVES
C. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron with elastomeric coating.
E. Stem: Brass or bronze.
F. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.
G. Supervisory Switch: External.
H. End Connections: Flanged.

2.09 INDICATOR POSTS
A. Type: Underground.
B. Base Barrel Material: Cast or ductile iron.
C. Cap: Cast or ductile iron.
D. Operation: Wrench.
2.10 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
A. Ball Valves:
1. Description:
a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
b. Body Design: Two piece.
c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.
d. Port Size: Full or standard.
e. Seat: PTFE.
f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.
g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
h. Actuator: Hand-lever.
i. End Connections for Valves 1 NPS (25 DN) through 2-1/2 NPS (65 DN):
Threaded ends.
j. End Connections for Valves 1-1/4 NPS (32 DN) and 2-1/2 NPS (65 DN):
Grooved ends.
B. Angle Valves:
1. Description:
b. Body Material: Brass or bronze.
c. Ends: Threaded.
d. Stem: Bronze.
e. Disc: Bronze.
f. Packing: Asbestos free.
g. Hand wheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminium.
C. Globe Valves:
1. Description:
b. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
c. Ends: Threaded.
d. Stem: Bronze.
e. Disc Holder and Nut: Bronze.
f. Disc Seat: Nitrile.
g. Packing: Asbestos free.
h. Hand wheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminium.
2.11 Automatic Filling tank Hydraulic Valve

Tagged valve drawings:AHV-01 and AHV-02 inside fire fighting pump room (FFP).

2.12 Pressure Reducing Valve (PRV)

2.13 Pressure Relief Valve or Safety Valve
A. The pressure relief valve is designed specifically to automatically relieve excess pressure
in fire protection pumping systems. Pilot controlled, it maintains constant system pressure
at the pump discharge within very close limits as demands change.
B. Schedule:

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm valve interior to be free of foreign matter and corrosion.
B. Remove packing materials.
C. Examine guides and seats by operating valves from the fully open position to the fully
closed position.

D. Examine valve threads and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage.
1. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material.
2. Verify gasket for size, defects, damage, and suitable material composition for service.
3. Replace all defective valves with new valves.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with specific valve installation requirements and application in the following
Sections:
1. for application of valves in fire-suppression standpipes.
2. for application of valves in wet and dry pipe, fire-suppression sprinkler systems.
3. for application of valves in fire-suppression water-service piping outside the building.
B. Install listed fire protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of
water supply except from fire department connections.
C. Install check valve in water supply connections and backflow preventer at potable water
supply connections.
D. Valves in horizontal piping installed with stem at or above the pipe centre.
E. Position valves to allow full stem movement.
F. Install valve tags. Comply with Section 21 0553 requirements for valve tags, schedules,
and signs on surfaces concealing valves; and the appropriate NFPA standard applying to
the piping system in which valves are installed.
END OF SECTION

5.5 21 0553 Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment:

A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society
of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
B. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2013.
C. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and colour coding for mechanical
identification.
B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number,
location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue literature for each product required.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS
A. Automatic Controls: Tags.
B. Control Panels: Nameplates.
C. Instrumentation: Tags.
D. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
E. Piping: Tags.
F. Pumps: Nameplates.
G. Relays: Tags.
H. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
I. Thermostats: Nameplates.
J. Valves: Nameplates and ceiling tacks where above lay-in ceilings.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Colour: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Background Colour: Black.
4. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
5. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

2.03 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background colour. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm)
diameter with smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminium frame.
2.04 PIPE MARKERS
A. Colour: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit
around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and
identification of fluid being conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon
tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for
direct burial service.
E. Colour code as follows:
1. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply
with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished
grade, directly above buried pipe.
D. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers
and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of
structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
E. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner
of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION

5.6 21 1200 Fire-Suppression Standpipes:

A. Standpipe system.
B. Fire department connection.
C. Fire extinguishers located in hose cabinets.
A. Fire Protection Specialties.
B. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Fire protection piping.
C. Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
D. Fire Pumps.
E. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
F. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
G. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.
B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
C. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection
Association; 2013.
D. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems; National Fire
E. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.
F. QCS 2014 - Qatar Construction Specifications, 2014 edition.
G. NFPA 130, Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail Systems, 2014
edition
H. QCDFSH, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Handbook.
I. QCDFSS, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards, 2008 edition
J. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015 edition.
K. BS 5041-1:1987 - Fire hydrant systems equipment. Specification for landing valves
for wet risers.
L. BS 5154:1991 - Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and
gate valves.
M. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalogue sheet for equipment indicating rough-
in size, finish, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate supports, components, accessories, and sizes.
1. Submit shop drawings and product data to Owner's insurance underwriter for

approval.
2. Submit proof of approval to Architect.
3. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.
4. Operation Data: Include manufacturer's data.
5. Maintenance Data: Include servicing requirements and test schedule.
6. Certificates: Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction
indicating approval of field acceptance tests.
7. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
a. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
b. Extra Hose Nozzles: One.
c. Extra Hoses: One.
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 14. Maintain one copy on site.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum 10 years experience approved by manufacturer.
A. Deliver and store products in shipping packaging until installation.

2.01 FIRE HOSE CABINETS
A. Hose Cabinets:
1. Style: Recessed mounted.
2. Tub: 16 gage (1.6 mm) thick steel, prepared for pipe and accessory rough-in.
3. Door: 12 gage (2.7 mm) thick steel, flush, glazed with 6 mm thick wired glass full
panel; hinged, positive latch device.
4. Finish: Prime Coated.
5. Hose Rack: Steel with polished chrome finish; swivel type with pins and water
stop.
6. Hose: 1 1/4 inch (33 mm) diameter, 100 feet (30 m) long, of linen hose; mildew
and rot-resistant.
7. Nozzle: Chrome plated brass; combination fog, straight stream, and adjustable
shut-off.
2.02 VALVES
A. Hose Station Valve: Angle type, brass finish, 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) nominal size with
automatic ball drip; refer to Section 21 0500.
B. Hose Connection Valve: valves manufactured according to BS 5154 and BS 5041
part 1. Angle type; brass finish; 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) size, thread or flanged to match
fire department hardware, 300 psi (2070 kPa) working pressure, with threaded cap
and chain of same material and finish; refer to Section 21 0500.
1. Manufactured: Delta Fire or approved equal.
C. Pressure Reducing Valve: Angle type; brass finish with inner hydraulic controls; 1-1/2
inch (40 mm) size, thread to match fire department hardware, 400 psi (2760 kPa) inlet
pressure, with threaded cap and chain of same material and finish; refer to Section 21
0500.
D. Hose Connection Valve Cabinets:
1. Style: Recessed mounted.

2. Tub: 16 gage (1.6 mm) thick steel, prepared for pipe and accessory rough-in.
3. Door: 12 gage (2.7 mm) thick steel, flush, glazed with 6 mm thick wired glass full
panel; hinged, positive latch device.
4. Finish: Prime Coated.
2.03 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Type: Flush mounted wall type with brass finish.
B. Outlets: Two 2 ½” headed instantaneous female way with thread size to suit fire
department hardware; threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish.
Oulets according to BS 336, or Other International Outlets: Storz, NOR, JIS, N&S, NH
etc. (It must be asked and approved by civil defence)
C. Drain: 3/4 inch (20 mm) automatic drip, outside.
D. Label: "Standpipe - Fire Department Connection".
E. With twin check valve.
F. Inlet: 6”.
G. Manufactured: Delta Fire or approved equal.
2.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Comply with NFPA 10.
B. See previous chapter “10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties”.
2.05 VORTEX PLATE
A. These are outlet fittings with baffle plates fitted inside the tank to reduce vortex
formation when water is being pumped out. They enable the bottom water level to be
lower, thus increasing the effective capacity of the tank.
B. The vortex plate is made of stainless steel. The plate diameter must be at least 18”
(457,2 m). The connection pipe between the vortex plate and the wall, including the
flanges, will be made of stainless steel,
C. Limit velocity 0,457 m/s
D. The vortex plate include: SS threaded rods, SS nuts, and Flat washers
2.06 PIPES
A. General
1. Section Includes:
a. Materials:
1) Pipe
(a) Victaulic Couplings
(b) Victaulic Fittings
(c) Victaulic Valves
(d) Victaulic Specialties
(e) Victaulic Tooling
2. Materials
a. Pipe
B. Carbon Steel, A-53B/A-106B - Roll or cut grooved-ends as appropriate to pipe
material, wall thickness, pressures, size and method of joining. Pipe ends to be
grooved in accordance with Victaulic current listed standards conforming to
ANSI/AWWA C-606.
1. Core Pipe
C. Pipes Sizes of Ø 80 mm & smaller: core pipe shall be seamless black steel pipes
conforming to ASTM A53 / API 5L Grade B, with schedule 40 wall thicknesses, and
grooved ends for Victaulic mechanical coupling joints.
D. Pipes Sizes of Ø 100 mm - Ø 800 mm: core pipe shall be ERW/SAW black steel
pipes conforming to ASTM A53 / API 5L Grade B, standard weight wall thicknesses,
and grooved ends for Victaulic mechanical coupling joints.
E. Pipes Sizes larger than Ø 800 mm: core pipe shall be SAW black steel pipes
conforming to ASTM A53 / API 5L Grade B, with extra strong weight wall thicknesses,
and grooved ends for Victaulic mechanical coupling joints.
1. Surface Finish
F. The core pipe external surface shall be grit-blasted to SA 2½ near white metal finish,
then coated by airless spray with self-priming Polyamide/Polyamine epoxy to a total
DFT of 125 microns nominal. 50mm shall be kept bare (uncoated) from both pipe
ends for joint welding.
1. Insulation
G. The thermal insulation shall be rigid cellular 100% CFC-free Polyurethane foam, as
per EN 253 factory-injected between core pipe and outer casing, having a density of
48 kg/m³ (3.0 lbs/ft³) nominal and thermal conductivity coefficient (l50) of 0.030
W/m•K (0.208 BTU-in/hr•ft²•°F) maximum at a mean temperature of 24°C(75°F).
Typical operating temperature is between -17 to +120°C (0 to 250°F).
1. Outer Casing / Protective Jacket
H. The outer casing or protective jacket shall be made of extruded High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe, black, UV-resistant, having a density of 950 kg/m³ and a
long-term mechanical property with tensile stress of 4.0 MPa (580 psi) at 80°C.
1. Fittings
I. All fittings shall be pre-insulated black steel, butt-welding type, with similar wall thickness
of the carbon steel pipes, conforming to ASTM A234 WPB and dimensions according
to ANSI/ASME B16.9, with 300 mm long Bevelled end steel pipe extension factory
welded to each end. All fabrication welded joints shall undergo 100% Non Destructive
Testing prior to insulation.
J.Field Joint Insulation
K. Field joint insulation shall consist of Polyurethane foam chemicals (2-component)
poured in a heat shrinkable tubular sleeve (Ray joint), fixed around the join and its
ends heat-shrunk to finish the joint. The Raychem heat shrinkable tubular sleeve can
be pressure tested up to 0.7 Bar.
1. Victaulic Couplings
L. Victaulic Standard Mechanical Couplings (2 inch through 12 inch): Manufactured in
two segments of cast ductile iron, conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12.
Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber, grade to suit the intended
service, conforming to ASTM D-2000. (Gaskets used for potable water applications
shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for potable water service.)
Mechanical Coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon
steel track head conforming to ASTM A-449 and ASTM A-183, minimum tensile
strength 110,000 psi (758450 kPa) as provided standard Victaulic.
1. Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be
used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI
B31.1, B31.9, and NFPA 13.
a. 2” through 6”: “Installation Ready” Victaulic Style 107 for direct stab
installation without field disassembly.

b. 2” through 12”: Victaulic Style 07 (Zero-Flex®).
1) Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress
relief are required. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible
connectors at equipment connections. Three couplings, for each
connector, shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source.
Victaulic Style 75 or 77.
2.07 FLANGE ADAPTERS:
For use with grooved end pipe and fittings, flat faced, for mating to ansi class 125 / 150
flanges. victaulic style 741. for direct connection to ansi class 300 flanges use victaulic style
743. grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of astm f-1476.
2.08 GASKET:
Synthetic rubber conforming to steel pipe outside diameter and coupling housing,
manufactured of elastomers as designated in astm d-2000.
A. Reference shall always be made to the latest published Selection Guide for Victaulic
Gaskets for proper gasket selection for the intended service.
2.09 VICTAULIC AGS MECHANICAL COUPLINGS (14 INCH THROUGH 24 INCH):
Couplings shall consist of two astm a-536 ductile iron housing segments, a wide elastomer
pressure responsive gasket, and zinc electroplated carbon steel track head bolts and nuts
conforming to the physical and chemical requirements of astm a-449 and the physical
requirements of astm a-183.
A. Coupling housings designed with the wedge-shaped AGS key profile to engage the
mating pipe(s)/component(s) wedge-shaped AGS grooves. Housings include lead-in
chamfer to accommodate a wider acceptable range of initial pipe positions. Housings
shall be coated with orange enamel or galvanized.
B. Gasket: Synthetic rubber, wide width, conforming to steel pipe outside diameter and
coupling housing, manufactured of elastomers as designated in ASTM D-2000.
C. Reference shall always be made to the latest published Selection Guide for Victaulic
Gaskets for proper gasket selection for the intended service.
1. Coupling Types:
a. Victaulic W07 AGS Rigid Coupling: Coupling key shall be designed to fill the
wedge shaped AGS groove to provide a rigid joint that corresponds with
support spacings as defined by ASME B31.1 and B31.9. Systems
incorporating rigid couplings require the calculated thermal
growth/contraction of the piping system to be fully compensated for in the
design of the piping system through use of adequate flexible components.
1) Victaulic W77 AGS Flexible Coupling: Coupling key shall be designed to
fit into the wedge shaped AGS groove and allow for linear and angular
movement, vibration attenuation, and stress relief. Support
requirements defined by Victaulic Design Data Submittal 26.01.
(a) Victaulic Fittings
D. Standard fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-
45-12, forged steel conforming to ASTM A-234, Grade WPB 0.375" wall (9,53 mm
wall), or fabricated from Std. Wt. Carbon Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53, Type
F, E or S, Grade B. Fittings provided with an alkyd enamel finish or hot dip galvanized
to ASTM A-153. Zinc electroplated fittings and couplings conform to ASTM B633.
E. AGS Fittings shall be supplied with factory AGS grooved ends, for use with Victaulic
W07 or W77 couplings and W741 flange adapter. Fittings shall be manufactured of

ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, forged carbon steel conforming to ASTM A-
234, or factory fabricated from carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53. Fittings
shall be manufactured to the dimensional standards ASME B16.9. Orange enamel
coated or galvanized.
F. Victaulic Hole-Cut Branch Outlets:
1. Bolted Branch Outlet: Branch reductions on 2"(DN50) through 8"(DN200) header
piping. Bolted branch outlets shall be manufactured from ductile iron conforming
to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with synthetic rubber gasket, and heat treated
carbon steel zinc plated bolts and nuts conforming to physical properties of
ASTM A-183. Victaulic Style 920 / 920N.
2. 300 PSI (2065 kPa). Victaulic Style 923.
3. Strapless Thermometer Outlet: To accommodate industrial glass bulb
thermometers with standard 1-1/4"-18 NEF 2B extra fine thread and 6" (152mm)
nominal bulb length on 4" (DN100) and larger header sizes rated for 300 PSI
(2065 kPa).
a. Victaulic Valves
G. Butterfly Valves
1. 2"(DN50) through 12"(DN300) Sizes: 300 psi CWP (2065 kPa) suitable for
bidirectional and dead-end service at full rated pressure. Body shall be grooved
end black enamel coated ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536. Disc shall be
[electroless nickel plated ductile iron] [stainless steel] [aluminium bronze] with
blowout proof 416 stainless steel stem. Disc shall be offset from the stem centre
line to allow full 360 degree seating. Seat shall be pressure responsive [EPDM]
[Lubricated Nitrile] [Fluoroelastomer]. Valve bearings shall be TFE lined
fibreglass, and stem seals shall be of the same grade elastomeric as the valve
seat. Valve shall be complete with ISO flange for actuation mounting. Valve
operators shall be lever handle or gear operator, available with memory stop
feature, locking device, chain wheel, or supplied bare. (Valve with EPDM seat is
UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61.) Victaulic Vic®-300 Master
Seal™.
2. 14” (DN350) through 24” (DN600) Sizes: 300 psi (2065 kPa), AGS grooved ends,
polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) coated ductile iron body (ASTM A-536, Grade 65-
45-12), PPS coated ductile iron disc (ASTM A-536), and two piece 17-4 PH S/S
stem design. Seat and seal material to suit intended service. Reinforced PTFE
bearings and gear operator. Bubble tight, dead-end, or bi-directional service.
With memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service. Victaulic AGS-
Vic300.
a. Note: Refer to latest published Victaulic literature, Butterfly Valve Material
Selection section, for liner/seat and disc material recommendations for
chemical service.
H. Check Valves:
1. 2-1/2"(DN65) through 3"(DN80) Sizes Spring Assisted: PPS coated ductile iron
body, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, aluminium bronze non-slam tilting disc,
stainless steel spring and shaft, rubber seat suitable for intended service, 300 psi
(2065 kPa). Victaulic Series 716.
2. 4”(DN100) through 12”(DN300) Sizes Spring Assisted: Black enamel coated
ductile iron body, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, elastomeric encapsulated
ductile iron disc suitable for intended service, stainless steel spring and shaft,
welded-in nickel seat, 300 psi (2065 kPa). Victaulic Series 716.
3. 2”(DN50) through 4”(DN100) Sizes Horizontal Swing: Horizontal installation,

ductile iron body, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, and Type 316 stainless steel
clapper. Synthetic rubber bumper & bonnet seals suitable for intended service,
stainless steel wetted parts, 300 psi (2065 kPa). Victaulic Series 712.
4. 4”(DN100) through 12”(DN300) Sizes Venturi Check: Black enamel coated
ductile iron body, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12 with venturi-like taps,
elastomeric encapsulated ductile iron disc suitable for intended service, stainless
steel spring and shaft, welded-in nickel seat, 300 psi (2065 kPa). Victaulic Series
779.
5. 14” (DN350) through 24” (DN600) Check Valves: 230 psi (1585 kPa), AGS
grooved ends, spring-assisted dual disc check valve. ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-
12 coated ductile iron body, EPDM seat bonded to the valve body, 304 stainless
steel disc, and 300 series stainless steel spring and shaft. Victaulic Series W715.
I. Tri-Service Valve Assembly: Combination shut-off, throttling and non-slam check valve.
Vic®-300 Master Seal™ butterfly valve with memory stop feature assembled with
Series 716 (2-1/2” & 3” (DN65 & DN75)) or Style 779 Venturi Check (4” – 12”(DN100-
DN300). Series 779 check valve with venturi like taps for flow measurement. Working
pressures to 300 psi (2065 kPa).
J.Ball Valves: 1-1/2”(DN40) through 6”(DN150) sizes, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12,
ductile iron body, chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, TFE seats, with
Fluoroelastomer seals. 800 psi (5515 kPa). Victaulic Series 726.
K. Plug Valves: 3"(DN75) through 12"(DN300) sizes, with memory stop for throttling,
metering or balancing service. Unidirectional bubble-tight shut-off, bi-directional
sealing optional. ductile iron body, bonnet, and plug, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12.
Plug encapsulated with synthetic rubber suitable for intended service. Welded-in
nickel seat, stainless steel self-lubricating bearings. 175 PSI (1200 kPa). AWWA rigid
groove dimensions may be adapted to IPS sized system through the use of Victaulic
Style 307 transition couplings. Victaulic Series 377 eccentric plug balancing valves.
L. Circuit Balancing Valves:
1. 2”(DN50) and Smaller Sizes: 300 psi (2065 kPa), y-pattern, globe type with
soldered or threaded ends, non-ferrous Ametal® brass copper alloy body, EPDM
o-ring seals. 4-turn digital readout hand wheel for balancing, hidden memory
feature with locking tamper-proof setting, and connections for portable differential
meter. Victaulic / TA Hydronics Series 786 or 787 STAD.
2. 2-1/2”(DN65) and Larger Sizes: 300 psi (2065 kPa), y-pattern, globe type with
flanged or grooved ends, ASTM A536 ductile iron body, all other metal parts of
Ametal® brass copper alloy, EPDM O-ring seals. 8, 12 or 16-turn digital readout
hand wheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof
setting, and connections for portable differential meter. Victaulic / TA Hydronics
Series 788 or 789 STAG.
a. Victaulic Specialties
M. Expansion Joints:
1. 2”(DN50) through 6”(DN150) Sizes: Pack less, gasketed, type with grooved end
telescoping body, suitable for axial end movement to 3”. 350 psi (2410 kPa).
Victaulic Style 150 Mover®.
2. 3/4"(DN20) and Larger Sizes: Expansion joint consisting of a series of grooved
end nipples joined with flexible-type couplings. Joint movement and expansion
capabilities determined by number of couplings / nipples used in the joint.
Victaulic Style 155.
2.10 DIELECTRIC WATERWAYS:

1”(dn25) through 8”(dn200) sizes, grooved, plain end, or threaded end, astm a-53
carbon steel or astm a-536 ductile iron body, zinc electroplated, with lths high
temperature stabilized polyolefin polymer liner. victaulic style 47.
2.11 STRAINERS - GROOVED-END
A. T-Type Strainer. 2” (DN50) through 12”(DN300) sizes, 300 PSI (2065 kPa) T-Type
Strainer shall consist of ductile iron (ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12) or carbon steel
(ASTM A-53) body, Type 304 stainless steel frame and mesh removable basket with
No. 12 mesh, 2"-3" (DN50-DN75) strainer sizes, or No. 6 mesh, 4"-12" (DN100-
DN300) strainer sizes, 57% free open area. Victaulic Style 730.
B. T-Type Strainer: 14” (DN350) through 24” (DN600) sizes, 300 PSI (2065 kPa), AGS
grooved end “Tee” strainer. Factory fabricated carbon steel body conforming to ASTM
A-53, Grade B, carbon steel T-bolt hinged closure/cap, and type 304 stainless steel
frame and mesh basket, (6x6 mesh for 14”(DN350) and 16”(DN400) sizes, and 4x4
mesh for 18”(DN450) through 24”(DN600) sizes). Victaulic Series W730.
C. Y-Type Strainer. 2”(DN50) through 12”(DN300) sizes, 300 PSI (2065 kPa) Y-Type
Strainer shall consist of ductile iron body, ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, Type 304
stainless steel perforated metal removable baskets with 1/16" (1,6mm) diameter
perforations and 41% open area 2"-3" (DN50-DN75) strainer sizes or 1/8" (3,2mm)
strainer sizes diameter perforations and 40% open area 4"-12" (DN100-DN300)
strainer sizes. Victaulic Style 732.

D. Suction Diffuser – Flanged outlet with grooved inlet connections, rated to 300 psi (2065
kPa). Ductile iron (ASTM A-536) body, 304 stainless steel frame and perforated sheet
diffuser with 5/32" (4,0mm) diameter holes. Removable 20 mesh 304 stainless steel start-
up pre-filter, outlets for pressure/temperature drain connections, and base support boss.
Victaulic Series 731-G and W731-G.
E. Flow Measuring Sensors - Grooved End

1. Venturi-Type:
2. Orifice-Type: Rated 250 psi (1725 kPa). Carbon steel (ASTM A-53) body and carbon
steel (ASTM A-569) plate, brass needle valve conforming to ASTM B-124. Minimum
straight pipe installation of five diameters upstream and two diameters downstream 2-
1/2”(DN65) through 4”(DN100) sizes, and 10 diameters upstream and 4 diameters
downstream in sizes 5”(DN125) and larger. Victaulic Style 734.
a. Victaulic Tooling
F. Tools shall be manufactured and supplied by Victaulic. Use roll sets or cut groovers
compatible with the pipe material and wall thickness.
G. Common wedge shaped AGS groove for pipe sizes 14”(DN350) through 24”(DN600)
requiring one (1) common AGS roll set per tool, for use with approved Victaulic grooving
tools. (VE414MC, VE416 FSD, VE424 MC, or VE436.)
2.12 EXECUTION
2.13 INSTALLATION:
A. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area
from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.
B. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the
intended service as specified.
C. Install the Victaulic AGS piping system in accordance with the latest Victaulic installation
instructions.
D. AGS products shall not be installed with standard grooved end pipe or components.
Installing AGS products in combination with standard grooved end products could result in
joint separation and/or leakage.)
E. Use Victaulic grooving tools with AGS roll sets to groove the pipe. Follow Victaulic
guidelines for tool selection and operation.

F. Couplings installation shall be complete when visual metal-to-metal contact is reached and
the required torque is achieved.
G. See the latest copy of Victaulic’s Field Assembly and Installation Instruction Pocket
Handbook (I-100).
2.14 TRAINING:
A. A Victaulic factory trained representative (direct employee) shall provide on-site training for
contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product
installation.
2.15 APPLICATION:
A. A Victaulic representative shall periodically visit the job site and review installation.
Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
B. Victaulic grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved
components may be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods.
C. All grooved components shall conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-
31.1, B-31.3, B-31.9, ASME, UL/ULC, FM, IAPMO or BOCA.
D. Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified.
2.16 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGESATER METER
A. Application: To be used for direct reading of differential pressure in water pipe fittings
whenever shown on the Drawings. Additionally, two electrical contacts for a direct remote
alarm and the data centre connection shall be " available.
B. Description: Differential pressure gauges shall have a diameter of 150 mm, have stainless
steel wetted parts and be constructed of a brass case material with a differential pressure
range of 30 KPa. Units shall include a bourdon element, have two electrical contacts
available, and be suitable for a max. line pressure of 1200 Kpa.

5.6.3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 14.
C. Locate and secure cabinets plumb and level. Establish top of cabinet (inside
horizontal) surface 66 inches (1675 mm) above finished floor.
D. Locate hose station valve in cabinet at 6 inches (1500 mm) above finished floor.
E. Connect standpipe system to water source ahead of domestic water connection.
F. Where static pressure exceeds 100 psi (690 kPa) but is less than 100 psi (690 kPa) at
any hose station, provide pressure orifice disc in discharge of hose station valve to
prevent pressure on hose exceeding 90 psi (620 kPa).
G. Where static pressure exceeds 100 psi (690 kPa) at any hose station, provide
pressure reducing valve to prevent pressure on hose exceeding 90 psi (620 kPa).
H. Provide two way fire department outlet connection on roof.
I. Flush entire system of foreign matter.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B. Test entire system in accordance with NFPA 14.
C. Test shall be witnessed by Fire Marshal.
END OF SECTION

5.7 21 1300 Fire Suppression Sprinklers:

A. Wet-pipe sprinkler system.
B. Deluge sprinkler system.
C. System design, installation, and certification.
A. Fire stopping.
B. Fire Detection and Alarm.
C. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Pipe, fittings, and valves.
D. Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
E. Fire Pumps.
F. Fire-Suppression Standpipes.
G. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
H. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
B. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;
2012.
C. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in
Masonry Elements; 2012.
D. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;
2013.
E. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2013.
F. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
G. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2016.
H. NFPA 13R - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential
Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height; National Fire Protection
Association; 2013.
I. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.
J.QCS 2014 - Qatar Construction Specifications, 2014 edition.
K. NFPA 130, Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail Systems, 2014
edition
L. QCDFSH, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Handbook.
M. QCDFSS, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards, 2008 edition
N. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015 edition.

O. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on sprinklers, valves, and specialties, including
manufacturer’s catalogue information. Submit performance ratings, rough-in details,
weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit preliminary layout of finished ceiling areas indicating only sprinkler
locations coordinated with ceiling installation.
2. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports,
sprinklers, components and accessories. Indicate system controls.
3. Submit shop drawings to authority having jurisdiction for approval. Submit proof
of approval to Architect.
C. Samples: Submit two of each style of sprinkler specified.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of
piping from drawings. Indicate drain and test locations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds
specified requirements and code requirements.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing
requirements, record drawings, inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, and location and numbers of service depot.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Sprinklers: Type and size matching those installed, in quantity required by
referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
3. Sprinkler Wrenches: For each sprinkler type.
A. Maintain one copy of referenced design and installation standard on site.
B. Conform to UL requirements.
C. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which
the Project is located.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
E. Installers:
F. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum 10 years experience approved by manufacturer.
G. Equipment and Components: Provide products that bear UL label or marking.
H. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Provide components for installation in mock-up.
B. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work.

A. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide
temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

2.01 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sprinklers, Valves, and Equipment:
1. Viking Corporation: www.vikinggroupinc.com.
2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire spaces as It is indicated on fire fighting
layouts drawings.
B. Occupancy: Light hazard and Ordinary Hazard as It is indicated on Fire Fighting Lay
out drawings; comply with NFPA 13.
C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data.
1. Revise design when test data available prior to submittals.
D. Interface system with building control system.
E. Provide fire department connections where indicated.
F. Storage Cabinet for Spare Sprinklers and Tools: Steel, located adjacent to alarm
valve.
G. Pipe Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as
follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
2.04 SPRINKLERS
A. Suspended Ceiling Type: Concealed pendant type with cover plate.
1. Response Type: Quick.
2. Coverage Type: Standard.
3. Finish: Brass.
4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass.
5. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type temperature rated for specific area hazard.

B. Suspended Ceiling Type: Semi-recessed pendant type with matching push on escutcheon
plate.
3. Finish: Brass.
4. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Brass.
C. Exposed Area Type: Pendent or Upright type with guard.

3. Finish: Brass.

D. Horizontal or Vertical Sidewall Type:
3. Finish: Bronze.
E. Flexible Drop System: Stainless steel, multiple use, open gate type.
1. Application: Use to properly locate sprinkler heads.
2. Include all supports and bracing.
3. Provide braided type tube as required for the application.

2.05 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced
clapper to automatically actuate water motor alarm, pressure retard chamber and
variable pressure trim with the following additional capabilities and features:

1. Activate electric alarm.
2. Test and drain valve.
3. Replaceable internal components without removing valve from installed position.

B. Alarm check valve assembly for wet sprinkler system, schedule:

FIGURE SHOWN DN100 / 150 mm:

B. Flooding Deluge Valve: Gate type valve with rubber faced disc actuated manually with
water motor alarm and electric alarm, with alarm testing trim.
C. Backflow Preventer: Reduced pressure principle valve assembly backflow preventer with
drain and OS & Y gate valve on each end.
D. Test Connections:
1. Inspector's Test Connection for Pre action Systems:
a. Provide test connections approximately 6 ft (2 m) above floor for each or portion
of each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device, located at the most
remote part of each system.
b. Route test connection to an open-site drain location, excluding janitor sinks,
accepting full flow without negative consequences.
c. Supply discharge orifice with same size as corresponding sprinkler orifice.
d. Limit vertical height of exterior wall penetration to 2 ft (0.61 m) above finished
grade.
2. Backflow Preventer Test Connection:
a. Provide downstream of the backflow prevention assembly, listed hose valves with
2.5 inch (65 mm) National Standard male hose threads with cap and chain.
b. Furnish one valve for each 250 gpm (16 L/s) of system demand or fraction
thereof.
c. Provide permanent sign reading "Test Valve" in accordance with Section 22 0553.
E. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminium alloy
chrome plated gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer.
F. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated chrome plated gong with pressure alarm switch.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard.
B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator.
D. Provide approved double check valve assembly at sprinkler system water source
connection.
E. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions,
or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
F. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated.
G. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
H. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
I. Centre sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required.
J.Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and
sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace
painted sprinklers.
K. Install and connect to fire pump system in accordance with Section 21 3000.
L. Install air compressor on vibration isolators.
M. Install air compressor on vibration isolators.
N. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.

O. Install guards on sprinklers where indicated.
P. Hydrostatically test entire system.
Q. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal.
3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Ensure required devices are installed and connected as required to fire alarm system.
END OF SECTION

5.8 21 2200 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing System:

A. Total flooding extinguishing system for enclosed spaces.
B. Fire detection system.
C. Control and supervision systems.
D. Extinguishing agent, containers, distribution and discharge system.
E. System maintenance after closeout.
A. Door Hardware: Release hardware for automatic closing doors.
B. Fire stopping.
C. Painting and Coating.
D. Fire Detection and Alarm: Building fire alarm system and devices.
E. Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
F. Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems.
G. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
H. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Dampers.
I. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American
B. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012
(ANSI/ASME B31.1).
C. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of
D. ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 -
Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2013.
E. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing
Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc
Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
G. ASTM A106/A106M - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for
High-Temperature Service; 2013.
H. ASTM A135/A135M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel
Pipe; 2014.
I. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.
J.AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2010.
K. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition.

L. ISO 9000 - ISO Standards Compendium: ISO 9000 - Quality management; 2005.
M. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
N. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1993 (R2006).
O. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most
Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
P. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signalling Code; National Fire Protection
Association; 2013.
Q. NFPA 2001 - Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems; National Fire
R. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.
S. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
T. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service; Underwriters
U. QCS 2014 - Qatar Construction Specifications, 2014 edition.
V. NFPA 130, Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail Systems, 2014
edition
W. QCDFSH, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Handbook.
X. QCDFSS, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards, 2008 edition
Y. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015 edition.
Z. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: To bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction. Provide for
each piece of equipment comprising the system including detectors, release devices,
discharge nozzles, manual controls, alarm devices, annunciators, extinguishing agent
containers, manifolds, and control panel.
B. Shop Drawings: To bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction. Indicate
detailed layout of system, including piping and location of each component. Include
control diagrams, wiring diagrams, and written sequence of operation.
1. Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch to 1 foot (1:100), minimum; use larger scale for details.
C. Samples: Submit one sample of each detector, manual pull station, and nozzle.
D. Design Data: Submit design calculations bearing stamp of approval of authority
having jurisdiction. Include calculations that verify system pressures, nozzle flow rate,
orifice code numbers, piping pressure losses, component flow data, and pipe sizes.
E. Installer's Qualification Statement.
F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1. Manufacturer: Certify that system meets or exceeds specified requirements.
2. Welders: Submit certificate indicating compliance with ASME Section IX.
G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include recommended equipment installation and system
components.

H. Test Reports: Indicate successful completion of tests; include certification of
extinguishing agent container pressure and extinguishing agent quantity.
I. Code Authority Approval: Submit copy of inspection approval of fire protection system by
authority having jurisdiction.
J.Maintenance Contract.
K. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and equipment,
equipment identification markings, conduit and piping routing details, and agent
container positions.
L. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Include electrical schematic written description of system design, drawings
illustrating control logic and equipment locations, and technical brochures
describing equipment.
2. Include list of recommended spare parts.
3. Include checklists and procedures for emergency situations, trouble shooting
techniques, abort functions, system control panel operation, trouble procedures,
and safety requirements.
M. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
N. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
2. Equipment Maintenance Tools: One set, including all special tools necessary for
servicing and maintaining the equipment installed.
3. Extra Detectors: One of each type.
A. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the
Project is located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
1. ISO 9000 registered.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Section IX.
D. Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years documented experience.
2. Trained and approved by manufacturer to design, install, test and maintain the
equipment specified herein.
3. Complies with manufacturer's certification requirements.
4. Complies with manufacturer's insurance requirements.
A. Deliver and store equipment in shipping containers with labelling in place. Deliver fire
extinguishing agent in approved containers.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide two year system warranty for complete replacement fire extinguishing agent.
B. Provide manufacturer's standard twenty year system warranty for complete
replacement of fire extinguishing agent due to regulatory changes.

C. Provide manufacturer's standard twenty year system warranty for complete
replacement of fire extinguishing agent due to system discharge, regardless of cause.

2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Electronical´s Rooms: Location of devices:
1. Smoke Detector: A minimum 2 detectors in each room. Detector allocation will be
based on a maximum 23 m2 per detector.
2. Abort Switch: Next to main entrance, inside and outside of the room.
3. Manual Release: Next to main entrance.
4. Alarm Bell: Any suitable location. At least one outside the protected space room.
5. Alarm Horn: None required.
6. Light and acoustic signal panel::One above the door outside the room with this text:
“DO NOT ENTER GAS DISCHARGED” and other above the door inside the room
with this text: EVACUATE NOW GAS DISCHARGED”.
7. Warning signals: There are three warning signals:
Sign 1: NOVEC 1230 GAS CAN CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH. WHEN
ALARM OPERATES, EVACUATE.
ALARM OPERATES, NO NOT ENTER UNTIL VENTILATED.
Sign 3: NOVEC 1230 GAS DISCHARGE INTO NEARBY SPACE CAN
COLLECT HERE WHEN ALARM OPERATES, EVACUATE IMMEDIATELY CAN
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
B. Electrical room: Location of devices:
1. Smoke Detector: A minimum 2 detectors in each room. Detector allocation will be
based on a maximum 23 m2 per detector.
2. Abort Switch: Next to main entrance, inside and outside of the room.
3. Manual Release: Next to main entrance.
4. Alarm Bell: At least one outside the protected space room.
5. Alarm Horn: None required.
6. Light and acoustic signal panel::One above the door outside the room with this
text: “DO NOT ENTER GAS DISCHARGED” and other above the door inside the
room with this text: EVACUATE NOW GAS DISCHARGED”.
7. Warning signals: There are three warning signals:

ALARM OPERATES, EVACUATE.
ALARM OPERATES, NO NOT ENTER UNTIL VENTILATED.
Sign 3: NOVEC 1230 GAS DISCHARGE INTO NEARBY SPACE CAN
COLLECT HERE WHEN ALARM OPERATES, EVACUATE IMMEDIATELY CAN
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
2.02 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A. Fire Suppression System: Complete fire detection and suppression system that totally
floods protected area with fire extinguishing agent to extinguish fire.
1. Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72.
2. Fire Extinguishing Agent: Any allowed by NFPA 2001.
3. Comply with NFPA 12 and NFPA 72.
4. Fire Extinguishing Agent: NOVEC 1230.
5. Locate extinguishing agent supply and backup supply in each protected area or
when it is indicated on fire fighting layout drawings.
6. Locate manual release stations at each exit from protected area.
7. Locate abort stations at each exit from protected area.
8. Provide all manufactured system components from a single source and by a
single manufacturer.
9. Provide components listed and labelled by UL for the type of system required
and for use with the other components of the system.
10. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
11. Permanently mark valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating.
B. Design Criteria: Provide total flooding of fire extinguishing agent at manufacturer's
recommended concentration by volume, in maximum discharge time of 10 seconds,
for period of 10 minutes and with 10 percent allowance for room leakage.
1. Provide minimum of two zone circuits in each contiguous protected space.
2. Direct discharge parallel to ceiling; use 360 degree pattern nozzles except where
obstructions would make 360 distribution inefficient.
3. Use UL-listed flow calculation software.
4. Provide sufficient amount of fire extinguishing agent. Consider the following when
computing volume:
a. Volume of protected area.
b. Specific volume of fire extinguishing agent.
c. Additional quantities of fire extinguishing agent required to compensate for
openings, pipe losses.
d. Forced ventilation, fan coast-down time, and damper actuation time.
e. Mechanical smoke control system.
f. Other special conditions affecting extinguishing agent concentration.
2.03 PIPE AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M Schedule 40, or ASTM
A135/A135M Schedule 10, galvanized as specified in ASTM A53/A53M.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3 malleable iron class 300 for sizes 2 inch (50 mm) and
smaller, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type fittings.
2. Joints: Threaded, AWS D1.1 welded, or grooved and shouldered pipe end
couplings.
B. Pipe Hangers: ASME B31.1, UL approved for sprinkler systems, split clamp up to 2-
1/2 inch (60 mm) size, riser clamps over 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) size, adequate to offset
discharge thrust.
C. Escutcheons: Chrome plated pressed or stamped brass, one-piece or split pattern,
minimum 2 inches (50 mm) larger than opening.
D. Gages:
1. ASME B40.100, UL 393, or UL 404 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) diameter cast aluminium case,
phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front re-
calibration adjustment, black figures on white background, 1 percent mid-scale
accuracy, scale calibrated in psi.
2.04 EXTINGUISHING AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Containers: Steel, red enamel finish; standard model and size for ease of
replacement and addition. Design, fabricate, certify, and stamp in accordance with

ASME Section VIII.
1. Where multiple, replaceable containers are used, provide only containers of the
same size and holding the same amount of extinguishing agent.
B. Contents: Fill with required fire extinguishing agent.
C. Identification: Permanent plate, specifying agent, tare and gross weight, pounds of fire
extinguishing agent, and pressurization level; installed so plate is visible and
readable.
D. Safety Release: Equip with frangible disc safety device that operates when internal
pressure exceeds 730 pounds per square inch (5033 kPa).
E. Safety Release: Equip with frangible disc safety device.
F. Valves: Heavy duty forged brass, with safety pressure relief device, manual control,
discharge valve, and pressure gage.
1. Pressure relief device activated at between 3000 to 3360 pounds per square inch
(20.7 to 23.1 MPa).
2. Provide a solenoid pilot valve for each container or each bank of containers.
G. Actuator: Resettable electric or pneumatic with pressurized nitrogen cartridge.
Explosive devices are NOT permitted.
H. Pressure Gauge: Visual indicator of internal pressure.
I. Low Pressure Switch: Electronic sensor; reports to control panel and provides audible
and visual alarms when container pressure drops below 230 pounds per square inch
(1586 kPa).
J.Manifold: Provide for systems with more than one container, with rack to secure each
and check valves between each discharge and manifold.
K. Wall Bracket: Manufacturer's standard; UL listed, welded steel construction, modular
design with saddle bottom and front bracket.
2.05 MANUAL STATIONS
A. Manual Release Station: Semi-flush housing fitted with double action control fitted
with "push in" tab and "pull down" lever that locks in position after releasing spring-
loaded contact switch, for mounting on electrical outlet box; addressable using
manufacturer's standard monitor module.
1. Activate all audible and visual alarms.
2. Override any abort station or time delay function.
3. Activate all release and shutdown functions normally triggered by detectors or
alarm system.
4. Locate engraved label adjacent to each manual release station indicating area
protected and that actuation will cause discharge of fire extinguishing agent.
B. Manual System Abort Switch: Stainless steel plate with momentary contact push
button, countdown timer, magnetic door holders manual release, for mounting on
electrical outlet box; addressable using manufacturer's standard monitor module.
1. Locate engraved label adjacent to each manual abort station, indicating area
protected and that actuation will prevent discharge of fire extinguishing agent
after automatic system is activated.
2.06 DETECTOR
A. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: NFPA 72, UL listed, adjustable sensitivity, with LED
light source and photocell, activated by smoke, plug-in, twist-lock unit easily removed
from base.

1. Amplifier-Switching Circuit and Indicator Lamp: Solid state, two-wire operating on
detector line voltage. On alarm, unit shall lock and be reset at control panel.
2. Adjustment: Manual for normal or high sensitivity, with sensitivity setting visible
and requiring no special tools.
3. Base Assembly: Twist-lock type with screw terminals, lamp to indicate alarm,
security base lock, and relay contactor.
2.07 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Nozzles: UL-listed; orifice size providing required rates of discharge and coverage
and to distribute extinguishing agent uniformly throughout protected area.
B. Construction: Two-piece chrome plated brass or aluminium nozzle with textured finish
with female pipe thread integral on body; one-piece deflector plate.
C. Orifice Union Nipple Assemblies:
1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard, UL listed.
2. Identification: Permanently marked with manufacturer's part number and UL
listing or FM approval.
3. Rating: 2000 pounds (907 kg).
D. Identification: Permanently mark nozzles with manufacturer's part number, UL listing
and equivalent single orifice diameter.
2.08 CONTROLS AND CONTROL PANEL
A. Controls: Combination type approved as both alarm and releasing device, with solid
state internal circuitry enclosed in NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 cabinet.
B. Provide supervision to NFPA 72, Class A of following circuits for wire break or ground
faults:
1. Zone detection loops.
2. Remote manual discharge stations.
3. Suppression system solenoid valves.
4. Power supply and circuit wiring and fuse.
5. Battery interconnecting wires and fuse.
6. Alarm in abort mode.
C. Conceal control switches and indicators, with exception of Power On, Master Trouble,
Supervisory Trouble, Circuit 1 Alarm, Circuit 2 Alarm and Release Indicators.
D. Equip panel with following standard features:
1. Visual and audible annunciation of trouble or alarm signals.
2. Panel reset switch.
3. Trouble alarm silence switch with ring back feature.
4. Single zone detection: cross zone.
5. Battery test meter and switch.
6. Manual discharge switch.
7. Dead man abort switch.
8. Programmable timers for pre-discharge and discharge, 0 to 60 second cycle.
9. Isolated relay contactors for external alarm or equipment and ventilation
shutdown.
10. Relay contactors for general trouble signal.
11. Relay contactor activated by detector zone board in alarm or trouble mode.
12. Drift compensation.
13. Sensitivity test complying with NFPA 72, Chapter 5.

14. Maintenance alert feature.
15. System status report to display or printer.
16. Alarm verification with verification counter.
17. Pre signal complying with NFPA 72 3-8.3.
18. Rapid (less than 2 seconds) manual station reporting.
19. Non-alarm points for general control.
20. Periodic, programmed detector self-test program software.
21. Pre-alarm advanced fire warning feature.
22. Detection: Capability of counting two detectors in alarm, two software zones in
alarm or one smoke and one thermal detector in alarm.
23. March time and temporal coding.
24. Walk test with check for two detectors set to same address.
25. UL 1076 Security Monitor Points.
26. Control-by-time feature for non-fire operations with holiday schedule.
27. Automatic day or night adjustment of detector sensitivity.
28. Detector blink control for sleeping areas.
E. Annunciation: Provide the following annunciation:
1. Power On: Green.
2. System Trouble: Amber.
3. Battery Trouble: Amber.
4. Circuit 1 Trouble: Amber.
5. Circuit 2 Trouble: Amber.
6. Ground Fault: Amber.
7. Release trouble: Amber.
8. Alarm Circuit 1: Red.
9. Alarm Circuit 2: Red.
10. Agent Release: Red.
11. Alarm Silence: Amber.
12. Battery Polarity: Amber.
13. Abort Trouble: Amber.
14. Alarm Output Trouble: Amber.
15. Supervisory Trouble: Amber.
F. Batteries: Provide nickel cadmium batteries and charger for continuous operation of
detection, alarm, actuation and supervision functions for 24 hours. Provide automatic
battery switch-over upon failure of primary power supply.
2.09 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Mounting Height: Mount miscellaneous equipment listed above 80 inches (2.03 m)
above floor or 72 inches (865 mm), whichever is lower.
B. Alarm Bells: 24 volts, with supervision of circuit wiring, of modular design, red baked
enamel finish, with minimum sound level of 84 dba at 10 feet (3 m), for mounting on 4
inch (100 mm) electrical outlet box.
C. Alarm Horns: 24 volts, with supervision of circuit wiring, with minimum sound level of
90 dba at 10 feet (3 meters), for mounting on 4 inch (100 mm) electrical outlet box.
D. Strobe Beacon: Manufacturer's standard design, 24 volts, with system identification
on strobe lens.
E. Motorized Fire and Smoke Dampers: Refer to Section 23 0913.
F. Under floor Water Detectors:

G. Signage:
1. Entrance Sign: One warning sign at each entrance to protected area.
2. Exit Warning Signs: One lighted, flashing warning sign at each exit from
protected area.
2.10 OPERATING SEQUENCE
A. Actuation of one detector in either zone circuit:
1. Illuminate zone indicator.
2. Energize alarm bell.
3. Shut down air-conditioning system and close dampers.
4. Close doors to area.
5. Signal building fire alarm system.
B. Actuation of second detector on second zone circuit:
1. Illuminate zone indicator.
2. Energize alarm horn.
3. Shut down power to protected equipment.
4. Actuate time delay for up to 30 seconds.
5. Release extinguishing agent into protected area.
6. If abort switch is engaged, delay release.
7. Upon abort switch disengagement release extinguishing agent unless system
cleared and reset.
C. Discharge of Extinguishing Agent:
1. Sounds alarm bells and horns.
2. Operates strobes.
D. Temperature Detection:
1. Lower Temperature: Illuminate indicator and energize bell.
2. Higher Temperature: Shut down power to protected equipment.
E. High Temperature Detection: Close circuit to sprinkler pre-action valve.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that enclosing walls are continuous above ceilings and below raised floors to
enable required concentration to be built up and maintained for required time to
ensure fire is extinguished.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with standards referenced in PART 2 of this section (the
referenced standards) and NFPA 70.
B. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. Remove
scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. Blow out pipe before nozzles or
discharge devices are installed.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, concealed, plumb and parallel to building structure,
and maintain gradient. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with
use of space and other work.
D. Securely support piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 with allowance for fire
extinguishing agent thrust forces, and thermal expansion and contraction.
E. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. Roll
groove piping only.
F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting, in accordance with
Section 09 9000.
H. Identify in accordance with requirements of referenced standard.
1. Place directional arrows and system labels wherever piping changes direction
and minimum 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs.
2. Refer to Section 21 0553.
I. Containers: Mount and anchor as indicated on drawings.
J.In rooms with suspended ceiling tiles, clip or retain tiles within 4 foot (1.2 m) radius of
the nozzles to prevent lifting during discharge.
K. Install wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717 requirements.
L. Make final connections between equipment and system wiring under direct
supervision of factory trained representative of manufacturer.
M. Install engraved plastic instruction plate, detailing emergency procedures, at control
panel and at each manual discharge and abort switch location. At control panel
identify control logic units, contacts, and major circuits with permanent nameplates.
N. At hazard area walls pack space between pipe, pipe sleeve or surface penetration
with mineral fibber with elastomeric calk to depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm). Provide
escutcheons where exposed piping passes through walls, floors, and ceilings. Seal
pipe penetrations of fire separations. Refer to Section 07 8400.
O. Locate discharge nozzle approximately 6 inches (150 mm) above or below ceiling and
6 inches (150 mm) below raised floors. Avoid interference with other piping and
equipment.
P. Locate remote manual releases at one or more doors to protect area where indicated.
Locate dead man abort switch adjacent.
Q. Locate strobe units at all points of entrance to protected area.

R. Locate abort station at all points of exit from protected area.
3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Provide interlock with automatic closing door releases. Refer to Section 08 7100.
B. Integrate system with pre-action sprinkler system. Refer to Section 21 1300.
C. Provide interlock with motorized dampers. Refer to Section 23 0913.
D. Provide signal to building fire alarm system. Refer to Section 28 3100.
A. Manufacturer Services: Provide experienced manufacturer's field engineer to
supervise installation and performance testing of the system.
B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
C. Test distribution piping and valving, prior to nozzle installation, to 50 psi (340 kPa) air
pressure test. Inspect joints using soap water solution or halide torch or lamp. Repair
leaks and retest. Maintain test pressure for four hours.
D. Upon completion of installation provide final checkout inspection by factory trained
representative of manufacturer to ascertain proper system operation. Leave system in
a fully commissioned and automatic readiness state with circuitry energized and
supervised.
E. Test circuits including automatic discharge, manual discharge, equipment shut-down,
alarm devices, and storage container pressure. Test supervision of each circuit.
F. Check each ionization detector with a sensitivity meter, adjust. Record sensitivity, and
include record in test report.
G. Submit original copies of tests, indicating that factory trained technical representatives
of the manufacturer have inspected and tested systems and are satisfied with
methods of installation, connections and operation.
H. Pressure test entire enclosure with test fan, pressurizing protected area both under
positive and negative conditions. Confirm that leakage is within system design
allowance.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate that components, except discharge assemblies, are functioning properly
and in conjunction with controls system.
B. Submit integrated step-by-step test procedure for approval 30 days prior to start of
demonstration.
1. Arrange meeting prior to demonstration with representatives of Owner, Owner's
underwriter, and the installer.
2. Perform visual inspection and overall review of system installed.
3. Place minimum of three UL-listed recording analyzers in space. Provide
certification that testing devices have been checked by recognized testing
authority within two weeks of date of demonstration.
4. Certify that replacement charge can be provided within 24 hours of
demonstration.
C. Discharge system using manual-release switch mounted on control panel. Run
discharge test with compressed nitrogen at 360 psi (2500 kPa). After discharge,
check for complete pressure release.
D. After satisfactory completion of discharge test, fill agent containers with amount of fire
extinguishing agent specified in design calculations.

3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
B. Provide inspections and maintenance performed by competent personnel in the
employ of the system installer.
C. Conduct inspections at 6 months and 12 months from Date of Substantial Completion
to verify proper operation of system, check agent container weight and pressure, and
a thorough check of controls, detection and alarm systems.
D. Remedy of all deficiencies shall be included at no extra cost to Owner except for
replacement of agent due to discharge under normal use or damage due to abuse.
E. Submit documents certifying satisfactory system conditions. Include manufacturer's
certificate of acceptance of inspector's qualifications.
END OF SECTION

5.9 21 3000 Fire Pumps:

A. Fire pump package, including two electrical motor driver pumps.
B. Fire pumps, electrical engine drive, controller and it´s accessories.
C. Ancillaries valves according to P&I Fire Fighting drawing.
D. Test and supply pipe manifolds.
E. Electrical and power controller, and it´s accessories.
F. Metallic beam floor frame, also supports and anchorages to floors.
G. Electric driver jockey pump, controller and it´s accessories.
H. System maintenance.
A. Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment.
B. Fire Suppression Piping Insulation.
C. Plumbing Piping Insulation.
D Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Fire protection piping.
E. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
B. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current
edition.
C. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008.
E. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; National Fire Protection
Association; 2016.
F. NFPA 20 - Standard for Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; National
Fire Protection Association; 2013.
G. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines
and Gas Turbines; National Fire Protection Association; 2010.
H. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
current edition.
I. UL 448 - Centrifugal Stationary Pumps for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters
J.UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
K. UL 1247 - Diesel Engines for Driving Centrifugal Fire Pumps; Underwriters
L. UL 1478 - Fire Pump Relief Valves; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.
M. QCS 2014 - Qatar Construction Specifications, 2014 edition.
N. NFPA 130, Standard for Fixed Guide way Transit and Passenger Rail Systems, 2014
edition
O. QCDFSH, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Handbook.
P. QCDFSS, Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards, 2008 edition
Q. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 2015 edition.
R. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature including general assembly, pump
curves showing performance characteristics with pump and system, operating point
indicated, NPSH curve, controls, wiring diagrams, and service connections.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, weights,
clearances, and methods of assembly.
C. Test Reports: Indicate results of hydrostatic test and field acceptance tests.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate support details, connection requirements, for fire
pump system.
E. Maintenance Contract.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and accessories.
G. Certificates: Certify that fire pumps meet or exceed specified requirements at
specified operating conditions and that the installation complies with regulatory
requirements. Submit summary and results of shop tests performed in accordance
with NFPA 20.
H. Operation Data: Include manufacturer’s instructions, start-up data, trouble-shooting
check lists, for pumps, drivers, and controllers.
I. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s literature, cleaning procedures, replacement
parts lists, and repair data for pumps, drivers and controllers.
J.Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
2. Extra Pump Gaskets/Screens/Seals: One set for each different pump model.
A. Comply with NFPA 20 and NFPA 13; where requirements differ comply with the most
stringent.
B. Maintain on site at all times one copy of each design and installation standard
referenced.
C. Design fire pump system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced
in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
D. Equipment and Components: Bearing UL label or marking.
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
G. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

minimum 10 years experience. approved by manufacturer.
H. Provide certificate of compliance from authority have jurisdiction indicating approval of field
acceptance tests.
A. Deliver fire pumps and components in factory packing. Comply with manufacturer's rigging
and installation instructions.
B. Protect fire pumps and components from physical damage including effects of weather,
water, and construction debris.
C. Preparation for Shipping: After assembling and testing fire pumps and pressure
maintenance pumps, protect flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces, pipe
openings, and nozzles.
D. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
E. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, or other foreign matter.
F. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps, and maintain in place until installation.

2.01 FIRE MAIN ELECTRICAL DRIVER PUMPS
A. KSB-ARMSTROM , SERIES EUFM-JE HSC-10x8x14LF, horizontal split case single
Stage fire pump listed by Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC), Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL) and approved by Factory Mutual FM) having a capacity of 8100
l/min for a pressure boost of 11 Bar.
B. Pump casing shall be of cast iron, axially split with a 15° angle that will minimize
NPSH requirements and dimensions. Lower half shall contain suction and discharge
nozzles. Suction and discharge connections shall be on the same elevation. Top half
and rotating element shall be removable without disturbing the piping. Casing shall be
fitted with replaceable bronze wearing rings. Impeller shall be bronze, double suction,
enclosed type fully balanced and keyed to an alloy steel shaft. Shaft shall to be fitted
with replaceable bronze sleeves. Shaft shall be mounted in two dust tight deep
grooves, sealed, and permanently greased ball bearings.
C. Bearings shall be mounted in cartridge type housing so that they shall be replaceable
without opening pump casing. Bearings shall be easily removable by rotating bearing
removal nut. No special tools or bearing puller are to be necessary.
D. Each stuffing box shall be fitted with a three piece bronze gland. Stuffing box shall be
fitted with a stuffing box extension to facilitate the packing rings removal. Packing
rings shall be removable without disturbing wetted parts or the pump bearings. Water
seal rings made from non-corroding material shall be piped to pump volute.
2.02 ELECTRIC MAIN MOTOR
A. The fire pump shall be directly coupled through flexible coupling to a horizontal electric
motor IEC / EN 60034, with a maximum kW of 315 at 3000 RPM, 415 VOLT, III
PHASE 50 Hz CYCLE. Motor shall be open drip proof, standard efficiency with 1.15
service factors.
2.03 MINIMUM FITTINGS
A. The pump shall be supplied with the following accessories:
One (1) combination suction gauge 3-1/2” dial type with 1/4” cock and lever handle.
One (1) discharge gauge, 3-1/2” dial type, with 1/4” cock and lever handle.

One (1) air release valve.
One (1) casing pressure relief valve.
2.04 FIRE MAIN PUMP CONTROLLER
A. The fire main pump controller shall be a model “TORNA TECH: GPY + GPU Electric
Fire Pump Controller with Automatic Power Transfer Switch” as manufactured by
Tornatech and rated for 400 V. / 450 HP / three phase / 50 Hz. It shall be factory
assembled, wired, and tested and specifically designed for maintaining the desired
water pressure in a fire pump serviced sprinkler system. This controller shall be of the
same manufacturer as the main fire pump controller.
B. Approvals; The fire main pump controller shall be listed by CSA and UL218 and
UL1008.
C. The enclosure shall be a floor mountable NEMA Type 2. The control circuit shall
include a transformer with 24V.AC secondary.
D. Operator Interface: the jockey pump controller shall be equipped with an operator
interface with touch-pad type pushbuttons and a high luminosity LED digital display.
The operator interface shall monitor and display motor operating conditions and
pressure conditions. The operator interface shall be fully accessible without opening
the controller door.
E. Visual Indications and alarms:
a. Power available
b. Phase reversal
c. Motor run
d. Pump room alarm
e. Motor Trouble
f. Phase loss
g. Phase unbalance
h. Low water level
i. Locked rotor
j. Periodic test
k. Fail to start
l. Low discharge pressure
m. Low pump room temperature
n. Pump room temperature (ºF or ºC)
o. Pump on demand/Automatic start
p. Emergency Start
q. Manual Start
r. Deluge valve start
s. Remote automatic start
t. Remote manual start
u. Over current
v. Under voltage
w. Overvoltage
F. Remote Alarm Contacts:
a. Power available
b. Phase reversal
c. Motor run
d. Common pump room alarm:
Overvoltage
Under voltage
Phase unbalance

Low pump room temperature
High pump room temperature
e. Common motor trouble:
Over current
Fail to start
Undercurrent
Ground fault
f. Free
G. Operator Interface:
a. Embedded microcomputer with software PLC logic.
b. 4.2” colour touch screen (HMI technology)
c. Upgradable software
d. Expandable storage
e. Multi language
H. Communication Protocol Capability:
a. Protocol: Mod bus
b. Connection type: Shielded female connector RJ45
c. Frame Format: TCP/IP
I. Operation:
a. Automatic start:
Start on pressure drop
Remote start signal from automatic device
b. Manual start:
Start pushbutton
Run test pushbutton
Deluge valve start
Remote start from manual device
c. Stopping:
Manual with Stop pushbutton
d. Timers:
Field Adjustable & Visual Countdown
e. Actuation & Mode:
Visual Indication
J. Automatic Power Transfer Switch:
a. Surge Suppression:
Surge arrestor rated to suppress surges above line voltage.
b. Disconnecting Means:
Isolating switch and circuit breaker assembly:
- Door interlocked in the ON position.
- Isolating switch rated not less than 115% of motor full load
current.
- Circuit breaker continuous rating not less than 115% of
motor full load current.
- Over current sensing non-thermal type, magnetic only.
- Instantaneous trip setting of not more than 20 times the
motor full load current.
Common flange mounted operating handle.
c. Locked Rotor Protector:
Operate shunt trip to open circuit breaker.
Factory set at 600% of motor full load current.
Trip between 8 and 20 seconds.

d. Visual Indications:
Alternate (emergency) isolating switch in the OFF position.
Alternate (emergency) voltage phase to phase.
Transfer switch in normal position.
Transition timers.
e. Transfer switch test pushbutton
f. Bypass for re-transfer and generator shutdown
g. Electrically operated and mechanically held in the normal or alternate position
h. Provision for manual operation
i. Remote Alarm Contacts:
SPDT-8A-250VAC
Isolating switch in the OFF position
Transfer switch in normal position
Transfer switch in alternate (emergency) position
j. Time Delays:
Momentary normal power outage override (factory set at 3 sec - field
adjustable 1 to 3 sec)
Alternate (emergency) power available delay (factory set at 3 sec - field
adjustable 1 to 3 sec)
Transfer trouble delay (factory set at 20 sec - field adjustable 1 to 60
sec)
Retransfer to normal (factory set at 5 min - field adjustable 1 to 20 min)
Generator cool down (factory set at 5 min - field adjustable 1 to 20 min)
k. Voltage Sensing:
Transfer to alternate (normal power dropout) 85% of nominal - field
adjustable 0 to 100%
Phase reversal transfer to alternate
Retransfer to normal (normal power pickup) 90% of nominal - field
adjustable 0 to 100%
l. Audible Alarm (AIS Open):
4” alarm bell - 85 dB at 10ft. (3m)
m. Generator Start Connection:
SPDT-8A-250V.AC
K. Solid State Pressure Transducer: the pump controller shall be supplied with a 316
stainless steel pressure transducer rated for fresh water operational between 0 and
600psi. The pressure transducer shall be used to display the pressure in the sprinkler
system and also control the automatic start circuit. The pressure transducer shall be
installed inside the controller mounted directly to a bulkhead allowing for an external
connection to the supply pipe system sensing line.
2.05 FIRE-MAIN PUMP SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Match fire-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for fire-pump capacity
rating. Include the following:
1. Float operated 3/4 inch (20 mm), automatic air-release valve.
2. Circulation casing relief valve, 3/4 inch (20 mm).
3. Suction and discharge pressure gages, diameter dial with snubber, valve cock
and lever handle.
4. Eccentric-tapered reducer at suction inlet.
5. Concentric-tapered reducer at discharge outlet.
6. Test-Header Manifold, brass escutcheon plate with lettering equivalent to "PUMP
TEST CONNECTION."

7. Ball Drip Valve: UL 1726.
8. Main Relief Valve: UL 1478, spring loaded.
9. Discharge Cone: Closed.
10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied red paint, unless brass or other
finish is specified.
11. Flow metering system for closed loop testing.
2.04 PRESSURE ELECTRICAL DRIVER BOOSTER-JOCKEY PUMP
A. Vertical in-line multi stage type, electrically vertical driver motor operated.
B. Control by automatic jockey pump controller with full voltage starter and minimum run
timer to start pump on pressure drop in system and stay in operation for minimum
period of time. Fire pump shall start automatically on further pressure drop or on
jockey pump failure.
C. Match pressure-booster (jockey)-pump suction and discharge ratings as required for
pump capacity rating. Include the following:
1. Circulation relief valve.
2. Suction and discharge pressure gages.
2.05 JOCKEY PUMP CONTROLLER
D. The jockey pump controller shall be a model JP as manufactured by Tornatech and
rated for 430 V. / 2.2 KW / three phase / 50 Hz. It shall be factory assembled, wired,
and tested and specifically designed for maintaining the desired water pressure in a
fire pump serviced sprinkler system. This controller shall be of the same manufacturer
as the main fire pump controller.
E. Approvals; The jockey pump controller shall be listed by CSA and UL508A.
F. Construction, the jockey pump controller shall be equipped with an across the line
electric motor starter incorporating a horsepower rated disconnect switch, a thermo-
magnetic motor protector and a motor contactor. The enclosure shall be a wall
mountable NEMA Type 2. The control circuit shall include a transformer with 24V.AC
secondary.
G. Operator Interface: the jockey pump controller shall be equipped with an operator
interface with touch-pad type pushbuttons and a high luminosity LED digital display.
The operator interface shall monitor and display motor operating conditions and
pressure conditions. The operator interface shall be fully accessible without opening
the controller door.
H. Visual Indications:
a. The operator interface shall indicate:
b. Manual motor run LED
c. Automatic motor run LED
d. Motor overload
e. System pressure
f. Start pressure
g. Stop pressure
h. System pressure above stop pressure LED
i. System pressure in between start and stop
j. pressure LED
k. System pressure below start pressure LED
l. Controller in AUTO mode
m. Controller in OFF mode
n. Pump start counter
o. Elapsed time meter (hours / non-resettable)

I. Timers; the jockey pump controller shall be supplied with a minimum run period timer
and a sequential start timer.
J. Solid State Pressure Transducer: the jockey pump controller shall be supplied with a
316 stainless steel pressure transducer rated for fresh water operational between 0
and 600psi. The pressure transducer shall be used to display the pressure in the
sprinkler system and also control the automatic start circuit. The pressure transducer
shall be installed inside the controller mounted directly to a bulkhead allowing for an
external connection to the sprinkler system sensing line.
2.05 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. Description: FM-approved, fire-pump, flow-measuring systems that indicate flow to
not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity. Include sensor of size to match
pipe, tubing, flow meter, and fittings.
1. Pressure Rating: to match pump head and system requirements.
2. Sensor: Venturi, annular probe, or orifice plate, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Flow Meter: Compatible with flow sensor with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches (115
mm) in diameter or manufacturer's equivalent size.
4. Permanently Mounted: Flow meter suitable for wall mounting with copper tubing
to connect to flow sensor.
5. Portable: Flow meter, with two 12-foot (4-m) hoses, in carrying case with handle.
6. Include complete operating instructions.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Hydrostatically test and test run fire pumps before shipping. Test at
150 percent of shutoff head plus suction head, but not less than 250 psig (1725 kPa).
Produce certified test curves showing head capacity and brake horsepower of each
pump.
2.07 SCHEDULES
A. Main Electrical Driver Pump, tagged EDP-1 and EDP-2:

FIRE FIGHTING PUMPING ROOM
MAIN ELECTRICAL DRIVER PUMP

EDP-1 AND EDP-2
HIDRAULIC PERFORMANCE REQUIRED CAPACITY
PUMP TYPE Horizontal Split Case Single Stage Fire Pump
DESIGN DUTY FLOW 135 l/s (8100 L/min)
DESIGN DUTY HEAD 1100 kPa (11 Bar)
DESIGN POWER 228,79 kW
ELECTRICAL MOTOR POWER 315 kW, 400V, 50 Hz.
NFPA LIMITS:
140 % HEAD AT SHUTOFF 1195 kPa (11,95 Bar)
65 % HEAD AT 150% FLOW 755 kPa (7,55 Bar)
LIQUID TEMPERATURE 20 ºC
SPEED 3000 rpm

MATERIALS AND DESCRIPTION
PUMP CONSTRUCTION CAST IRON
SHAFT SLEEVES BRONZE
CASE WEARING RINGS BRONZE
IMPELLERS BRONZE
SHAFT ALLOY CARBON STEEL
LANTERN RINGS CORROSION RESISTANT
STUFFING BOX BUSHING BRONZE
GLANDS BRONZE
PACKING RINGS INTERWOVEN GROPHITE IMPREGNATED T.F.E.
BEARING ARMS CAST INTEGRAL
BALL BEARINGS REGREASIBLE
THRUST BEARING DOUBLE ROW (OUTBOARD SIDE)
WATER SLINGERS AND GREASE SEALS
UPPER CASING LIFTING LUGS
AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVE
CASING RELIEF VALVE
SIZE ASSEMBLY ELECTRIC MOTOR AND PUMP
DIAMETER OF DISCHARGE: DN200 mm

DIAMETER OF SUCTION: DN250 mm

B. Electrical Driver Jockey Pump, tagged EDJP-3:

C. Main Electrical Driver Pump Controller:
EDP-1 AND EDP-2, WYE-DELTA ELECTRIC FIRE MAIN PUMP CONTROLLER.

Built to NFPA 20 (latest edition)
Standard,
UL218 FIRE PUMPS CONTROLLERS
Listings, Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
CSA C22.2 Nº 14 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Approvals and Certifications
FM Global Class 1321/1323
IP55
Accesories: Paint Specifications:
Enclosure -Botton entry gland plate. -Red RAL3002.
-Lifting Lugs. -Powder coating.
Keylock handle. -Glossy texture finish.
Shortcircuit Withstand Rating 100 kA 400V/50Hz 315 kW
Ambient Temperature Rating Min. 5ºC Max. 50ºC

Redco International Trading & Contracting W.L.L.Page 100 of 611
NOTES:
-Fire pump controller according to NFPA-10, NFPA-20 and Stardard for centrifugal fire pumps as adopted by UL and FM.
- Controllers used on reduced voltage using state starter for "soft" starting and "Soft" stopping of electric motors.
- The controller is completely wired, assembled, and tested at the factory, ready for inmediate installation.
-Horse power rating for 315 kW, and voltage of 400V/50Hz.

D. Main Electrical Driver Jockey Pump Controller:
EDJP-3, ELECTRICAL DRIVER JOCKEY PUMP CONTROLLER.

Built to NFPA 20 (latest edition)
Standard,
UL508A FIRE PUMPS CONTROLLERS
Listings, Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
CSA C22.2 Nº 14 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
Approvals and Certifications
IP55
Paint Specifications:
Enclosure Accesories: -Red RAL3002.
-Wall mounting lugs. -Powder coating.
-Glossy texture finish.
Shortcircuit Withstand Rating 100 kA 400V/50Hz 200 kW
Ambient Temperature Rating Min. 5ºC Max. 50ºC

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 20.
B. Install diesel engine drive in accordance with NFPA 37.
C. Provide access space around pumps for service; no less than minimum as recommended
by manufacturer.
D. Install piping in accordance with Section 21 0500. Decrease from line size with long radius
reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is
carried on pump casings. For base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on
pump suction and discharge.
E. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.
F. Mount unit on vibration isolators.
G. Mount unit on vibration isolators.
H. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 2717.
I. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
J. Check, align, and certify pumps by qualified installer prior to start-up.
K Concrete Bases: Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for fire pumps, pressure-
maintenance pumps.

A. Perform field acceptance tests as specified in NFPA 20.
B. Perform field acceptance tests in the presence of Fire Marshal.
3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate automatic operation of system including verification of pressure switch set
points.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
B. Perform maintenance using competent personnel in the direct employ of the system
installer.
C. Provide service and maintenance of equipment installed under this section for one year
from the Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

5.10 21 3000 Site Water Utility Distribution Piping:

A. Pipe and fittings for site water lines including fire water lines.
B. Valves, Fire hydrants, and Domestic water hydrants.
A. Manholes and Structures.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO HB - Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges; Seventeenth Edition.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300; 2011.
C. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250; 2011.
D. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
E. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings;
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.
F. ASME B18.2.2 - Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square,
Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series); 2010.
G. ASME B18.5.2.1M - Metric Round Head Short Square Neck Bolts; 2006 (Reaffirmed
2011).
H. ASME B18.5.2.2M - Metric Round Head Square Neck Bolts; 1982 (Reaffirmed 2010).
I. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
J. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2012.
K. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a
(Reapproved 2014).
L. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]; 2007.
M. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
N. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2012.
O. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated
Pipe (SDR Series); 2009.
P. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40; 2013.
Q. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
R. ASTM D3035 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR)
Based on Controlled Outside Diameter; 2012.
S. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals; 1998 (Reapproved 2011).
T. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding;

American Welding Society; 2011-AMD 1.
U. AWWA C104/A21.4 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings;
V. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems;
W. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings; American Water Works Association; 2012 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
X. AWWA C115/A21.15 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron
Threaded Flanges; 2011.
Y. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; American Water Works
Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
Z. AWWA C200 - Steel Water Pipe, 6 In. (150 mm) and Larger; 2012 (ANSI/AWWA
C200).
AA. AWWA C203 - Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines -
Enamel and Tape-Hot-Applied; 2008 (ANSI/AWWA C203).
AB. AWWA C205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe, 4
in. (100 mm) and Larger - Shop Applied; 2012 (ANSI/AWWA C205).
AC. AWWA C206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA C206).
AD. AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Size 4 In. Through 144 In.
(100 mm Through 3,600 mm); 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C205).
AE. AWWA C208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; 2012
(ANSI/AWWA C208).
AF. AWWA C209 - Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections,
Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines; 2006 (ANSI/AWWA C209).
AG. AWWA C210 - Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipelines; 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C210).
AH. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American Water
Works Association; 2009.
AI. AWWA C502 - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants; American Water Works Association; 2005
(ANSI/AWWA C502/C502a).
AJ. AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves, 3 In. (75 mm) Through 72 In. (1,800
mm); American Water Works Association; 2010.
AK. AWWA C508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 In. (50 mm) Through
24 In. (600 mm) NPS; American Water Works Association; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA
C508).
AL. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; American
Water Works Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C509).
AM. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances;
American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C600).
AN. AWWA C602 - Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place, 4 In. (100 mm) and
Larger; 2011.
AO. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; American Water Works Association;
2011.
AP. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm

Through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution; American Water Works
Association; 2007 (ANSI/AWWA C900/C900a).
AQ. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 In. (13 mm) Through
3 In. (76 mm), for Water Service; American Water Works Association; 2008.
AR. AWWA M11 - Steel Pipe - A Guide For Design and Installation; 2004
AS. UL 246 - Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
AT. See previous chapter “4.1 Codes and Standards” for fire suppression specifications.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves,
connections, thrust restraints, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected
variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.
A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements.
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labelling in place.

2.01 WATER PIPE
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151:
1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods.
3. Jackets: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket.
B. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D3035, for 45 psig (315 kPa) pressure rating:
1. Fittings: AWWA C901, molded or fabricated.
2. Joints: Compression.
C. Polyethylene Pipe: AWWA C901:
1. Fittings: AWWA C901, molded or fabricated.
2. Joints: Compression.
D. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with
“Water Service " in large letters.
2.02 VALVES
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B. Gate Valves Up To 3 Inches (75 mm):
1. Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc,
compression ends, with control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box.
C. Gate Valves 3 Inches (75 mm) and Over:
1. AWWA C509, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single
wedge, resilient seat, flanged ends, control rod, post indicator, valve key, and
extension box.
D. Ball Valves Up To 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem
pre-drilled for control rod, AWWA inlet end, compression outlet with electrical
ground connector, with control rod, valve key, and extension box.
E. Swing Check Valves from 2 Inches to 24 Inches (50 mm to 600 mm):
1. AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and
seat, flanged ends.
F. Butterfly Valves from 2 Inches to 24 Inches (50 mm to 600 mm):
1. AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug
ends, ten position lever handle.
G. Schedules:

2.03 HYDRANTS
A. Hydrants: AWWA C502, UL 246, dry barrel type.
B. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6 inches (150 mm) with rod and coupling
to increase barrel length.
C. Hose and Streamer Connection: Match sizes with utility company, two hose nozzles,
one pumper nozzle.
D. Schedules:
Figure dimensions shown in pulg, 1 pulg (") = 25,4mm.

2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03 3000.
C. Meter.

D. Manhole and Cover: Refer to Section 33 0513.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and
invert are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. See the sections on excavation and fill for additional requirements.
B. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600.
B. Route pipe in straight line.
C. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
D. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points.
E. Install trace wire 6 inches (150 mm) above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 31 2316.13.
3.05 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS
A. Set valves on solid bearing.
B. Centre and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.
C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway.
D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches (500 mm) above ground.
E. Locate control valve 4 inches (100 mm) away from hydrant.
F. Provide a drainage pit 36 inches (900 mm) square by 24 inches (600 mm) deep filled with
2 inches (50 mm) washed gravel. Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches (150
mm) above drain opening. Do not connect drain opening to sewer.
G. Paint hydrants.
3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide water service to utility company requirements with water meter with by-pass valves
and sand strainer.
B. Provide sleeve in retaining wall for service main. Support with reinforced concrete bridge.
Calk enlarged sleeve watertight.
C. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall.
A. Pressure test water piping to 174 psi (1200 kPa).
B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and
retest at no cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION

6 MEP Plumbing & Drainage:
6.1 22 0519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping:

A. Flow meters.
B. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
A. Hydronic Piping.
B. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.
A. Rules and Regulations Guide for Plumbing Works prepared by QGEWC.
B. BS EN 837-1:1998: Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions,
metrology, requirements and testing
C. KAHRAMA Code and Standards.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and
location for manufactured components.
B. Samples: Submit two of each type of instrument specified.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and
instrumentation.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.

2.01 LIQUID FLOW METERS
A. Calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with valved taps, chart for conversion of
differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case.
B. Annular element flow stations with meter set.
1. Measuring Station: Type 316 stainless steel pitot type flow element inserted through
welded threaded couplet, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections,
and permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for design flow rate,
metered fluid, line size, station or location number.
- Pressure rating: 275 psi (1896 kPa).
- Maximum temperature: 400 degrees F (204 degrees C).
- Accuracy: Plus 0.55 percent to minus 2.30 percent.
2. Portable Meter Set: Dry single diaphragm type pressure gage with 6 inch (150 mm)
dial pointer, stainless steel wetted metal parts, variable pulsation damper, equalizing
valve, two bleed valves, and master chart for direct conversion of meter readings to
flow rate, mounted in rust-proof carrying case with two ten foot (3 m) long rubber test
hoses with brass valves or quick connections for measuring stations.

2.02 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: BS EN 837-1:1998 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon
tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black
scale on white background.
1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
2. Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter.
3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
4. Scale: Psi and KPa.
2.03 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
B. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) NPT for minimum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch (6 mm) connections.
D. Syphon: Steel, 1/4 inch (6 mm) angle or straight pattern.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet. Provide
full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction
and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each
gage. Provide siphon on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to
allow clearance from insulation.
E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes
smaller than 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure
sockets allow clearance from insulation.
F. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
G. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or
sensor sockets
H. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet (3 m) downstream of mixing
dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.
I. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
J. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest
appropriate scale.
K. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal
operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
L. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and
calibrate to zero.
M. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.
3.02 SCHEDULES
A. Flow Meters, Location:
1. Service connection.
2. Chilled water system.

3. Bathroom area.
B. Pressure Gages, Location:
1. Pumps.
2. Expansion tanks.
3. Pressure tanks.
4. Pressure reducing valves.
5. Backflow preventers.
C. Pressure Gage Tappings, Location:
1. Control valves.
END OF SECTION

6.2 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment:

A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.
A. Section 09 9000 – Painting and Coating.
A. BS 1710:2014: Specification for identification of pipelines and services.
B. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D. Samples: Submit two labels.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

A. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
B. Control Panels: Nameplates.
C. Instrumentation: Tags.
D. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
E. Piping: Tags.
F. Pumps: Nameplates.
G. Tanks: Nameplates.
H. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
I. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Plastic.

2.03 TAGS
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) square.
B. Metal Tags: Aluminum with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch (40 mm)
square with smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.04 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch (20-30 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch
(200 mm) long color field, 1/2 inch (15 mm) high letters.
2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch (40-50 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch (200
mm) long color field, 3/4 inch (20 mm) high letters.
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch (65-150 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch
(300 mm) long color field, 1-1/4 inch (30 mm) high letters.
4. 8 to 10 inch (200-250 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch (600
mm) long color field, 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) high letters.
5. Over 10 inch (250 mm) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32 inch (800
mm) long color field, 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) high letters.
B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9123, semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming
to ASME A13.1.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit
B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon
tape, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for
direct burial service.
D. Color code as follows:
1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.
2.06 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Plumbing Valves: Green.

3.01 PREPARATION
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9123 for stencil painting.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9123.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished
G. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter and smaller.
4. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers
and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of
structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
5. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings.
Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION

6.3 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation:

A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
A. Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jacket.
B. Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
C. Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
D. Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.
A. BS 5422:2009 - Method for specifying thermal insulating materials for pipes, tanks,
vessels, ductwork and equipment operating within the temperature range -40°C to
+700°C.
B. BS 476-7:1997 - Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products.
C. BS 874-2.1 - Methods for determining thermal insulating properties. Tests for thermal
conductivity and related properties. Guarded hot-plate method.
D. BS EN ISO 9346:1996 - Thermal insulation. Mass transfer. Physical quantities and
definitions.
E. BS 3958-4 - Thermal insulating materials. Bonded preformed man-made mineral fiber
pipe sections.
F. ISO 8497:1994 - Thermal insulation - Determination of steady-state thermal
transmission properties of thermal insulation for circular pipes.
G. DIN EN 13469:2013-01 - Thermal insulating products for building equipment and
industrial installations - Determination of water vapour transmission properties of
preformed pipe insulation.
H. BS 4370-2:1993 - Methods of test for rigid cellular materials. Methods 7 to 9.
I. ISO 354:2003 - Acoustics -- Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation
room.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials
and thickness for each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation
type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,

and thickness.
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

2.01 FOAMED NITRILE RUBBER
A. Insulation: Foamed nitrile rubber.
'K' ('Ksi') value: EN ISO 8497, 0.036 at 20ºC.
Maximum service temperature: 105ºC.
B. Water Vapour Permeability: µ 7000 (DIN EN 13469), 0,09 µ gm/Nh BS 4370/2.
C. Fire Rating: Class 1 (BS 476-7).
D. Noise Reduction: Sound Absorption Coefficient up to 0,8 (ISO 354:2003).

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system
including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections and
expansion joints.
E. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,
thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat
tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal
piping.
F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.
Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces.
H. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves
with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams
located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
I. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service
jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with
0.025 mm thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous
compound; outer surface faced with a polyester film.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Domestic Hot Water Supply:
Foamed nitrile rubber.
1. Pipe Size Range: From ND 15 to ND 40 mm.
Thickness: 25 mm.
B. Domestic Fresh Water Supply:
Foamed nitrile rubber.
Thickness: 20 mm.
Thickness: 25 mm.
3. Pipe Size Range: Above ND 50 mm.
Thickness: 30 mm.
END OF SECTION

6.4 22 1005 Plumbing Piping:

A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
Sanitary sewer.
Fresh and Hot water.
Storm water.
A. Access Doors and Panels.
B. Painting and Coating
C. Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.
D. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
E. Plumbing Piping Insulation.
F. Water Treatment Equipment.
A. BS 416-1:1990 - Discharge and ventilating pipes and fittings, sand-cast or spun in
cast iron. Specification for spigot and socket systems.
B. BS EN 877:1999+A1:2006 - Cast iron pipes and fittings, their joints and accessories
for the evacuation of water from buildings. Requirements, test methods and quality
assurance.
C. BS EN 10242:1995 - Threaded pipe fittings in malleable cast iron.
D. BS EN 12449:2012- Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for general
purposes.
E. BS EN 1254-1:1998 - Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. Fittings with ends
for capillary soldering or capillary brazing to copper tubes.
F. BS EN 1254-2:1998 - Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. Fittings with
compression ends for use with copper tubes.
G. BS EN 12201-1:2011 - Plastics piping systems for water supply, and for drainage and
sewerage under pressure. Polyethylene (PE). General.
H. BS EN 12201-2:2011+A1:2013 - Plastics piping systems for water supply, and for
drainage and sewerage under pressure. Polyethylene (PE). Pipes.
I. BS EN 12201-3:2011+A1:2012 - Plastics piping systems for water supply, and for
drainage and sewerage under pressure. Polyethylene (PE). Fittings.
J. BS EN 10255:2004 - Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading.
Technical delivery conditions.
K. BS EN 10240:1998 - Internal and/or external protective coatings for steel tubes.
Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings applied in automatic plants.
L. BS 417-2:1987 - Specification for galvanized low carbon steel cisterns, cistern lids,
tanks and cylinders. Metric units.
M. BS 1010-2:1973 - Specification for draw-off taps and stop valves for water services
(screw-down pattern). Draw-off taps and above-ground stop valves.

N. BS EN 13959:2004 - Anti-pollution check valves. DN 6 to DN 250 inclusive Family E,
type A, B, C, and D.
O. BS EN 14451:2005 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. In-line
anti-vacuum valves DN 8 to DN 80. Family D, type A.
P. BS 5163-1:2004 - Valves for waterworks purposes. Predominantly key-operated cast
iron gate valves. Code of practice.
Q. BS 5163-2:2004 - Valves for waterworks purposes. Stem caps for use on isolating
valves and associated water control apparatus. Specification.
R. BS EN 1074-2:2000 - Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements and
appropriate verification tests. Isolating valves.
S. BS EN 1074-1:2000 - Valves for water supply. Fitness for purpose requirements and
appropriate verification tests. General requirements.
T. BS EN 295-1:2013 Vitrified clay pipe systems for drains and sewers, Requirements
for pipes, fittings and joints.
U. BS EN 295-2:2013. Vitrified clay pipe systems for drains and sewers. Evaluation of
conformity and sampling.
V. BS EN 295-3:2013. Vitrified clay pipe systems for drains and sewers. Test methods.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout
developed for this project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
C. Sustainable Design Documentation: For soldered copper joints, submit installer's
certification that the specified installation method and materials were used.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
project.
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Identify pipe with marking including size, material classification, specification, potable
water certification, water pressure rating.
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for
damage.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place
until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,
completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe according to BS EN 877:1999+A1:2006 and BS 416-1:1990.
- Fittings: Cast iron.
- Joint Seals: Neoprene gaskets.
B. U-PVC Pipe according to BS EN 1329-1:2014
- Fittings: U-PVC
- Joints: Solvent cement
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED
- Joints: Hub-and-spigot, compression type with neoprene gaskets.
2.03 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube Type X according to BS EN 12449:2012.
- Fittings: Copper according to BS EN 1254-1:1998 and BS EN 1254-2:1998.
- Joints: Solder.
- Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, utilizing EPDM, non toxic
synthetic rubber sealing elements.
B. Galvanized Steel Pipe series M according to BS EN 10255:2004.
- Threaded Joints: cast iron fittings according to BS EN 10242:1995.
2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED
A. PE Pipe according to BS EN 12201-2:2011+A1:2013.
- Fittings: PE according to BS EN 12201-3:2011+A1:2012.
- Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp.
2.05 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
- Joint Seals: Neoprene gaskets.
2.06 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED
- Joints: Hub-and-spigot, compression type with neoprene gaskets.
2.07 EXTERNAL BURIED NETWORK, SANITARY SEWER AND STORM WATER,
BURIED
B. Vitrified clay Pipe according to BS EN 295-1:2013. .
- Fittings: Vitrified clay.
- Joints: Bell-and-spigot, according to BS EN 681-1:1996. and BS EN 681-4:2000 .
2.08 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions.

- Ferrous pipe: malleable iron threaded unions.
- Copper tube and pipe: bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Flanges.
- Ferrous pipe: malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed
neoprene gaskets.
- Copper tube and pipe: slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
- Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe
groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket.
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
- If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select
appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
- Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to
trapeze hangers.
- Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
- Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
- Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture
attachment.
B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
- Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 mm (1/2 Inch) to 40 mm (1-1/2 Inches): Malleable iron,
adjustable swivel, split ring.
- Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm (2 Inches) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
- Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm (3 Inches): Cast iron hook.
- Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm (4 Inches) and Over: Welded steel bracket
and wrought steel clamp.
- Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
C. Plumbing Piping - Water:
- Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 mm (1/2 Inch) to 40 mm (1-1/2 Inches): Malleable iron,
adjustable swivel, split ring.
- Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm (2 Inches) and Over: Carbon steel,
adjustable, clevis.
- Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 50 mm (2 Inches) to 100 mm (4 Inches): Carbon steel,
adjustable, clevis.
- Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm (6 Inches) and Over: Adjustable steel yoke,
cast iron pipe roll, double hanger.
- Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm (3 Inches): Cast iron hook.
- Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm (4 Inches) and Over: Welded steel bracket
and wrought steel clamp.
- Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm (6 Inches) and Over: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.

- Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
2.10 GATE VALVES
A. Up To and Including 3 Inches (80 mm):
- Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw, solid wedge
disc, solder ends.
B. 2 Inches (50 mm) and Larger:
- Iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, hand wheel, solid wedge disc,
flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches (150 mm) and
larger mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor.
2.11 AIR ADMITANCE VALVES
A. Features:
- Screening on the inside and outside of the valve to protect the sealing membrane
from foreing objects.
- Protective cover for the air intake and additional insulation against extreme
temperatures.
- Ability to divert condensation away from the sealing membrane.
- Prevents the release of foul air from the drainage system.
B. The valves should be connected to the piping in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
C. Performance Parameter
- Temperature range:-400C to +600C (CE).
- Open Pressure: -70 Pa (-0.010 PSI).
- Maximum pressure rating: 10,000 Pa (1m/40” H2O) at 0 Pa or higher.
D. Materials
- Aluminium cover: Aluminium.
- Insulating cover cap: Polystyrene.
- Valve body: ABS.
- Valve membrane: Synthetic rubber.
- Connector: Rubber.
2.12 BALL VALVES
A. Construction, 2” Inches (50 mm) and Smaller: Bronze body, chrome plated brass ball,
regular port, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with
balancing stops, solder, threaded, or grooved ends with union.
2.13 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Construction 2 ½” Inches (65 mm) and Larger: Cast or ductile iron body, nickel-plated
ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck.
B. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches (150 mm) and larger, and chain-wheel
operators for valves mounted over 8 feet (2400 mm) above floor.
2.14 FLOW CONTROLS
A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and
pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blow down/back flush drain.
B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure

range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum
pressure 3.5 psi (24 kPa).
2.15 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm):
Bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends.
B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):
Iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged or grooved ends.
2.16 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
A. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm):
Bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced
diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.
B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):
Cast iron body with interior lining, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc,
flanged.
2.17 RELIEF VALVES
A. Pressure Relief:
- Bronze body, Teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure
actuated.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:
- Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct
pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 98.9 ºC.
2.18 STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:
- Threaded brass body for 175 psi (1200 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8
mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
- Threaded bronze body 300 psi (2070 kPa) CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch (0.8
mm) stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 1-1/2 inch (40 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm):
- Flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) stainless steel perforated
screen.
C. Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger:
- Flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) stainless steel perforated
screen.
2.19 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Manual internal bleed.
B. Self-cleaning, 150-mesh, stainless steel filter screen on 25, 40 and 50mm models.
C. Straight-through flow path.
D. Flow control allows precise flow adjustment and manual shutoff.
E. Compact, low-profile design.
F. Glass-reinforced nylon body and bonnet construction with stainless steel spring and
hardware.
G. Rugged, nylon-reinforced Buna-N diaphragm.
H. Captive plunger solenoid.
I. Unique three-way stainless steel bonnet screws accept Phillips, flat blade and hex-
driver tools.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
3.03 INSTALLATION
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and
perpendicular to walls.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of
space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation
of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
I. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.
J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
K. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.
L. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish
painting.
M. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 2316.
N. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 2323.
O. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
Q. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather
proof hood.
R. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints, using specified solder, and flux; in
potable water systems use flux also.
S. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
- Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
- Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides
of reinforced concrete beams.
- Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe

over 4 inches (100 mm).
- Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
- Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
A. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
- Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
- Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (15 mm) space between finished
covering and adjacent work.
- Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of
- Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
- Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in
crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered
exposed.
- Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder
adapters to pipe.
D. Install gate or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.
E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F. Install globe or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
G. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate
equipment.
H. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
I. Provide flow controls in water recirculation systems where indicated.
3.05 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 1300.
B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding or acid
hydrochloric.
D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout
system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at
minimum 15 percent of outlets.
F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0
mg/L.

3.06 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check
invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that
these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved double check backflow preventer
and water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer.
END OF SECTION

6.5 22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specialties:

A. Roof and floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibs.
D. Backflow preventers.
E. Water hammer arrestors.
F. Thermostatic mixing valves.
G. Catch basins and manholes.
H. Leak detection.
A. Manholes and Structures.
B. Plumbing Piping.
C. Plumbing Fixtures.
D. Plumbing Equipment.
F. QCS 2014 Section 5. Concrete
A. BS EN 124:1994- Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Design requirements, type testing, marking, quality control.
B. BS EN 13076:2003 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water.
Unrestricted air gap. Family A. Type A.
C. BS EN 13077:2003 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Air
gap with non-circular overflow (unrestricted). Family A, type B.
D. BS EN 13959:2004 - Anti-pollution check valves. DN 6 to DN 250 inclusive Family E,
type A, B, C, and D.
E. BS EN 14451:2005 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. In-line
anti-vacuum valves DN 8 to DN 80. Family D, type A.
F. BS EN 14453:2005 - Devices to prevent pollution by backflow of potable water. Pipe
interrupter with permanent atmospheric vent DN 10 to DN 20. Family D, type C.
G. BS EN 1433:2002 - Drainage channels for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Classification, design and testing requirements, marking and evaluation of conformity.
H. BS 2879:1980 - Specification for draining taps (screw-down pattern).
I. PDI-WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and
finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate

assembly and support requirements.
D. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit appropriate evidence that materials used
in potable water systems comply with the specified requirements.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts,
backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors.
specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience.
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

2.01 DRAINS
A. Cornice Drains:
Galvanized cast iron body with aluminum flashing clamp collar and epoxy coated flat
strainer.
B. Linear Drains:
Channel unit: high strength polymer concrete.
Protective Steel galvanized edge rails for improved strength and bonding between
channel and surface materials.
System fully certified and CE marked to Load Class D 400 BS EN 1433:2002.
C. Floor Drain (FD-1):
Body: Stainless steel.
Vertical outlet.
Perforated grille.
Hygienic foul air trap.
Clamping ring.
D. Floor Drain (FD-2):
Body: Polypropylene.
Horizontal outlet.
Stainless steel perforated grille. Round or square.
Individual removable trap.
Clamping ring.
E. Floor Drain (FD-3):
Body: Cast Iron.
Vertical outlet.
Square cast iron grating
Clamping ring.
F. Floor Drain (FD-4):
Body: Cast Iron.
Horizontal outlet.
Square cast iron grating
G. Floor Drain (FD-5):
Body: Cast Iron.
Vertical outlet.
Square cast iron grating.
Clamping ring.
H. Floor Drain (FD-6):
Body: Cast Iron.
Vertical outlet.
Square cast iron grating.
Clamping ring.
2.02 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas
Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.
B. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas.
Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas.
Galvanized cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top
assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed
depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas.
Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and
round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
E. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas.
Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.
2.03 HOSE BIBBS
A. Interior Hose Bibb:
Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose
thread spout, chrome plated where exposed with hand wheel, integral vacuum
breaker.
2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Every pipe through which water is supplied to a point of use or draw-off where
backflow or back siphonage is likely to occur shall be fitted with a backflow protection
device.
B. Pipe interrupters for backflow protection shall comply with the relevant provisions of
BS EN 14453:2005.
C. Vacuum breakers for backflow protection shall comply with the relevant provisions of
BS EN 14451:2005 and BS EN 13959:2004.
D. Check valves for backflow protection shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS
EN 13959:2004. Any additional installation instruction issued by the manufacturer or
supplier of the check valve shall also be complied with.
E. Combined check valve and vacuum breaker for backflow protection shall comply with
the relevant provisions of BS EN 14451:2005.
F. Double check valve assembly for backflow protection shall comply with the relevant
provisions of BS EN 13959:2004, with a draining tap complying with the relevant
provisions of BS 2879 connected between them.
2.05 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201, pre
charged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F (1 to 120
degrees C) and maximum 250 psi (1700 kPa) working pressure.
2.06 SUMPS
A. Precast concrete with required openings and drainage fittings.
B. Cover: 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick checkered steel plate with gasket seal frames and
anchor bolts.
2.07 MIXING VALVES
A. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows,
integral temperature adjustment.
B. Pressure Balanced Mixing Valves:
Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel cylinder, and integral
temperature adjustment.
2.08 MANHOLES
A. Formed-bottom type, laid on cast-in-place reinforced concrete foundation pad;
concrete as specified in QCS 2014 Section 5. Concrete
Construction: Concrete masonry units.
Cover: Standard cast iron with minimum sized pick hole, and frame. Use heavy duty
cover and frame in vehicular traffic areas.
Steps: 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter galvanized steel on 16 inch (400 mm) centers.
2.09 FLOOD DETECTOR
A. It’s a self-contained composite Water Leak Detection and Automatic Water Valve
Shutdown System designed specifically for Domestic, smaller Industrial, Office or
Leisure applications. If the Flood detector detects a water leak, it automatically shuts
the valve supplying water to that item or that area, and prevents any further flood
damage. The Flood detector can also be used to switch off the water when the
premises are vacant.
B. The system features a mains powered compact wall mounted Control Unit.
C. The mains power cable needs to be hard wired to an adjacent mains spur. The valve
cable is provided with the special connector which fits to the valve. The system will be
supplied with either a 1/2" Solenoid Valve. The valve should be fitted in the water
supply pipe work on entry to the monitored area.

3.01 INSTALLATION

B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs
with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of
drainage system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where
contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms,
fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and
exterior hose bibs.
F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and
cold water supply piping to lavatories sinks.
H. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of
fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch (20 mm)
minimum, and minimum 18 inches (450 mm) long.
END OF SECTION

6.6 22 3000 Plumbing Equipment:

A. Water heaters.
B. Pumps.
Sump Pumps.
C. Water pressure booster system.
A. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. BS EN 60335-1:1994+A2:2000 - Safety of household and similar electrical
appliances. General requirements.
B. BS EN 60335-1:2002+A15:2011 - Household and similar electrical appliances. Safety.
General requirements.
C. BS EN 60335-2-51:2003+A2:2012 - Household and similar electrical appliances.
Safety. Particular requirements for stationary circulation pumps for heating and
service water installations.
D. BS EN 16297-1:2012 - Pumps. Rotodynamic pumps. Glandless circulators. . General
requirements and procedures for testing and calculation of energy efficiency index
(EEI).
E. BS EN 16297-2:2012 - Pumps. Rotodynamic pumps. Glandless circulators.
Calculation of energy efficiency index (EEI) for standalone circulators.
F. BS EN 12050-1:2015 - Wastewater lifting plants for buildings and sites. Lifting plants
for wastewater containing fecal matter.
G. BS EN ISO 9906:2012 - Rotodynamic pumps. Hydraulic performance acceptance
tests. Grades 1, 2 and 3.
H. DIN 1988-200:2012 - Codes of practice for drinking water installations - Part 200:
Installation Type A (closed system) - Planning, components, apparatus, materials;
DVGW code of practice.
I. BS EN 681-1:1996 - Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals
used in water and drainage applications. Vulcanized rubber.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections
to other equipment and piping.
Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.
Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump
and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
Indicate heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data.
Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,

tappings, and drains.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection
data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and
telephone number.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of
products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented
experience.
B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and
rating/capacity identified by permanently attached label.
C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without
vapor binding and cavitations, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,
operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.

2.02 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.
B. Performance:
Storage capacity:
- 10 GAL.
- 20 GAL.
Heating element size:
- 6 kW.
Maximum working pressure: 150 psi (1000 kPa).
C. Electrical Characteristics:
240 V, Three phase, 50 Hz.
D. Glass lined welded steel; 4 inch (100 mm) diameter inspection port, thermally
insulated, minimum 2 inches (50 mm), Equipped with anode rod for additional
protection against corrosion.
E. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature
range from 60 to 180 ºF (16 to 82ºC), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, high
temperature limit thermostat.
F. Accessories: Provide:
Water connections: Brass.
Dip tube.
Drain Valve.
Anode.
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve.
2.02 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Type: Completely submersible, vertical, centrifugal.
B. Pump housing: Cast iron (EN-GJL-250).
C. Impeller: Cast iron (EN-GJL-250).
D. Motor: Cast iron (EN-GJL-250).
The motor is a watertight, totally encapsulated motor supplied with a 10 m power
cable.The stainless steel plug is fastened with a union nut. This nut and the O-rings
provide sealing against ingress of the liquid.
The plug is polyurethane-embedded.
E. Bearings: Ball bearings.
F. All surfaces of the cast iron parts are protected with cataphoresis coating. he surface
of the cast iron pump parts is afterwards painted with environmental friendly powder
coating (type NCS 9000N (black), gloss code 30, thickness 100 μm).
G. Maximum particle size: 65 mm.
H. Primary shaft seal: SIC/SIC.
I. Secondary shaft seal: CARBON/CERAMICS.
J. Pump inlet: 80.
K. Pump outlet: 65.
L. Pressure stage: PN 10.
M. Controls: Motor control panel containing across-the-line electric motor starters with
ambient compensated quick trip overloads in each phase with manual trip button and
reset button, circuit breaker, control transformer, electro mechanical alternator, hand-
off-automatic selector switches, pilot lights, high water alarm pilot light, reset button
and alarm horn. Provide mercury switch liquid level controls, steel shell switch
encased in polyurethane foam with cast iron weight for pump on (each pump), pump
off (common), and alarm.
N. The pump is approved according to CE, EN12050-1.
O. Performance:
Flow: 5,7 l/s, at 15 meters.
Motor: 3 kW, 415 volt, three phases, 50 Hz.
Number of poles: 2.
Starting current: 6,7 A.
Cos phi - power factor: 0,85.
Motor efficiency at full load: 85,6%.
Enclosure class (IEC 34-5): IP68.
Net weight: 92,6 Kg.
2.03 COLD WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
A. System:
- 3 vertical, multistage, centrifugal pumps. Pump parts in contact with the pumped
liquid are made of stainless steel EN DIN 1.4301.

- Two stainless steel manifolds to EN DIN 1.4571.
- Stainless steel base frame to EN DIN 1.4301 up to CR 90; above CR 90 the
pumps are placed on a galvanized I-Beam frame.
- One non-return valve (POM) and two isolating valves for each pump.
- Non-return valves are certified according to DVGW, isolating valves according to
DIN and DVGW.
- Adapter with isolating valve for connection of diaphragm tank.
- Pressure gauge and pressure transmitter (analog output 4-20 mA).
- Control MPC in a steel cabinet, IP54, including main switch, all required fuses,
motor protection, switching equipment and microprocessor-controlled CU 352.
B. Controls and Instruments: Pump operation is controlled by Control MPC with the
following functions.
- Intelligent multi-pump controller, CU 352.
- Constant-pressure control through continuously variable adjustment of the speed
of each individual pump.
- PID controller with adjustable PI parameters (Kp + Ti).
- Constant pressure at set point, independent of inlet pressure.
- On/off operation at low flow.
- Automatic cascade control of pumps for optimum efficiency.
- Selection of min. time between start/stop, automatic pump changeover and pump
priority.
- Automatic pump test function to prevent idle pumps from seizing up.
- Possibility of standby pump allocation.
- Possibility of backup sensor (redundant primary sensor).
- Manual operation.
- Possibility of external set point influence.
- Log function.
- Set point ramp.
- Possibility of digital remote-control functions.
- System on/off.
- Max., min. or user-defined duty.
- up to 6 alternative set points.
- Minimum and maximum limits of current value.
- Inlet pressure.
- Motor protection.
- Sensors and cables monitored for mal function.
- Alarm log with the previous 24 warnings/alarms.
- Display and indication functions.
- GRUNDFOS bus communication.
C. Performance:
Number of pumps: 3.
Flow: 7,90 l/s, at 48 meters.
Motor: 3 kW, 415 volt, three phases, 50 Hz.
Rated current of system: 18,6 A.
Enclosure class (IEC 34-5): IP54.
Maximum operating pressure: 16 bar.
Manifold inlet: DN 80.
Manifold outlet: DN 80.
Net weight: 315 Kg.
Gross weight: 465 Kg.
2.04 IRRIGATION WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM
A. System:
- 2 vertical, multistage, centrifugal pumps. Pump parts in contact with the pumped
liquid are made of stainless steel EN DIN 1.4301.
- Two stainless steel manifolds to EN DIN 1.4571.
- Stainless steel base frame to EN DIN 1.4301 up to CR 90; above CR 90 the
pumps are placed on a galvanized I-Beam frame.
- One non-return valve (POM) and two isolating valves for each pump.
- Non-return valves are certified according to DVGW, isolating valves according to
DIN and DVGW.
- Adapter with isolating valve for connection of diaphragm tank.
- Pressure gauge and pressure transmitter (analog output 4-20 mA).
- Control MPC in a steel cabinet, IP54, including main switch, all required fuses,
motor protection, switching equipment and microprocessor-controlled CU 352.
B. Controls and Instruments: Pump operation is controlled by Control MPC with the
following functions.
- Intelligent multi-pump controller, CU 352.
- Constant-pressure control through continuously variable adjustment of the speed
of each individual pump.
- PID controller with adjustable PI parameters (Kp + Ti).
- Constant pressure at set point, independent of inlet pressure.
- On/off operation at low flow.
- Automatic cascade control of pumps for optimum efficiency.
- Selection of min. time between start/stop, automatic pump changeover and pump
priority.
- Automatic pump test function to prevent idle pumps from seizing up.
- Possibility of standby pump allocation.
- Possibility of backup sensor (redundant primary sensor).
- Manual operation.
- Possibility of external set point influence.
- Log function.
- Set point ramp.

- Possibility of digital remote-control functions.
- System on/off.
- Max., min. or user-defined duty.
- up to 6 alternative set points.
- Minimum and maximum limits of current value.
- Inlet pressure.
- Motor protection.
- Sensors and cables monitored for mal function.
- Alarm log with the previous 24 warnings/alarms.
- Display and indication functions.
- Bus communication.
C. Performance:
The irrigation water pumping set will ensure the necessary flow and pressure to
exterior irrigation (to be defined in further stages in landscaping project).

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as
required by code, and complying with conditions of certification.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating
system.
C. Domestic Water Heat Exchangers:
Install domestic water heat exchangers with clearance for tube bundle removal
without disturbing other installed equipment or piping.
Support unit.
Pipe relief valves and drains to nearest floor drain.
Pitch shell for condensate drain to traps.
D. Pumps:
Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches (600 mm)
below lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches (150 mm) clearance from
bottom of sump pit.
Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated
check valve and balancing valve on discharge.
Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports
under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and over.
Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding
and cavitations, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate
within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
END OF SECTION

6.7 31 3219.23 Geotextile:

A. Geotextiles designed for strength and stability.
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation.
C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill.
E. Section 46 6000 – Water Treatment Equipment.
A. BS EN 13252:2014+A1:2015. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products.
Characteristics required for use in drainage systems.
B. BS EN 12447:2001. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Screening test method
for determining the resistance to hydrolysis in water.
C. BS EN ISO 10776:2012. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of
water permeability characteristics normal to the plane, under load.
D. BS EN ISO 11058:2010. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of
water permeability characteristics normal to the plane, without load.
E. BS EN ISO 12958:2010. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of
water flow capacity in their plane.
F. BS EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013 Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. General rules (design
standards).
G. BS EN ISO 11058 .Geotextiles and geotextile-related products
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate design
considerations and installation information.
B. Submit a 20" x 20" section of the product for review. Reviewed and accepted samples
will be returned to the Contractor.
C. Submit material certificates.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish manual for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
A. Geotextiles shall be subject to sampling and testing to verify conformance with this
specification. In the absence of purchaser’s testing, verification may be based on
manufacturer’s certifications as a result of testing by the manufacturer of quality
assurance samples obtained using the procedure for Sampling for Manufacturer’s
Quality Assurance (MQA) Testing. A lot size shall be considered to be the shipment
quantity of the given product or a truckload of the given product, whichever is smaller.
A. Geotextile labeling, shipment, and storage shall follow acceptable manufacturers
practice. Product labels shall clearly show the manufacturer or supplier name, style, and

roll number. Each shipping document shall include a notation certifying that the material
is in accordance with the manufacturer’s certificate.
B. Each geotextile roll shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the geotextile,
including the ends of the roll, from damage due to shipment, water, sunlight and
contaminants. The protective wrapping shall be maintained during periods of shipment
and storage.
C. During storage, geotextile rolls shall be elevated off the ground and adequately covered
to protect them from the following: site construction damage, precipitation, extended
ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, chemicals that are strong acids or strong bases,
flames including welding sparks, temperatures in excess of 160ºF (71ºC), and any other
environmental condition that may damage the property values of the geotextile.

2.01 NON-WOVEN POLYPROPYLENE GEOTEXTIL FILTER
A. Shall be non-woven PP or PET with a weight of at least 100 g/m², appropriate for the soil
type and depth conditions.
B. Mean peak strength BS EN ISO 10319 8kN/m
C. Elongation at peak strength BS EN ISO 10319 28%
D. CBR puncture resistance EN ISO 12236 1500N
E. Pore size (O90) EN ISO 12956 0.15mm
F. Permeability (50cm head) EN ISO 11058 100l/m2.s
A. The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals and chemical properties of
the soil and water.

3.01 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION

6.8 33 0513 Manholes and Structures:

A. Monolithic concrete manholes with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage,
and accessories.
B. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints with
masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories.
C. Monolithic FRP manholes with transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and
accessories.
D. Masonry manhole sections with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage,
and accessories.
A. QCS 2014 Section 5 Concrete.
A. BS EN 124-1:2015: Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Definitions, classification, general principles of design, performance requirements and
test methods.
B. BS EN 124-3:2015: Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Gully tops and manhole tops made of steel or aluminium alloys.
C. BS EN 124-4:2015: Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Gully tops and manhole tops made of steel reinforced concrete.
D. BS EN 124-5:2015: Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Gully tops and manhole tops made of composite materials
E. BS EN 124-6:2015: Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Gully tops and manhole tops made of polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE) or
unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC-U).
F. BS EN 124-2:2015: Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian areas.
Gully tops and manhole tops made of cast iron.
G. BS EN 13101:2002: Steps for underground man entry chambers. Requirements,
marking, testing and evaluation of conformity.

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete.
B. Manhole Sections: glass-fiber reinforced polyester with integral steps.
C. Concrete: As specified in QCS 2014 Section 5
D. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 2000, Type S.
E. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in QCS 2014 Section 5

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.
B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.
C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct.
3.02 MANHOLES
A. Place concrete base pad, trowel top surface level.
B. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base
pad.
C. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and
elevations. As work progresses, build in fabricated metal items.
D. Cut and fit for pipe.
E. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour
as required.
F. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
3.03 MASONRY WORK
A. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of
uniform thickness.
B. Lay masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 200
mm (8 inches).
C. Form concave mortar joints.
D. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with
other work.
E. Install joint reinforcement 400 mm (16 inches) on center.
F. Place joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above base pad and
below lid frame opening.
END OF SECTION

6.9 33 4923.13 Underground Storm Drainage Water Retention Tanks:

A. Excavation and base preparation to provide adequate support for project designs loads
and safety from excavation sidewall collapse.
B. Provide modular underground tank as a drainage system including units, geotextiles,
geogrids with connections and installation per the manufacturer's instructions furnished
under this section.
A. Subgrade preparation.
B. Utilities and subsurface drainage.
A. BS EN 13252:2014+A1:2015. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products.
Characteristics required for use in drainage systems.
B. BS EN 12447:2001. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Screening test method
for determining the resistance to hydrolysis in water.
C. BS EN ISO 10776:2012. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of
water permeability characteristics normal to the plane, under load.
D. BS EN ISO 11058:2010. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of
water permeability characteristics normal to the plane, without load.
E. BS EN ISO 12958:2010. Geotextiles and geotextile-related products. Determination of
water flow capacity in their plane.
F. BS EN 1997-1:2004+A1:2013 Eurocode 7. Geotechnical design. General rules (design
standards).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on underground modular tank physical properties. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate design considerations and installation
information.
B. Submit a 20" x 20" section of the product for review. Reviewed and accepted samples
will be returned to the Contractor.
C. Submit material certificates for geotextile, geogrid, base course and backfill materials.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish manual for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
D. Follow Section 01 33 23 for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
A. Installation: Performed only by skilled work people with satisfactory record of
performance on pipe, chamber, or pond/landfill construction projects of comparable size
and quality.
B. Identify tank with marking including size, number of plates, gross tank volume, water
storage volume and weight.
A. Protect cells from damage during delivery and store under tarp to protect from sunlight.
Storage should occur on smooth surfaces, free from dirt, mud and debris.

B. Handling is to be performed with equipment appropriate to the size (height) of cells and
site conditions, and may include, hand, handcart, forklifts, extension lifts, small cranes,
etc., with care given to minimize damage to spacer bars and surrounding cells.
A. Considerate proximity of tanks to tree roots, do no place the tanks within the tree drip line.
B. Review installation procedures and coordinate with other work affected, such as grading,
excavation, utilities, construction access, erosion control to prevent all non-installation
related construction traffic over the completed cells installation, especially with loads
greater than design loads.
C. Cold weather:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost.
2. Do not build on frozen work or wet, saturated or muddy subgrade.
3. Care must be taken when handling cells when air temperature is at 40 degrees or
below as plastic becomes brittle.
D. Protect partially completed cells installation against damage from other construction
traffic when work is in progress, and following completion of backfill, with highly visible
construction tape, fencing, or other means until construction is complete.
E. Protect adjacent work from damage during cells installation.

2.01 GEOGRID
A. Use geogrid product, such as Tensar TriX 160, or equal, to overlay the excavation floor,
the assembled cells, and above the completed liner, extending at least twice the width of
side backfill, with geogrid joints overlapped by at least 12”
2.02 NON-WOVEN POLYPROPYLENE GEOTEXTIL FILTER
B. Shall be non-woven PP or PET with a weight of at least 8 oz per square yard,
appropriate for the soil type and depth conditions, placed on the floor of the excavation,
the sides of the chamber, and chamber top.
2.03 UNDERGROUND MODULAR SYSTEM
A. Injection molded plastic units (layers) 1x1x0.1 m (Approximately 40"x40"x4"), (0.1 m3
each) assembled into vertical columnar cell structures of variable height (custom for each
project) with each layer consisting of hollow rings rising from a strong open grid Unit
weight = 6.4 kg (14.2 lb.), volume = 6% solid.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine prepared excavation and conditions for smoothness, compaction and level.
Base of Excavation shall be smooth soil, level and free of lumps or debris. Do not start
cells installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Check for presence of
seasonal high water table, which must be kept at levels 3 feet below the bottom of the
cell structure at all times. Different municipalities have different regulations regarding the
required distance between the bottom of an underground infiltration structure and the top
of the seasonal high water table. Please check with your local regulations to ensure
compliance.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for

satisfactory performance. If existing conditions are found unsatisfactory, contact Project
Manager for resolution.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Excavation: Excavation size to allow for the tank dimensions, backfill material
encompassing the tank and compaction equipment access at the tank side walls. Size of
bulk excavation to be as documented or use the following minimum dimensions;
- Tank base allow 100mm to 150mm
- Tank side walls allow perimeter 300mm to 500mm
- Tank top cover depth typically 300mm 600mm plus paving system as specified.
Excavate floor to an even level plane to the reduced level specified.
B. Prepare base: Place the specified base material to the specified thickness, evenly
spread to the correct line and level. Typically base material is a coarse washed river
sand or a free draining open graded 20mm aggregate. If the tank is not expected to ex-
filtrate water to the surrounding soils then a GAP 20 type material is acceptable. Base
material compacted to 95%.
C. Place geogrid over prepared grade, with any joints overlapped by a minimum of 12”,
extending over the entire excavation bottom. All overlapping edges / joins to be heat
welded by an experienced poly-plastic welder. Use only large liner sheets to minimize
the number of welded joins. Avoid site welded vertical joints if possible. Ensure liner at
the ends and sides is sufficient to wrap up and over the tank.
D. Place the geotextile fabric on the geogrid, extending the excess portion of the rolls up the
sides of the excavated area. Typically for most applications TerraTex 160N non-woven
needle-punched geotextile is used; lay the Geotextile into the excavation, over lapping
edges by 300mm or as specified; ensure geotextile at the ends and sides is sufficient to
wrap up and over the tank; secure / tape the geotextile against sliding or blowing down
into the excavation.
E. It is helpful to identify the outline of the cell placement on the fabric, using spray paint or
chalk line, to ensure squareness.
F. The geotextile fabric will later be brought up and encompass all sides and the top of the
units
G. All water entering the system must be filtered by an appropriate device including during
the construction phase of the tank system, use appropriate sediment / silt control
systems.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF MODULAR CELLS

A. Install cells by placing side by side, with grid side down. Try to place sides of cells
without damaged bumpers along outside of structure to resist backfill forces against
fabric and liner materials. Do not cut cells – cells must be installed whole. Cutting of
Rainstore3 is only permitted for installation of maintenance ports. Do not disassemble,
reassemble, or reconfigure the height (stacks) of the cells. Place metallic tape on top
corners of install to mark the area for future utility detection. Place a layer of geogrid
directly over the top of the cells to bridge columns and joints and provide a secure
walking surface. Place geotextile fabric layer over the top and sides to prevent soil entry
into the chamber. Take great care to avoid damage to fabric liner material during
placement.
B. After placement of cells, bring liner material up the sides and over the top of the structure,
overlapping or sealing joints per manufacturers recommendations. Fold excess fabric at

corners to lay flat against sides of structure, securing folds and seams with staples or
similar methods.
C. Identify locations of inlet, outlet, inspection ports, and any other penetrations of the liner,
securing pipe into prefabricated boots with stainless steel pipe clamps. Support pipe in
trenches and during backfill operations to prevent damage to liner or pipe.
D. With chambers greater than 1.2 meters (4 feet) deep, place piles of cover material over
closed chamber top surface along the edge of the chamber to provide vertical load on
perimeter cells. This will ensure compression of the columns and aid in resistance to
side pressures from backfill operations.
E. Use a powered mechanical compactor to conduct backfill operations on structure sides
with care to avoid damage to liner while providing required compaction forces to the top
level of the structure.
F. Place a geogrid layer over the top of the structure, extending beyond the outside edge of
the excavation by at least 40”. Any joints must be overlapped by a minimum of 12”.
G. Place sufficient sandy gravel backfill material over geogrid to ensure support of design
loads. Place cover backfill in 6” lifts and compact with vibrating plates or walk-behind
rollers (do not use drivable rolling compactors) to a minimum of 95%, with a minimum
depth of 12” and a maximum depth of 36”. Take care to place backfill on top of structure
and avoid damage to structure or liner, using low pressure tire or track vehicles.
H. Ensure that all non-chamber construction traffic be kept away from the limits of
excavation until the project is complete and final surface materials are in place.
I. Place surfacing materials, such as groundcovers (no shrubs or trees), or paving materials
over the structure with care to avoid displacement of cover fill and damage to
surrounding areas.
J. Any slopes creating additional overburden above the cells system should be carefully
located. The toe of said slope should be 10’ away from the closest edge of the cells
system. This will prevent any additional earth pressure.
K. Inspection and or maintenance ports. Maintenance and inspection ports, typically PVC
pipe cut vertically thru the tank and resting on the tank floor and rising to the finished
surface at the locations specified. Cut holes as required, see tank assembly instructions
above. Typically inspection port pipes (dip stick access to check water level) are 100mm
perforated pipe. Typically maintenance port pipes (to flush tank floor ) are 150mm to
200mm solid pipe with large vee notches cut in the bottom end. All pipes to enter the
tank at 90º to the face. Seal pipes to the tank envelope as detailed by the manufacturer.
Cap the top of maintenance and inspection pipes as specified by the manufacturer.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Perform cleaning during the installation of work and upon completion of the Work.
Remove from site all excess materials, debris, and equipment. Repair any damage to
adjacent materials and surfaces resulting from installation of this work.
END OF SECTION

6.10 46 6000 Water Treatment Equipment:
A. Sand Filter
1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start
of the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
B. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and
expeditious manner.
A. BS EN 15798:2010: Products used for the treatment of swimming pool water. Filter
media.
A. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which
the Project is located.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
C. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each
referenced document that prescribes execution requirements.
2.01 SAND FILTER
A. Description
- Four-cartridge design traps.
- Fiberglass-reinforced polypropylene tank is strong and corrosion resistant.
- Large filter area for increased dirt capacity
- 1-1/2 “, 100% drain clean-out port
B. Main Characteristics
- Filter Area: 22.3 m2
- Vertical Clearance: 1,42 m
- Filter Diameter: 21.5”
- Flow Rate: 5.7 l/s
3.01 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION

7 Smoke Management:
7.1 08 9000 Sand Trap Louvers and Vents:

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fixed, extruded-aluminium louvers.
2. Sand trap louvers
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused
by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind
pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of louvers.
1. Wind Loads: Basic wind speed 130 km/hr (80 mph), exposure C, according to
UBC1997.
B. Seismic Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to UBC 1997.
1. Seismic zones: according to UBC 1997.
C. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by
preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and night time-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material
surfaces.
D. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, Air-Leakage, and Wind-Driven Rain Ratings:
Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated
by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and
width according to AMCA 500-L.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other Work. Show blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
1. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
2. Shop drawings prepared by manufacturer will be accepted for review.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied colour finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, for each type of louver.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied colour
finish.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminium Sheet: ASTM B 209M, alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Aluminium Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, alloy 319.
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z180 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
E. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless
steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined
materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Post installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion
anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load
imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in
jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.
1. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical
assemblies are indicated.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames
at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
D. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.

E. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
1. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
G. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.03 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver:
1. Louver Depth: 100 mm.
2. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: As required to comply with structural
performance requirements, but not less than 2.0 mm.
3. Mullion Type: Exposed.
4. Performance Requirements:
a. Free Area: Not less than 0.79 m2 for 1.2-m- wide by 1.2-m- high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 4.6 m/s.
c. Air Performance: Not more than 37-Pa static pressure drop at 4.6-m/s free-area
velocity.
2.04 SAND TRAP LOUVERS
A. Sand Trap Louvers: shall be fixed vertical blade type a minimum of 200 mm deep.
The louvers shall be fabricated from extruded aluminium members epoxy coated, a
minimum of 2 mm thick of 6063-T5 alloy. The louver sub-sill will be formed from 1.25
mm thick aluminium sheet and sloped at such an angle to direct captured sand to the
building exterior.
B. The Louvers shall be tested by an accredited laboratory to indicate the louver
system's ability to reject a minimum of 95 percent of sand grain sizes between 150
and 425 microns when subjected to a face velocity of 0.5 meters per second.
C. An indoor bird screen construction as specified shall be provided on the inside of
each louver.
D. Provide inclined sill of same material and finish as louver vertical blades for slide of
sand particles.
E. Louver Construction:
1. Frames: Channel, 2.025 mm extruded aluminium 6063-T5 alloy.
2. Blades: 1.75 mm extruded aluminium 6063-T5.
3. Fasteners: Stainless steel
4. Finish: Super durable powder coating.
5. Mullions: Invisible.
6. Louvers Performance: Shall be according to louver types indicated on shop
drawings and Engineer’s approved products.

2.05 SAND TRAP LOUVERS SHEDULE
SAND TRAP LOUVER SCHEDULE
SIZE AIR STATIC
SPACE / ROOM FLOW RATE
MARK LOCATION QTY. Lengt Heigh VELOCITY PRESSURE DROP NOTES
DESTINATION
m 3/h l/s mhm mtm m /s Pa
EXIT PASSAGE WAY CORRIDOR STL-1 CL-HVAC-1 2 16400 4556 1950 1950 1,20 37
CL-CAR-1 AND CL-CAR-3
EXIT PASSAGE WAY CORRIDOR
STL-1 CL-HVAC-2 1 16400 4556 1950 1950 1,20 37 Aluminium sand trap
CL-CAR-5
louvre w ith galvanised
STAIR WELL
STL-1 IL-PRS 1 16400 4556 1950 1950 1,20 37 steel bird screen.
PRESSURIZATION STR-5
STAIR WELL
STL-1 CL-PRS 1 16400 4556 1950 1950 1,20 37
PRESSURIZATION CAR-7
MAKE UP AIR CL-CLH STL-1 UL-SMK-2 1 30000 8333 1950 1950 2,19 37
Notes:

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3. 2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for
installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with
adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where
required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,

as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes
so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in
the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide
new units.
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action
by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact
with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation
progresses, where weather tight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.
3. 4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Test operation of adjustable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning
units that comply with requirements.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary
covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil
accumulate until final cleaning.
C. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or
detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no
evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as
determined by Engineer, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches colour and
gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION

7.2 23 0713 Duct Insulation:

A. Duct insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
C. Insulation jackets.
A. Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jackets.
B. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2014.
B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and
Plate [Metric]; 2014.
C. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
D. ASTM C553 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013.
E. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal
Insulation; 2014.
F. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985
(Reapproved 2014).
G. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation
(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.
H. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation
Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2011.
I. ASTM C1338 - Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation
Materials and Facings; 2014.
J.ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2013a.
K. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of
Materials; 2015.
L. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi; 2015.
M. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
N. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. EN 13501-1: 2017 + A1: 2010. - Fire classification of construction products and
building elements - Part 1: Classification using data from reaction to fire tests.
Q. EN 13501-3: 2007 + A1: 2010 - Fire classification of construction products and
building elements - Part 3: Classification using data from fire resistance tests on
products and elements used in building service installations: fire resisting ducts and
fire dampers.
R. EN 1366-1: 2000 - Fire resistence test for service installations. Part 1. Ducts.
S. EN 1366-8: 2005 - Fire resistance tests for service installations - Part 8: Smoke
extraction ducts.
T. EN 12667: 2002 - Thermal performance of building materials and products.
Determination of thermal resistance by means of guarded hot plate and heat flow
meter methods. Products of high and medium thermal resistance.
U. EN 12939: 2001 - Thermal performance of building materials and products -
Determination of thermal resistance by means of guarded hot plate and heat flow
meter methods - Thick products of high and medium thermal resistance.
V. EN 29053: 1994 – Acoustics materials for acoustical applications. Determination of
airflow resistence. (ISO 9053:1991)
W. EN 15715: 2012 - Thermal insulation products - Instructions for mounting and fixing
for reaction to fire testing - Factory made products.
X. EN 12086: 2013 - Thermal insulating products for building applications -
Determination of water vapour transmission properties.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials
and thickness for each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation
type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure
acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the
type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented
experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work
specified in this section, with minimum 10 years of experience and approved by
manufacturer.
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and
mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of
adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
2.02 JACKETS
A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m) plain weave cotton fabric treated
with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a. Compatible with insulation.
B. Mineral Fiber (Outdoor) Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 50 lb/square
(2.45 kg/sq m).
C. Aluminium Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick
aluminium.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick stainless
steel.
2.03 JACKET FIRE RESISTANT DUCTS
A. Solutions for providing fire resistance in HVAC using mineral wool. U Protect solutions
provide an easy to install and lightweight efficient solution for fire resistance in HVAC.
B. Metallic duct jacketing in Mineral wool with quality mark RAL by the
Gütegemeinschaft Mineralwolle e. V., un risky regarding health according to German
decree on dangerous substances, decree on prohibition of chemicals and to guideline
EU 97/69 Nota Q. According to EN 1366-1, EN 1366-8 and EN 13501-3.
C. Behavior in fire: Non-combustible Euro class A1 Fire resistance of ventilation air ducts
in fire classes EI15-EI120. EN 1366.
D. Face Finishing: black aluminium facing.
E. Thickness versus time Fire rated proof:
Fire Class
Fire position Duct orientation
EI 15 EI 30 EI 60 EI 90 EI 120
Fire inside duct
30 40 60 70 80 Horizontal
Inside
35 50 80 90 100 Vertical
Fire outside duct
Outside
30 30 30 70 80 Vertical
When both fire position are required
Both
35 50 80 90 100 Vertical

Fire Class
Fire position Duct orientation
EI 15 EI 30 EI 60 EI 90 EI 120
To use 1 product for both duct orientations
Outside 30 30 30 70 80
Both
Inside 35 50 80 90 100
To use 1 product for all cases
Both 35 50 80 90 100 Both
F. Thermal Conductivity:
T ºC 10 50 100 150 200 300 400 500 600 STANDARD
W/mK 0.031 0.035 0.040 0.047 0.054 0.072 0.096 0.120 0.162 EN12667
Trademark: Isover, U Protect Slab 4.0 Alu1 or approved equivalent.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends
of insulation.
E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet
(3 meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
F. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with outdoor
jacket finished.
G. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor
barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert
spacers.
4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier

adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow
operation without disturbing wrapping.
H. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
2. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
3. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
END OF SECTION

7.3 23 3101 Ducts and Casings Smoke Management:

A. Metal ductwork.
B. Non-metal ductwork.
C. Casing and plenums.
D. Buried ductwork.
E. Kitchen hood ductwork.
F. Duct cleaning.
A. Painting and Coating: Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.
B. Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.
C. Air Duct Accessories.
D. Air Terminal Units.
E. Air Outlets and Inlets.
F. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
A. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013.
B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
C. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and General
Applications; 2015.
D. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2015.
E. ASTM A480/A480M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-
Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2015.
F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.
G. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
H. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.
I. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved
Formability, and Ultra-High Strength; 2014.
J.ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2014.
K. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminium and Aluminium-Alloy Sheet and
Plate [Metric]; 2014.
L. ASTM C14 – 15a Standard Specification for Non reinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm

Drain, and Culvert Pipe; 2015.
M. ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Non reinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm
Drain, and Culvert Pipe [Metric]; 2011.
N. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
Using Rubber Gaskets; 2012.
O. ASTM C443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,
Using Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011.
P. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2015a.
Q. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;
2012.
R. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in
S. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;
2013.
T. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2013.
U. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
V. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
W. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 2014.
X. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition.
Y. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
Z. SMACNA (FGD) - Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
AA. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment
Fabrication & Installation Guidelines; 2001.
AB. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters
AC. UL 1978 - Grease Ducts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
AD. UL 2221 - Tests of Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Assemblies; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
AE. EN 1366-8: 2005 - Fire resistance tests for service installations - Part 8: Smoke
extraction ducts.
AF. EN 1366-9: 2009 - Fire resistance tests for service installations - Part 9: Single
compartment smoke extraction ducts.
AG. EN 1507: 2007 - Ventilation for buildings - Sheet metal air ducts with rectangular
section - Requirements for strength and leakage.
AH. EN 1506: 2007 - Ventilation for buildings - Sheet metal air ducts and fittings with
circular cross-section - Dimensions.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and
configuration prior to start of work for LOW pressure class and higher systems.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings.
D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test
pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage
Test Manual.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures for glass fibber
ducts.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fibber ductwork meet or
exceed specified requirements.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record
changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified
in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
C. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.
E. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial
Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by
sealant manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct
sealants.

2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
A. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class,
galvanized steel.
C. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure
class, galvanized steel.
D. Buried Supply or Return: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, concrete encased
sheet metal.

1. Fabricate using two gages heavier material than indicated for 2 inch WG (500
Pa) pressure class.
E. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized
steel.
F. Return and Relief: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
G. General Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
H. Outside Air Intake: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
I. Combustion Air: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized steel.
J.Evaporative Condenser Intake and Exhaust: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class,
galvanized steel.
K. Emergency Generation Ventilation: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, galvanized
steel.
L. Transfer Air and Sound Boots: 1/2 inch w.g. (125 Pa) pressure class, fibrous glass.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M
FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating.
B. Un-Galvanized Steel for Ducts: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold-rolled
commercial steel.
C. Aluminium for Ducts: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); aluminium sheet, alloy 3003-H14.
Aluminium Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength.
D. Stainless Steel for Ducts: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
E. Concrete Pipe for Buried Ducts: ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M) Class 1 Non reinforced
hub and spigot concrete sewer pipe; ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M) joints with
standard rubber gaskets.
F. PVC Coating for Steel Ducts: 4 mils (0.1 mm) polyvinyl chloride plastic on both sides.
G. Asphalt Coating For Buried Ducts:
H. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold
resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint
configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by
manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of
zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labelled.
I. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one
end, or continuously threaded.
J.Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards and as indicated.
B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size
round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE
Handbook - Fundamentals.
C. Duct systems have been designed for metal duct. At the Contractor's option, fibrous
glass duct may be substituted for metal duct.
D. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
E. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct
on centre line. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used,
provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fibber insulation.
F. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fibber insulation when acoustical
lining is indicated.
G. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever
possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees
convergence downstream.
H. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
I. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver
frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material
as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.
2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. Flat Oval Ducts: Machine made from round spiral lock seam duct.
1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
2. Fittings: Manufacture at least two gages heavier metal than duct.
3. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures
indicated.
B. Double Wall Insulated Flat Oval Ducts: Machine made from round spiral lock seam
duct.
2. Fittings: Manufacture with solid inner wall.
3. Inner wall: Perforated galvanized steel.
4. Insulation:
a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) fibreglass.
C. Slab Duct Ventilation System: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M
FS, with G90/Z275 coating designed for installation in cast-in-place concrete floor
assemblies.
1. Fittings: Elbows, End caps, Connecting couplings, Spin-in-collar, Sofit-discharge
head, Support Brackets, Wall discharge head.
D. Double Wall Insulated Round Ducts: Round spiral lock seam duct with galvanized
steel outer wall, perforated galvanized steel inner wall; fitting with solid inner wall.
2. Insulation:
a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Material: Air.

E. Fibber Glass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Ducts: Glass fibber reinforced plastic,
minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) wall thickness.
F. Flexible Ducts: Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.
1. Insulation: Fiberglas insulation with polyethylene vapour barrier film.
2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.50 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250 Pa)
negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec).
4. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F (-23 degrees C to 71
degrees C).
G. Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.
1. UL labelled.
3. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG (1000 Pa) positive and 0.5 inches WG (175 Pa)
negative.
degrees C).
H. Flexible Ducts: Multiple layers of aluminium laminate supported by helically wound
spring steel wire.
1. UL labelled.
negative.
degrees C).
I. Flexible Ducts: UL 181, Class 1, aluminium laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire.
negative.
degrees C).
J.Flexible Ducts: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminium foil.
2. Pressure Rating: 8 inches WG (2.0 kPa) positive or negative.
degrees C).
K. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection,
interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and
corner clips.
2.05 CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
and construct for operating pressures indicated.
B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch (100 mm) high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet
panels on 8 inch (200 mm) centres to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated,
provide liner of 18 gage (1.20 mm) galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12
inch (300 mm) centres, turned up 12 inches (30 mm) at sides with sheet metal
shields.
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum
supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access
to equipment for cleaning and inspection.
1. Provide clear wire glass observation ports, minimum 6 X 6 inch (150 X 150 mm)
size.
D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage (1.50 mm)
back facing and 22 gage (0.80 mm) perforated front facing with 3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
diameter holes on 5/32 inch (4 mm) centers. Construct panels 3 inches (75 mm) thick
packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft (72 kg/cu m) minimum glass fibber media, on inverted
channels of 16 gage (1.50 mm).
2.06 ROUND DUCT
A. Round duct construction is classified into two types: Low and High Pressure. These
shall conform to the requirement of the SMACNA Low and High pressure Duct
Construction Standards respectively
B. Ducts shall be of spirally seamed galvanized steel with continuous welded
construction fittings for high pressure applications with light gauge spiral steel or
longitudinal snap lock seams for low pressure applications. Fittings shall be made
with mechanically locked or riveted constructions.
C. The galvanized steel thickness for round ducts shall comply with the requirements of
Table 4 of Chapter 1 of the ASHRAE Handbook and Product Directory, 1979,
"Equipment".
D. Orifice plates shall be provided where necessary in high pressure systems for
balancing.
2.07 FIRE RATED DUCT
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.
B. Fire Rating: 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 180 minutes.
C. Galvanized Steel for Ducts with fire protection according to NFPA-92 (Smoke Control
Systems).
D. Fire rated duct is constructed from galvanized sheet steel, manufactured to the HVCA
or SMACNA standard, then degreased and factory fire sprayed with Flame bar BW11
or similar, a specially formulated water-based compound. The finished product
contains selected mineral filters in a low permeability elastomeric binder, to a
thickness of approximately 1mm, and has been successfully tested for international
use under cellulosic fire conditions - in excess of four hours duration. Flame bar
BW11 fire rated ductwork is produced in sections and assembled on site utilizing
tested fireproof gaskets/sealants.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on

open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
D. Buried Supply Duct: Insulate duct runs over 70 feet (20 m) long with 1 inch (25 mm)
thick insulation covered with plastic vapour barrier.
E. Buried Metal Ductwork: Paint according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
F. Buried Metal Ductwork Without Factory Jacket: Paint with one coat and seams and
joints with additional coat of asphalt base protective coating.
G. Buried Metal Ductwork: Encase according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
1. Provide adequate tie-down points to prevent ducts from floating during concrete
placement.
2. Introduce no heat into ducts for 20 days following placement of concrete.
H. Fibrous Glass Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards. Obtain manufacturer's inspection and acceptance of
fabrication and installation at beginning of installation.
I. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with adhesive.
J.Kitchen Hood Exhaust: Provide residue traps at base of vertical risers with provisions for
clean out.
K. PVC Coated Metal Ductwork: Tape with PVC tape.
L. Underground Ducts: Slope to plenums or low pump out points at 1:500. Provide
access doors for inspection.
M. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes
inside lining.
N. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems,
complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.
Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a
metal ring.
O. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
P. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch (200 mm) and
smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.
Q. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
R. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot (300 mm) maximum
length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
S. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet (1.5
m) maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
T. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above floor. Arrange door swings
so that fan static pressure holds door in closed position.
U. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels.
3.02 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated
and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Transverse joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.03 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches (600 mm) of each elbow and within 48
inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet (5 m) and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-
fourth of failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely
cured.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated
dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that
could be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
B. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that could
be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate
access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.
END OF SECTION

7.4 23 3301 Air Duct Accessories Smoke Management:

A. Air turning devices/extractors.
B. Back draft dampers - metal.
C. Back draft dampers - fabric.
D. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
E. Duct test holes.
F. Fire dampers.
G. Flexible duct connections.
H. Smoke dampers.
I. Volume control dampers.
A. HVAC Ducts and Casings.
B. Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies.
C. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
B. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2012.
C. NFPA 96 - Standard Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations; 2014.
D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
F. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
G. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems;
H. EN 15727: 2010 - Ventilation for buildings - Ducts and ductwork components, leakage
classification and testing.
I. EN 12236: 2003 - Ventilation for buildings. Ductwork hangers and supports.
Requirements for strength.
J. EN 15650: 2010 - Ventilation for buildings - Fire dampers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control
dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control
dampers.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers.

D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.
project.
2. Extra Fusible Links: One of each type and size.
experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275)
coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality,
with oiled, exposed matte finish.
C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminium and stainless-steel
ducts.
D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for 36-inch (900-mm)
length or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches
(900 mm).
2.02 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with
individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.
2.02 BACK DRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A. Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installations.
B. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and
mounting flange.
C. Blades: 0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed aluminium.
D. Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminium sheet.
E. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
F. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
G. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
H. Blades shall include field adjustable, zinc plated steel counter balance weights to
allow that 0.01 inches wg (2.5 Pa).
2.03 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - FABRIC
A. Fabric Back draft Dampers: Factory-fabricated, 18 gage (1.90 mm), galvanized steel
frame.

1. Blades: Neoprene coated fabric material.
2. Bird screen: 12 mm nominal mesh of galvanized steel or aluminium.
3. Maximum Velocity: 6 m/sec face velocity.
2.04 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated.
B. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.
C. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage (1.5 mm) galvanized steel frame and
blades, oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel
axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch (3.2 x 12.7 mm) plated steel
concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch
(12.7 mm) actuator shaft.
D. Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return pneumatic type suitable for operation
on 0-20 psig (0-140 kPa) instrument air. Provide end switches to indicate damper
position. Locate damper operator on interior of duct and link to damper operating
shaft.
E. Normally Closed Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, opening by gravity
upon actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to
provide constant sealing pressure.
F. Normally Open Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, closing upon
actuation of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide
constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices to ensure
positive closure for units mounted horizontally.
G. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F (74 degrees C); 120 volts,
single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labelled.
2.05 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.
B. Fire Rating: 90 minutes, 120 minutes or 180 minutes.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-
inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed,
0.034- inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) or 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick as indicated,
and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet
steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick,
galvanized steel blade connectors.
H. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
I. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage (0.76 mm) frame and 16 gage (1.5 mm)
flap, two layers 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) ceramic fibber on top side and one layer on
bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip.

J.Fusible Links: UL 33, Replaceable, separate at 165 degrees F (74 degrees C) with
adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers.
2.05 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labelled
for one-and-one-half-hour rating to UL 555.
B. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated as indicated.
C. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- (1.62-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized, sheet
steel; length to suit wall or floor application.
E. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
1. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed
gear trains.
2. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and
breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
3. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit
normal operation at minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C).
4. Two-Position Motor: 220 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
5. Two-Position Motor: 300 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
6. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
7. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
8. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 460 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
F. Smoke Damper schedule:
SMOKE DAMPER SCHEDULE
Size
ROOM FLOW MAX. DP Pow er Notes
UNIT NO TECHNICAL DATA Qty.
DESTINATION WidthxHeight
m3/s m3/h mm Pa kw
UL-SMK-1/4; SMOKE
EXHAUST FAN FOR
SMD-01 400 ºC/ 2H 4 11,00 40.000 1200x1200 20 0,1 DAMPER MOUNTED IN DUCT
CONCURSE HALL
(CL-CLH)
UL-SMK-3; SMOKE
EXHAUST FAN FOR
SMD-02 SOUTH ACESS AT 400ºC/ 2H 2 10,28 37.000 1100x1100 20 0,1 DAMPER MOUNTED IN DUCT
GRADE LEVEL
(AG-SAC)
Notes:
-With Electrical spring return actuators, opened a closed supervisory sw itches, and also cover grilles for inlet and oulet sides.
2.7 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) wide, curved blades
set 3/4 inch (19 mm) o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches (50

mm) o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminium extrusions with
perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. General: Fabricate doors and panels airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and
thickness, and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class.
Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano
hinge and cam latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam
rubber.
E. Insulation: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.08 RELIEF DAMPERS
Application: Relief dampers shall be installed to open for excess pressure actuating as a
check damper.
Construction: Relief dampers shall be anodized aluminium and be suitable for exterior
installation.
A. Relief or Over pressure damper schedule:
OVERPRESSURE DAMPER SCHEDULE
STATIC
FLOW RATE SIZE
SPACE / ROOM DAMPER PRESSURE
MARK QTY. NOTES
DESTINATION LOCATION Legt Heigh DROP
m 3/h L/s mm mm Pa
EMERGENCY STAIRCASE STR-05 & STR- AG-CAR
OD-01 2 10450 2903 1000 800 33,00
07, AIR RELIEF DAMPER IL-MEP-3
CL-CAR-1
EXIT / CORRIDOR WAY CL-CAR-1, CL-
OD-02 3 CL-CAR-3 5110 1419 1000 500 27,44
CAR-3 & CL-CAR-5, AIR RELIEF DAMPER
CL-CAR-5
SUPPLY FRESH AIR (MAKE UP AIR) FOR
OD-03 2 CL-SMK-4 30000 8333 1200 1200 45,00
CL-CLH, CL-SMK-04.
REMARKS:
-Includes all the accesories for installation.

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and
follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 23 3100 for
duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils,
fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and
elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with
NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, size for
shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch (100 x 100 m) for balancing
dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing
purposes.
E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at
locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and
where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter
mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs,
bearings, bushings and hinges.
F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with
NFPA 92.
G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct
connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.
I. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections
immediately adjacent to the equipment.
J.For fans developing static pressures of 5.0 inches (1250 Pa) and over, cover flexible
connections with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps.
K. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2
duct widths from duct take-off.
L. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
M. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. Refer to
Section 23 3600 - Air Terminal Units.
N. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers,
regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register
assembly.
END OF SECTION

7.5 23 3417 Centrifugal Fans Smoke Management:

A. Backward inclined centrifugal fans.
B. Forward curved centrifugal fans.
C. Airfoil centrifugal fans.
D. Radial centrifugal fans.
E. Tubular centrifugal fans.
F. In-line centrifugal fans.
G. Vent sets.
H. Motors and drives.
I. Fan accessories.
A. Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
B. Duct Insulation.
C. Air Duct Accessories: Back draft dampers.
D. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings; American Bearing
C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc.; 2010.
D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA
210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
E. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified
Ratings Program; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.
F. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement
and Control Association International, Inc.; 2014.
G. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2014.
H. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2014.
I. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the
AMCA Certified Rating Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
D. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.
E. Temperature: Smoke removal exhaust fan must be certificated to exhaust smoke air
temperaure at least 400 ºC, 120 minutes.
F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied
areas.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves
with specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for
both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and
connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan
curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan
inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions.
D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,
spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
project.
2. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan.
experience.
C. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and
that
are listed and labelled by UL where available.
D. Listing and Labelling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section
that are listed and labelled. The Terms "Listed" and "Labelled": As defined in the
National Electrical Code, Article 100.
E. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are
licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
F. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with
applicable NEMA standards.
G. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
A. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

A. Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.
B. Permanent fans may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is
clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run
under observation.

2.01 GENERAL
A. General
1. Exhaust air units shall be supplied whenever indicated on the Drawing or in the
Bills of Quantities.
2. These units shall be the centrifugal type for roof installation.
2.02 WHEEL AND INLET
A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminium construction with smooth curved inlet flange,
heavy back plate, backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back
plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set
screws.
B. Forward Curved: Black enamelled steel construction with inlet flange, back plate,
shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically
secured to flange and back plate; steel hub swaged to back plate and keyed to shaft
with set screw.
C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate die
formed hollow airfoil shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange, and back plate;
cast iron or cast steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.
D. Radial: Steel construction with inlet flange, heavy reinforced back plate, plate blades
with reinforcing gussets welded or riveted to back plate and flange; cast iron or cast
steel hub riveted to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.
2.03 HOUSING
A. Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously
welded for Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun
inlet bell and shaped cut
B. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard. For fans handling air
downstream of humidifiers, provide two additional coats of paint. Prime coating on
aluminium parts is not required.
C. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing, where indicated.
D. Fabricate plug fans without volute housing, in lined steel cabinet.
2.04 BEARINGS AND DRIVES
A. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self greasing ball bearings, with ABMA 9 life
at 50,000 hours.
B. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with
lubricating oil, and shaft guard.
C. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and
adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp (11.2 Kw) and under, selected so required
rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid Fixed sheave for 20 hp (15 Kw) and over,
matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5
times nameplate rating of the motor.

D. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards; 0.106 inch (2.6 mm)
thick, 3/4 inch (20 mm) diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or
equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting
vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of
tachometer with guard in place.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with fixed cantilevered inlet guide vanes welded
to inlet bell.
B. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with blades supported at both ends with
two permanently lubricated bearings, variable mechanism out of air stream
terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double width fans and locking
quadrant.
C. Discharge Dampers: Parallel blade heavy duty steel damper assembly with blades
constructed of two plates formed around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed
ball bearings, with blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.
D. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid.
E. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latches and gaskets.
F. Scroll Drain: 1/2 inch (13 mm) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads..
C. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23
0548.
D. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section
23 3300. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch (25
mm) flex between ductwork and fan while running.
E. Install fan restraining snubbers. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible
connectors when fan is operating.
F. Install fan restraining snubbers; refer to Section 23 0548. Adjust snubbers to prevent
tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.
G. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
H. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
I. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
J. Provide back draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to Section 23
3300.
K. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated.
L. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using
housed spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.

M. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
N. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and
vibration isolation springs.
O. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
P. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
Q. It is included any structure of slip resistance galvanized steel open- floor grating
(50x50mm & 50x3mm PLATES).that would be necessary for the maintenance works,
including steps, and any other auxiliary element required for the correct maintenance.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Section 23 3100.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with flexible connector.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Section 26.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including
grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct
and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.06 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean
fan wheel and cabinet.
C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.

3.08 SCHEDULES
A. Pressurized Stair Well and Exit Way Corridors Fans:
Drawing identification marks / tag: PF-01-01/02/03/04/05.
SUPPLY/ EXHAUST FAN UNIT SCHEDULE
STATIC
TOTAL
PRESSURE MOTOR
SPACE / ROOM FAN ROTATION FLOW VOLTAGE SIZE
MARK QTY. AVAILABLE CHARACTERISTIC CURVE NOTES
DESTINATION LOCATION RATE
Pow er
rpm l/s m 3/h Pa KW V mm
PRESSURIZED
EMERGENCY STAIR
AND CORRIDOR CL-HVAC-1
FAN: IL-PRS
Soundproofed
CL-CAR-1 CL-HVAC-1
PF-01 ventilation units
IL-STR-5 CL-HVAC-2
- 5 1050 4556 16400 350 3,0 400-III w ith backw ard-
CL-CAR-3 CL-PRS
01/02/03/04/05 facing blades.
CL-CAR-5
CL-STR-7
Notes:
- All fans shall be provided w ith flexible connections to avoid vibrations to ducts in inlet and outlet connection. (must be Fire Rated 400ºC and 120 minutes for smoke exhaust fans)
-All fans shall be provided w ith diferential pressure sw itch betw een inlet and outlet connection for supervisory the start or stop mode of the fan. (must be Fire Rated 400ºC and 120 minutes for smoke exhaust fans)

M002-RLR-MEP-SPE-27005 3 DD2 Qatar University Station WP11.2 - MEP Specifications
B. Supply fresh air Fans (make up air):
STATIC
TOTAL
PRESSURE MOTOR
Pow er
Soundproofed
SUPPLY FAN FOR
SF-01 ventilation units
MAKE UP AIR TO
- 2 UL-SMK-02 1285 8333 30000 433 11,0 400-III w ith backw ard-
CONCOURSE HALL
01/02 facing blades.
CL-CLH.
Notes:

END OF SECTION

7.6 23 3413 Axial Fans Smoke Management:

A. Propeller fans.
B. Motors and drives.
C. Accessories.
B. Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.
D. Air Duct Accessories: Back draft dampers.
A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing
B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings; American Bearing
C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc.; 2010.
D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Rating; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA
210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
E. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified
F. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement
and Control Association International, Inc.; 2014.
G. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data;
H. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2014.
I. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on axial fans and accessories including fan curves with
specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan
inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of axial fans and accessories including fan curves
with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and
outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for at least
five blade settings, including maximum.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,
project.
experience.
A. Permanent fans may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is
clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run
under observation.

2.01 AXIAL FANS
A. A. Product Requirements:
1. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing
the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing the AMCA
Certified Sound Rating Seal.
3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
4. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.
5. Temperature Limit: Smoke removal exhaust fan must be certificated to exhaust
smoke air temperature at least 400ºC, 120 minutes.
B. Hub and Impeller:
1. Airfoil Impeller Blades: Adjustable die cast aluminium alloy glass reinforced
polyester resin.
2. Hub: Die cast aluminium alloy or cast iron hub or with belt drive of spun, welded
steel, bored and keyed to shaft; to facilitate indexing of blade angle with
automatic adjustment stops.
3. Controllable Pitch Assemblies: Incorporate ball bearing counterbalanced blade
and variable pitch assembly into hub with mechanical link to casing exterior
mounted actuator, or pneumatic or electric actuator incorporated within hub.
4. Cast Components: X-ray components after fabrication and statically and
dynamically balance assembly before attachment to motor or shaft.
C. Casing:
1. Fabricate casing of 1/4 inch (6 mm) steel for fans 40 inch (1000 mm) in diameter
and smaller and 3/8 inch (10 mm) steel for larger fans.
2. Continuously weld, with inlet and outlet flange connections, and motor or shaft
supports. Incorporate flow straightening guide vanes for fans specified for static

pressures greater than one inch wg (250 Pa).
3. Finish with one coat enamel applied to interior and exterior.
D. Bearings and Drives:
1. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball
bearings, with ABMA STD 9, L-10 life at 50,000 hours.
2. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway; protectively coated
with lubricating oil.
3. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable
and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under selected so required
rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fixed sheave for 20 hp and
over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or
minimum 1.5 times nameplate rating of the motor.
4. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA (DCS); 0.106 inch (2.6 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19
mm) diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation,
with provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.
5. Lubrication: Extend lubrication fittings to outside of casing.
E. Accessories:
1. Guide Vanes: Welded steel construction with airfoil vanes and casing flanges,
finished to match casing.
2. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel construction with blades supported at both ends
with two permanently lubricated bearings, variable mechanism out of air stream
terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double width fans and
locking quadrant.
3. Inlet Bell: Bell mouth inlet fabricated of steel with flange.
4. Outlet Cones: Fabricated of steel with flanges, outlet area/inlet area ratio of
1.5/1.0, with centre pod as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid to fit inlet bell.
6. Dampers: Welded steel construction, consisting of two semi-circular vanes
pivoted on oil-retaining bearings in short casing section, finished with one coat
enamel. Provide airstream operation closing blades by reverse air flow and
gravity.
7. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to casing with quick opening latches and
gaskets.
8. Blade Pitch Actuator: Factory mounted and calibrated, electric actuator requiring
single phase power and accepting electric input.
9. Stall Alarm Probe: Factory installed sensing probe to detect fan operation in stall.
Refer to Section 23 0913.
10. Vibration Detector: Factory installed vibration switch to stop fan with extra set of
contacts. Refer to Section 23 0913.

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION

B. Install with resilient mountings and with flexible electrical lead.
C. Install flexible connections specified in Section 23 3300 between axial fan inlet and
discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one
inch (25 mm) flex between ductwork and axial fan while running.
D. Install fan restraining snubbers. Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible
connectors when fan is operating.
E. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.
F. Provide back draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated.
G. Provide access to adjustable blade axial fan wheels for varying blade angle setting.
Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure.
H. Provide floor mounted axial fans with reinforced legs. Provide ceiling suspended units
with support brackets bolted to casing flange.
I. It is included any structure of slip resistance galvanized steel open- floor grating (
50x50mm & 50x3mm PLATES).that would be necessary for the maintenance works,
including steps, and any other auxiliary element required for the correct maintenance.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct
and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.05 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean
fan wheel and cabinet.

3.06 SCHEDULES
A. Smoke Exhaust Fans SEF-01 (Smoke removal fan for At grade Level):
Drawing identification marks / tag: SEF-01-01/02.

STATIC
TOTAL
PRESSURE MOTOR
Pow er
Axial extraction
SMOKE EXHAUST units w ith
REMOVAL FAN FOR SEF-01 soundproofed
2 UL-SMK-3 1455 10278 37000 440 15,0 400-III
MAIN ENTRANCE -01/02 box,
AT GRADE LEVEL Fire Rated
400ºC / 2h.
Notes:

Suction and Supply Flexible Coupling Connector must be Fire Rated 400ºC / 120 min.

B. Smoke Exhaust Fans SEF-02 (Smoke removal fan for Concourse Level):
Drawing identification mark / tag: SEF-02-01/02/03/04.

STATIC
TOTAL
PRESSURE MOTOR
Pow er
Axial extraction
SMOKE EXHAUST
units w ith
REMOVAL FAN FOR
SEF-02 soundproofed
CONCOURSE AREA 4 UL-SMK-1/4 1455 11000 39600 380 15,0 400-III
-01/02/03/04/ box,
AT CONCOURSE
Fire Rated
LEVEL
400ºC / 2h.
Notes:

Suction and Supply Flexible Coupling Connector must be Fire Rated 400ºC / 120 min.
END OF SECTION

7.7 23 3701 Air Outlets and Inlets Smoke Management:

A. Registers/grilles.
A. Painting and Coating: Painting of ducts visible behind outlets and inlets.
B. Interior Lighting: Air handling light troffers.
A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 2012.
B. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006
(R2011).
C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and
inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of
outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
B. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
C. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of air-conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of typical exterior ceiling module with supply and return air outlets.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
B. Grilles are scheduled on Drawings.
2.02 WIRE MESH GRILLE
A. Add optional inner wire mesh grilles where shown installed on outside walls building,
fabricate grille with 2 x 2 mesh 13 mm (1/2 inch) aluminium hardware cloth in a spot
welded galvanized steel frame with approximately 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) margin.
2.03 REGISTER SCHEDULE
A. Supply/return and exhaust register.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, registers that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or
approved equal:
a. Trox
b. Koolair
c. Titus
3. Material: Aluminium.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, colour selected by Engineer.
5. Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal for return and exhaust registers.
6. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical for supply registers.
7. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
10. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
3.7 GRILLE SCHEDULE
A. Supply and return grille.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, grilles that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or
approved equal:
a. Trox
b. Koolair
c. Titus
3. Material: Aluminium.
4. Finish: Baked enamel, colour selected by Engineer.
5. Face Blade Arrangement: Adjustable horizontal.
6. Rear Blade Arrangement: Adjustable vertical.
7. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Countersunk screw.
9. Accessories: Include plaster frame.
B. Exhaust or Return Grille Schedules for Smoke Management System:

EXHAUST/RETURN GRILLE SCHEDULE
SIZE EFECTIVE EFFECTIVE STATIC
NOISE
SPACE / ROOM AIR FLOW OUTLET JET PRESSURE
MARK LOCATION QTY. Length Height CRITERIA NOTES
DESTINATION AREA VELOCITY DROP
m ³/h l/s mm mm m2 m /s Pa NC
PUBLIC SPACE AG-SAC AT CEILING
EG-01 18 2056 570,988 825 225 0,141 4,05 10,7 30 FIRE RATED 400ºC AND 120 MINUTES
GRADE LEVEL. AG-SAC
PUBLIC SPACE CL-CLH AT
EG-02 CL-CLH 48 4950 1375,000 1225 525 0,535 2,57 2,4 25 FIRE RATED 400ºC AND 120 MINUTES
CONCOURSE LEVEL
EMERGENCY STAIRCASE STR-5 EG-03 AG-STR-5 2 5227 1451,806 1225 325 0,320 4,54 13,4 30
EMERGENCY STAIRCASE STR-7 EG-03 IL-STR-7 2 5227 1451,806 1225 325 0,320 4,54 13,4 30
CEILING
CL-CAR-1, CL-CAR-3 & CL-CAR-
CL-CAR-1
5 PASSAGE WAY CORRIDOR AT EG-04 3 5110 1419,444 1025 425 0,356 3,99 10,3 25
CL-CAR-3
CONCOURSE LEVEL
CL-CAR-5
CL-CLH EG-05 LIFT 2 500 500
NOTES:
-ALL GRILLES WITH REGULATION DAMPER.

C. Supply Grille Schedules for Smoke Management System:
SUPPLY GRILLE SCHEDULE
EFECTIVE EFFECTIVE STATIC
SIZE NOISE
MARK LOCATION QTY. CRITERIA NOTES
DESTINATION Length Height AREA VELOCITY DROP
EXIT PASSAGE
CEILING For pressurization
WAY CORRIDOR SG-01 2 8200 2278 1225 525 0,535 4,26 11,8 30
CL-CAR-1 system
CL-CAR-1
EXIT PASSAGE
WAY CORRIDOR SG-01 2 8200 2278 1225 525 0,535 4,26 11,8 30
CL-CAR-3 system
CL-CAR-3
EXIT PASSAGE
WAY CORRIDOR SG-01 2 8200 2278 1225 525 0,535 4,26 11,8 30
CL-CAR-1 system
CL-CAR-5
EMERGENCY
STAIRWELL SMOKE For pressurization
SG-01 IL-STR-5 2 8200 2278 1225 525 0,535 4,26 11,8 30
PROOF ENCLOSURE system
STR-5
EMERGENCY
STAIRWELL SMOKE For pressurization
SG-01 IL-STR-7 2 8200 2278 1225 525 0,535 4,26 11,8 30
PROOF ENCLOSURE system
STR-7
CONCOURSE
HALL´S CEILING CL- SG-02 CL-CLH 8 3750 1042 1225 325 0,32 3,26 6,23 25 Make up air CL-CLH
CLH
NOTES:

D. Weather Resistant Louvre for Smoke Management System:
WEATHER RESISTANT LOUVRE
EFECTIVE EFFECTIVE STATIC
SIZE NOISE
MARK LOCATION QTY. CRITERIA NOTES
DESTINATION Length Height AREA VELOCITY DROP
FACADE OUTSIDE
FRESH AIR INTAKE FOR
BUILDING:
PRESSURIZATION
CL-HVAC-2, CL-HVAC-1,
SYSTEM TO STAIRWELL WRL-01 6 16400 4555,6 1600 1155 1,712 2,66 31,2 48,1
CL-HVAC-1, IL-PRS,
OR EXIT PASSAGE WAY
CL-PRS, AG-CAR, IL-MEP-
CORRIDORS.
3.
FRESH AIR INTAKE FOR
FACADE OUTSIDE
MAKE UP AIR TO
WRL-02 BUILDING: 1 30000 8333,3 2000 1980 3,79 2,20 22,0 43,5
CONCOURSE HALL; CL-
UL-SMK-02.
CLH.
FACADE OUTSIDE
OVERPRESSURE RELIEF
BUILDING:
SYSTEM FOR CL-CAR-1, WRL-03 3 5110 1419,4 1800 660 1,035 1,37 3,0 35,0
CL-CAR-1,
CL-CAR-3 and CL-CAR-5.
CL-CAR-3, CL-CAR-5.
OVERPRESSURE RELIEF FACADE OUTSIDE
WRL-04 1 10440 2900,0 2400 495 0,984 2,95 3,0 35,0
SYSTEM FOR STR-5 BUILDING AG-CAR.
CL-CLH EG-05 LIFT 2 500 500
NOTES:
-With w ire mesh screen and insect screen in stainless steel.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install grilles to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are
specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09
9000.
F. Allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
G. After installation of grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove
burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace grilles that have damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION

7.8 08 5000 Motorized Smoke Vent:

1.01 Description
A. Natural louvered glazed ventilator, suitable for natural day to day ventilation and
smoke control. For installation in the vertical only. Tested to and in compliance with
EN 12101-2, and CE marked. Manufactured under the ISO 9001 quality and ISO
14001 environmental management standards.
1.02 Detailed Description
B. Non thermally broken extruded aluminium, frame width 40mm, outer frame with
frameless controllable, single glazed, overlapping glass louvers.
1.03 Compliance
A. Tested to and in compliance with EN 12101-2, and CE marked.

2.01 Manufacturers
A. mod. CLS natural louvered glazed ventilator, suitable for natural day to day ventilation
and smoke control, or approved equivalent.
2.02 Dimensions / size range
A. From 300mm to 1800mm in width, and from 250mm to 3000mm in height as one
module.
2.03 Frame
A. Non thermally broken, 47mm deep
2.04 Louvres
A. 8mm / 10mm / 12mm overall clear toughened, float or laminated glass with
overlapping blades.
B. Glass Types: Toughened, Heat toughened or laminated (from float, toughened -
laminated or toughened)

2.05 Louvre dimensions
A. Louvre height from 205mm to 395mm.
B. Blade pitch 155 to 355mm (depending on overall size of complete unit) with central pivot
point.
2.06 Colours/ finishes options
A. Polyester powder paint to a RAL colour, standard 75 mu
B. Anodised, standard 20 mu
2.07 Fixing options
A. Fixing to curtain walling using 20 to 30 mm non thermally broken glazing frame adaptor
B. Fixing to structural opening using either through frame or strap fixings.
2.08 Controls options
A. Lever
B. Crank handle
C. 240 volt AC motor
D. 24 volt DC motor
E. Pneumatic cylinder
F. Smoke ventilator, activation is either by local thermal fuse which opens the unit at a pre-
selected temperature, or by responding to an external release signal.
2.09 Frame mounted motor
A. Hidden behind side frame profile positioned at:
Top
Bottom
on either side frame and with a typical operation time of 32 seconds.
Optional device to reduce the speed and force of closing louvers, to reduce the risk of
finger squeezing (electric versions only).
2.10 Performance
A. The following performance attributes follow tests to EN 12101-2:2003 (standard for
smoke and heat exhaust ventilators) and EN 14351-1:2006 (standard for windows and
doors). The exact performance attribute will depend on the chosen size, controls, and
louver type.
Aerodynamic coefficient: Up to 0.65
Reliability: RE 1000
Wind load: Varies with size and options, up to WL 2000
Snow load: SL 0
Resistance to heat: B 300
Low temperature class: T(00) to T(-15)
Materials resistance to fire: E (to EN 13501-1)
U value: Max 5.8 W/m²K
Air permeability: Class 1 to EN 12207 - 10.4m³/hr/m² or 1.6m³/hr/m at 50Pa
Class 2A to EN 12208 –
Water tightness:
Watertight at static pressure of up to and including 100Pa
Sound insulation: 27 dB R’w
Cv value: Up to 0.65
Smoke Vent Schedule for Platform Level over Platform Screen Doors:
SMOKE VENT SCHEDULE

TECHNICAL DATA
Non-thermally broken extruded
aluminium outer frames. Frameless
DESCRIPTION: single glazed overlaping louvres with
either 10mm thick float, toughened
or laminated glass
NUMBER OF BLADE PITCH: 2

MAX. LOUVRE OPENING ANGLE: 90º
DEPTH OF FRAME (mm): 47
FACE FRAME WIDTH (mm): 40
Cv (Vent discharge coefficient): 0.64
POWER (W): 12.5
VOLTAGE (V): 240

Longitudinal Front View of one PSD:

Note:
The PSD drawing, is shown as only for information purpose, this element is out of scope to Smoke
Management services.
Smoke Vents Types according to last PSD drawings shown:
SMOKE VENT
Width Height
TYPE Qty. Cv
(mm) (mm)
I 1100 600 84 0,64
II 1390 600 4 0,64
III 1323 600 24 0,64
IV 1062 600 48 0,64
END OF SECTION

7.9 08 5001 Automatic Smoke Curtain:

1.01 Description
A. The work under this section includes all labour, material, equipment and related
services necessary to install a smoke curtain barrier system and all related
accessories.
B. The Contractor shall also coordinate installation and penetration layout with other
trades to achieve the smoke-stop condition.
1.02 Reference Standards
A. BS 7346: Part 3: 1998 Components for smoke and heat control systems.
B. BS 476: Fire tests on building materials and structures.
C. Part 6 : 1989 Method of test for fire propagation for products.
D. Part 7: 1987 Surface spread of flame tests for materials pr EN 12101-1 (2003) Smoke
and heat control systems, Part 1: Specifications for smoke barriers.
1.03 Performance Requirements:
A. Fire:
The works shall achieve the fire ratings - including all visible and concealed support
framing – in accordance with the relevant NFPA or the Local Code.
Refer also to the Fire Strategy Report -if applies-
All elements of the works shall be either non-combustible or not easily ignitable with low
flame spread characteristics, and shall not produce excessive quantities of smoke or
toxic gases.
The Contractor shall consult these provisions in detail prior to proceeding with work.
Complete product tested to pr EN 12101-1 (2003) and BS 7346 Part 3.
B. Architectural:
An enamelled galvanized steel enclosure (housing) hanged from any horizontal
structural element (concrete slabs, structural steel profiles grid, etc) for the fabric
roller.
Fire resistant closes above head height (sometimes to the finished floor level) to create
a smoke-free layer.
1.04 Tender Submittals:
A. Submit a design response with the Tender proposal, to include all profiles of typical
conditions, with dimensions.
B. The Tender design response shall include:
Samples where specified.
List of Tests included.
List of proposed Working Drawings.
Summary of deviations from the Architectural Specification.
Outline technical specifications reflecting the proposed materials/systems.
A list of proposed suppliers and sub-contractors intended to be used.
1.05 Samples and Prototypes:
A. A prototype shall be provided as follows: 25m² build-up comprising: curtain, rollers
and its housing including build-up around typical opening/finishings and
surrounding interfaces.

2.01 SMOKE CURTAIN
The automatic smoke curtain is provided with a gravity system to work. Also has a limited
system of current to determine the upper position of the curtain.
The automatic descent of the curtain is guaranteed by an electromagnetic system that is
controlled by the motor.
2.02 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Smoke curtain Type 1:
The automatic smoke curtain delimit the zone of smoke and gases caused in a fire.
Material Non-flammable glass fibre cloth with aluminum filaments and crystal fibre
Thickness 0.54 mm
Medium weight 500 gr/m2 1000ºC during 60 min.
Medium weight 660 gr/m2 1000ºC during 120 min.
Motor 24 V, electronic limiter of current and circuit of control
Control board 240 V Ac 50 Hz, fire alarm signal, emergency batteries.
The equipment is for reference and any approved equal equipment is considered sufficient.
B. Smoke curtain Type 2:
The automatic smoke curtain delimit the zone of smoke and gases caused in a fire.
Material Non-flammable glass fibre cloth and extruded aluminum bottom bar
Thickness 0.4 mm
Motor 24 V, electronic limiter of current and circuit of control
Control board 240 V Ac 50 Hz, fire alarm signal, emergency batteries.
The equipment is for reference and any approved equal equipment is considered sufficient.
2.03 SECONDARY BOARD FOR AUTOMATIC CURTAINS
A. Supply: 240 V Ac 50 Hz
B. Contains fire alarm signal
C. The descent is controlled by the gravity effect, includes emergency rechargeable
batteries.

2.04 TECHNICAL DIMENSIONS:
SMOKE CURTAIN SCHEDULE
TECHNICAL DATA
Length Height
Reference Brand / Model Location
(mm) (mm)
SC-PL-01-A PL-PLT-01 1125 3895

SC-PL-01-B PL-PLT-01 4500 3895
SC-PL-02-A PL-PLT-01 1125 3895
SC-PL-02-B PL-PLT-01 4500 3895
SC-UL-01-A CL-CLH 5120 4710
SC-UL-01-B CL-CLH 18020 2417
SC-UL-02-A CL-CLH 5120 4710
SC-UL-02-B CL-CLH 18020 2417
SC-UL-03-A CL-CLH 5120 4710
SC-UL-03-B CL-CLH 21650 2417
SC-UL-04-A CL-CLH 5120 4710
SC-UL-04-B CL-CLH 21650 2417
SC-IL-01-A AG-SAC 8700 3760
SC-IL-01-B AG-SAC 7480 3510
SC-IL-01-C AG-SAC 8700 3760

3.01 Installation
A. Unless specified otherwise, the works shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written recommendations and all relevant British Standards or any
other renowned international/local code.
B. Provide all equipment recommended by the manufacturer for proper installation of the
materials specified. The installation shall be carried out by fully trained, competent and
certified tradesmen.
END OF SECTION

8 Ventilation and Air Conditioning:
8.1 23 0513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC equipment:

A. Single phase electric motors.
B. Three phase electric motors.
B. Enclosed Controllers.
A. NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating systems.
B. Handbooks and Standards of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
C. ASHRAE standard 90.1 – 2013.
D. AHRI standards (Air conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute).
E. Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS2014).
F. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 13 - Mechanical,
Electrical, Plumbing (MEP) Specifications.
G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2014.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
B. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for
three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections,
lubrication, and wiring instructions.
D. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes,
and lubrication instructions.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric motors for
Commercial use, and their accessories, with minimum three years documented product
development, testing, and manufacturing experience.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
high efficiency motors.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and
suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from
equipment and store separately.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower.

2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 2717 for required electrical characteristics.
B. Nominal Efficiency:
1. Open Motor with Two Poles: 82.5.
2. Open Motor with Four Poles: 82.5.
3. Open Motor with Six Poles: 50.0.
4. Enclosed Motor with Two Poles: 75.5.
5. Enclosed Motor with Four Poles: 82.5.
6. Enclosed Motor with Six Poles: 50.0.
C. Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 53 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation
class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.
D. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full
load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number,
service factor, power factor, efficiency.
E. Wiring Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and
materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box, threaded for conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide
threaded conduit connection in end frame.
2.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment
manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans and centrifugal pumps: Split phase type.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor
type.
D. Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor start
type.
E.Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.
F. Motors located in exterior locations, air cooled condensers, direct drive axial fans, and
dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.
G. Motors located outdoors: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-sealed type.
2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A.Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B.Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA
Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E.Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service
Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A.Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B.Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature
rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings,
automatic reset overload protector.
2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A.Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B.Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E.Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run
motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at
operating speeds.
F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA
Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service
Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.
2.06 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A.Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B.Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B
characteristics.
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design
B motors.
E.Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical
defects in compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end
brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors
embedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for
wiring into motor starter; refer to Section 26 2913.
I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with
plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum life of 20,000 hours. Calculate
bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA
standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
K.Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked rotor starting
current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing
approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque.
L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure

with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded
with waterproof non-washing grease.
M. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in
accordance with IEEE 112.
N. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in
accordance with IEEE 112.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
END OF SECTION

8.2 3 0516 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping:

A. Flexible pipe connectors.
B. Expansion joints and compensators.
C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.
A. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping.
B. Section 23 2300 - Refrigerant Piping.
C. AHRI standards (Air conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute).
D. Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS2014).
E. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 13 - Mechanical,
F. BS EN 10296-2:2005 Welded circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering
purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Stainless steel
G. BS EN 10297-2:2005 Seamless circular steel tubes for mechanical and general engineering
purposes. Technical delivery conditions. Stainless steel
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,
face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per meter
(foot) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure,
and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and
maximum expansion compensation.
B. Samples: Submit two low pressure compensators 20 mm (3/4 inch) in size.
C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instructions, special
procedures, and external controls.
E. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
F. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connectors,
expansion joints, anchors, and guides.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Packing for Packed Expansion Joints: One set for each joint.
A. Conform to UL requirements.

2.01 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING
A. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.
C. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 232 degrees C (125 psi and 450 degrees F).
D. Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Maximum offset: 20 mm (3/4 inch) on each side of installed center line.
2.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING
A. Inner Hose: Bronze.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
C. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 232 degrees C (125 psi and 450 degrees F).
D. Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
F. Maximum offset: 20 mm (3/4 inch) on each side of installed center line.
G. Application: Copper piping.
2.03 EXPANSION JOINTS - STAINLESS STEEL BELLOWS TYPE
A. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 204 degrees C (125 psi and 400 degrees F).
B. Maximum Compression: 45 mm (1-3/4 inches).
C. Maximum Extension: 6 mm (1/4 inch).
D. Joint: Flanged.
F. Application: Steel piping 75 mm (3 inches) and under.
2.04 EXPANSION JOINTS - EXTERNAL RING CONTROLLED STAINLESS STEEL
BELLOWS TYPE
A. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 204 degrees C (125 psi and 400 degrees F).
B. Maximum Compression: 24 mm (15/16 inch).
C. Maximum Extension: 8 mm (5/16 inch).
D. Maximum Offset: 3 mm (1/8 inch).
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Accessories: Internal flow liner.
H. Application: Steel piping over 50 mm (2 inches).
2.05 EXPANSION JOINTS - SINGLE SPHERE, FLEXIBLE COMPENSATOR
A. Body: Neoprene and nylon.
B. Pressure Rating, Sizes 20 mm to 50 mm (3/4 Inch to 2 Inch): 1040 kPa and 99
degrees C (150 psi and 210 degrees F).
C. Pressure Rating, Sizes 32 mm to 300 mm (1-1/2 Inch to 12 Inch): 1040 kPa and 121
D. Pressure Rating, Sizes 350 mm to 600 mm (14 Inch to 24 Inch): 725 kPa and 121
E. Maximum Compression: 13 mm (1/2 inch).
F. Maximum Elongation: 10 mm (3/8 inch).
G. Maximum Offset: 10 mm (3/8 inch).
H. Maximum Angular Movement: 15 degrees.
I. Joint: Tapped steel flanges.
J.Size: Use pipe sized units.
K. Accessories: Control rods.
L. Application: Steel piping 50 mm (2 inches) and over.
2.06 EXPANSION JOINTS - TWO-PLY BRONZE BELLOWS TYPE
A. Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides.
B. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 204 degrees C (125 psi and 400 degrees F).
C. Maximum Compression: 45 mm (1-3/4 inches).
D. Maximum Extension: 6 mm (1/4 inch).
E. Joint: Soldered.
G. Application: Copper piping.
2.07 EXPANSION JOINTS - LOW PRESSURE COMPENSATOR WITH TWO-PLY BRONZE
BELLOWS
A. Working Pressure: 510 kPa (75 psi).
B. Maximum Temperatures: 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).
C. Maximum Compression: 12.7 mm (1/2 inch).
D. Maximum Extension: 4.0 mm (5/32 inch).
E. Joint: Soldered.
G. Application: Copper or steel piping 75 mm (3 inches) and under.
2.08 EXPANSION JOINTS - STEEL WITH PACKED SLIDING SLEEVE
A. Working Pressure and Temperature: Class 150.
B. Joint: Flanged.
C. Size: Use pipe sized units.
D. Application: Steel piping 50 mm (2 inches) and over.
2.09 EXPANSION JOINTS - COPPER WITH PACKED SLIDING SLEEVE
A. Working Pressure: 862 kPa (125 psi).
B. Maximum Temperature: 121 degrees C (250 degrees F).
C. Joint: Flanged.
D. Size: Use pipe sized units.
E. Application: Copper or steel piping 50 mm (2 inches) and over.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Stainless Steel Pipe: BS EN 10296-2 / 10297-2.
B. Pipe Alignment Guides:
1. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pipe,
frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 25 mm (1 inch) thick
insulation, minimum 75 mm (3 inches) travel.
C. Swivel Joints:
1. Fabricated steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber
(Buna-N) o-ring seals.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment.
Provide line size flexible connectors.
C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately
adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane
unless indicated otherwise.
D. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so movement
is directed along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on
cast connections or apparatus.
E. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of
piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where
required.
F. Substitute grooved piping for vibration isolated equipment instead of flexible
connectors. Grooved piping need not be anchored.
END OF SECTION

8.3 23 0519 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping:

A. Positive displacement meters.
B. Flow meters.
C. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
D. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
E. Static pressure gages.
A. Hydronic Piping.
B. Hydronic Specialties.
C. ASHRAE standards 62 - 2013, 55 - 2013, 90.1 – 2013.
G. ASME B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of
H. ASME MFC-3M - Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi;
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007.
I. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers; 2013.
J. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers;
2007.
K. AWWA C700 - Cold Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case; American
Water Works Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C700).
L. AWWA C701 - Cold Water Meters -- Turbine Type, for Customer Service; American
Water Works Association; 2012.
M. AWWA C702 - Cold Water Meters -- Compound Type; American Water Works
Association; 2010.
N. AWWA C706 - Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold Water Meters;
American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C706).
O. AWWA M6 - Water Meters -- Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance;
American Water Works Association; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range and location
for manufactured components.
B. Samples: Submit two of each type of instrument specified.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Gage Oil for Inclined Manometers: One bottle.
2. Extra Pressure Gages: One of each type and size.
A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required
rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.

2.01 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS (LIQUID)
A. AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze case and
cast iron frost-proof, breakaway bottom cap, hermetically sealed register, remote reading to
AWWA C706.
B. Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register.
1. Service: Cold water, 122 degrees F (50 degrees C).
2. Service: Hot water, 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).
3. Accuracy: 1-1/2 percent.
4. Maximum Counter Reading: 10 million gallons (liters).
5. Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
2.02 HEAT CONSUMPTION METERS
A. Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register, platinum temperature
sensors.
1. Maximum Service Temperature: 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).
2. Accuracy: 1-1/2 percent.
3. Maximum Counter Reading: 1 million btuh (kJ).
4. Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Power: Alkaline Battery).
2.03 LIQUID FLOW METERS
A. ASME MFC-3M Calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with valved taps, chart for
conversion of differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case.
B. Annular element flow stations with meter set.
1. Measuring Station: Type 316 stainless steel pitot type flow element inserted through
welded threaded couplet, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections, and
permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for design flow rate, metered fluid,
line size, station or location number.
a. Pressure rating: 275 psi (1896 kPa).
b. Maximum temperature: 400 degrees F (204 degrees C).
c. Accuracy: Plus 0.55 percent to minus 2.30 percent.
2. Portable Meter Set: Dry single diaphragm type pressure gage with 6 inch (150 mm) dial
pointer, stainless steel wetted metal parts, variable pulsation damper, equalizing valve, two
bleed valves, and master chart for direct conversion of meter readings to flow rate, mounted in
rust-proof carrying case with two ten foot (3 m) long rubber test hoses with brass valves or
quick connections for measuring stations.
2.04 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon
tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on
white background.
1. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
2. Size: 4-1/2 inch (115 mm) diameter.
3. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
4. Scale: Psi and KPa.
2.05 PRESSURE GAGE TAPPINGS
A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
B. Needle Valve: Brass, 1/4 inch (6 mm) NPT for minimum 150 psi (1034 kPa).
C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch (6 mm) connections.
D. Syphon: Steel, 1/4 inch (6 mm) angle or straight pattern.
2.06 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM
E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish.
1. Size: 9 inch (225 mm) scale.
2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.
B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass;
ASTM E1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable
joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in
vertical plane.
1. Size: 9 inch (225 mm) scale.
2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. Stem: 3/4 inch (20 mm) NPT brass.
4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
5. Calibration: Degrees F.
2.07 THERMOMETERS
A. To be rigid mercury bulb 150 mm. dia. dial type, range 0-60° C with two degrees per
division. They shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings and at the following
locations:
1. Wells, only, shall be provided to cooling coils when shown on the Drawings where
required for test purposes.
B. Thermometers shall be constructed of a steel casing, white finish aluminium dial and
chromed facing trim, with a 100 mm. bulb.
C. Brass closed end thermometer wells shall be welded where shown or needed, and one
shall be supplied complete with each thermometer listed in the Bills of Quantities.
2.08 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as
required, and with cap and chain.
B. Flange: 3 inch (75 mm) outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet
metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.09 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8
inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with neoprene core for
temperatures up to 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).
B. Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8
inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Nordel core for
temperatures up to 350 degrees F (176 degrees C).
C. Test Plug: 1/4 inch (6 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8
inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures
up to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C).
D. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 2-1/2 inch (60 mm)
diameter pressure gages, one gage adapters with 1/8 inch (3 mm) probes, two 1 inch (25 mm)
dial thermometers.
2.10 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES
A. 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on
white background, front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
B. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front recalibration
adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.
C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter tubing.
2.11 ENERGY METER
A. The energy meter shall consist of a flow meter, supply temperature sensor, return
temperature sensor, and energy integrator/calculator. Based on these input values, energy is
calculated.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA
M6. Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage.
Provide siphon on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance
from insulation.
E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes
smaller than 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow
clearance from insulation.
F. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
G. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or
sensor sockets. Refer to Section 23 0943. Where thermometers are provided on local panels,
duct or pipe mounted thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted
thermometers are not required.
H. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet (3 m) downstream of mixing
dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.
I. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
J. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest
appropriate scale.
K. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal
operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
L. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate
to zero.
M. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.
END OF SECTION

8.4 23 0548 Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment:

A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
D. HVAC Duct construction standard 2005 (SMACNA)
E. AHRI standards (Air conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute).
F. Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS2014).
G. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 13 - Mechanical,
H. ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2015.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2
PRODUCTS.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation
bases, member sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment.
2. Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, concrete
weights, equipment static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of
isolator location and orientation with static and dynamic load on each isolator.
3. Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the
applicable building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
4. Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any
calculations.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and
setting dimensions.
A. Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in
which the Project is located.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified
in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years of experience.

A. General:
1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection
and stability requirements under all operating loads.
2. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
3. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating
clearance of 50 mm (2 inches) between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted
otherwise.
2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES
A. Structural Bases:
1. Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for side mounting
of the isolators.
2. Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped.
3. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine, and to
transmit design loads to isolators and snubbers.
B. Concrete Inertia Bases:
1. Construction: Engineered, steel forms, with integrated isolator brackets and anchor bolts,
welded or tied reinforcing bars running both ways in a single layer.
2. Size: 152 mm (6 inches) minimum depth and sized to accommodate elbow supports.
3. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
4. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base including
template and fastening devices for equipment.
5. Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 20 mPa (3000 psi) concrete.
2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Non-Seismic Type:
1. All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads:
a. Configuration: Flat or molded.
b. Thickness: 6 mm (0.25 inch) minimum.
c. Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation
plate between each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface.
2. Elastomeric Mounts:
a. Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds.
b. Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate with
anchor hole bolted to supporting structure.
3. Steel Springs:
a. Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing.

b. Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame.
4. Restrained Steel Springs:
a. Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and operating height
from changing during temporary weight reduction.
b. Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipment and
isolator base plate to supporting structure.
5. Elastomeric Hangers:
a. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to prevent rod
contact with housing and short-circuiting of isolating function.
b. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to housing.
6. Spring Hanger:
a. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric
element preventing metal to metal contact.
b. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
7. Combination Elastomeric-Spring Hanger:
a. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring with elastomeric element in
series isolating upper connection of hanger box to building structure.
b. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.

3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
B. Bases:
1. Set steel bases for 25 mm (one inch) clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 50 mm (2 inches) clearance between housekeeping pad
and base.
3. Adjust equipment level.
C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating
conditions.
D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially
different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height.
When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 1.5 kPa (6.0 inches WC)
static pressure, and on hanger supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
F. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or
resilient hangers for scheduled distance.
1. Up to 100 mm (4 Inches) Pipe Size: First three points of support.
2. 125 to 200 mm (5 to 8 Inches) Pipe Size: First four points of support.
3. 250 mm (10 inches) Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support.
4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 25 mm (1.0 inch) static
deflection or static deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25
mm (1.0 inch) static deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections.
END OF SECTION

8.5 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment:

A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.
A. Painting and Coating: Identification painting.
C. HVAC Duct construction standard 2005 (SMACNA)
G. BS 1710:2014 Specification for identification of pipelines and services
H. DW144 Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.
C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
D. Control Panels: Nameplates.
E. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
F. Ductwork: Nameplates.
G. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
H. Instrumentation: Tags.
I. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
J. Piping: Tags.
K. Pumps: Nameplates.
L. Relays: Tags.
M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
N. Tanks: Nameplates.
O. Thermostats: Nameplates.
P. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
Q. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Letter Color: White.
B. Letter Height: 6 mm (1/4 inch).
C. Background Color: Black.
2.03 TAGS
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) diameter
with smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.
2.04 STENCILS
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 20-30 mm (3/4 to 1-1/4 inch) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm (8 inch)
long color field, 15 mm (1/2 inch) high letters.
2. 40-50 mm (1-1/2 to 2 inch) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm (8 inch) long
color field, 20 mm (3/4 inch) high letters.
3. 65-150 mm (2-1/2 to 6 inch) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 300 mm (12 inch)
long color field, 30 mm (1-1/4 inch) high letters.
4. 200-250 mm (8 to 10 inch) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600 mm (24 inch)
long color field, 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) high letters.
5. Over 250 mm (10 inch) Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800 mm (32 inch) long
color field, 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) high letters.
6. Ductwork and Equipment: 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) high letters.
B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000, semi-gloss enamel.
2.05 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Conform to BS1710.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon
tape, minimum 150 mm (6 inches) wide by 0.10 mm (4 mil) thick, manufactured for direct
burial service.
E. Color code as follows:
1. Heating, Cooling, and Boiler Feedwater: Green with white letters.
2. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.
3. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
2.06 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: Steel with 20 mm (3/4 inch) diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.

3.01 PREPARATION
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 for stencil painting.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9000.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 to 200 mm (6 to 8 inches) below finished
G. Use tags on piping 20 mm (3/4 inch) diameter and smaller.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 6 m (20 feet) on straight runs including risers and
drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,
and at each obstruction.
H. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification
number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in
corner of panel closest to equipment.
3.03 SCHEDULE
A. Ductwork
1. The service of the duct and the direction of flow shall be identified on all ductwork. The
letters shall be at least 5 cm. High and the flow arrows shall be at least 15 cm. Long. The
letters and flow arrows shall be made by pre-cut stencils and black oil base paint with an
aerosol spray; concealed ducts need not be identified.
B. Piping
1. All piping shall be identified as to the service of the pipe and the normal direction of flow.
The letter shall be 2 cm. High on small pipe sizes and 5 cm. High on large pipe sizes and the
flow arrows shall be made by pre-cut stencils and black oil base paint with an aerosol spray;
concealed pipes need not be identified.
C. Control
1. Each valve, including control valves, shall be tagged with a brass disc 40 mm. in
diameter. The disc shall contain a number; a valve list shall be provided under glass in the
main Mechanical Room showing the location of the valve, the service of the valve and any
pertinent remarks regarding the operation of the valve. These discs shall be securely fastened
to the valves with brass "S" hooks or chains.
D. Equipment
1. All equipment, except in finished rooms, shall be identified by stencilling the title of the
equipment as taken from the plans in a position that is clearly visible from the floor. The titles
shall be short and concise; abbreviations may be used as long as the meaning is clear. In
finished rooms, equipment shall be identified by engraved nameplates as specified in the next
subparagraph.
E. Control Panel
1. All panel-mounted controls and instruments shall be identified by engraved nameplates
mounted under the control or instrument. Nameplates shall be made of an approved plastic,
which shall be black and show white letters when engraved; letters shall be 1 cm. High.
F. Time of Application
1. No identification shall be carried out until all painting required under the Architectural
section of these Specifications has been carried out.
END OF SECTION

8.6 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC:

A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic and refrigerating systems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
F. Commissioning activities.
A. Commissioning of HVAC.
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. Allowance includes testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems.
H. ASHRAE Std 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society
of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2008.
I. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB
supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.
B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard
to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Submit to Architect.
2. Submit to the Commissioning Authority.
3. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
4. Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract documents, the
equipment and systems, and the control system with the Architect and other installers to
sufficiently understand the design intent for each system.
5. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system.
b. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements
to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be
used.
c. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be
tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
d. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most recent
calibration date.
e. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings
during the process.
f. Final test report forms to be used.
g. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including:
1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).
2) Diffuser proportioning.
3) Branch/submain proportioning.
4) Total flow calculations.
5) Rechecking.
6) Diversity issues.
h. Expected problems and solutions, etc.
i. Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sensors;
analogous explanations for the water side.
j. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:
1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of
all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations.
2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.
k. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operating at the
lowest possible pressures and methods to verify this.
l. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions.
m. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and
for what level (total building, zone, etc.).
n. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capacity.
o. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement methods.
p. Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if specified.
q. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.).
r. Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any.
s. Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified.
t. False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified.
u. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure
differentials.
v. Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if specified.
w. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by
others, contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequency).
x. Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency.
y. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.
C. Field Logs: Submit at least twice a week to Commissioning Authority.
D. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls installer all
setpoint and parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB
that affect, or could affect, the control system setup and operation.
E. Progress Reports.
F. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,
adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Submit to the Commissioning Authority within two weeks after completion of testing,
adjusting, and balancing.
2. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.
3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
4. Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with
cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and
equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of
calibration.
6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report
format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
7. Units of Measure: Report data in SI (metric) units only.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and
balancing valves and rough setting.

Not applied.

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
2. SMACNA (TAB).
3. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times.
B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and
complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project.
C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including
fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection
procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction.
D. TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this
section.
2. Having minimum of three years documented experience.
E. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the
following conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final
filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper
system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.
1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced.
B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.
C. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply
systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of
design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING
A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:
1. Running log of events and issues.
2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.
3. Contract interpretation requests.
4. Lists of completed tests.
B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements
were taken and cross reference the location in the final report.
E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that
such disruption has been rectified.
F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points
or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
H. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit
report.
3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return,
and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional
area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable
drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do
not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal
devices such as dampers and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet
or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil
pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of
filters.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for
design conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to
check leakage.
K. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to
provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 12.5 Pa (0.05 inches)
positive static pressure near the building entries.
3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to
determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base
flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer
elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature
differential in conjunction with air balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves,
and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance
point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system
parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.08 SCOPE
A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:
1. Fire Pumps
2. Electric Water Coolers
3. Plumbing Pumps
4. HVAC Pumps
5. Air Cooled Water Chillers
6. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
7. Unit Air Conditioners
8. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units
9. Air Coils
10. Terminal Heat Transfer Units
11. Air Handling Units
12. Fans
13. Air Filters
14. Air Terminal Units
15. Air Inlets and Outlets
3.9 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED
A. Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer
2. Model/Frame
3. HP/BHP
4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
5. RPM
6. Service factor
7. Starter size, rating, heater elements
8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
B. V-Belt Drives:
1. Identification/location
2. Required driven RPM
3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
4. Belt, size and quantity
5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
C. Pumps:
1. Identification/number
2. Manufacturer
3. Size/model
4. Impeller
5. Service
6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
8. Discharge pressure
9. Suction pressure
10. Total operating head pressure
11. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
12. Shut off, total head pressure
D. Air Cooled Condensers:
2. Location
3. Manufacturer
4. Model number
5. Serial number
6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
8. Number of compressors
E. Chillers:
2. Manufacturer
3. Capacity
4. Model number
5. Serial number
6. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
7. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
8. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
9. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
10. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
11. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
12. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual
F. Heat Exchangers:
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Model number
6. Serial number
7. Steam pressure, design and actual
8. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual
9. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual
10. Primary water flow, design and actual
11. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual
12. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
13. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
14. Secondary water flow, design and actual
15. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual
G. Cooling Coils:
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
10. Water flow, design and actual
11. Water pressure drop, design and actual
12. Entering water temperature, design and actual
13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
15. Air pressure drop, design and actual
H. Air Moving Equipment:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
6. Air flow, specified and actual
7. Return air flow, specified and actual
8. Outside air flow, specified and actual
9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
10. Inlet pressure
13. Number of Belts/Make/Size
14. Fan RPM
I. Return Air/Outside Air:
2. Design air flow
3. Actual air flow
4. Design return air flow
5. Actual return air flow
6. Design outside air flow
7. Actual outside air flow
8. Return air temperature
9. Outside air temperature
10. Required mixed air temperature
11. Actual mixed air temperature
12. Design outside/return air ratio
13. Actual outside/return air ratio
J. Exhaust Fans:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Air flow, specified and actual
6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7. Inlet pressure
10. Number of Belts/Make/Size
11. Fan RPM
K. Duct Traverses:
1. System zone/branch
2. Duct size
3. Area
4. Design velocity
5. Design air flow
6. Test velocity
7. Test air flow
8. Duct static pressure
9. Air temperature
10. Air correction factor
L. Duct Leak Tests:
1. Description of ductwork under test
2. Duct design operating pressure
3. Duct design test static pressure
4. Duct capacity, air flow
5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
6. Test apparatus
a. Blower
b. Orifice, tube size
c. Orifice size
d. Calibrated
7. Test static pressure
8. Test orifice differential pressure
9. Leakage
M. Air Monitoring Stations:
2. System
3. Size
4. Area
5. Design velocity
6. Design air flow
7. Test velocity
8. Test air flow
N. Flow Measuring Stations:
2. Location
3. Size
4. Manufacturer
5. Model number
6. Serial number
7. Design Flow rate
8. Design pressure drop
9. Actual/final pressure drop
10. Actual/final flow rate
11. Station calibrated setting
O. Terminal Unit Data:
1. Manufacturer
2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
4. Location
5. Model number
6. Size
7. Minimum static pressure
8. Minimum design air flow
9. Maximum design air flow
10. Maximum actual air flow
11. Inlet static pressure
P. Air Distribution Tests:
1. Air terminal number
2. Room number/location
3. Terminal type
4. Terminal size
5. Area factor
6. Design velocity
7. Design air flow
8. Test (final) velocity
9. Test (final) air flow
10. Percent of design air flow
Q. Sound Level Reports:
1. Location
2. Octave bands - equipment off
3. Octave bands - equipment on
R. Vibration Tests:
1. Location of points:
a. Fan bearing, drive end
b. Fan bearing, opposite end
c. Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
d. Motor bearing, drive end
e. Motor bearing, opposite end
f. Casing (bottom or top)
g. Casing (side)
h. Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
i. Duct after flexible connection (suction)
2. Test readings:
a. Horizontal, velocity and displacement
b. Vertical, velocity and displacement
c. Axial, velocity and displacement
3. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration
4. Unusual conditions at time of test
5. Vibration source (if non-complying)
END OF SECTION

8.7 23 0713 Duct Insulation:

A. Duct insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
C. Insulation jackets.
A. Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jackets.
B. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
C. HVAC Ducts and Casings.
D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2013a.
I. DW144 Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
J. BS 476-4:1970 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Non-combustibility test for
materials
K. BS 476-7:1997 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insulation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure
acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified
in this section, with minimum 10 years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.

maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.02 POLYISOCYANURATE (PHENOLIC FOAM) INSULATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated insulate supply and return ductwork with 25 mm of 35 kg/m3
nonhygnoscopic foil faced polyisocyanurate (phenolic foam) slabs.
B. Flexible connections shall be insulated with 25 mm of 24 kg/m3 reinforced flame
resistant flexible fibreglass insulation.
C. The insulation shall be fixed by means of a non flamable adhesive recommended by the
insulation manufacturer.
D. Finish insulation on duct work by applying a 200 g/m2 canvas cloth cover adhered
between two coats of approved fungicidal protective fire resistant lagging adhesive.
2.02 ELASTOMERIC FOAM
A. Insulation: flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F (0.052 at 24 degrees C).
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch (0.029 ng/Pa s m).
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure
sensitive rubber based adhesive.
D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm).
2.03 JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket.
2. Finish: Smooth.
protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick aluminum.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick stainless steel.
2.04 DUCT LINER
A. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber; flexible blanket, rigid board, and
preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate
polymer, acrylic polymer, or black composite.
1. Fungi Resistance.
2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F (0.045 at 24 degrees
C).
3. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F (121 degrees C).
4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm (25.4 m/s), minimum.
5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 1/2 inch (13 mm) Thickness: 0.30.
b. 1 inch (25 mm) Thickness: 0.45.
c. 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) Thickness: 0.60.
d. 2 inch (50 mm) Thickness: 0.70.
B. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type.
C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.02 INSTALLATION
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections,
and expansion joints.
D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
E. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (below 10 feet (3
meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
F. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with outdoor
jacket finished as specified.
G. External Duct Insulation Application:
1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier
adhesive or tape to match jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where
necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation
without disturbing wrapping.
H. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.
2. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
3. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct
size to allow for insulation thickness.
END OF SECTION

8.8 23 0716 HVAC Equipment Insulation:

A. Equipment insulation.
B. Covering.
C. Breeching insulation.
A. Painting and Coating: Painting insulation covering.
B. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D. Hydronic Specialties.
E. Refrigerant Piping.
H. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2013a.
I. BS 476-4:1970 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Non-combustibility test for
materials
J. BS 476-7:1997 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
1.04 SUBMITTALS
thickness for equipment scheduled.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
in this section with minimum 10 years of experience.
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.

B. Supply ducts running in vertical shafts and supply and return ducts in air handling rooms
or outdoors shall be insulated as specified herein.
C. Duct insulation may consist of a fine lightweight fiberglass blanket with a factory applied
vapour-barrier on the outside.
D. Supply and return ducts shall have a 25 mm thick insulation layer, having a factory
applied vapour-barrier composed of aluminium foil, glass reinforcing and kraft paper. Field
applied vapour-barriers may be accepted if approved by the Engineer. The vapour-barrier
facing shall be furnished with a 50 mm tab along one edge to overlap the adjacent section of
insulation and provide a continuous vapour seal.
E. Supply and return duct insulation for outdoor use, air handling rooms or any other
described application shall have the same insulation and vapour-barrier characteristics as
those described in Item C above but with an insulation thickness of 50 mm; the weather-
barrier shall consist of an aluminium jacket with a minimum thickness of 0.8 mm. to protect the
insulation from damage and erosion.
2.04 CELLULAR GLASS
A. Insulation.
1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity; 'K' ('Ksi') Value: Grade 6, 0.33 at 100 degrees F (0.047
at 38 degrees C).
2. Service Temperature: Up to 800 degrees F (427 degrees C).
3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch (0.007 ng/Pa s m).
4. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum.
5. Density: Minimum 6.12 lb/cu ft (98 kg/cu m), Grade 6.
2.05 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE
A. Insulation: rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: 0.40 at 300 degrees F (0.057 at 148 degrees C).
3. Density: 15 lb/cu ft (249 kg/cu m).
B. Tie Wire: 0.048 inches (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch
(300 mm) centers.
C. Insulating Cement.
2.06 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation, in sheet form.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F (-40 degrees C).
2. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.07 JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: formed aluminum sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation.
Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system.
G. For hot equipment containing fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not
insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges
and unions with removable sections and jackets.
I. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour
as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range.
J. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
K. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canvas
jacket sized for finish painting.
L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced
vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of
horizontal equipment.
M. Nameplates and Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.
N. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so
it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
END OF SECTION

8.9 23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation:

A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
A. Painting and Coating: Painting insulation jacket.
B. Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.
D. Refrigerant Piping: Placement of inserts.
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2013a.
H. BS 476-4:1970 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Non-combustibility test for
materials
I. BS 476-7:1997 Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
1.04 SUBMITTALS
thickness for each service, and locations.
in this section with minimum 10 years of experience.
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and
thickness.
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

2.02 POLYISOCYANURATE CELLULAR PLASTIC
A. Insulation Material: rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular plastic.
1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: 0.18 at 75 degrees F (0.026 at 24 degrees C), when tested in
accordance with ASTM C518.
4. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum.
5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 4.0 perm in (5.8 ng/(Pa s m)).
2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation; use molded tubular
material wherever possible.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
2.04 JACKETS
A. Aluminum Jacket: formed aluminum sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
protective liner.
2.05 UNDERGROUND PREINSULATED PIPE
A. All underground chilled water pipework shall be pre-insulated.
B. The system shall be non-corrosive, non-metalic, structurally strong, completely water
proof and entirely resistant to attack by salts, water and any ground chemical.
C. The system manufacturer shall have fabricated systems of the composition defined here
for at least two years.
D. All straight sections fittings, anchors end seals and other accessories shall be factory
prefabricated to the project dimensions. The design shall be such to minimise the number of
field welds.
E. The system design shall be in conformance with the latest edition of ANSI 331.1.
F. Pipe movement due to thermal expansion shall be accommodated with expansion loops
or elbows.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system
including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and
expansion joints.
E. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate
flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges and
unions at equipment.
G. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and contour
as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range.
H. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.
Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 8400.
I. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet (3
meters) above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
J. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves
with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh
reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom
side of horizontal piping. Provide two coats of UV resistant finish for flexible elastomeric
cellular insulation without jacketing.
K. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket
with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil (0.025 mm)
thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface
faced with a polyester film.
END OF SECTION

8.10 23 0913 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC:

A. Air supply system.
B. Thermostats.
C. Humidistats.
D. Control valves.
E. Automatic dampers.
F. Damper operators.
G. Time clocks.
H. Miscellaneous accessories.
A. Section 23 0548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 0519 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping: Thermometer sockets, gage taps.
C. Section 23 2113 - Hydronic Piping: Installation of control valves, flow switches,
temperature sensor sockets, gage taps.
D. Section 23 3300 - Air Duct Accessories: Installation of automatic dampers.
E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Elevation of exposed components.
F. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work
of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
B. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system
component. Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and
software module.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diagrams,
and written detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves
indicating size, flow, and pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate
arrangement, velocities, and static pressure drops for each system.
C. Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat and cover.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including
panels, thermostats, and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components,
including panels, thermostats, and sensors.
1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods,
recommended cleaning materials, and calibration tolerances.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in
Owner’s name and registered with manufacturer.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Thermostats and Other Exposed Sensors: One of each type.
A. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the State in which the Project is
located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 10 years experience approved by manufacturer.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion.
B. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for control air compressors.

2.01 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
2.02 CONTROL PANELS
A. Unitized cabinet type for each system under automatic control with relays and controls
mounted in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push buttons and
switches flush on cabinet panel face.
B. General purpose utility enclosures with enamelled finished face panel.
C. Provide common keying for all panels.
2.03 CONTROL VALVES
A. Equipment tag: VMM.
B. Globe Pattern:
1. Up to 2 inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition
disc, screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
a. Over 2 inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends,
renewable seat and disc.
b. Hydronic Systems:
1) Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F (860 kPa at 121 degrees C).
2) Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel.
3) Size for 3 psig (20 kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
4) Two way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics. Size two way valve
operators to close valves against pump shut off head.
C. Butterfly Pattern:
1. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F (82
degrees C) wafer or lug ends, extended neck.
a. Hydronic Systems:
1) Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F (860 kPa at 121 degrees C).
2) Size for 1 psig (7 kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
D. Electronic Operators:
1. Valves shall spring return to normal position as indicated on freeze, fire, or temperature
protection.
2. Select operator for full shut off at maximum pump differential pressure.
2.04 DAMPERS
A. Rectangular multileaf dampers for volume flow and pressure control as well as for low-
leakage shut-off of ducts and openings in walls and ceiling slabs.
B. Suitable for duct pressures up to 1000 Pa.
C. Ready-to-operate unit which consists of the casing, aerofoil blades and the blade
mechanism.
D. Flanges on both sides, suitable for duct connection.
E. The blade position is indicated externally by a notch in the blade shaft extension.
F. Closed blade air leakage to EN 1751, class 4.
G. Casing air leakage to EN 1751, class C.
H. Special features
1. Aerofoil blades
2. Low-maintenance, robust construction
3. No parts with silicone
4. Closed cell side seals meet increased hygiene requirements
I. Technical data
1. Nominal sizes: 200 × 100 mm – 2000 × 1995 mm
2. Volume flow rate: 200 – 40,000 l/s or 720 – 143,640 m³/h at 10 m/s
3. Differential pressure range: 5 – 3500 Pa
4. Operating temperature 0 to 100 °C
2.05 DAMPER OPERATORS
A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20
percent greater than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum
system pressures. Provide spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation.
1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement throughout
damper range.
2. Provide one operator for maximum 36 sq ft (3.24 sq m) damper section.
B. Electric Operators:
1. Spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with auxiliary end
switch.
C. Inlet Vane Operators:
1. High pressure with pilot positioners and sufficient force to move vanes when fan is
started with vanes in closed position. Return vane operator to closed position on fan shutdown.
2.06 HUMIDISTATS
A. Room Humidistats:
1. Wall mounted, proportioning type.
2. Throttling range: Adjustable 2 percent relative humidity.
3. Operating range: 30 to 80 percent.
4. Maximum temperature: 110 degrees F (43 degrees C).
5. Cover: Set point indication.
B. Limit Duct Humidistat:
1. Insertion, two position type.
2. Throttling range: Adjustable 2 percent relative humidity.
3. Operating range: 20 to 80 percent.
4. Maximum temperature: 150 degrees F (65 degrees C).
2.07 INPUT/OUTPUT SENSORS
A. Temperature Sensors:
1. Use thermistor or RTD type temperature sensing elements with characteristics resistant
to moisture, vibration, and other conditions consistent with the application without affecting
accuracy and life expectancy.
2. Construct RTD of nickel or platinum with base resistance of 1000 ohms at 26 degrees C
(70 degrees F).
3. 100 ohm platinum RTD is acceptable if used with project DDC controllers.
4. Temperature sensing device must be compatible with project DDC controllers.
5. Performance Characteristics:
a. RTD:
1) Room Sensor Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.56 degrees C (1.0 degree F) minimum.

2) Duct Averaging Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.67 degrees C (1.2 degrees F) minimum.
3) Chilled Water Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.28 degrees C (0.5 degrees F) minimum.
4) All Other Accuracy: Plus/minus 0.42 degrees C (0.75 degrees F) minimum.
5) Range: Minus 40 degrees C (Minus 40 degrees F) through 104.4 degrees C (220
degrees F) minimum.
b. Thermistor:
1) Accuracy (All): Plus/minus 0.20 degrees C (0.36 degrees F) minimum.
2) Range: Minus 34.4 degrees C (Minus 30 degrees F) through 110 degrees C (230
degrees F) minimum.
3) Heat Dissipation Constant: 2.7 mW per degree C.
c. Temperature Transmitter:
1) Accuracy: 0.06 degrees C (0.10 degree F) minimum or plus/minus 0.20 percent of span.
2) Output: 4 - 20 mA.
d. Sensing Range:
1) Provide limited range sensors if required to sense the range expected for a respective
point.
2) Use RTD type sensors for extended ranges beyond minus 34.4 degrees (minus 30
degrees F) to 114.4 degrees C (230 degrees F).
3) Use temperature transmitters in conjunction with RTD's when RTD's are incompatible
with DDC controller direct temperature input.
e. Wire Resistance:
1) Use appropriate wire size to limit temperature offset due to wire resistance to 0.56
degrees C (1.0 degree F) or use temperature transmitter when offset is greater than 0.56
degrees C (1.0 degree F) due to wire resistance.
2) Compensate for wire resistance in software input definition when feature is available in
the DDC controller.
f. Room Sensors: Locking cover.
g. Outside Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting shielded from direct rays of the sun.
h. Room Security Sensors: Stainless steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws.
i. Room Temperature Sensors:
1) Construct for surface or wall box mounting.
2) Provide the following:
(a) Setpoint reset slide switch with an adjustable temperature range.
(b) Individual heating/cooling setpoint slide switches.
(c) Momentary override request push button for activation of after-hours operation.
(d) Analog thermometer.
j. Room Temperature Sensors with Integral Digital Display:
1) Construct for surface or wall box.

2) Provide a four button keypad with the following capabilities:
(a) Indication of space and outdoor temperatures.
(b) Setpoint adjustment to accommodate room setpoint, DDC Input/Output Points List, and
Sequence of Operation.
(c) Display and control fan operation status.
(d) Manual occupancy override and indication of occupancy status.
(e) Controller mode status.
(f) Password enabled setpoint and override modes.
k. Temperature Averaging Elements:
1) Use on duct sensors for ductwork 0.93 sq m (10 sq ft) or larger.
2) Use averaging elements where prone to stratification with sensor length 2.5 m (8 ft), or 5
m (16 ft).
3) Provide for all mixed air and heating coil discharge sensors regardless of duct size.
l. Insertion Elements:
1) Use in ducts not affected by temperature stratification or smaller than 1 sq m (11 sq
inches).
2) Provide dry type, insertion elements for liquids, installed in immersion wells, with
minimum insertion length of 60 mm (2.5 inches).
B. Humidity Sensors:
1. Elements: Accurate within 5 percent full range with linear output.
2. Room Sensors: With locking cover, span of 10 to 60 percent relative humidity.
3. Duct and Outside Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 - 100
percent relative humidity.
C. Static Pressure Sensors:
1. Unidirectional with ranges not exceeding 150 percent of maximum expected input.
2. Temperature compensate with typical thermal error or 0.06 percent of full scale in
temperature range of 5 to 40 degrees C (40 to 100 degrees F).
3. Accuracy: One percent of full scale with repeatability 0.3 percent.
4. Output: 0 - 5 vdc with power at 12 to 28 vdc.
D. Equipment Operation Sensors:
1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 1250 Pa
(0 to 5 inches wg).
2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential pressure switch piped across pump with adjustable
pressure differential range of 50 to 400 kPa (8 to 60 psi).
3. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
E. Damper Position Indication: Potentiometer mounted in enclosure with adjustable crank
arm assembly connected to damper to transmit 0 - 100 percent damper travel.
F. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:
1. General: Provide non-dispersive infrared (NDIR) CO2 sensors with integral transducers
and linear output.
a. Linear, CO2 Concentration Range Display: 0 to 2000 ppm.
b. Full Scale Accuracy: Plus/minus 100 ppm or plus/minus 5 percent of reading which ever
is higher.
c. Maximum Response Time: 1 minute.
d. Analog Output: 0-10 VDC.
e. Rated Ambient Conditions:
1) Air Temperature: Range of 0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F).
2) Relative Humidity: Range of 0 to 95 percent (non-condensing).
2. Calibration Characteristics:
a. Automatically compensating algorithm for sensor drift due to sensor degradation.
b. Maximum Drift: 2 percent.
c. User calibratable with a minimum calibration interval of 5 years.
3. Construction:
a. Sensor Chamber: Non-corrosive material for neutral effect on carbon dioxide sample.
b. Provide duct mounted sensors with duct probe designed to protect sensing element from
dust accumulation and mechanical damage.
2.08 THERMOSTATS
A. Electric Room Thermostats:
1. Type: 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature control.
2. Service: cooling only.
3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment, with thermometer.
B. Line Voltage Thermostats:
1. Integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, single or two pole as required.
2. Dead band: Maximum one degree C (2 degrees F).
3. Cover: Locking with set point adjustment, with thermometer.
4. Rating: Motor load.
C. Room Thermostat Accessories:
1. Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum.
2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
3. Thermostat Guards: Metal mounted on separate base.
4. Adjusting Key: As required for device.
5. Aspirating Boxes: Where indicated for thermostats requiring flush installation.
D. Outdoor Reset Thermostat:
1. Remote bulb or bimetal rod and tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling
range, adjustable setpoint.
2. Scale range: 2 to 35 degrees C (-10 to 70 degrees F).
E. Immersion Thermostat:
1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint
and adjustable throttling range.
F. Airstream Thermostats:
1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint
in middle of range and adjustable throttling range.
2. Averaging service remote bulb element: 2.3 m (7.5 feet).
G. Electric Low Limit Duct Thermostat:
1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual reset switch that trips if temperature
sensed across any 300 mm (12 inches) of bulb length is equal to or below setpoint,
2. Bulb length: Minimum 6 m (20 feet).
3. Provide one thermostat for every 1.86 sq m (20 sq ft) of coil surface.
H. Electric High Limit Duct Thermostat:
1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, manual reset switch that trips if temperature
sensed across any 300 mm (12 inches) of bulb length is equal to or above setpoint,
2. Bulb length: Minimum 6 m (20 feet).
3. Provide one thermostat for every 1.86 sq m (20 sq ft) of coil surface.
I. Fire Thermostats:
1. UL labeled, factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A.
2. Normally closed contacts, manual reset.
J. Heating/Cooling Valve Top Thermostats:
1. Proportional acting for proportional flow, molded rubber diaphragm, remote bulb liquid
filled element, direct and reverse acting at differential pressure to 172 kPa (25 psig), cast
housing with position indicator and adjusting knob.
2.09 TIME CLOCKS
A. Seven day programming switch timer with synchronous timing motor and seven day dial,
continuously charged Ni-cad battery driven power failure 8 hour carry over and multiple switch
trippers to control systems for minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two
normally open and two normally closed output switches.
B. Solid state programmable time control with 4 separate programs, 24 hour battery carry
over, duty cycling.
2.10 TRANSMITTERS
A. Building Static Pressure Transmitter:
1. One pipe, direct acting, double bell, scale range.0025 to 1.5 kPa (0.01 to 6.0 inch wg)
positive or negative, and sensitivity of 0.125 Pa (0.0005 inch wg). Transmit electronic signal to
receiver with matching scale range.
B. Pressure Transmitters:
1. One pipe direct acting indicating type for gas, liquid, or steam service, range suitable for
system, proportional electronic output.
C. Temperature Transmitters:
1. One pipe, directly proportional output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or
minus 1/2 percent of range for 93 degrees C (200 degree F) span and plus or minus 1 percent
for 10 degrees C (50 degree F) span, with 10 degree C (50 degrees F) temperature range,
compensated bulb, averaging capillary, or rod and tube operation on 138 kPa (20 psig) input
pressure and 20 to 100 kPa (3 to 15 psig) output.
D. Humidity Transmitters:
1. One pipe, directly proportioned output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus
or minus 1 percent for 70 percent relative humidity span, capable of withstanding 95 percent
relative humidity without loss of calibration.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of
similar components in other systems.
E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar
components.
G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems
equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation.
Locate 60 inches (1500 mm) above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats. Refer to
Section 26 2726.
C. Mount freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element holders.
D. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements
outdoors with sun shield.
E. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb elements.
F. Provide thermostats in aspirating boxes in front entrances.
G. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances.
H. Provide valves with position indicators and with pilot positioners where sequenced with
other controls.
I. Provide mixing dampers of opposed blade construction arranged to mix streams.
Provide pilot positioners on mixed air damper motors. Provide separate minimum outside air
damper section adjacent to return air dampers with separate damper motor.
J. Provide isolation (two position) dampers of parallel blade construction.
K. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas. Do not install motors in
locations at outdoor temperatures.
L. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free
standing angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same
equipment room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside
cabinet and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face.
M. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when
switch is in "hand" position.
N. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 26 2717. Electrical
material and installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.
3.03 MAINTENANCE
B. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
C. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs, and submit written
report of each service call.
END OF SECTION

8.11 23 2113 Hydronic Piping:

A. Hydronic system requirements.
B. Chilled water piping, buried.
C. Chilled water piping, above grade.
D. Equipment drains and overflows.
E. Pipe hangers and supports.
F. Unions, flanges, mechanical couplings, and dielectric connections.
G. Valves:
1. Gate valves.
2. Globe or angle valves.
3. Ball valves.
4. Plug valves.
5. Butterfly valves.
6. Check valves.
H. Flow controls.
A. Section 07 8400 (See Architecture Specs).- Firestopping.
B. Section 23 0516 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.
C. Section 23 0548 - Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
E. Section 23 0719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.
F. Section 23 2114 - Hydronic Specialties.
G. Section 23 2500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.
H. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
G. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 14 - Electrical and
Mechanical Room Requirements.
L. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
M. BS10:2009 Specification for flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and fittings
N. BS EN 10226-1:2004 Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads.
Taper external threads and parallel internal threads. Dimensions, tolerances and designation
O. BS EN 10226-2:2005 Pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on the threads.
Taper external threads and taper internal threads. Dimensions, tolerances and designation
P. BS EN 10226-3:2005 Pipes threads where pressure-tight joints are made on the threads.
Verification by means of limit gauges
Q. BS EN 10255:2004 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical
delivery conditions
R. BS EN ISO 17672:2010 Brazing. Filler metals
S. BS EN 10253-1:1999 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general use
and without specific inspection requirements
T. BS EN 10253-2:2007 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non alloy and ferritic alloy steels with
specific inspection requirements
U. BS EN 12449:2016 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for general
purposes
V. BS EN 1254-1:1998 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. Fittings with ends for
capillary soldering or capillary brazing to copper tubes
W. BS EN 1254-2:1998 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. Fittings with
compression ends for use with copper tubes
X. BS EN ISO 1452-1:2009 Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and
above-ground drainage and sewerage under pressure. Unplasticized poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC
U). General
Y. BS EN ISO 1452-2:2009 Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and
U). Pipes
Z. BS EN ISO 1452-3:2009 Plastics piping systems for water supply and for buried and
U). Fittings
AA. BS EN 10216-1:2013 Seamless steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical delivery
conditions. Non-alloy steel tubes with specified room temperature properties
BB. BS EN 10217-1:2002 Welded steel tubes for pressure purposes. Technical delivery
conditions. Non-alloy steel tubes with specified room temperature properties
CC. BS EN 1092-2:1997 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
and accessories, PN designated. Cast iron flanges
DD. BS EN 1092-1:2002 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges
EE. BS EN 12266-1:2012 Industrial valves. Testing of metallic valves. Pressure tests, test
procedures and acceptance criteria. Mandatory requirements
FF. BS EN 12266-2:2012 Industrial valves. Testing of metallic valves . Tests, test
procedures and acceptance criteria. Supplementary requirements
GG. BS EN ISO 10497:2010 Testing of valves. Fire type-testing requirements.
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of
the work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.
2. Provide manufacturers catalogue information.
3. Indicate valve data and ratings.
4. Show grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties on drawings and product
submittals, specifically identified with the manufacturer's style or series designation.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
procedures.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in
this section, with minimum 10 years of experience.
C. Provide all grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, specialties, and grooving tools from a
single manufacturer.
D. Date stamp all castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc. for quality
assurance and traceability.
E. Coupling Manufacturer:
1. Perform on-site training by factory-trained representative to the Contractor's field
personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved joint products.
2. Periodic job site visits by factory-trained representative to ensure best practices in
grooved joint installation.
3. A distributor's representative is not considered qualified to perform the training.
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

2.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable state and local regulations.
B. Piping: Provide piping, fittings, hangers and supports as required, as indicated, and as
follows:
1. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide joining fittings that are
compatible with piping materials and ensure that the integrity of the system is not jeopardized.
2. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.
3. Grooved mechanical joints are required in all locations.
a. Accessible locations include those exposed on interior of building, in pipe chases, and in
mechanical rooms, aboveground outdoors, and as approved by Architect.
1) Steel: Comply with ASTM A53/A53M.
c. Use rigid joints unless otherwise indicated.
d. Depending on pipe size, three or four flexible joints may be used in lieu of a flexible
connector.
e. Use gaskets of molded synthetic rubber with central cavity, pressure responsive
configuration.
f. Provide steel coupling nuts and bolts.
4. Provide pipe hangers and supports.
C. Pipe-to-Valve and Pipe-to-Equipment Connections: Use flanges, unions, or grooved
couplings to allow disconnection of components for servicing; do not use direct welded,
soldered, or threaded connections.
1. Where grooved joints are used in piping, provide grooved valve/equipment connections
if available; if not available, provide flanged ends and grooved flange adapters.
D. Valves: Provide valves where indicated:
1. Provide drain valves where indicated, and if not indicated provide at least at main shut-
off, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. Use 20 mm (3/4 inch) gate
valves with cap; pipe to nearest floor drain.
2. Isolate equipment using butterfly valves with lug end flanges or grooved mechanical
couplings.
3. For throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services, use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.
4. For throttling and isolation service in chilled and condenser water systems, use only
butterfly valves.
5. In chilled water systems, butterfly valves may be used interchangeably with gate and
globe valves.
6. For shut-off and to isolate parts of systems or vertical risers, use gate, ball, or butterfly
valves.
7. For throttling service, use plug cocks. Use non-lubricated plug cocks only when shut-off
or isolating valves are also provided.
2.02 CHILLED WATER PIPING, BURIED
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black with polyethylene jacket, or double
layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.
1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type with double layer, half-lapped
polyethylene tape.
B. Steel Pipe Sizes 300 mm (12 Inch) and Over: ASTM A53/A53M, 10 mm (0.375 inch)
wall, black with polyethylene jacket, or double layer, half-lapped polyethylene tape.
1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type with double layer, half-lapped
polyethylene tape.
2.03 CHILLED WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black; using one of the following joint types:
1. Grooved Joints: grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and mechanical couplings.
B. Steel Pipe Sizes 300 mm (12 Inch) and Over: ASTM A53/A53M, 10 mm (0.375 inch)
wall, black; using one of the following joint types:
1. Grooved Joints: grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and mechanical couplings.
2.04 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A. PVC Pipe: BS EN ISO 1452-2.
1. Fittings: BS EN ISO 1452-3, PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded.
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate
type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm (1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch): Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm (2 Inches) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 76 mm (3 Inches): Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm (4 Inches) and Over: Welded steel bracket and
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
9. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
10. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms;
size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

B. In grooved installations, use rigid couplings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads or with
wedge shaped grooves in header piping to permit support and hanging in accordance with
ASME B31.9.
C. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of
roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the
roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
1. Bases: High density polypropylene.
2. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing
assembly.
3. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
4. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as
indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
5. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 150 mm (6 inches) under pipe to top of roofing.
2.06 UNIONS, FLANGES, MECHANICAL COUPLINGS, AND DIELECTRIC
CONNECTIONS
A. Unions for Pipe 50 mm (2 Inches) and Under:
1. Ferrous Piping: 1034 kPa (150 psig) malleable iron, threaded.
B. Flanges for Pipe Over 50 mm (2 Inches):
1. Ferrous Piping: 1034 kPa (150 psig) forged steel, slip-on.
2. Gaskets: 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) thick preformed neoprene.
C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing
segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to
secure and compress gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Mechanical Couplings: Comply with ASTM F1476.
3. Housing Material: Ductile iron, galvanized complying with ASTM A536.
4. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from -34 degrees C (-
30 degrees F) to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F).
5. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
6. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.
D. Dielectric Connections:
1. Waterways:
a. Water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of
short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint.
b. Dry insulation barrier able to withstand 600 volt breakdown test.
c. Construct of galvanized steel with threaded end connections to match connecting piping.
d. Suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures.
2. Flanges:
a. Dielectric flanges with same pressure ratings as standard flanges.

b. Water impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to 1 percent of
short circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint.
c. Dry insulation barrier able to withstand 600 volt breakdown test.
d. Construct of galvanized steel with threaded end connections to match connecting piping.
e. Suitable for the required operating pressures and temperatures.
2.07 GATE VALVES
A. Up To and Including 50 mm (2 Inches):
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, non-rising stem, lockshield stem, inside
screw with backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder ends.
B. Over 50 mm (2 Inches):
1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,
solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.
2.08 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw
with backseating stem, renewable composition disc and bronze seat, solder ends.
1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,
rotating plug-type disc with renewable seat ring and disc, flanged ends.
2.09 BALL VALVES
1. Bronze one piece body, chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring,
lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.
1. Ductile iron body, chrome plated stainless steel ball, teflon or Virgin TFE seat and
stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear operated, flanged ends, rated to 5515 kPa (800 psi).
2.10 PLUG VALVES
1. Bronze body, bronze tapered plug, 40 percent port opening, non-lubricated, teflon
packing, threaded ends.
2. Operator: One plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves minimum of one.
1. Cast iron body and plug, 40 percent port opening, pressure lubricated, teflon packing,
flanged ends.
2. Operator: Each plug valve with a wrench with set screw.
2.11 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, grooved ends, extended
neck.
B. Disc: Construct of aluminum bronze, chrome plated ductile iron, stainless steel, ductile
iron with EPDM enscapsulation, or Buna-N enscapsulation.
C. Stem: Stainless steel with stem offset from the centerline to provide full 360 degree
circumferential setting.
D. Operator: Handwheel and gear drive.
2.12 SWING CHECK VALVES
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc, solder or
threaded ends.
1. Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel, bronze, or bronze faced rotating swing disc,
renewable disc and seat, grooved ends.
2.13 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient seal
bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.
2.14 FLOW CONTROLS
A. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet,
temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.
range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 24 kPa
(3.5 psi).

3.01 PREPARATION
B. Prepare pipe for grooved mechanical joints as required by coupling manufacturer.
C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
D. Prepare piping connections to equipment using jointing system specified.
E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary
plugs or caps.
F. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 23 2500 for additional
requirements.
3.02 INSTALLATION. GENERAL.
A. All pipework shall be arranged to set around piers and other obstructions and minor
modifications shall be made as required by the Contractor to circumvent site difficulties.
B. Pipe shall be arranged to follow the contour of walls or beams or other building structure
lines and all vertical pipework shall be plumb, without offsets and set as close as possible to
any local projections consistent with maintaining adequate clearances for installation of wall
plates or insulation.
C. Pipework shall be installed so as to give the following minimum clearances between
adjacent services as follows:-
(a) walls 25 mm
(b) ceilings 50 mm
(c) finished floors either above top of skirting 50 or (if greater) 150 mm
(d) adjacent pipes, both insulated 25 mm
(e) adjacent pipes in trench, both insulated 100 mm
(f) adjacent pipe, both uninsulated 150 mm
(g) adjacent pipes, one insulated 75 mm
(h) insulated pipes to adjacent conduit or trunking 100 mm
(i) adjacent electrical cables not in conduit or trunking 150 mm
Not withstanding the above minimum clearances, sufficient space shall be allowed to facilitate
easy application of insulating materials. Pipes shall not be enclosed in a common insulating
covering.
D. Pipework shall be graded to ensure adequate draining and venting. Draining and venting
facilities shall be fitted at all low and high points respectively and wherever else necessary to
ensure that all sections and subsidiary sections can be drained and that no air locks can form.
E. The engineer may at his discretion ask for the removal of installed pipework for examination.
No extra payment will be made when such removal is called for. If the pipework is found to
have been installed in an unsatisfactory manner, then the complete installation shall be
thoroughly inspected and all unsatisfactory sections shall be removed and re-fixed in a proper
manner.
F. During construction work on all pipework services, care shall be taken to prevent any
foreign matter entering the pipework. All open ends shall be capped with the appropriate
pipework fittings. Wooden plugs and the like shall not be used. Valves fitted in the ends of
pipework shall not be accepted as a means of preventing the ingress of foreign materials.
G. Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean that the Engineer shall have the right
to instruct that pipework so left uncovered to be dismantled for such lengths as the Engineer
requests, and the pipework blown through and/or cleaned at no cost to the contract.
H. All pipework fittings shall be installed in such a manner to ensure that air cannot be trapped
and that pipework can be drained.
I. Unequal tees shall be used in preference to equal tees with separate reducing fittings.
Bushes shall not be used. Unequal tees shall be eccentric pattern on horizontal pipework, and
concentric on vertical pipework.
J. Segmented, cut-and-shut, or any other site manufactured bends or fittings shall not be
installed in any section of the Works.
K. The use of fire or cold pulled bends will not be permitted.
L. Where weldable steel pipework fittings to BS 1965 are to be used then branch bends,
although not covered by this standard, will be accepted, but only at the specific location
designated by the Engineer and subject to total approval by the Engineer.
M. Where fittings are connected to light or medium weight pipework they shall be “medium‟
quality, and where connected to heavyweight pipework they shall be “heavy‟ quality.
N. All fittings, valves, cocks etc., shall be manufactured from materials guaranteed proof
against de-zincification unless specifically stated otherwise elsewhere.
O. Only one manufacturer of pipework fitting shall be used for each differing range of fitting
specified.
P. Reducers on all vertical pipework shall be concentric. In all other positions eccentric
reducers shall be fitted in a manner to maintain a level bottom and ensure that fluids are not
collected at that point in the system. Where it is not possible to fit eccentric reducers the
Engineers approval shall be obtained before fitting concentric reducers. Reductions in all
cases shall be made by use of factory made fittings.
Q. Sufficient unions or flanges shall be provided to install and dismantle screwed or solvent
jointed sections of pipework. Union on all steel pipework shall be of malleable iron
construction with spherically ground bronze-to -bronze seats and shall have screwed ends to
BS 21. Union on PVC-U systems shall be factory manufactured unions appropriate for the
pipe.
R. All branches shall be made by easy sweep tees, twin elbows or sweep crosses. Bends
shall be used wherever possible. All sweep fittings and all sweep bends shall be of the long
radius pattern except where the use of these fittings would stand pipework too far from wall
surfaces and make for unsightly appearance, in which case short sweep tees and elbows may
be used provided that the Engineer‟s written approval is obtained beforehand.
S. Where copper pipework is specified, or allowed, as having bronze welded joints, the
Engineer will allow the use of silver brazed joints (low temperature brazing) using brazing
alloys conforming to BS 1845 Type CP1 or BS 1845 Type CP2. All details of inspection and
testing procedures for bronze welding shall apply to silver brazing jointing methods, and all
joints shall be made in accordance with the brazing alloy manufacturer‟s recommendations for
the application concerned.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPEWORK.
A. Piping and fittings to be used for the HVAC system shall be seamless black steel pipe
schedule 40 with mechanical coupling joints.
B. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published
C. Always check the supplied gasket to ensure it is suitable for the intended service.
D. Valve bodies, discs, and other wetted components must be compatible with the material
flowing through the system.
E. Always read the operating and maintenance instruction manuals for the pipe preparation
tools.
F. For rigid, angle-bolt-pad couplings, the nuts must be tightened evenly by alternating sides
until metal-to-metal contact at the bolt pads is achieved. Equal, positive offsets are necessary
to ensure a rigid joint.
G. Rigid, angle-bolt-pad couplings are not recommended for use with PVC plastic pipe.
H. For flexible couplings with flat bolt pads, the nuts must be tightened evenly by alternating
sides until metal-to-metal contact at the bolt pads is achieved.
I. Couplings that contain a tongue-and-recess feature must be mated properly, tongue-to-
recess.
J. When a torque value is specified for coupling installation, this torque must be applied to the
nuts in order to achieve proper installation. However, torque beyond specified values will not
improve sealing. Exceeding the specified torque by more than 25% may cause damage to the
product, resulting in joint failure.
K. Placement of check valves too close to sources of unstable flow will shorten the life of the
valve and may potentially damage the system. To extend valve life, valves should be installed
a reasonable distance away from pumps, elbows, expanders, reducers, or other similar
devices. Piping practices dictate a minimum distance of five times the pipe diameter for
general use. Distances between three and five diameters are allowable, provided the flow
velocity is less than 8 feet per second/2.4 meters per second. Distances of less than three
diameters are not recommended.

L. When joining pipe of the same size but different wall thicknesses/schedules, the joint rating
will be based on the thinner wall pipe.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF COPPER PIPEWORK.
A. Hard drawn copper shall not be bent by any means. Care is to be taken during brazing that
excess heat is not used. All copper pipes may only be cut by pipe cutting wheels. No flame
cutting or hacksaw work will be permitted. No water quenching will be permitted.
B. All copper pipework and fittings shall be of copper to BS 2871 Part 1 Table X and fittings
shall comply with BS 864 or their equivalent.
C. Pipe clamps shall be selected to ensure no reaction between dissimilar metals.
D. Dielectric joints shall be installed between copper and steel pipes. Direct joints will not be
permitted.
E. All joints shall be properly cleaned before jointing.
F. All soldered joints shall be made with 95 % tin and 5 % antimony soldier, having a melting
point of not less than 238˚C. All soldered joints for tubing larger than 50 mm in size shall be
made with the simultaneous application of two or three blow torches.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PVC-U PIPEWORK.
A. PVC-U piping system is to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
recommendations, using appropriate pressure pipe and fittings.
B. Extreme care must be taken in the preparation of joints. All joints must be cut square. The
burrs must be removed and a 2 mm chamfer filed onto the outside at 45 º.
C. The pipe is to be abraded using emery cloth to approximately the depth of the socket. In
addition, the inside of the socket is to be roughened in a similar manner.
D. The roughened surfaces are to be cleaned using the proprietary cleaner from the system
manufacturer.
E. The proprietary cement from the manufacturer of the system must be thoroughly stirred
before each use. The cement is to be applied longitudinally to both the pipe and the fitting.
Generally two coats will be necessary, but care is to be taken to ensure that no excess solvent
is left on the inside of smaller fittings.
F. Immediately after application of the cement the pipe must be pushed fully home against the
stop in the fitting. The pressure must be maintained for about 30 seconds.
G. Wipe off any excess cement. Clean brushes in cleaner solvent and close lids on all
solutions.
H. The system is to harden at least 24 hours before pressurising.
3.06 EXPANSION PROVISONS AND ANCHOR POINTS.
A. All sections of pipework installation shall be installed in such a manner as to allow
expansion and contraction for the pipework, without causing undue stress in any part of the
installation.
B. The stress in the pipework shall be kept below the yield point. Care shall be taken to
prevent branch connections becoming anchor points.
C. Wherever possible expansion and contraction shall be absorbed by natural offset and
changes in direction of pipe runs. Anchors, pipe guides and expansion loops shall be provided
where shown or required, to the Engineer‟s approval. Do not use screwed fittings on
expansion loops.
D. Wherever it is not possible to accommodate expansion and contraction of the installations
as described above, expansion devices shall be supplied, erected and connected into the
pipework installation, and the position of these devices shall be to the approval of the
Engineer. Ball-joint expansion devices shall be fitted on steel pipework systems.
E. The exact location and working details including anchor loads of all expansion devices,
guides, anchors, and all associated equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
prior to commencement of the installation, carrying the manufacturer‟s confirmation that these
are in accordance with the requirements.
F. Connection to items of plant and equipment shall be made so that no stress in placed on
the equipment or its connections. All expansion devices shall be carefully erected in full
accordance wit the manufacturers’ recommendation and instructions, and be approved by the
particular application concerned.
G. No system of expansion control shall be accepted where the closure of movement exceeds
the amount recommended by the manufacturer when operating from the cold to the upper limit
working temperature. The minimum temperature difference for calculation purpose shall be
40ºC for interior pipes, and 50 ºC for exposed or external runs.
H. All expansion devices shall be cold drawn by a distance equal to half the total expansion
and all contraction devices shall be cold compressed by a distance equal to half the total
contraction. Cold draw shall not be applied until the anchor installations have been completed
and approved by the Engineer.
I. All anchor points shall be treated as main anchor points; the practice of utilising a less
substantial anchor for intermediate positions shall not be permitted.
J. Where the installation is required to be tested in sections, extra anchor points shall be
installed where necessary, for the protection of the expansion devices.
K. Pipework between anchors shall wherever possible be straight, but where this is not
possible, the bracing of all guides shall be adequate to overcome this resultant turning
moment produced by the offset forces, but the Engineer shall be informed before the work
commences.
L. Each axial expansion device shall be guided as close as possible on both sides of the joint,
but in no case more than 1.5 diameters away. A further set of guides shall be installed at a
distance of not more than 15 diameters away from the axial expansion device unless the
manufacturer imposes more stringent requirements.
M. The positioning of anchors and guides immediately adjacent to angular expansion devices
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendation for the application concerned
and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before installation commences. The
remainder of the pipework shall be set in guides at a maximum of twice the maximum interval
for support spacings specified elsewhere for the pipe size to which the expansion device is
fitted.
3.07 FLANGES.
A. Flanges shall be provided on the pipework systems wherever necessary to connect to
components, plant or equipment having flanged connection. In addition, flanges shall be
provided where services are specified elsewhere as having flanged joints.
B. Flanges (including the associated nuts, bolts, and washers) shall be to the minimum
requirements of BS 4504 to suit the conditions within the pipework or to suit equipment, valves
and other pipework components having flanged connection. Where these connections have
flanges shall be provided to suit the connection concerned. Where flanges to BS 4504 are not
manufactured then flanges to BS 10 will be accepted.
C. Flanges shall be bolted up using hexagonal nuts and bolts manufactured from high tensile

carbon steel in accordance with BS 916 using two flat steel washers, one each side of the
jointed flanges.
D. Bolt threads shall not project more than 3.2 mm or less than 1.6 mm beyond the nuts when
jointed up.
E. Blank flanges where required shall be manufactured from the same material and same
thickness as the flanges to which they are mating.
F. Flanges shall be smooth machined across the full width of the flange and on the edge but
may be rough turned on the back. Flanges shall be drilled off-centre.
G. Flanges shall be mounted square with the axis of the pipe after all surface scale, oxides,
grease, oil and dirt have been removed.
H. Care shall be taken to avoid distortion of the flange during welding.
I. Steel flanges shall be provided on mild steel pipework.
J. Cast iron flanges shall be provided on cast iron pipework.
K. Steel and gunmetal flanges shall be of the welding neck pattern, welded to the pipework in
accordance with the general requirements for welding detailed elsewhere in the Project
Documentation.
L. Flanges shall be finished or coated exactly as specified for the pipework on which they are
to be fitted.
M. Composite type flanges having gunmetal inner and steel outer flanges shall be provided on
copper pipework.
N. Flanges for PVC-U pipe shall be to BS 10, Table E with 14 bar ratings. Backing rings will be
provided for sizes of 150 mm and larger, nominal pipe size.
O. Stub flange assemblies will only be permitted if specifically requested for specific reason
and if thought appropriate by the Engineer.
P. All items of plan including air heater batteries and fan coil units etc., shall be capable of
being disconnected from connected pipework services by means of unions, union valves,
flanges or flanged valves. Pipework shall be so arranged to allow the item to be removed.
3.08 SCHEDULES
A. Hanger Spacing for Steel Piping.
1. 15 mm (1/2 inch), 20 mm (3/4 inch), and 25 mm (1 inch): Maximum span, 2100 mm (7
feet); minimum rod size, 6 mm (1/4 inch).
2. 32 mm (1-1/4 inches): Maximum span, 2400 mm (8 feet); minimum rod size, 9 mm (3/8
inch).
3. 40 mm (1-1/2 inches): Maximum span, 2700 mm (9 feet); minimum rod size, 9 mm (3/8
inch).
4. 50 mm (2 inches): Maximum span, 3.0 m (10 feet); minimum rod size, 9 mm (3/8 inch).
5. 65 mm (2-1/2 inches): Maximum span, 3.4 m (11 feet); minimum rod size, 9 mm (3/8
inch).
10. 250 mm (10 inches): Maximum span, 6.1 m (20 feet); minimum rod size, 19 mm (3/4
inch).
inch).
12. 350 mm (14 inches): Maximum span, 7.6 m (25 feet); minimum rod size, 25 mm (1 inch).
14. 450 mm (18 inches): Maximum span, 8.5 m (28 feet); minimum rod size, 38 mm (1-1/4
inch).
inch).
B. Hanger Spacing for Plastic Piping.
1. 15 mm (1/2 inch): Maximum span, 1000 mm (42 inches); minimum rod size, 6 mm (1/4
inch).
2. 20 mm (3/4 inch): Maximum span, 1100 mm (45 inches); minimum rod size, 6 mm (1/4
inch).
3. 25 mm (1 inch): Maximum span, 1300 mm (51 inches); minimum rod size, 6 mm (1/4
inch).
4. 32 mm (1-1/4 inches): Maximum span, 1400 mm (57 inches); minimum rod size, 9 mm
(3/8 inch).
5. 40 mm (1-1/2 inches): Maximum span, 1600 mm (63 inches); minimum rod size, 9 mm
(3/8 inch).
6. 50 mm (2 inches): Maximum span, 1700 mm (69 inches); minimum rod size, 9 mm (3/8
inch).
7. 80 mm (3 inches): Maximum span, 2100 mm (7 feet); minimum rod size, 9 mm (3/8 inch).
8. 100 mm (4 inches): Maximum span, 2400 mm (8 feet); minimum rod size, 13 mm (1/2
inch).
inch).
inch).
inch).
END OF SECTION

8.12 23 2114 Hydronic Specialties:

A. Expansion tanks.
B. Air vents.
C. Air separators.
D. Strainers.
E. Suction diffusers.
F. Combination pump discharge valves.
G. Pressure-temperature test plugs.
H. Balancing valves.
I. Combination flow controls.
J. Flow meters.
K. Relief valves.
L. Pressure reducing valves.
A. Hydronic Piping.
B. Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required
for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
Include product description, model and dimensions.
B. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from authority having jurisdiction.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining
procedures.
D. Maintenance Contract.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls and flow meters.
F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication
instructions, and replacement parts list.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing
sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

2.01 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1;
supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 860 kPa (125 psi), with
flexible EPDM diaphragm or bladder sealed into tank, and steel support stand.
B. Accessories: Pressure gage and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 80 kPa (12
psi).
C. Automatic Cold Water Fill Assembly: Pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double
check back flow preventer, test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker, and valved by-pass.
2.02 AIR VENTS
A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 50 mm (2 inch) diameter pipe to form air
chamber, with 3 mm (1/8 inch) brass needle valve at top of chamber.
B. Float Type:
1. Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float, stainless
steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature and pressure; with
isolating valve.
2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system
operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
C. Washer Type:
1. Brass with hygroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off, and
integral spring loaded ball check valve.
2.03 AIR SEPARATORS
A. In-line Air Separators:
1. Cast iron for sizes 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) and smaller, or steel for sizes 50 mm (2 inch) and
larger; tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; for 860 kPa (125 psi)
operating pressure.
B. Combination Air Separators/Strainers:
1. Steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME BPVC-VIII-1; for 860 kPa (125 psi)
operating pressure, with integral bronze strainer, tangential inlet and outlet connections, and
internal stainless steel air collector tube.

2.04 STRAINERS
A. Size 50 mm (2 inch) and Under:
1. Screwed brass or iron body for 1200 kPa (175 psi) working pressure, Y pattern with 0.8
mm (1/32 inch) stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) to 100 mm (4 inch):
1. Provide grooved iron body for 1200 kPa (175 psi) working pressure, Y pattern with 1.6
mm (1/16 inch), or 1.2 mm (3/64 inch) stainless steel perforated screen.
C. Size 125 mm (5 inch) and Larger:
1. Provide grooved iron body for 1200 kPa (175 psi) working pressure, basket pattern with
3.2 mm (1/8 inch) stainless steel perforated screen.
2.05 SUCTION DIFFUSERS
A. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 50 mm (2 inch) and smaller, flanged
for 65 mm (2-1/2 inch) and larger, rated for 1200 kPa (175 psi) working pressure, with inlet
vanes, cylinder strainer with 5 mm (3/16 inch) diameter openings, disposable 4 mm (5/32 inch)
mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, 20 mesh start up screen, and permanent magnet
located in flow stream and removable for cleaning.
B. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in side.
2.06 COMBINATION PUMP DISCHARGE VALVES
A. Valves: Straight or angle pattern, flanged cast-iron valve body with bolt-on bonnet for
1200 kPa (175 psi) operating pressure, non-slam check valve with spring-loaded bronze disc
and seat, stainless steel stem, and calibrated adjustment permitting flow regulation.
2.07 PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS
A. Construction: Brass body designed to receive temperature or pressure probe with
removable protective cap, and Neoprene rated for minimum 93 degrees C (200 degrees F).
B. Application: Use extended length plugs to clear insulated piping.
2.08 BALANCING VALVES
A. Size 50 mm (2 inch) and Smaller:
1. Provide ball or globe style with flow balancing, flow measurement, and shut-off
capabilities, memory stops, minimum of two metering ports and NPT threaded or soldered
connections.
2. Metal construction materials consist of bronze or brass.
3. Non-metal construction materials consist of Teflon, EPDM, or engineered resin.
B. Size 64 mm (2.5 inch) and Larger:
1. Provide ball, globe, or butterfly style with flow balancing, flow measurement, and shut-off
capabilities, memory stops, minimum of two metering ports and grooved connections.
2. Valve body construction materials consist of cast iron, carbon steel, or ductile iron.
3. Internal components construction materials consist of brass, aluminum bronze, bronze,
Teflon, EPDM, NORYL, or engineered resin.
2.09 COMBINATION FLOW CONTROLS
A. Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and
pressure test plug on inlet and outlet with blowdown/backflush drain.

range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 24 kPa
(3.5 psi).
C. Control Mechanism: Stainless steel or nickel plated brass piston or regulator cup,
operating against stainless steel helical or wave formed spring.
1. Accessories: In-line strainer on inlet and ball valve on outlet.
2.10 FLOW METERS
A. Orifice principle by-pass circuit with direct reading gage, soldered or flanged piping
connections for 860 kPa (125 psi) working pressure, with shut off valves, and drain and vent
connections.
B. Direct reading with insert pitot tube, threaded coupling, for 1034 kPa (150 psi) working
pressure, maximum 115 degrees C (240 degrees F), 5 percent accuracy.
C. Cast iron, wafer type, orifice insert flow meter for 1720 kPa (250 psi) working pressure,
with read-out valves equipped with integral check valves with gasketed caps.
D. Calibrated, plug type balance valve with precision machined orifice, readout valves
equipped with integral check valves and gasketed caps, calibrated nameplate and indicating
pointer.
E. Portable meter consisting of case containing two, 3 percent accuracy pressure gages
with 0-34 kPa (0-135 inches) and 0-180 kPa (0-60 feet) pressure ranges for 3450 kPa (500 psi)
maximum working pressure, color coded hoses for low and high pressure connections, and
connectors suitable for connection to read-out valves.
2.11 RELIEF VALVES
A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure
actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled.
2.12 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Operation: Automatically feeds make-up water to the hydronic system whenever
pressure in the system drops below the pressure setting of the valve. Refer to Section 23
2113.
B. Materials of Construction:
1. Valve Body: Constructed of bronze, cast iron, brass, or iron.
2. Internal Components: Construct of stainless steel or brass and engineered plastics or
composition material.
C. Connections:
1. NPT threaded: 15 mm (0.50 inch), or 20 mm (0.75 inch).
2. Soldered: 15 mm (0.50 inch).
D. Provide integral check valve and strainer.
E. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 689 kPa (100 psi).
F. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 82 degrees C (180 degrees F).
G. Operating Pressure Range: Between 69 kPa (10 psi) and 172 kPa (25 psi).

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.
C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.
D. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent
tubing to nearest drain.
E. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to
expansion tank.
F. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
G. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps where
indicated. Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.
H. Provide combination pump discharge valve on discharge side of base mounted
centrifugal pumps where indicated.
I. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
J. Provide relief valves on pressure tanks, low pressure side of reducing valves, heat
exchangers, and expansion tanks.
K. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure reducing
valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of connected
equipment.
L. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.
M. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of
individual vent areas.
END OF SECTION

8.13 23 2123 Hydronic Pumps:

A. Close coupled pumps.
B. Base mounted pumps.
C. HVAC Equipment Insulation.
D. HVAC Piping Insulation.
E. Hydronic Piping.
F. Hydronic Specialties.
G. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with
pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Millwright's Certificate: Certify that base mounted pumps have been aligned.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements and
recommendations.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views,
lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.
1. Extra Pump Seals: One set for each type and size of pump.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field
performance of pumps, with minimum three years of documented experience.

2.01 HVAC PUMPS - GENERAL
A. Provide pumps that operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding
and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25
percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
B. Base Mounted Pumps: Aligned by qualified millwright.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL or testing agency
acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
2.02 BASE MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL END-SUCTION TYPE PUMPS
A. Equipment tags: CWSP-AA-01/02/03.
B. Non-self-priming, single-stage, centrifugal volute pump designed according to ISO 5199
with dimensions and rated performance according to EN 733. Flanges are PN 16 with
dimensions according to EN 1092-2. The pump shall have an axial suction port, a radial
discharge port and horizontal shaft. It is of the back pull-out design enabling removal of the
motor, coupling, bearing bracket and impeller without disturbing the pump housing or pipework.
C. The unbalanced rubber bellows seal shall be according to DIN EN 12756.
D. The pump shall be fitted with a foot-mounted, fan-cooled asynchronous motor. Pump
and motor are mounted on a common base frame.
E. Pump and motor are mounted on a common steel base frame in accordance with ISO
3661.
F. Cast-iron parts have an epoxy-based coating made in a cathodic electro-deposition
(CED) process.
G. Pump.
1 The pump housing has both a priming and a drain hole closed by plugs.
2 The impeller is a closed impeller with double-curved blades with smooth surfaces.
3 The impeller is statically balanced according to ISO 1940-1 class G6.3 and hydraulically
balanced to compensate for axial thrust.
4 Wear rings used in pump housing and for impeller are made of bronze/brass or cast iron.
5 The pump is fitted with an unbalanced rubber bellows seal with torque transmission
across the spring and around the bellows. Due to the bellows, the seal does not wear the shaft,
and the axial movement is not prevented by deposits on the shaft.
6 Primary seal:
7 Description
8 - Rotating seal ring material: Carbon graphite, metal-impregnated
9 - Stationary seat material: Silicon carbide (SiC)
10 This material pairing has a very good corrosion resistance and is especially suitable for
water up to +120 °C. However, seal life will be reduced at temperatures above +90 °C. The
material pairing is not recommended for liquids containing particles as this will result in heavy
wear on the SiC face.
11 Secondary seal material: EPDM (ethylene-propylene rubber)
12 EPDM has excellent resistance to hot water. EPDM is not suitable for mineral oils.
13 The shaft is made of stainless steel and has a diameter of 32 mm where the coupling is
mounted.
14 The pump uses a standard coupling between the pump and motor shaft.
H. Motor.
1 The motor is a totally enclosed, fan-cooled motor with principal dimensions to IEC and
DIN standards and mounting designation B3 (IM 1001). Electrical tolerances comply with IEC
60034.
2 The motor efficiency is classified as IE3 in accordance with IEC 60034-30.
3 The motor has thermistors (PTC sensors) in the windings in accordance with DIN
44081/DIN 44082.
4 The protection reacts to both slow- and quick-rising temperatures, e.g. constant overload
and stalled conditions.
5 Thermal switches must be connected to an external control circuit in a way which
ensures that the automatic reset cannot cause accidents. The motors must be connected to a
motor-protective circuit breaker according to local regulations.

3.01 PREPARATION
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum space
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base
mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes
102 mm (4 inches) and over. Refer to Section 23 0548.
D. Provide line sized shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat
check valve and balancing valve on pump discharge.
E. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.
G. Check, align, and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
H. Install close coupled and base mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with
anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place.
I. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. The equipment schedules shall be as included in the VAC Equipment Schedules
drawing M002-RLR-MHV-DWG-RNST080-AA-26681 and subsequent.
END OF SECTION

8.14 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping:

A. Piping.
B. Refrigerant.
C. Moisture and liquid indicators.
D. Valves.
E. Strainers.
F. Check valves.
G. Pressure relief valves.
H. Filter-driers.
I. Solenoid valves.
J. Expansion valves.
K. Flexible connections.
A. Access Doors and Panels.
B. Painting and Coating.
C. HVAC Equipment Insulation.
E. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.
F. Computer Room Air Conditioners - Floor Mounted.
G. Convection Heating and Cooling Units: Air Coils.
H. AHRI 495 - Performance Rating of Refrigerant Liquid Receivers; Air-Conditioning,
Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2005.
I. AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid-Line Driers; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and
Refrigeration Institute; 2009.
J. AHRI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter Driers;
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2005.
K. AHRI 750 - Standard for Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves; Air-Conditioning,
Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.
L. AHRI 760 - Standard for Performance Rating of Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile
Refrigerants; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2007.
M. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2013 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15).
N. ASHRAE Std 34 - Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2013.
O. BS EN ISO 17672:2010 Brazing. Filler metals
P. BS EN 12449:2016 Copper and copper alloys. Seamless, round tubes for general
purposes
Q. BS EN 1254-1:1998 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. Fittings with ends for
capillary soldering or capillary brazing to copper tubes
R. BS EN 1254-2:1998 Copper and copper alloys. Plumbing fittings. Fittings with
compression ends for use with copper tubes
S. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture,
Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve
and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
T. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components
are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide
necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently
provided.
B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5 unless indicated
otherwise.
C. Liquid Indicators:
1. Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.
2. If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.
3. Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
D. Valves:
1. Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.
2. Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.
3. Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.
4. Use check valves on compressor discharge.
5. Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.
E. Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off
valve and expansion valve.
F. Strainers:
1. Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.
2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid
line strainer.
3. On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line.
4. Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.
G. Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors.
H. Filter-Driers:
1. Use a filter-drier immediately ahead of liquid-line controls, such as thermostatic
expansion valves, solenoid valves, and moisture indicators.
2. Use a filter-drier on suction line just ahead of compressor.
3. Use sealed filter-driers in lines smaller than 1/2 inch (13 mm) outside diameter.
4. Use sealed filter-driers in low temperature systems.
5. Use sealed filter-driers in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.
6. Use replaceable core filter-driers in lines of 1/2 inch (13 mm) outside diameter or greater.
7. Use replaceable core liquid-line filter-driers in systems utilizing receivers.
8. Use filter-driers for each solenoid valve.
I. Solenoid Valves:
1. Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor
control.
2. Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.
3. Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into
the suction line when system shuts down.
J. Receivers:
1. Use on systems with long piping runs.
K. Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide general assembly of specialties, including manufacturers
catalogue information. Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of system, including equipment, critical
dimensions, and sizes.
C. Design Data: Submit design data indicating pipe sizing. Indicate load carrying capacity
of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.
D. Test Reports: Indicate results of leak test, acid test.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support, connection requirements, and
isolation for servicing.
F. Submit welders certification.

G. Project Record Documents: Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration
accessories on record drawings.
H. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare
parts lists.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Filter-Dryer Cartridges: One of each type and size.
2. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: One, each containing everything required to conduct one test.
A. Designer Qualifications: Design piping system under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in
this section, with minimum 10 years of documented experience.
A. Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to applicable state labor regulations.
C. Welders Certification.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the
purpose indicated.
A. Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B. Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps
and plugs in place until installation.
C. Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment,
until connected into system.

2.01 PIPING
A. Copper Tube: BS EN 12449.
1. Fittings: BS EN 1254.
2. Joints: Braze, BS EN ISO 17672.
B. Pipe Supports and Anchors:
1. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
a. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate
type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Malleable iron adjustable swivel,
split ring.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (75 mm): Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches (100 mm) and Over: Welded steel bracket and
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
10. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.
11. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms;
size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
12. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of
roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the
roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a. Bases: High density polypropylene.
b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing
assembly.
c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as
indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) under pipe to top of roofing.
2.02 REFRIGERANT
A. Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and
global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.
B. Refrigerant: R-134a, tetrafluoroethane as defined in ASHRAE Std 34.
2.03 MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A. Indicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends,
sight glass, color coded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic
cap; for maximum temperature of 200 degrees F (93 degrees C) and maximum working
pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa).
2.04 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet, phosphor bronze and
stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless steel spring, nylon seat disc,
solder or flared ends, with positive backseating; for maximum working pressure of 500 psi
(3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 275 degrees F (135 degrees C).
B. Packed Angle Valves:
1. Forged brass or nickel plated forged steel, forged brass seal caps with copper gasket,
rising stem and seat with backseating, molded stem packing, solder or flared ends; for
maximum working pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 275 degrees
F (135 degrees C).
C. Ball Valves:
1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions,
brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for
F (149 degrees C).
D. Service Valves:
1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball
check valve, flared or solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psi (3450 kPa).
2.05 STRAINERS
A. Straight Line or Angle Line Type:
1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of
stainless steel wire or monel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psi
(2960 kPa).
B. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type:
1. Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire screen.
2.06 CHECK VALVES
A. Globe Type:
1. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and
disc holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum
temperature of 300 degrees F (149 degrees C) and maximum working pressure of 425 psi
(2930 kPa).
B. Straight Through Type:
1. Brass body and disc, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, neoprene seat; for
F (93 degrees C).
2.07 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting, adjustable over 0 to 80 psi (0 to
550 kPa) range, for maximum working pressure of 450 psi (3100 kPa).
2.08 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and
stamped, selected to ASHRAE Std 15, with standard setting of 235 psi (1620 kPa).
2.09 FILTER-DRIERS
A. Performance:
1. Water Capacity: As indicated in schedule, rated in accordance with AHRI 710.
2. Pressure Drop: 2 psi (14 kPa), maximum, when operating at full connected evaporator
capacity.
3. Design Working Pressure: 350 psi (2410 kPa), minimum.
B. Cores: Molded or loose-fill molecular sieve desiccant compatible with refrigerant,
activated alumina, activated charcoal, and filtration to 40 microns, with secondary filtration to
20 microns; of construction that will not pass into refrigerant lines.
C. Construction: UL listed.
1. Replaceable Core Type: Steel shell with removable cap.
2. Sealed Type: Copper shell.
3. Connections: As specified for applicable pipe type.
2.10 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Valve: AHRI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass body and internal parts, synthetic seat,
stainless steel stem and plunger assembly (permitting manual operation in case of coil failure),
integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of 500
psi (3450 kPa).
B. Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded electromagnetic coil,
moisture and fungus proof, with surge protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction
box with pilot light.
2.11 EXPANSION VALVES
A. Angle or Straight Through Type: AHRI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body,
internal or external equalizer, bleed hole, adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet
strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing bulb and remote bulb well.
B. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available
pressure drop across valve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and
minimum 10 degrees F (6 degrees C) superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load
and excessively oversized at part load.
2.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
A. Valve:
1. Brass body with flared or solder connection, needle valve with floating needle and
machined seat, stepper motor drive.
B. Evaporation Control System:
1. Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case, proportional integral control with
adaptive superheat, maximum operating pressure function, preselection allowance for
electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.
2. Electrical Characteristics: 230 volts, single phase, 50/60 Hz.
C. Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case,
with proportional integral control of valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and
low), solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat control, maximum operating
pressure function, night setback thermostat, timer for defrost control.
2.13 RECEIVERS
A. Internal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Smaller:
1. AHRI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psi (2760 kPa) maximum pressure rating, with
tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. Internal Diameter Over 6 inch (150 mm):
1. AHRI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV VIII, 1);
400 psi (2760 kPa) with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and
magnetic liquid level indicator.
2.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Corrugated stainless steel hose with single layer of stainless steel exterior braiding,
minimum 9 inches (230 mm) long with copper tube ends; for maximum working pressure of
500 psi (3450 kPa).

3.01 PREPARATION
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain
gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one
percent in direction of oil return.E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without
stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
E. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches (100 mm).
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-
bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
F. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.5.
2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering
and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.
5. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
6. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple
or trapeze hangers.
7. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
G. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and
provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
H. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
I. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings. Coordinate size and location of access
doors with Section 08 3100.
J. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and
apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 09 9000.
M. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 0716.
N. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for
disposal of refrigerant.
O. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-driers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
P. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction
line.
Q. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor
connected to evaporator.
R. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to
crankshaft.
S. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
T. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Section 26 2717.
A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psi (1380 kPa). Perform final tests at 27
inches (92 kPa) vacuum and 200 psi (1380 kPa) using halide torch. Test to no leakage.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Hanger Spacing for Copper Tubing.
1. 13 mm (1/2 inch), 16 mm (5/8 inch), and 22 mm (7/8 inch) OD: Maximum span, 1500
mm (5 feet); minimum rod size, 6.3 mm (1/4 inch).
2. 29 mm (1-1/8 inch) OD: Maximum span, 1800 mm (6 feet); minimum rod size, 6.3 mm
(1/4 inch).
(3/8 inch).
(3/8 inch).
(3/8 inch).
(3/8 inch).
7. 79 mm (3-1/8 inch) OD: Maximum span, 3.0 m (10 feet); minimum rod size, 9.5 mm (3/8
inch).
8. 92 mm (3-5/8 inch) OD: Maximum span, 3.4 m (11 feet); minimum rod size, 12.7 mm
(1/2 inch).
9. 92 mm (4-1/8 inch) OD: Maximum span, 3.6 m (12 feet); minimum rod size, 12.7 mm
(1/2 inch).
END OF SECTION

8.15 23 2500 HVAC Water Treatment:

A. Cleaning of piping systems.
B. Chemical feeder equipment.
C. Chemical treatment.
A. Hydronic Piping.
B. Hydronic Specialties.
C. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, chemicals, and equipment
including electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system schematic, equipment locations, and controls
schematics, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems,
piping configuration, and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up of treatment systems when completed
and operating properly. Indicate analysis of system water after cleaning and after treatment.
E. Certificate: Submit certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating
approval of chemicals and their proposed disposal.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and piping, including
sampling points and location of chemical injectors.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include data on chemical feed pumps, agitators, and
other equipment including spare parts lists, procedures, and treatment programs. Include step
by step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.
1. Sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing during required maintenance period.
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. Company shall
have local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.
this section, with minimum 10 years of experience and approved by manufacturer.
A. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical
systems and to public sewage systems.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the
2.01 MATERIALS
A. System Cleaner:
1. Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and
petroleum products; sodium tripoly phosphate and sodium molybdate.
2. Biocide chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite.
B. Closed System Treatment (Water):
1. Corrosion inhibitors: Hydrex 2909 (sodium silicate plus other corrosion inhibitors).
2.02 SOLUTION METERING PUMP
A. Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable flow rate, thermoplastic
construction, continuous-duty fully enclosed electric motor and drive, and built-in relief valve.
B. Electrical Characteristics:
1. 220 volts, single phase, 50 Hz.
2. Cord and Plug: Provide unit with 2 m (6 foot) cord and plug for connection to electric
wiring system including grounding connector.
C. Features:
1. Type: diaphragm, SA 6-8.
2. Drive: electromagnetic.
3. Maximum flow: 6 l/h.
4. Maximum working pressu re: 8 bar
5. Pulse rate: 400 pulse / min
6. Power: 35 W.
7. Power supply: 220V / 50Hz.
8. Enclosure: IP65.
9. Frequency range: 20-100%.
10. Control: Pulse / 4-20mA.
11. Liquid level switch.
12. Ambient temperature: 0 - 40˚C.
13. Fluid temperature: 0 - 40˚C.
14. Maximum viscosity: 200 cps.
15. Inlet: 4 x 6 mm.
16. Outlet: 4 x 6 mm.
17. Process outlet: ½”.
D. Materials:
1. Head: PVC.
2. Diaphragm: Teflon
3. Joints and seats: Viton.

4. Spheres: Glass.
E. Dimensions and weight:
1. Length: 149 mm.
2. Depth: 109.5 mm.
3. Height: 235.5 mm.
4. Weight: 1.7 kg.
2.03 SOLUTION TANK
A. 120 l capacity, high density polyethylene, self-supporting, 5 l graduated markings;
molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump and liquid level switch.
B. Dimensions:
1. Diameter: 510 mm.
2. Inlet diameter: 170 mm.
3. Total height: 730 mm.
2.04 LIQUID LEVEL SWITCH
A. Polypropylene housing with integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for connection
to metering pump, and low level alarm.
2.05 WATER METER
A. Displacement type cold water meter with sealed, tamper-proof magnetic drive, impulse
contact register, single pole, double throw dry contact switch.
B. Features:
1. Type: multiple jet, 1 ½” JU.
2. Size: 40 mm.
3. Nominal flow: 10 m3/h.
4. Minimum fow: 200 l/h.
5. Maximum flow: 20 m3/h.
6. Maximum working pressure: 16 bar.
7. Inlet/Outlet size: G2”B.
8. Drive: magnetic.
9. Display: 8 digits, 1 pointer.
10. Resolution: 0.05 l.
11. Flow per pulse: 10 pulse / l.
12. Maximum water temperature: 40˚C.
C. Materials
1. Body and sphere: plastic.
D. Dimensions
1. Length: 300 mm.
2. Width: 136 mm.
3. Height: 160 mm.
4. Weight: 4.3 kg.
2.06 CHEMICAL
A. Multi-component corrosion inhibitor for closed chilled water systems. Sodium silicate and
other organic and inorganic corrosion inhibitors.
B. Features:
1. State: Liquid (amber)
2. Density: 1.28 +/- 0.2 kg/l.
3. Smell: Light.
4. Freezing point: 0˚C / 32˚F
5. Solubility: Complete in water.
6. Boiling point: 100˚C.
7. pH: 11.0 – 12.5.
8. Viscosity: Same as water.
9. Expiration date: 2 months.
C. Materials compatibility.
1. The recommended materials for the storage tanks are crosslinked polyethylene,
fiberglass, stainless steel or coated mild steel.
2. The following materials are not recommended any part of the dosing system: uncoated
steel, black steel, galvanized steel, copper.
3. The best options for the dosing pump head and dosing lines are stainless steel and PVC.
D. Storage.
1. The chemical must be stored at the following temperature range: 0 – 32˚C.

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water
meter to record capacity in each system.
B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.
C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 CLEANING SEQUENCE
A. Chilled Water Systems:
1. Circulate for 48 hours, and then drain systems as quickly as possible.
2. Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain.
3. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
B. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of
Architect.
C. Flush open systems and glycol filled closed systems with clean water for one hour
minimum. Drain completely and refill.
D. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
E. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is
completed. Include disassembly of components as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of chemical treatment
system.
1. Provide minimum of two hours of instruction for two people.
2. Have operation and maintenance data prepared and available for review during training.
3. Conduct training using actual equipment after treated system has been put into full
operation.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the
supervision and in the direct employ of the equipment manufacturer or original installer.
B. Provide service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
C. Provide monthly technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water
analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating requirements,
and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report after each visit.
D. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period.
E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to
properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in writing
based upon these inspections.
END OF SECTION

8.16 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings VAC:

A. Metal ductwork.
B. Casing and plenums.
C. Buried ductwork.
D. Duct cleaning.
A. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
B. Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.
C. Air Duct Accessories.
D. Air Terminal Units.
E. Air Outlets and Inlets.
A. Handbooks and Standards of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
B. ASHRAE standards 62 - 2013, 55 - 2013, 90.1 – 2013.
F. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 14 - Electrical and
G. Volume 6, Architectural Branding Manual. Section 12 - Part 2. D 4 MEP.
H. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013.
I. BS EN 10143:2006 Continuously hot-dip coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on
dimensions and shape
J. BS EN 515:1993 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Wrought products. Temper
designations
K. BS EN 485-2:2013 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate. Mechanical
properties
L. BS EN 485-3:2003 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet, strip and plate. Tolerances
on dimensions and form for hot-rolled products
M. BS EN 573-2:1995 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Chemical symbol based designation system
N. BS EN 573-4:1995 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical composition and form of
wrought products. Forms of products
O. BS EN 10088-2:2014 Stainless steels. Technical delivery conditions for sheet/plate and
strip of corrosion resisting steels for general purposes.

P. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.
Q. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in
R. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements;
2013.
S. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2013.
T. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
U. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
V. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
W. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition.
X. DW 144 Specification for sheet metal ductwork.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and
configuration prior to start of work for duct systems.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork meet or exceed
specified requirements.
E. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test
pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK).
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record
changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used.
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience, and approved
by manufacturer.
this section, with minimum 10 years of documented experience.
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by
sealant manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct
sealants.

2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES
A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

B. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 125 Pa (1/2 inch w.g.) pressure class,
galvanized steel.
D. Buried Supply or Return: 125 Pa (1/2 inch w.g.) pressure class, concrete encased sheet
metal.
1. Fabricate using two gages heavier material than indicated for 500 Pa (2 inch w.g.)
pressure class.
E. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 125 Pa (1/2 inch w.g.) pressure class, galvanized
steel.
F. Return and Relief: 125 Pa (1/2 inch w.g.) pressure class, galvanized steel.
G. General Exhaust: 125 Pa (1/2 inch w.g.) pressure class, galvanized steel.
H. Outside Air Intake: 125 Pa (1/2 inch w.g.) pressure class, galvanized steel.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, BS EN 10143.
B. Aluminum for Ducts: BS EN 485 aluminum sheet.
C. Stainless Steel for Ducts: BS EN 10088.
D. Joint Sealers and Sealants: DW 144, non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold
resistant.
1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and
compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.
2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled.
E. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one
end, or continuously threaded.
F. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size
round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE Handbook -
Fundamentals.
C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct
on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil
turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.
E. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical
lining is indicated.
F. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA
(DCS).
H. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver
frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct,
painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct.
2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS
A. Flexible Ducts: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound spring steel wire.
1. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with polyethylene vapor barrier film.
2. Pressure Rating: 2.50 kPa (10 inches WG) positive and 250 Pa (1.0 inches WG)
negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 20.3 m/sec (4000 fpm).
4. Temperature Range: Minus 28 degrees C to 99 degrees C (Minus 20 degrees F to 210
degrees F).
B. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection,
interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and corner
clips.
2.05 CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating
pressures indicated.
B. Mount floor mounted casings on 100 mm (4 inch) high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet
panels on 200 mm (8 inch) centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide
liner of galvanized 1.21 mm (18 gage, 0.0478 inch) expanded metal mesh supported at 300
mm (12 inch) centers, turned up 300 mm (12 inches) at sides with sheet metal shields.
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting
angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for
cleaning and inspection.
D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 1.52 mm (16 gage,
0.0598 inch) sheet steel back facing and 0.76 mm (22 gage, 0.0299 inch) perforated sheet
steel front facing with 2.4 mm (3/32 inch) diameter holes on 4 mm (5/32 inch) centers.
Construct panels 75 mm (3 inches) thick packed with 72 kg/cu m (4.5 lb/cu ft) minimum glass
fiber insulation media, on inverted channels of 1.52 mm (16 gage, 0.0598 inch) sheet steel.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
D. Buried Supply Duct: Insulate duct runs over 20 m (70 feet) long with 25 mm (1 inch)
thick insulation covered with plastic vapor barrier.
E. Buried Metal Ductwork: Paint according to SMACNA (DCS).
F. Buried Metal Ductwork Without Factory Jacket: Paint with one coat and seams and
joints with additional coat of asphalt base protective coating.
G. Buried Metal Ductwork: Encase according to SMACNA (DCS).
1. Provide adequate tie-down points to prevent ducts from floating during concrete
placement.
H. Flexible Ducts: Connect to metal ducts with adhesive.
I. Underground Ducts: Slope to plenums or low pump out points at 1:500. Provide access
doors for inspection.
J. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside
lining.
K. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with
metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are
provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
L. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
M. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 200 mm (8 inch) and
smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.
N. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
O. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with 300 mm (one foot) maximum
length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction.
P. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with 1.5 m (5 feet)
maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.
Q. Set plenum doors 150 to 300 mm (6 to 12 inches) above floor. Arrange door swings so
that fan static pressure holds door in closed position.
R. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated
dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be
harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
END OF SECTION

8.17 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories VAC:

A. Air turning devices/extractors.
B. Backdraft dampers - metal.
C. Duct access doors.
D. Duct test holes.
E. Fire dampers.
F. Flexible duct connections.
G. Relief dampers.
A. Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
B. HVAC Ducts and Casings.
C. Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies.
H. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
I. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2015.
J. NFPA 96 - Standard Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations; 2014.
K. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
L. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
N. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems;

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers.
Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control
dampers.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers.
D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes.
1. Extra Fusible Links: One of each type and size.
A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with
individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.
2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL
A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches (450 x 450 mm) or Smaller, Furnished
with Air Moving Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction.
B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with
center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch (150 mm) width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed
edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and
plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.
B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches,
neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap.
Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.05 FIRE DAMPERS (FD)
A. Square or rectangular fire dampers in many dimension combinations for the isolation of
duct penetrations between fire compartments.
B. Ready-for-operation unit includes a fire-resistant damper blade and a release
mechanism.

C. Application-dependent EI 90 (ve, ho i ↔ o) S or EI 120 (ve, ho i ↔ o) S.
D. Tested for fire resistance properties to EN 1366-2.
E. With declaration of performance DoP and CE marking.
F. For mortar-based installation and dry mortarless installation into solid walls and ceiling
slabs, lightweight partition walls with cladding on both sides, lightweight fire walls, and shaft
walls; for mortar-based installation, upright, in solid ceiling slabs; for dry mortarless installation
on the face of, adjacent to and remote from solid walls. Also for dry mortarless installation with
fire batt in solid walls, solid ceiling slabs and lightweight partition walls with cladding on both
sides.
G. Special features:
1. Complies with the requirements of EN 15650
2. Tested for fire resistance properties according to EN 1366-2
3. Classified according to EN 13501-3
4. Low differential pressure and sound power level
5. Integration into the central BACS
H. Differential pressure range 20 to 2000 Pa.
I. Closed blade air leakage according to EN 1751, class 2; Casing air leakage to EN 1751,
class C; (B + H) ≤ 700, class B.
J. Fire damper with fusible link at 72˚C and spring return actuator with thermoelectric
release mechanism. Power supply: 230V AC ± 14%, 50Hz. Two limit switches integrated into
actuator for indicating damper blade positions OPEN and CLOSED.
K. Materials:
1. Casing made of galvanised sheet steel
2. Damper blade made of special insulating material
3. Damper blade shaft and driving linkage made of stainless steel
4. Plain bearings made of brass
5. Seals made of polyurethane and elastomer.
2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as
indicated.
B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m).
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches (50 mm) wide.
2. Metal: 3 inches (75 mm) wide, 24 gage (0.6 mm) thick galvanized steel.
C. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch (14 mm) thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft (4.2 kg/sq m),
10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 Hz range.
D. Maximum Installed Length: 14 inch (356 mm).

2.07 OVERPRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS (OD)
A. Rectangular pressure relief dampers for the protection of air handling units, ductwork
and internal spaces from differential pressures in excess of acceptable levels
B. Ready-to-install component which consists of a casing, blades with low-friction bearings,
magnets, and travel stop and sealing parts.
C. Special features
1. Blades made of salt-water resistant AlMg3
2. Robust, maintenance-free construction
3. Maximum pressure loading of 5000 Pa
4. Air leakage with back pressure, in closing direction, to EN 1751, class 4
5. Damper for negative or positive pressure (air extract or discharge)
6. Temperature resistant up to 80 °C
7. Optional temperature resistant construction for up to 200 °C, with Viton seal
8. Maintenance-free DU bearings with Teflon coating, bearing shafts made of stainless
steel
9. Each blade is locked with a factory set permanent magnet
10. Adjustable differential pressure for blade opening: 50 – 1000 Pa, depending on width
D. Materials and surfaces
1. Casing and travel stop (angle section) made of galvanised sheet steel.
2. Blades made of aluminium, material no. AlMg3
3. Blade holders made of stainless steel
4. Blade shafts made of stainless steel
5. Plate of the retaining element made of steel
6. Blade bearings made of metal-polymer composite, with an antifriction lining of PTEE/Pb
7. Neoprene seals
E. Construction
1. Galvanised sheet steel, duct connection without flange holes
F. Technical data
1. Nominal sizes: 200 × 345 to 1200 × 1995 mm
2. Volume flow rate range: 140 – 4790 l/s or 504 – 17244 m³/h at 50 Pa, 2 m/s
3. Adjustable differential pressure range: 50 – 1000 Pa (B > 600 mm: 600 Pa max).
4. Airflow velocity: 2 m/s at 50 Pa.

3.01 PREPARATION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and
follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct
construction and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as
indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch (200 x 200 mm) size for hand access, size for shoulder
access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch (100 x 100 m) for balancing dampers only.
Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at
locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles,
sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and
hinges.
F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with
NFPA 92.
G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct
connections immediately adjacent to the equipment.
I. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections
immediately adjacent to the equipment.
J. For fans developing static pressures of 5.0 inches (1250 Pa) and over, cover flexible
connections with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with metal straps.
K. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct
widths from duct take-off.
L. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
M. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated. Refer to Section
23 3600 - Air Terminal Units.
N. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless
of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.
END OF SECTION

8.18 23 3319 Duct Silencers:

A. Duct Silencers.
B. Cross-Talk Silencers.
C. Acoustic Housings.
D. Ductwork Lagging.
E. Acoustic Louvers.
A. HVAC Ducts and Casings: Connections to silencers.
B. Air Duct Accessories: Flexible duct connections.
C. ASHRAE standards 62 - 2013, 90.1 – 2013.
H. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 14 - Electrical and
I. Volume 6, Architectural Branding Manual. Section 12 - Part 2. D 4 MEP.
J. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
K. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
L. AMCA 302 - Application of Sone Loudness Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices;
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1973 (Reaffirmed 2001).
M. AMCA 303 - Application of Sound Power Level Ratings for Fans; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 1979 (R2008).
N. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and
Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
O. AHRI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space; Air-
Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
P. ASHRAE Std 68 - Laboratory Method of Testing To Determine the Sound Power in a
Duct; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 1997.
Q. ASHRAE (HVAC) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2015.
A. Use acoustical devices to maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed those
listed below.
B. Maintain rooms at following maximum sound levels, in Noise Criteria (NC) as defined by
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications
1. Offices
a. Executive: 25
b. Conference rooms: 25
c. Private: 30
d. Open-plan areas: 35
e. Computer/business machine areas: 40
f. Public circulation: 40
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data, pressure
losses, acoustical performance, layout, and connection details.
B. Design Data: Provide engineering calculations, referenced to specifications and AMCA
301 standards indicating that maximum room sound levels are not exceeded.
C. Test Reports: Indicate dynamic insertion loss and noise generation values of silencers.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to
maintain integrity of sound isolation.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate installation is complete and in accordance with
instructions.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of cross-talk silencers.
B. Design application of duct silencers under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this work.
C. Design application of duct silencers under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this work and licensed the State in which the Project is located.
D. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300 standards and recommendations of
ASHRAE Std 68.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
A. Conform to applicable code for sound levels at property line.

2.01 DUCT SILENCERS
A. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material,
and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick galvanized steel stiffened as required,
with mastic filled lock formed seams, 2 inch (50 mm) long, 11 gage (2.9 mm) slip joints on
both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 24 gage (0.6 mm) thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 4 lb/cu ft (64 kg/cu m) density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.
2.02 CROSS-TALK SILENCERS
A. Description: Duct sections with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill material,
and inner casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar construction.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick galvanized steel with mastic filled lock
formed seams, 3 inch (75 mm) long, 11 gage (2.9 mm) slip joint on both ends.
2.03 ACOUSTIC HOUSINGS
A. Description: Modular panels, including access doors and windows, nominal 4 inches
(100 mm) thick, with filled outer and inner casing. Fabricate and support in accordance with
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 18 gage (1.2 mm) thick galvanized steel stiffened as required,
with mastic filled lock formed seams for internal flange butt joining.
2.04 DUCTWORK LAGGING
A. Acoustic Insulation: 2 inch (50 mm) thick, 3 to 5 lb/cu ft (50 to 80 kg/cu m) density glass
fiber or mineral wool insulation.
B. Covering: sheet lead with surface weight minimum 4 lb/sq ft (20 kg/sq m)
2.05 ACOUSTIC LOUVERS
A. Configuration: 8 inch (200 mm) deep louvers with blades on 45 degree slope; sound
absorbing fill material, and inner surface of perforated sheet metal, heavy channel frame,
birdscreen.
B. Materials:
1. Louvers: 16 gage (1.50 mm) galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat
finish.
2. Louvers: 12 gage (2.50 mm) extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime
coat finish.
3. Inner Surface: Minimum 24 gage (0.6 mm) thick perforated galvanized steel.
6. Birdscreen: 1 inch (25 mm) square wire mesh.
7. Mounting: Interior flat flange.
2.06 RECTANGULAR SOUND ABSORBERS
A. Rectangular sound absorbers shall be made in accordance with the ASHRAE Guide
recommended construction for high pressure rectangular ductwork. Seams shall be lock
formed and mastic filled.
B. Interior partitions for rectangular silencers shall be made of 0.75 mm thick galvanized
perforated steel and the interior configuration shall be straight through passages of
consistently exact dimensions to ensure uniform performance. All interior components of the
sound traps shall be held in place by spot welds not more than 7.5 cm on center.
C. The acoustic filler shall be inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain
the specified acoustic performance, and compression packed to eliminate voids due to
vibration and settling.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Support duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connections, lagged with
leaded vinyl sheet on inlet and outlet. Refer to Section 23 3100 and Section 23 3300.
C. Install cross-talk silencers in wall. Seal wall penetrations.
D. Where indicated, lag ductwork by wrapping with insulation and covering. Apply covering
to be air tight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork.
E. Attach ductwork to acoustic louvers with flexible duct connections. Refer to Section 23
3300.
A. Provide services of an independent testing agency to take noise measurements. Use
meters meeting requirements of ANSI S1.4.
B. After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band sound
measurements over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to mechanical equipment
rooms, duct and pipe shafts, and other critical locations, as directed.
C. Provide one-third octave band measurements of artificial sound sources in areas
indicated as having critical requirements.
D. Submit complete report of test results including sound curves.
3.03 SYSTEMS STARTUP
A. Inspect installation periodically. Prepare and start systems.
3.04 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.19 23 3416 Centrifugal HVAC Fans:

A. Backward inclined centrifugal fans.
B. Forward curved centrifugal fans.
C. Airfoil centrifugal fans.
D. Radial centrifugal fans.
E. Tubular centrifugal fans.
F. Inline centrifugal fans.
G. Vent sets.
H. Motors and drives.
I. Fan accessories.
C. Duct Insulation.
D. Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.
C. ASHRAE standards 62 - 2013, 90.1 – 2013.
K. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International,
Inc.; 2010.
L. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating;
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as
ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
M. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified

N. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
O. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air
P. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
Q. BS 848 Fans for general purpose.
A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA
Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
D. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.
E. Temperature Limit: Maximum 300 degrees F (150 degrees C).
F. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with
specified operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet
and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan
curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and
outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions.
D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,
A. Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.
B. Permanent fans may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is
clean, filters are in place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under
observation.

2.01 BELT DRIVEN CABINET FANS
A. Equipment tags:
1. EFU-AG-STF-1-2
2. EFU-CL-TOI-1
3. EFU-CL-GRB
4. EFU-CL-TOI-2
5. EFU-CL-STO
6. SFU-V-UL-1/../4
B. Forward curved belt drive cabinet fans manufactured from galvanised steel sheet,
internally lined with melamine thermo-acoustic insulation.
C. All models incorporate a double inlet low pressure centrifugal fan mounted on anti-
vibration mounts and flexible coupling at the discharge.
D. Supplied as standard in horizontal discharge (code H) configuration with motor, pulley
and belt assembly on the right hand side of the unit when viewed from the discharge end.
E. Motors
1. All motors are IP55, class F insulation.
2. Electrical supply:
a. Three phase 230/ 400V-50Hz, up to 3 kW. 400V-50Hz, for higher motor powers.
b. Single phase 230V-50Hz, with a maximum of 1,5 kW (CVTB version).
3. All motors up to 2,2 kW are mounted onto the fan casing scroll.
4. All motors above 3 kW are mounted onto an adjoining support frame.
5. All three phase motors are speed controllable by frequency inverter (to be installed in an
external MCC panel).
F. Acoustic insulation of 7 mm thickness flame retardant (M1) melamine foam reducing the
noise level significantly.
G. Flexible coupling at the discharge.
H. Quality finishing, with aluminium corners providing a high robustness.
I. Anti-vibration mounts. The fan is mounted on base frame with silent-blocks to reduce
vibration and noise transmissions to the installation.
2.02 BELT DRIVEN CABINET FANS F400-120 RATED
A. Equipment tags:
1. EFU-V-F1-1
2. EFU-F1-BAT-1
3. EFU-F1-FUT-UPS
4. EFU-V-F1-2
5. EFU-F1-BAT-2
6. EFU-AG-TPSS

7. EFU-GAS-CL-1
8. EFU-V-CL-2
9. EFU-V-UL-1/../4
B. Belt driven cabinet fans designed for smoke extraction in fire conditions and certified
F400-120 (CE marked).
C. The casings are manufactured from heavy gauge galvanised sheet steel.
D. All models incorporate double inlet forward curved centrifugal impellers.
E. Belt-driven transmission system mounted external to the air stream. Motor mounted
within the fan cabinet onto a specific support giving optimal belt tension.
F. Supplied as standard in horizontal discharge (code H) or vertical (code V) configuration
with motor, pulley and belt assembly on the right hand side of the unit when viewed from the
discharge end.
G. Motors
1. All motors are IP55, class F insulation.
2. Electrical supply:Three phase230/ 400V-50Hz, up to 3 kW. 400V-50Hz, for higher motor
powers.
H. The cabinets have fixing points on the corners easing the installation either on the floor
or ceiling.
I. Motor inside the fan casing, providing a smaller size and a higher compacity.
J. Automatically tensioned and maintenance free system.
K. Quality finishing, with aluminium corners providing a high robustness.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23
0548.
C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section 23
3300. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch (25 mm) flex
between ductwork and fan while running.
D. Install fan restraining snubbers; refer to Section 23 0548. Adjust snubbers to prevent
tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.
F. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.
G. Pipe scroll drains to nearest floor drain.
H. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated; refer to
Section 23 3300.

3.03 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.20 23 3433 Air Curtains:

A. Air curtains.
A. Equipment Wiring: Connection to building power.
H. AMCA 220 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtains for Aerodynamic Performance
Ratings; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in this section;
indicate options specified.
1. Manufacturer's instructions: Printed installation instructions for each product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate installation and connection details for air curtains.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's printed instructions for operating and
maintaining air curtain components.
D. Warranty Documents: Issued and executed by manufacturer.
A. Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.
B. Maintain dry, heated storage area for products of this section until installation of
products.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Supply manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and
materials.

2.01 EQUIPMENT TAGS
A. ACU-AG-SAC-01/02
B. ACU-AG-WAC-01-01/02
C. ACU-AG-WAC-02-01/02
2.02 AIR CURTAINS
A. Product Description: Self-contained electrically-operated air curtain for mounting at head
of door openings. Double adjustable airfoil type blade, made of anodized aluminum, with
adjustable discharge angle in both directions.
B. Housing:
1. Material: Galvanized steel.
2. Factory-provided mounting brackets.
3. Finish: Painted epoxy.
4. Color: White.
C. Blower Assembly: Heavy-duty motor;. forward curved centrifugal fans, double inlet,
double width. Thermo contact protection, with five speed selection. Low noise level.
D. Performance: Tested in accordance with AMCA 220.
E. Control panel and IR remote controller, RJ45 plug and 7 m wiring, BACS interface.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that required utilities are in correct location and are of correct capacities for
specified products.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces have sufficient strength to support units.
C. Verify that space is ready for installation of units.
D. Verify clearances required to maintain the units.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install air curtains in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed
B. Maintain clearances required to maintain the units.
C. Ensure proper connection to utilities.
3.03 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.21 23 3514 Dust Collection Equipment:

A. Dust elimination and collection devices.
B. Accessories.
A. Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Fan motors.
B. Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Vibration isolators.
C. Centrifugal HVAC Fans: Supply of centrifugal exhaust fans for placement by this Section.
I. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International,
Inc.; 2010.
J. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating;
K. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
L. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air
Q. NFPA 91 - Standard for Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases, Mists,
and Noncombustible Particulate Solids; National Fire Protection Association; 2015.
R. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
S. SMACNA (ROUND) - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and
T. SMACNA (RIDC) - Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, sizes, weights and point loadings, material
thickness, and locations and sizes of field connections. Submit construction layout and details
for inlet fittings.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature and data indicating rated capacities,
dimensions, weights and point loadings, accessories, electrical characteristics and connection
requirements, wiring diagrams, and location and sizes of field connections.
C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted.
D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and installation instructions.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive
replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Filter Separator Filters: One.
2. Extra Filter Bags: One.
A. Fans:
1. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
2. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
3. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

2.01 SELF CLEANING INERTIAL AIR FILTER (ISF)
A. General.
1. Air cleaners shall be factory fabricated and assembled. Each air cleaner shall consist of
housing, a bleed air manifold, cell bodies, blade packs, bullnoses, and inlet screen. All finished
components are primed and finished with a top coat of gray enamel. The inertila air filter shall
consist of one or more cells depending on airflow and resistance requirements. Individual cells
shall include two removable blade packs and have a maximum center-to-center (width)
dimension of 5” (127 mm) and shall be 24” (610 mm) in length.
B. Housing.
1. Housings shall be constructed of not less than 11-gauge steel. The housing shall be of
all welded construction and equipped with continuous standing flanges around the periphery
of both the air entering and the air exiting sides. Flanges shall have pre-drilled bolt holes to
facilitate field installation.
C. Bleed air manifold.
1. Housings shall be equipped with a bleed air manifold constructed of not less than 11-
gauge steel all welded steel construction and equipped with continuous standing flange with
pre-drilled bolt holes to facilitate field connection. Manifolds shall be sized to provide uniform
airflow through each cell’s dust bin for proper balance and dust removal.
D. Blade packs.
1. Blade packs shall be constructed of not less than 20-gauge steel with Heli-arc welded
construction. Blade pack vanes shall be individually formed and welded. Vanes shall be
arranged to provide a circuitous path to the air flow and redirect the air toward the clean air
outlet. The air passageway between adjacent blades shall have a minimum width of 0.19”
(4.83 mm). Blade packs shall be removable to allow for inspection or service.
E. Bullnose.
1. The bullnose shall be aerodynamically formed of 16-gauge steel to provide proper air
entry. One bullnose will be required for each two blade pack to properly direct air to each
tapered cell. Bullnose clamps shall be constructed of 0.19” (4.83 mm) steel and shall be
retained by 5/16” threaded stock welded to the center divider. Center dividers shall be
constructed of 16-gauge steel.
F. Bleed slot.
1. Bleed slots shall be an integral part of each dust bin. The bleed slot/dust bin shall be
constructed of not less than 16-gauge steel. The bleed slot shall have a rounded entry
configuration to minimize obstruction or plugging under heavy dust concentrations.
G. Inlet screen.
1. Inlet screens shall consist of a 26-gauge, four-mesh, galvanized hardware cloth
integrally supported by a double layered 16- gauge galvanized steel frame. Inlet screens shall
be bolted to the housing.
H. Efficiency
1. When tested in accordance with the general requirements outlined in SAE J726, the air
cleaner efficiency shall not be less than 93% on Standardized Coarse Air Cleaner Test Dust at
a clean airflow rate of 1000 CFM (1700 m3/h) per single cell using a bleed rate equaling 10%
of inlet airflow. Inlet to clean air outlet resistance shall not exceed 1.20" w g. (0.30 kPa) at
1000 CFM (1700 m3/h) clean airflow.
2.02 SAND TRAP LOUVERS (STL)
A. Description
1. Sand trap louvres for the protection of air intakes exposed to extreme levels of sand
pollution. To separate large dust particles / sand at low air velocities, to be self cleaning and
maintenance free. To be used as initial filter to protect conventional plant filters from excessive
dust loading.
B. Materials
1. Basic construction aluminum. Bird screen galvanized steel mesh 12 x 12 x 1 mm. For all
external application powder coat finish to BS EN 12206-1:2004.
C. Louvre Fixing
1. Louvre rear section to be site drilled for fixings supplied by others.
2. Sand trap louvers with H between 1050 and 1949 integral sand chutes are fitted, H
between 1950 and 3900 they are split on height and supplied with additional sand chute, loose
for fitting on site by others. The additional support for reinforcement and assembly of the sand
trap louver combination is to be supplied on site by others. Sand trap louvers with B = 1950 to
3900 are also split into end section left, end section right and middle if required. The vertical
joint between two end sections of sand trap louver is capped on site by others with a loose
channel section supplied.
D. Construction
1. Two rows of vertically arranged channels sections to form a labyrinth for the air path.
Base frame has drainage holes for the sand ensuring the louvre is self cleaning and
maintenance free.
E. Weight
1. Net weight without packing
2. Aluminum approx. 18 kg per m2 of area (B x H)
3. Steel approx. 27 kg per m2 of area (B x H)
F. Filtration
1. The filtration performance is dependant on the dust type and the velocity of the air:
Particle Size Filtration Efficiency in %
Range at 1.0 m/s at 2.0 m/s
350-700 90 70
75-700 60 approx.30

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 91 except as indicated.
C. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings
lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.
D. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 23
0548.
E. Install flexible connections at fan inlet and discharge. Ensure metal bands of connectors
are parallel with minimum 1 inch (25 mm) flex between ductwork and fan while running.
F. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal
cap with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.
G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
3.03 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.22 23 3600 Air Terminal Units:

A. Constant volume terminal units.
B. Hydronic Piping: Connections to heating coils.
C. Hydronic Specialties: Connections to heating coils.
D. Convection Heating and Cooling Units: Air Coils.
E. HVAC Ducts and Casings.
F. Air Duct Accessories.
G. Air Outlets and Inlets.
H. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Thermostats and Actuators.
I. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
H. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems;
I. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials
used in fabrication. Include catalog performance ratings that indicate air flow, static pressure,
and NC designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used in
fabrication, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1. Include schedules listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of second
through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1 to 4 inch wg (250 to 1000 Pa).
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging details, and
service clearances required.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for
resetting constant volume regulators.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Motors: One of each type and size.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.

A. Ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for connection to single
duct, central air systems, with pneumatic variable volume controls, electric heating coils.
B. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and air flow indicator.
Include unit nominal air flow, maximum factory set airflow, minimum factory set air flow, and
coil type.
2.02 CONSTANT AIR FLOW CONTROLLER (CC)
A. Rectangular volume flow controllers for constant air volume systems, mechanical self-
powered, without external power supply, suitable for supply or extract air, available in 19
nominal sizes.
B. Ready-to-commission unit consists of the casing containing a damper blade with low-
friction bearings, bellows, external cam plate and leaf spring.
C. Volume flow controllers without actuators are factory set to a reference volume flow rate
(customers can set the required volume flow rate on site).
D. Both ends suitable for the connection of air duct profiles.
E. Casing air leakage to EN 1751, class C (B + H ≤400, class B)
F. Special features
1. Volume flow rate can be set using an external scale; no tools required
2. High volume flow rate control accuracy
3. Any installation orientation
4. Correct operation even under unfavourable upstream or downstream conditions (1.5 B
straight section required upstream and 0.5 B required downstream)
G. Materials and surfaces
1. Casing and damper blade made of galvanised sheet steel
2. Leaf spring made of stainless steel
3. Polyurethane bellows
4. Plain bearings with PTFE coating
H. EN-D type
1. Acoustic cladding made of galvanised sheet steel
2. Rubber profile for the insulation of structure-borne noise
3. Lining is mineral wool
I. Mineral wool
1. To EN 13501, fire rating class A2, non-combustible
2. RAL quality mark RAL-GZ 388
3. Biosoluble and hence hygienically safe according to the German TRGS 905 (Technical
Rules for Hazardous Substances) and EU directive 97/69/EG
J. Construction
1. Galvanised sheet steel
2. P1: Powder-coated, silver grey (RAL 7001)
K. Technical data
1. Nominal sizes: 200 × 100 to 600 × 600 mm
2. Volume flow rate range: 40 to 3360 l/s or 144 to 12096 m³/h
3. Volume flow rate control range: approx. 25 – 100 % of the nominal volume flow rate
4. Differential pressure: 50 – 1000 Pa

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling components.
C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductwork.
D. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 3100.
E. Provide minimum of 5 ft (1.5 m) of 1 inch (25 mm) thick lined ductwork downstream of
units.
F. Install heating coils in accordance with Section 23 8200.
G. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range
modulation from 100 percent of design flow to 0 percent full flow. Set units with heating coils
for minimum 50 percent full flow.
3.03 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.23 23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets VAC:

A. Diffusers.
B. Registers/grilles.
I. Volume 6, Architectural Branding Manual. Section 12 - Part 2. D 4 MEP.
K. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets;
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (RA
2011).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and
inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets
and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.
B. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of typical interior ceiling module with supply and return air outlets.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

2.01 SLOT DIFFUSERS (SD)
A. Adjustable slot diffuser with aesthetically designed face sections, suitable for installation
in suspended ceiling systems, comprising the diffuser face in 1- to 4-slot configuration, with
integral edge flange.
B. End caps either as end plates or end angles, with incorporated air control blades, which
are set at the factory but can be adjusted by the user at any time to enable adaptation to the
prevailing conditions.
C. The slot diffuser has a variable neck length and the diffuser face can optionally be fitted
to the plenum box on site, by means of a concealed slot fixture.
D. The plenum box is available with an inner lining of 20 mm in thickness, faced on one
side with scrim, with circular side entry spigot with or without sealing lip and four suspension
points for suspension of the complete assembly from the ceiling slab, with volume control
damper which is adjustable on the face of the diffuser.
E. Materials:
1. Diffuser face and end caps consist of extruded aluminium sections, natural anodised
finish E6-C-0 or powder-coated in RAL colours.
2. The air control blades are produced in black plastic (polystyrene) as standard, similar to
RAL 9005, or on request in white (similar to RAL 9010).
3. The plenum box consists of sendzimir galvanised sheet steel, lining in mineral wool
faced on one side with scrim, sealing lip in rubber.
2.02 SWIRL DIFFUSERS (WD)
A. Adjustable swirl diffusers in square or circular face plates with swirling horizontal
discharge of supply air with high induction.
B. For air change rates up to approximately 30 per hour.
C. Consisting of a pressed front face with radially angled air discharge sections
incorporating adjustable directional air control blades.
D. Supplied with plenum box incorporating special internal control elements, complete with
circular top or side entry spigots (with volume control damper, lip seal or test connection for
reference pressure measurement, sheathed cable and test nipple).
E. Plenum box has holes in the top return edge for suspension or, when supplied, can be
fixed by hanging brackets. The face plate can be fitted and removed by means of the centre
fixing screw.
F. Material:
1. The face plate is in galvanised sheet steel. The surfaces are pre-treated and powder
coated white (RAL 9010).
2. The control blades are made from Polystyrol (PS 476 L), with black (similar to RAL 9005)
as standard or white (similar to RAL 9010) on request.
3. The plenum box is made from galvanised sheet steel, the rubber lip seal.
2.03 SUPPLY GRILLE (HORIZONTAL BLADES) (SG)
A. Grilles suitable for supply air, preferably in walls, sills and ducts, consisting of the
perimeter front border (border sections mitre-cut, seamlessly joined together) with peripheral
seal and front blades.
B. Individually adjustable, horizontal front blades.

C. Rear assemblies/volume flow adjustment components. To optimise the air distribution,
rear assemblies are fitted. These can be adjusted from the grille face without its removal.
1. Set of adjustable rear air pattern control blades which are installed at 90° to the front
blades.
2. Opposed blade action flow rate controller with screw driver adjustment.
D. Materials.
1. Grille face from aluminium extruded section, natural anodised finish, E6-C-0.
2. Rear assemblies made from formed or profiled steel sheet, phosphate treated, stove
enamelled black (RAL 9005) using electro-dipcoat process, resistant to saturated environment
for a minimum of 100 hours without deterioration (DIN 50017).
E. Installation: using an ER subframe and concealed screw fix, duct opening equals
nominal size (L x H).
2.04 SUPPLY FLOOR GRILLE (FS)
A. Floor supply grilles, consisting of the perimeter front border (border sections mitre-cut,
seamlessly joined together) with peripheral seal and front blades.
B. Suitable for installation in floors, fixed horizontal blades, core completely removable by
use of the special spring clips, subframe with builder’s cleats.
1. Set of adjustable rear air pattern control blades which are installed at 90° to the front
blades.
D. Materials.
2.05 RETURN/EXHAUST GRILLE (HORIZONTAL BLADES) (RG)
A. Grilles suitable for return air, preferably in walls, sills and ducts, consisting of the
perimeter front border (border sections mitre-cut, seamlessly joined together) with peripheral
seal and front blades.
B. Individually adjustable, horizontal front blades.
D. Materials.
E. Installation: using an ER subframe and concealed screw fix, duct opening equals
nominal size (L x H).
2.06 LINEAR JET NOZZLE (LN)
A. Linear jet nozzles type DUL are specially designed for their application in areas with
excessive air flow (and slot diffusers installation is not recommended), with large distances to
the occupied zone and where units are required to achieve high iinduction capacities.
B. The direction of the air stream from the type DUL jet nozzle can be adjusted within the
range of +/- 30º.
C. On request plenum boxes are available with different entry spigots (diameter and
quantity) in order to meet noise and pressure drop requirements of the air conditioning system.
D. Connections
1. Standard spigot diameter 200 mm (one per plenum box)
2. Other spigots diameters 150, 220 and 250 mm, on request
3. Also available with two spigots per plenum box.
2.07 DISC VALVES (LV)
A. Circular disc valves, suitable for supply and extract air, comprising valve ring with
peripheral seal, central disc with threaded spindle and locknut and installation subframe with
volume flow rate adjustment by rotating the central disc.
B. Material.
1. Face sections sheet steel with electrostatic powder coating (colour similar to RAL 9010,
thickness 60 μm), galvanised steel threaded spindle and lock nut, installation subframe
galvanized steel sheet.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers,
despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
3.02 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.24 23 4000 HVAC Air Cleaning Devices:

A. Ionization units.
A. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2012.
B. UL 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
C. Classified as plenum rated per UL 2043.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and change-out procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation, changing, and
periodic cleaning.

2.01 ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS
A. The in duct ionization system is intended to be mounted in the supply air duct of a
heating, cooling or ventilating system. A mounting bracket is included.
B. Access to the unit’s control panel is provided.
C. The unit is intended to operate only when airflow is present.
D. Power to the ionization unit should be interlocked with fan operation or controlled via an
air pressure switch.
E. The contractor will calibrate the ionization setting to attain ion level readings of between
500 and 1,500 –ions/cm3.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene gaskets.
C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.
END OF SECTION
8.25 23 6313 Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers:

A. Refrigerant condenser package.
B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Controls and control connections.
D. Refrigerant piping and connections.
E. Motor starters.
F. Electrical power connections.
C. Refrigerant Piping.
G. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-
Source Heat Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
H. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
I. ASHRAE Std 20 - Methods of Testing for Rating Remote Mechanical-Draft Air Cooled
Refrigerant Condensers; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.; 1997 (R2006).
J. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;
2013, Including All Addenda (ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Std 90.1).
K. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
L. UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical;
A. Motor: Refer to Section 23 0513.
B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical requirements,
and wiring diagrams.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loading,
required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts
showing condenser, refrigeration compressors, cooling coils, refrigerant piping and
accessories required for complete system.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's complete installation instructions.
D. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant
used, showing compliance with specified requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance instructions,
parts lists, controls, and accessories.
1. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each unit.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 5 years of experience.
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and
transporting units.
B. Protect units on site from physical damage. Protect coils.

2.01 EQUIPMENT TAGS
A. CRAC-OU-AG-TPSS-01/02
B. CRAC-OU-AG-TTP
C. CRAC-OU-CL-SGN
D. CRAC-OU-CL-MTE
A. Provide packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit, suitable for outdoor use consisting
of casing, condensing coil and fans, integral sub-cooling coil liquid accumulator.
B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL 207. Testing shall
be in accordance with ASHRAE Std 20.
C. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficient Rating (EER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP)
not less than prescribed by ASHRAE Std 90.1, in combination with compressor units.
2.03 CASING

A. House components in welded steel frame with steel panels with weather resistant,
baked enamel finish.
B. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full
opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door is opened.
C. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners.
2.04 CONDENSER COILS
A. Coils: Copper fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling
circuits. Air test under water to 2900 kPa (425 psig), and vacuum dehydrate. Seal with holding
charge of nitrogen.
B. Coil Guard: Expanded metal with lint screens.
C. Configuration: Single refrigeration circuit with receiver.
2.05 FANS AND MOTORS
A. Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on
discharge, equipped with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside of
casing, or
B. Horizontal discharge, double width, double inlet forward curved centrifugal type
condenser fans, equipped with roller or ball bearings with grease fittings extended to outside
of casing, V-belt drive with belt guard.
C. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split capacitor or
3 phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built-in current and thermal overload
protection; refer to Section 23 0513.
2.06 CONTROLS
A. Provide factory wired and mounted control panel, containing fan motor starters, fan
cycling thermostats, compressor interlock, and control transformer.
B. Provide controls to permit operation down to 53 degrees C ambient temperature.
C. Provide thermostat to cycle fan motors in response to outdoor ambient temperature.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 2717.
C. Install units on vibration isolation.
D. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system. Refer to Section 23 2300. Comply
with ASHRAE Std 15.
E. Provide cooling season start-up, winter season shut-down service, for first year of
operation.
F. Shut-down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines are to
remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first cooling season.
3.02 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION
8.26 23 6426 Rotary-Screw Water Chillers:

A. Factory-assembled packaged chiller.
B. Charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Controls and control connections.
D. Chilled water connections.
E. Starters.
F. Variable frequency drives.
G. Electrical power connections.
C. Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
F. Hydronic Piping.
G. Hydronic Specialties.
H. Hydronic Pumps.
I. Panel Boards.
J. Equipment Wiring.
G. AHRI 550/590 - Standard for Performance Rating of Water-Chilling Packages Using the
Vapor Compression Cycle; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2011.
H. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc; 2013 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std 15).
I. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc;
2013, Including All Addenda, (ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Std 90.1).
J. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
A. Coordination: Coordinate physical size, weight and location of major pieces of
equipment to be installed. Notify Architect of any major deviations from the equipment
originally specified prior to ordering equipment.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories, electrical
requirements and wiring diagrams.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings,
required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate equipment, piping and
connections, valves, strainers, and thermostatic valves required for complete system.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that components furnished but not produced by
manufacturer meet or exceed manufacturer's requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Performance Data: Indicate energy input versus cooling load output from
0 to 100 percent of full load at specified and minimum condenser water temperature for water-
cooled chillers and at specified and minimum outdoor air temperature for air-cooled chillers.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's complete installation instructions.
F. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start-up instructions, maintenance data, parts
lists, controls, and accessories; include trouble-shooting guide.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in
1. Extra Refrigerant: One container.
2. Extra Lubricating Oil: One container.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. When required, provide certification of inspection for conformance to requirements of
authority having jurisdiction.
A. Conform to manufacturer's written installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
B. Deliver units to the job site completely assembled and charged with refrigerant and oil by
manufacturer.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide minimum Five year warranty to include coverage for
materials only for compressor.

2.01 GENERAL

A. Equipment tags: CHI-AA-01/02.
B. Supply and install where shown in the drawings packaged type air cooled screw water
chillers with at least two refrigerant circuits, having capacities as shown in the drawings,
mounted on vibration isolators with a minimum efficiency of 90 %. Packaged chillers shall be
completely factory assembled on a continuous structure steel base and shall be individually
performance tested in the factory, as a complete assembly, at the job design condition. Test
certificates shall be submitted for consultant’s approval.
C. Chillers shall be Eurovent certified and shall comply with EC requirements for machinery,
electromagnetic and pressure equipment directives.
D. Chillers shall be from European Union (EU) or USA.
E. Chiller sound levels shall not exceed 70 dBa at a radial distance of 10M from the sound
source under free field conditions.
F. Contractor shall provide all lining materials, silencers, flexible connections, compressors
sound attenuating enclosures (if needed) for achieving the above noise levels.
G. Slide valve mechanism shall provide infinite step control capable of unloading the chiller
down to 15% of chiller full load capacity. Infinite step modulation should allow the chiller to
exactly match the required load and maintain chilled water supply temperature within +/-1/2
degree F of the set point.
H. The Air cooled chiller shall be able to work up to 53Deg C without tripping.
I. Start-up shall be carried by manufacturer’s factory trained engineer.
2.02 COMPRESSORS
A. Semi-hermetic, direct drive screw compressors operating on R-134a with twin screws,
capacity control slide valve, rolling element bearings, differential refrigerant pressure oil pump
and oil heater. In case of mechanical oil pump, 10 years warranty shall be provided for the oil
pump.
B. Compressor speed shall not exceed 3000 RPM. Motor shall be suction gas cooled, two
pole squirrel cage induction type.
C. Gear driven compressors shall not be approved unless manufacturer provides 10 year
warranty (including parts and labor) on the gear set and bearings.
D. Compressor must start unloaded for soft start on motors. Compressor shall be designed
for star-delta starting; each compressor shall be provided with factory wired and tested start-
delta starter.
E. Compressor power factor shall not be lower than 0.88. If the power factor is less than
0.88, power factor correction capacitor shall be supplied, installed, tested and guaranteed by
the chiller supplier.
F. All high-speed items shall be made of steel. Composite materials are not acceptable for
these items.
G. Oil separator and filtration devices shall be provided separate from the compressor.
2.03 EVAPORATOR
A. Shell and tube heat exchanger with internally finned copper tubes, roller expanded into
the tube sheets. The evaporator shall be designed and stamped in accordance with the
European P.E.D. code for pressure vessel. Design working pressure shall be 14 bars on both
refrigerant side and on waterside.
B. Evaporator shall be designed to operate properly and efficiently with a refrigerant charge
of 0.3 Kg / Kw of nominal cooling capacity.
C. Two layers of 19mm (total 38 mm) thermal insulation of closed cell polyvinylchloride (k =
0.26) shall be provided on the evaporator. Water connections shall be grooved for Victaulic
couplings.
2.04 CONDENSER COIL
A. Condenser coils shall be of 3/8” O.D. seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to
plate type Copper fins of max pitch of 16 FPI. Additionally, the fins shall be coated with high
quality coating (E-KOTE or equivalent coat with 5000 hours resistance to salt spray test as per
ASTM B117 standard). Perforated fins shall not be acceptable. Fins thickness shall be 0.14
mm as a minimum. Fins shall have full self-spacing collars and completely cover the tubes.
Condenser coil shall be factory leak tested at 35 bars. Micro-channel condenser coil is not
acceptable.
B. A separate sub-cooling coil integral with main condenser coil to be provided for each
refrigerant circuit.
C. Fans shall be propeller type of the airfoil shape, made of non-corrosive composite
material, placed to have uniform air distribution and shall be statically and dynamically
balanced for minimum noise and vibration. Fan speed shall not exceed 920 rpm.
D. Fan motors shall be 3 phase type, suitable for outdoor application and specified ambient.
They shall be tropicalized totally enclosed class “F” insulation and with permanently lubricated
ball bearings and built-in thermal overload protection.
E. Heavy gauge protection guards are to be provided for each condenser fan.
2.05 REFRIGERANT CIRCUITS
A. Each chiller shall have at least two completely independent refrigerant circuits with
maximum two screw compressors per circuit.
B. Each refrigerant circuit shall include, suction and discharge service valves, liquid line
shut-off valve, high side pressure relief valve, removable core filter drier, charging port, liquid
line sight glass and an electronic expansion valve.
C. Full refrigerant charge and oil charge shall be filled in the factory.
2.06 CHILLER CONSTRUCTION
A. Chiller casing and electrical panels shall be made of galvanized steel 1.5mm thick
mounted on a welded structural steel base, entirely painted. The paint system applied on the
metal sheets of the casing shall withstand 650 hours salt spray test.
B. Electrical panels shall be fully mounted and wired in the factory, weatherproof and with
full opening access doors.
C. Base frame shall integrate accessible and appropriate rigging points for an easy and
safe handling at job site.
2.07 CONTROL PANEL
A. Microprocessor-based unit control module utilizing the adaptive control concept shall be
housed in a weatherproof enclosure with removable plates to allow for customer connection of
power wiring and remote interlocks. All controls including sensors shall be factory mounted
and tested prior to shipment.
B. Clear language display screen shall be mounted on the unit panel. The digital display
shall be read on the unit without opening any control panel door.
C. Panel shall have a digital display to indicate operating data points including leaving
chilled water set point, current limit set point, entering and leaving chilled water temperature,
evaporator and condenser refrigerant pressures and temperatures and percent RLA output for
each compressor.
D. Unit protective functions shall include, but not limited to:
1. Loss of chilled water flow / low chilled water temperature
2. Evaporator freezing
3. Low and high refrigerant pressure
4. Reverse rotation
5. Compressor starting and running over-current
6. Phase loss / phase imbalance and phase reversal
7. Loss of oil flow
E. Controls shall have the ability to display, among others, the following readouts and
diagnostics:
1. Low chilled water temperature protection
2. High and low refrigerant pressure protection
3. Phase reversal / unbalance / single phasing and over / under voltage protection
4. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature
5. Condenser fan sequencing to automatically cycle fans in response to load, expansion
valve pressure and condenser pressure to optimize unit efficiency
6. Oil pressure control
F. The unit controller shall utilize the following components to automatically take action to
prevent unit shut down due to abnormal operating conditions which will perform as follows:
1. High pressure switch that automatically unloads the compressor to help prevent a high
condenser pressure trip
2. Motor load control, set at 95% of compressor RLA, that will automatically unload the
compressor to help prevent an over-current trip. Each compressor shall be protected
individually
3. Low pressure switch that automatically unloads the compressor to help prevent a low
evaporator temperature trip
G. In any of the above cases, the chiller should keep in operating in an unloaded state and
will continue to produce some chilled water in an attempt to meet the cooling load. However,
if the chiller reaches the trip-out limits, the chiller control will take the chiller off-line for
protection and a manual reset will be required. Once the "near-trip" condition is corrected, the
chiller will return to normal operation and can then produce full load cooling.
H. The unit controller shall provide the following operational controls:
1. Five minute start-to-start and two minutes stop-to-start to prevent compressor from short
cycling
2. Pull down limit control of chilled water temperature drop to 1 degree F per minute. This
load limit control is meant to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature to
prevent nuisance trip-out
3. High ambient unloader pressure controller that unloads compressors to keep head
pressure under control and help prevent high pressure nuisance trip-outs
2.08 STARTERS

A. Unit mounted star-delta compressor motor starter shall be housed in a weatherproof
enclosure with IP54 protection. Direct-on-line starter is not acceptable.
B. Starter panel shall be provided with 3-phase current transformer for motor overload
protection.
C. Single source power supply shall be provided. Dual power supply connection is not
acceptable.
D. Factory mounted electrical power meter shall be provided.
2.09 CHILLER PLANT CONTROL
A. Provide standard commercialized application software to properly sequence the chiller
plant to minimize energy use. Site developed code is acceptable with the additional provision
of training manuals and access to make on site changes by the local operator or servicing
contractor without the intervention of the software programmer. This application shall perform
according to the sequence of operations, and contain the following functions:
1. Deliver the specified chilled water temperature at all times.
2. The ability to control multiple chillers of any type including Centrifugal, HelliRotor, Scroll,
Reciprocating and Absorption machines as detailed in the sequence of operations.
3. Sequence chillers to maintain necessary chilled water temperature and maintain
efficiency.
4. This application shall be able to control both constant and variable flow systems; parallel,
series and decoupled piping configurations, as well as the pumping systems associated with
them.
5. Diagnostics/Protection The chiller plant application program shall be able to integrate
individual chiller diagnostics into control action decisions.
6. Event Processing - All chiller plant control and status events shall be recorded, at the
operator’s selection, in the building management system event log to facilitate troubleshooting.
7. Alarm Indications - The chiller plant control status screens shall display chiller plant and
individual chiller alarm messages.
B. The BAS contractor shall use an Open Standard gateway to provide the chiller points
required to achieve the functionality outlined in the sequence of operation. The BAS contractor
shall provide and pay for all necessary material and labor to achieve the interface, including
but not limited to the chiller manufacturer’s gateway and necessary programming.
C. Control Strategies - The chiller plant control software shall perform the following control
strategies:
1. System Scheduling The chiller plant control software shall start the chiller system
based on a time of day schedule and ambient temperature. An override Input will allow the
operator to manually override chiller system operation.
2. Chiller Start-up Sequence The chiller plant control software will start and stop system
water pumps and chillers based upon the loading of the operating chillers, as detailed in the
sequence of operations.
3. Add/Subtract Chiller Control - The application software shall be password protected and
allow the operator access to adjustable time delays on add/subtract requests to prevent
excessive chiller cycling. The criteria for adding and subtracting chillers shall be controlled as
follows:
a. Add Control shall be based on the system chilled water setpoint and the system
chilled water supply temperature.
b. Subtract Control shall be based on either the system chilled water delta T or
chilled water flow, as selected by the operator.
4. Chiller Rotation - The operator shall be able to designate normal, base, peak and swing
chillers to increase system efficiency and equalize chiller run time. Manual or automatic
rotation of the chiller sequence shall be allowed. Rotation time interval shall be operator
adjustable. Re-designation of chillers shall be part of the standard application, and not require
programmer intervention
5. Chiller Soft Start The chiller plant control software shall provide a user adjustable
loading time at system start up to limit system electrical demand during chilled water loop
pulldown.
6. System Status Display The chiller plant control software shall provide operating status
for the system. The display shall include all points indicated in the points list and any others
required to achieve the sequence of operation.
7. Diagnostics/Protection The chiller plant control program shall be able to integrate
individual chiller diagnostics into control action decisions. This shall also include the ability to
designate chillers as being in maintenance mode (hence unavailable for sequencing) to avoid
generating sequencing alarms.
8. Event Processing - All chiller plant control and status events shall be recorded, at the
operator’s selection, in the building management system event log to facilitate troubleshooting.
9. System Security - The chiller plant control system shall allow program security to be
designated for each operator with a choice of the following functions:
a) View chiller plant status
b) Change chiller plant status
c) View chiller plant setpoints
d) Change chiller plant setpoints
10. Alarm Indications - The chiller plant control status screens shall display chiller plant and
individual chiller alarm messages.
11. Chiller Failure Recovery - Upon sensing a chiller failure the chiller plant control software
shall lockout that chiller and pump and immediately initiate the start of the next chiller in the
rotation sequence. The chiller plant control program will retry chillers (an operator adjustable
number of tries) if all chillers have been marked as failed.
12. Power Failure Recovery: A rapid powerfail recovery capability returns the chiller plant to
its last state (before the building controller lost power) as quickly as possible after the building
controller powers up.
D. Provide a color graphical representation of each chiller, separate graphics for chilled
water and condenser water schematic piping diagrams, and separate graphic for the
distribution pumping set, indicating all temperatures and status of all equipment. The building
automation system graphical display shall include all points indicated in the points list and any
others required to achieve the sequence of operation.
2.10 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings,
required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Indicate accessories where
required for complete system
B. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, specialties and accessories,
electrical requirements and wiring diagrams

C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions
2.11 CHILLER FACTORY TEST
A. The Chiller shall be subjected to witness test, in an Eurovent certified lab, by the
Engineer representative and Consultant performance testing and simulation at design ambient
conditions at factory before shipment is required, run test alone is not acceptable.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Align chiller package on steel or concrete foundations.
C. Install units on vibration isolators.
D. Connect to electrical service.
E. Connect to chilled water piping.
F. Arrange piping for easy dismantling to permit tube cleaning and removal.
3.02 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Perform factory startup of the chiller by factory trained and authorized servicing
technicians confirming equipment has been correctly installed prior to equipment becoming
operational and covered under the manufacturer's warranty.
B. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil if not completely factory charged.
C. Demonstrate system operations and verify specified performance.
A. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.
B. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.
2. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
3.06 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.27 23 7313 Modular Central-Station Air-Handling Units:

A. Factory fabricated assembly of modular sections consisting of housed centrifugal fans
with belt drives, coils, filters, and other necessary modules to perform one or more of the
functions of circulating, cleaning, cooling, dehumidification, and mixing of air with construction
suitable for indoor or outdoor applications.
A. Plumbing Piping: Equipment drains.
B. Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
C. Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
E. Air Duct Accessories: Flexible duct connections.
F. Centrifugal HVAC Fans.
G. Panel boards.
B. AHRI standards (Air conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute).
C. Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS2014).
D. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 13 - Mechanical,
E. Volume 6, Employer’s Requirements, Design specifications. Section 14 - Electrical and
F. Volume 6, Architectural Branding Manual. Section 12 - Part 2. D 4 MEP.
G. AHRI 260 - Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment; 2011.
H. AHRI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; Air-
Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2001 (R2011).
I. AHRI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units; Air-Conditioning, Heating,
and Refrigeration Institute; 2009.
J. AHRI 1060 I-P - Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery
Ventilation Equipment; 2011.
K. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International,
Inc.; 2010.
L. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating;
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as
ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
M. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
N. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc; 2007.
O. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating; 2012.
P. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and
Q. AMCA 611 - Certified Ratings Program for Airflow Measurement Stations; 2010.
R. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; 2012.
S. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation For Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; 2013.
T. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings; 2013, Including All Addenda (ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Std 90.1).
U. ASTM B177/B177M - Standard Guide for Engineering Chromium Electroplating; 2011.
V. ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance
of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers; 2013.
W. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
X. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
2015.
Y. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
Z. UL 705 Standard for power ventilators.
A. Coordinate the work with other trades for installation of roof mounted air handling units
on roof curbs.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of
C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Published Literature: Indicate dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, gages and
finishes of materials, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
2. Filters: Data for filter media, filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
3. Fans: Performance and fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power,
RPM.
4. Sound Power Level Data: Fan outlet and casing radiation at rated capacity.
5. Electrical Requirements: Power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring, clearly indicating factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances,
construction details, field connection details, and electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
C. Samples: Submit two of each type of replacement filter media with frame.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions.
E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, filter replacement, motor and
drive replacement, spare parts lists, and wiring diagrams.
1. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each unit.
2. Extra Filters: One set for each unit.
A. Accept products on site in factory-fabricated protective containers, with factory-installed
shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
B. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle
carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
C. Do not operate units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and
fan has been test run under observation.

2.01 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU) WITH ECONOMIZER SECTION
A. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B. Tags:
1. AHU-PL-PLT-1-01
2. AHU-PL-PLT-1-02
3. AHU-PL-PLT-2-01
4. AHU-PL-PLT-2-02
5. AHU-CL-CLH-1
6. AHU-CL-CLH-2.
7. AHU-AG-SAC
C. EUROVENT certified.
D. Components:
1. Casing construction.
2. Fan section.
3. Coil section.
4. Filter section.
5. Damper section.
6. Airflow measurement.
7. Silencer section.
8. Access section.
9. Factory mounted electrical panel, for general AHU power supply (except for fans, with
power supply directly from MCC).
E. CASING CONSTRUCTION
1. Full Perimeter Base Rail:
a. Construct of galvanized steel.
b. Provide base rail of sufficient height to raise unit for external trapping of condensate
drain pans. Base frame made of U-shape profiles of galvanized and cold rolled steel 3 mm
thick.
2. Casing:
a. Self-supporting frame of painted and extruded aluminum profile.
b. Provide mid-span, no through metal, internal thermal bridge break.
c. Sandwich type panels 50 mm thick: with galvanized metal sheet 1 mm thick (inner) and
pre-lacquered metal sheet 1 mm thick (outer).
d. Clasification according to standard EN-1886:
a. Casing strength D2
b. Casing air leakage L1
c. Filter leakage F9
d. Thermal transmittance T2
e. Thermal bridging factor TB2.
e. Panels leveled to the self-supporting frame forming flat interior surfaces suitable for
cleaning purposes.
3. Access Doors:
a. Construction, thermal and air pressure performance same as casing.
b. Provide surface mounted handles on hinged, swing doors.
4. Unit Flooring: Construct with sufficient strength to support expected people and
equipment loads associated with maintenance activities.
5. Casing Leakage: Seal all joints and provide airtight access doors so that air leakage
does not exceed one percent of design flow at the specified casing pressure.
6. Insulation:
a. Rockwool thermal and acoustic insulation, thickness 50 mm.
b. Completely fill all panel cavities in all directions preventing voids and settling.
7. Drain Pan Construction:
a. Provide cooling coil sections with an insulated, double wall, stainless steel drain pan
complying with ASHRAE 62.1 for indoor air quality and sufficiently sized to collect all
condensate.
b. Slope in two planes to promote positive drainage and eliminate stagnate water
conditions.
c. Locate outlet of sufficient diameter at lowest point of pan to prevent overflow at normal
operating conditions.
d. Provide threaded drain connections constructed of drain pan material, extended
sufficient distance beyond the base to accommodate field installed, condensate drain trapping.
8. Louvers: Adjustable, of galvanized steel, 100 mm (4 inch) deep with plenum, nylon
bearings, 13 mm (1/2 inch) mesh, 1.0 mm (0.04 inch) galvanized wire bird screen in aluminum
frame, and bearing. Furnish adjustable louvers with hollow vinyl bulb edging on blades and
foam side stops to limit leakage to maximum 2 percent at 1 kPa (4 inch wg) differential
pressure when sized for 10 m/s (2000 fpm) face velocity.
9. Lighting:
a. Provide factory mounted, water and dust resistant LED fixture(s) where shown on the
Drawings with the following characteristics:
a. Non-ferrous metal housing.
b. Glass or polycarbonate lens.
c. Factory wired to a single switch within factory provided service module.
d. Instant on white light with minimum 8000 hour service life.
b. Provide factory installed service module including GFCI receptacle independent from
load side; designed to receive power from field supplied 120 volt source.
10. Finish:
a. Indoor Units:
a. Pre-enamelled interior sheet and painted exterior sheet, for high corrosion resistance.
b. Color: Manufacturer's standard color.
F. FAN SECTION
1. Type: Backward curved, aerofoil impeller, single width, double inlet, centrifugal belt-
driven type fan. Licensed to bear the AMCA seal. Refer to Section 23 3416.
2. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with DIN 24166. Tests and procedures
performed in accordance with AMCA Publication 211.
3. Sound Ratings: noise measurements in accordance with DIN 45635-38. Induct method
for the discharge specified in DIN EN ISO 5136. Envelope method for the inlet specified in DIN
45635-1 and -38.
4. Bearings: Self-aligning, grease lubricated, with lubrication fittings extended to exterior of
casing with plastic tube and grease fitting rigidly attached to casing.
5. Mounting: Locate fan and motor internally on welded steel base coated with corrosion
resistant paint. Factory mount motor on slide rails. Provide access to motor, drive, and
bearings through removable casing panels or hinged access doors. Provide built-in inertia
base of welded steel with bottom sheet and reinforcing grid for concrete ballast. Mount base
on vibration isolators; refer to Section 23 0548.
6. External Motor Junction Box: Factory mount external junction box and connect to
extended motor leads from internally mounted motors.
7. Motor Wiring Conduit: Factory wire fan motor wiring to the unit mounted starter-
disconnect, and external motor junction box. Power supply wiring for fan motors shall be
provided from the MCC electric panels.
8. Fan Accessories: Variable inlet vanes. Refer to Section 23 3416.
9. Flexible Duct Connections: For separating fan and coil, and adjacent sections; refer to
Section 23 3300.
10. Drives:
a. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, ball bearings, with life at 50,000 hours.
b. Shafts: Solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively
coated with lubricating oil.
c. V-Belt Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts, and
keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 15 hp and under selected so required
rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fixed sheave for 20 hp and over, matched
belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5 times nameplate
rating of the motor.
d. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA (DCS); 2.6 mm (0.106 inch) thick, 20 mm (3/4 inch)
diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to
fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of
belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.
11. Load break disconnector, flow meter connections, anti-corrosion coating.
G. COIL SECTION
1. Casing: Provide access to both sides of coils. Enclose coils with headers and return
bends exposed outside casing. Slide coils into casing through removable end panel with blank
off sheets and sealing collars at connection penetrations.
2. Drain Pans: 600 mm (24 inch) downstream of coil and down spouts for cooling coil
banks more than one coil high.
3. Eliminators: Three break of galvanized steel, mounted over drain pan.
4. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance
with AHRI 410.
5. Fabrication:
a. Tubes: 16 mm (5/8 inch) OD seamless copper expanded into fins, brazed joints.
b. Fins: Copper.
c. Casing: Die formed channel frame of galvanized steel.
6. Water Cooling Coils:
a. Headers: Cast iron, seamless copper tube, or prime coated steel pipe with brazed joints.
b. Configuration: Drainable, with threaded plugs for drain and vent; threaded plugs in return
bends and in headers opposite each tube.
H. FILTER SECTION
1. General: Provide filter sections with filter racks, minimum of one access door for filter
removal, and filter block-offs to prevent air bypass.
2. Prefilter.
a. Coarse dust filter, Class G4, according to EN 779.
b. Materials and surfaces
i. Filter media made of synthetic fibres
ii. Frame made of non-woven fibres or plastic
3. Bag Filters:
a. Pocket filters made of non-woven synthetic fibres as final filters for the separation of fine
dust in ventilation systems.
b. Class F7. Fine dust filter according to EN 779.
c. Certified by Eurovent and meet the hygiene requirements of VDI 6022
4. Differential Pressure Gage:
a. Provide factory installed dial type differential pressure gage, flush mounted with casing
outer wall, and fully piped to both sides of each filter to indicate status.
b. Maintain plus/minus 5 percent accuracy within operating limits of minus 6.7 degrees C
(20 degrees F) to 48.9 degrees C (120 degrees F).
I. DAMPER SECTION
1. Mixing Section: Provide a functional section to support the damper assembly for
modulating the volume of outdoor, return, and exhaust air.
2. Internal Face Damper Section: Provide as scheduled within the air handling unit.
3. Damper Blades:
a. Double-skin airfoil design with metal, compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade-
edge seals on all blades.
b. Self-lubricating stainless steel or synthetic sleeve bearings.
c. Comply with ASHRAE 90.1 for rated maximum leakage rate.
d. Base all leakage testing and pressure ratings on AMCA 500-D.
e. Arrange in parallel or opposed-blade configuration.
J. AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT
1. Flow Meter:
a. Provide airflow measurement system to directly measure fan airflow or measure
differential pressure that can be used to calculate airflow without interfering with submitted
airflow performance and noise levels.
b. Accuracy: Plus/minus 5 percent (device and transmitter) when operating within the
stable operating region of the fan curve.
K. ACCESS SECTION
1. Provide where indicated on the Drawings to allow for inspection, cleaning, and
maintenance of field installed components.
2. Construct access doors same as previously specified within this Section.
2.02 AIR HANDLING UNIT (AHU) RECIRCULATION AIR
A. Tags:
a. AHU-AG-WAC-01
b. AHU-AG-WAC-02
B. EUROVENT certified.
C. Components:
2. Fan section.

3. Coil section.
4. Filter section.
5. Damper section.
8. Access section.
D. CASING CONSTRUCTION
thick.
2. Casing:
cleaning purposes.
3. Access Doors:
6. Insulation:
condensate.
conditions.
9. Lighting:
10. Finish:
a. Indoor Units:
E. FAN SECTION
45635-1 and -38.
Section 23 3300.
10. Drives:
F. COIL SECTION
with AHRI 410.
5. Fabrication:
b. Fins: Copper.
G. FILTER SECTION
2. Prefilter.
3. Bag Filters:
H. DAMPER SECTION
3. Damper Blades:
I. AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT
1. Flow Meter:
J. ACCESS SECTION
2.03 VENTILATION AIR HANDLING UNIT (FAHU-V)
A. Tags:
1. FAHU-V-CL-01
B. EUROVENT certified.

C. Components:
2. Fan section.
3. Coil section.
4. Filter section.
5. Damper section.
7. Total energy recovery wheel section.
9. Access section.
D. CASING CONSTRUCTION
thick.
2. Casing:
cleaning purposes.
3. Access Doors:
6. Insulation:
condensate.
conditions.
9. Lighting:
10. Finish:
a. Indoor Units:
E. FAN SECTION
45635-1 and -38.
Section 23 3300.
10. Drives:
F. COIL SECTION
with AHRI 410.
5. Fabrication:
b. Fins: Copper.
G. FILTER SECTION
2. Prefilter.
3. Bag Filters:
H. DAMPER SECTION
3. Damper Blades:
I. AIRFLOW MEASUREMENT
1. Flow Meter:
J. TOTAL ENERGY RECOVERY WHEEL SECTION
1. Certified in accordance with AHRI 1060 and UL 1812 for mechanical, electrical, and fire
safety.
2. Wheel Construction:
a. Dessicant Properties:
a. Factory coated.
b. Washable using standard detergent or alkaline based coil cleaner.
c. Resistant to high levels of humidity.
a. Construct housing of stainless steel, aluminum, or galvanized steel.
b. Factory set adjustable diameter seals and self-adjusting perimeter seals.
c. Permanently sealed and lubricated wheel bearings.
d. Motor:
a. Thermally protected.
b. Factory mounted.
3. Maintenance and Access Features:
a. Access doors upstream and downstream of the wheel cassette.
b. Removable wheel segments to facilitate maintenance and cleaning.
c. Adequate space for cleaning, service, and maintenance.
4. Controls:
a. Wheel Control: Damper control of recovery capacity to 40 percent of initial total recovery
capacity.
K. ACCESS SECTION
2.04 FRESH AIR HANDLING UNIT (FAHU) - INLINE.
A. Tags:
1. FAHU-V-F1
2. FAHU-V-F2
3. FAHU-V-AA-1
4. FAHU-V-CL-2
5. FAHU-V-AG-RTL-1
6. FAHU-V-AG-RTL-2
B. Designed for installation in low profile ceilings.
C. Multileaf dampers.
1. Dampers with an aerodynamic profile for an optimal air flow control.
2. As an option, one damper for the air inlet or with mixing section (double air flow damper).
D. Mixing section with attenuator and primary air flow controller. Additionally on return with
mixing section, silencer for the secondary air and/or air volume flow controller (constant or
variable).
E. Air filtration. G4 Pre-filter and F7 bag filter.
F. Supply volume flow control
1. Manual controller for a basic control.
2. Control based on constant differential pressure or air flow, on request.
3. Control System integrated.
G. Control System
1. For temperature, pressure and indoor air quality control.
2. Compatible to integrate in the building management system (BACS) via different
protocols as: ModBus, BACnet, LONWorks.
H. Fans. Belt driven centrifugal fans or Plug-in fans with turbine formed by aerodynamic
profile louvers connected directly to EC motors.
I. Cooling coil. Water coils made of copper tubes and aluminium fins.
J. Casing
1. Built with galvanized steel profiles finished in grey enamelled.
2. With cast aluminium corners.
K. Pre-painted exterior sheet
1. High resistance against corrosion.
2. Units will be supplied with casing finished in grey colour RAL 9006 as standard, other
constructions upon request.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Bolt sections together with gaskets.
C. Install flexible duct connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork and air
handling unit sections. Ensure that metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum 25
mm (one inch) flex between ductwork and fan while running.
D. Install assembled unit on vibration isolators. Install isolated fans with resilient mountings
and flexible electrical leads. Install restraining snubbers as indicated. Refer to Section 23 0548.
Adjust snubbers to prevent tension in flexible connectors when fan is operating.
F. Make connections to coils with unions or flanges.
G. Hydronic Coils:
1. Hydronic Coils: Connect water supply to leaving air side of coil (counterflow
arrangement).
2. Provide shut-off valve on supply line and lockshield balancing valve with memory stop
on return line.
3. Locate water supply at bottom of supply header and return water connection at top.
4. Provide manual air vents at high points complete with stop valve.
5. Ensure water coils are drainable and provide drain connection at low points.
H. Insulate coil headers located outside air flow as specified for piping. Refer to Section 23
0719.
I. Field-wire all factory provided controls for field installation.

3.03 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.28 23 8124 Computer Room Air Conditioners - Floor Mounted:

A. Air conditioning units.
B. Controls and control panels.
A. Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing System: Interlock with fire suppression system.
B. Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment: Evaporator and condenser fan
motors.
C. Hydronic Specialties.
D. Hydronic Pumps: Glycol system pumps.
E. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers.
F. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
G. Section 09 6900 - Access Flooring.
H. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2012.
I. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems;
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide for manufactured products and assemblies. Indicate water, drain,
refrigeration, rough-in connections, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate manufactured products and assemblies. Indicate water, drain,
refrigeration, rough-in connections, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connection requirements,
and include start-up instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate conditions at initial start-up including date, and
initial set points.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in
1. Extra Filters: One set for each individual unit.
B. Conform to NFPA 90A for the installation of computer room air conditioning units.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Include coverage of refrigeration compressors.

2.01 CHILLED WATER CRAC UNIT
A. Equipment tags:
1. CRAH-F1-MVLV-1
2. CRAH-F1-MVLV-2
3. CRAH-AG-TPS-01/02
B. General.
1. Precision air conditioning unit for telecommunication, IT, computer and EDP installations.
2. Close control operation
3. Dehumidification function
4. Incorporated controller for autarc operation of the A/C unit
5. Entire maintenance accessibility from the front
6. The A/C unit meets the current technical regulations and standards, the European
guidelines for machines and the German safety regulations
7. CE certification
8. Manufacturing in a company certified according to DIN ISO 9001/ EN 29001
9. Protection of all ESD sensible elements by manufacturing according to DIN EN 61340-5-
1 (Protection of electronic devices from electrostatic phenomena)
10. Functional test before delivery
C. CW - type:
1. One chilled water heat exchanger
2. One chilled water cooling circuit

3. Dehumidification by reducing the fan speed
4. Chilled water piping ends pointing downwards
5. Connecting nipple with external thread for chilled water connections to site piping
6. One proportional 2-way control valve for the chilled water circuit
D. Suction direction:
1. Air suction from bottom
E. Discharge direction:
1. Airflow through the unit to the top
2. Fan blowing out of the unit
3. Discharge to the top
F. Frame, housing:
1. Self-supporting construction
2. Frame parts are made of galvanized steel or high-quality powder coating
3. Harmonized colour allocation
4. Interior sheet metals for highest stability and air conduction
G. Panelwork:
5. The unit is delivered with all sides closed
6. Panels and doors can be removed on all sides.
7. Back- and side panels are firmly screwed
8. All parts of sheet steel are provided with a high-grade plastic powder coating for a
persistent corrosion protection
9. The panelwork is executed with doors at the unit front
10. The doors are assembled to the unit frame with lockable security fasteners which
prevent from unauthorized access to the units
11. Panelwork and door insulation with appropriate B1-insulation material
12. Fire classification of the insulation is B1 according to DIN 4102, hardly inflammable, self-
extinguishing
13. Chemical-free
14. No mould fungus according to DIN IEC 68
15. Resistent against house dust mites and vermins
16. Non-provoking allergies
17. Decay-proof
18. Sound absorbent features > 5 kN/m4 according DIN52213
19. Toxicologically recognized as safe according Öko-Tex Standard 100
20. Detergent-proof
21. Thermal isolation characteristics until WLG 0,035 (035) DIN 52612
22. UV-proof
H. Unit colour:
1. Panelwork and sheet steel parts in STULZ anthracite grey
2. Fronttop-C7000 in Stulz telegrey 4 (RAL 7047)
I. Filter:
1. Located on suction side
2. Large filter surface
3. Small pressure loss
4. Long service life
5. Fixed fold distance
6. Fully combustible, metal-free
7. Self-extinguishing according to DIN 53438 (fire class F1)
8. Filter exchange from the front
9. Filter monitor installed in the unit
10. Filter Control Management for constant airflow
J. Filter quality:
1. DIN EN 779 M5
K. High performance EC-radial fan:
1. Direct driven fan
2. Low vibration
3. Low noise operation
4. Wear-resistant
5. Maintenance-free
6. Single suction
7. Twofold backward curved blades
8. Statically and dynamically balanced in two planes (G 6,3 DIN ISO 1940)
9. Electronically commutated motor with integrated electronic for connection to a
microprocessor system
10. Inherently safe motor with alarm output
11. Fan speed can be electronically controlled
12. Standard softstart
13. Control from the microprocessor
14. Bus connection (RS485)
15. Multi-range voltage at 50/60 Hz
16. Integrated current limitation
17. Impeller:
a. PP plastic GF40, fibreglass-reinforced
b. 3-dimensional formed fan blade for increasing the impeller efficiency
c. Corrosion-free
d. Colorfast
e. Applicable for cleanrooms
L. Chilled water coil:
5. High capacity chilled water coil
6. Copper core tubes
7. Pressed-on aluminum fins with hydrophilic coating
8. Targeted draining of the condensate into the condensate pan even with high air flow
velocities
9. Self-supporting aluminium frame
10. High efficiency
11. No dehumidification at normal cooling operation
12. Suction side position for optimized flow conditions and lowest pressure losses
13. Aluminium condensate tray and cover plates for 100% condensate collection
14. Chilled water CRAC units may be provided with an optional condensate pump.
M. Chilled water unit CW:
1. External chilled water production
2. 2-way control valve
3. Filling and drain valve
4. Piping of the control valve and the CW coil
5. Entire functionality of the CW-circuit at dispatch
6. Several Schrader valves for air evacuation
N. 2 way-control valve:
1. 2 way-control valve to control the chilled water circuit
2. 0-10V control of the valve drive
O. Tube insulation:
1. Highly flexible until - 40°C
2. FCHC-free
3. Resistant against most of the chemicals (with application in chemical environment
please indicate type of chemicals)
4. Test comparable to DIN 53 428
5. Hardly inflammable according to DIN 4102-B1 ; PA-III 2, 768
6. Self-extinguishing, non-dropping, non-fire-conducting
7. Resistance classification R 90
8. Noise protection according to DIN 4109
9. Thermal conductivity at 0°C 0,036 W / m² x K
10. High water vapour transfer coefficient ; µ = 7.000
11. UV-proof, non-ageing and water-proof

P. Electric cabinet:
1. Design of the cabinet according to VDE and DIN standards
2. Filter monitor
3. Accommodation of high voltage and control components
4. Accessible from the front
5. Installed main switch operable and lockable from the outside
6. Clear and space saving structure of high voltage and control components
7. Completed wiring of motor circuit breakers, contactors and control components in wiring
ducts
8. Top hat rail or busbar system for high voltage components
9. Main power supply provided by customer
Q. Feeding direction:
1. Power supply and piping connection from bottom
R. Voltage:
1. 380 V - 415 V, 3ph, 50 Hz with N and PE protective conductor
S. C7000 Control System (CompTrol C7000):
1. System for control of A/C units consisting of C7000 - I/O-controller and, depending on
functionality, further expansion boards.
T. C7000-IO-Controller:
1. Supply voltage: 24 V (+15%/-15%) VAC
2. I/O-board interface: EIA485 (RS485)
3. Service, download- and printer interface: EIA232 (RS232)
4. 4 sensor inputs: signal current 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA or signal voltage 0-10 V
5. 11 alarm inputs: 24 VAC/DC (+ 24V = no alarm) status display via LED's
6. 4 analog outputs: 0-10 VDC; max. load 20 mA
7. 7 digital outputs (relais with two way contact), 24 VAC, max. 6 A, status display via
LED's
U. C7000-IO-Controller installed in electrical cabinet of a unit with following properties:
1. Automatic or manual start after power loss, unit start time delay also selectable for
individual components.
2. Energy-saving fan speed control depending on temperature
3. Free allocation of all digital/analoge inputs and outputs at respective terminals.
4. Runtime equalization and sequencing of 2 compressors in a unit with 2 refrigerant
circuits
5. Service warning according to pre-set time intervals.
6. Manual operation of individual components.
7. Day and night operation
8. Recording of up to 200 alarms with time and date

9. Temperature- and humidity recording up to 1440 data points, freely scalable within 1 to
60000 minutes
10. Variable alarm delay, selectable alarm priority, text input for auxiliary alarms.
11. 1*common alarm
12. Winter start operation
13. RS232 port on microprocessor board for servicing and software upload. Print out of
alarm protocols, temperature/humidity values, diagnostics and parameter setting
14. Serial RS485 interface available for connection to user interface
C7000AdvancedTerminal (C7000AT)
15. Sequencing of all connected C7000-IO-Controller
16. Sequencing can be divided in up to 20 zones
17. Turn over conditions: unit failure and selectable temperature for Std-By unit activation
18. Selectable sequencing time
19. Alarm priority configuration
20. Modbus protocol preinstalled
V. If the unit is equipped with respective options, the following functions can be controlled
and supervised:
1. Cooling, heating, humidification and dehumidification
2. Control and supervision of limit values for condensation pressure, temperature and
humidity with supply air or return air limitation. Mean average value control when more than
one sensor of the same type is used.
3. Supervision of following signals: airflow, compressor, heater, fan speed, condensation
pressure, filter, humidifier, water detector, phase supervision, conductivity measurement, UPS,
dry cooler, fire alarm, pumps, 4 auxiliary alarms, broken sensor.
W. Water detector.
1. A remote single point water/leak detector shall be factory supplied and shall ship
separately for field installation. Upon sensing a water leak, the normally closed water detector
control circuit shall open, thereby shutting down the air conditioning unit’s water producing
components.
X. Documents:
1. The A/C units are dispatched with the following documents:
a. Operation instructions manual
b. Maintenance instructions manual
c. Wiring diagrams
d. Refrigeration diagram
e. Replacement parts list
f. CE - declaration of conformity
g. Test certificate of final function and safety test
2. The commissioning, the final function check and the instruction of the operator are not
part of the delivery volume.

2.02 CHILLED WATER CRAC UNIT WITH ELECTRIC REHEAT
A. Equipment tags:
1. CRAH-AG-TTP
2. CRAH-CL-SGN
3. CRAH-CL-MTE
B. General.
7. CE certification
10. functional test before delivery
C. CW - type:
1. One chilled water heat exchanger
2. One chilled water cooling circuit
3. Dehumidification by reducing the fan speed
4. Chilled water piping ends pointing downwards
5. Connecting nipple with external thread for chilled water connections to site piping
6. One proportional 2-way control valve for the chilled water circuit
F. Frame, housing:
G. Panelwork:

extinguishing
9. Chemical-free
13. Decay-proof
16. Detergent-proof
18. UV-proof
H. Unit colour:
I. Filter:
10. Filter Control Management for constant airflow
J. Filter quality:
1. DIN EN 779 M5
2. Low vibration
4. Wear-resistant
5. Maintenance-free
6. Single suction
17. Impeller:
c. Corrosion-free
d. Colorfast
L. Chilled water coil:
1. High capacity chilled water coil
3. Pressed-on aluminum fins with hydrophilic coating
velocities
6. High efficiency
7. No dehumidification at normal cooling operation
9. Aluminium condensate tray and cover plates for 100% condensate collection
10. Chilled water CRAC units may be provided with an optional condensate pump.
M. Chilled water unit CW:
1. External chilled water production

2. 2-way control valve
3. Filling and drain valve
4. Piping of the control valve and the CW coil
5. Entire functionality of the CW-circuit at dispatch
6. Several Schrader valves for air evacuation
N. 2 way-control valve:
1. 2 way-control valve to control the chilled water circuit
2. 0-10V control of the valve drive
O. Tube insulation:
2. FCHC-free
5. Hardly inflammable according to DIN 4102-B1; PA-III 2, 768
10. High water vapour transfer coefficient; µ = 7.000
P. Electric reheat.
1. A factory mounted and wired low-watt density, plated fin-tubular design electric
resistance heater shall be included to provide automatic sensible re-heating as required during
the dehumidification cycle and automatic heating mode.
2. Electric heaters shall be provided with miniature thermal/magnetic circuit breakers,
which shall protect each ungrounded conductor.
3. Also included will be one automatic reset and one manual reset over-temperature safety
device (pilot duty).
Q. Electric cabinet:
2. Filter monitor
ducts

R. Feeding direction:
S. Voltage:
T. C7000 Control System (CompTrol C7000):
1. System for control of A/C units consisting of C7000 - I/O-controller and, depending on
U. C7000-IO-Controller:
LED's
V. C7000-IO-Controller installed in electrical cabinet of a unit with following properties:
circuits
60000 minutes
11. 1*common alarm
W. If the unit is equipped with respective options, the following functions can be controlled
and supervised:
W. Water detector.
1. A remote single point water/leak detector shall be factory supplied and shall ship
separately for field installation. Upon sensing a water leak, the normally closed water detector
control circuit shall open, thereby shutting down the air conditioning unit’s water producing
components.
X. Documents:
c. Wiring diagrams
g. Test certificate of final function and safety test
2.03 DX CRAC UNIT
A. Equipment tags:
1. CRAC-IU-AG-TPSS-1/2
B. General:

7. CE certification
C. A - type:
1. Cold production in the unit
2. One open refrigerant circuit
3. One evaporator
4. Condensation by external air-cooled condenser
5. Dehumidification by reducing the refrigerant mass flow and the fan speed
6. Hot gas and liquid line end pointing downwards in the unit
7. Connection to piping on site by soldered connections
8. Connections can be individually shut off
F. Frame, housing:
G. Panelwork:
extinguishing
9. Chemical-free
13. Decay-proof
16. Detergent-proof
18. UV-proof
H. Unit colour:
I. Filter:
J. Filter quality:
1. DIN EN 779 G4
2. Low vibration
4. Wear-resistant
5. Maintenance-free
6. Single suction
14. Bus connection ( RS485 )
17. Impeller:
c. Corrosion-free
d. Colorfast
L. Evaporator coil :
1. High capacity evaporator
3. Pressed-on aluminium fins with hydrophilic coating
velocities
6. High efficiency
7. No dehumidification during normal cooling operation
9. Aluminium condensate tray and cover plates for entire condensate collection
10. Indoor units may be provided with an optional condensate pump.
M. Refrigerant:
1. Standard: R407C
2. Ternary blend: 23% R32, 25% R125, 52% R134a
3. ODP: 0
4. GWP: 1610
5. With the optional application of an alternative refrigerant (R134a, R410A) the standard
R407C refrigerant charge is omitted.
N. Refrigerating unit A/ ACW:
1. Hermetic scroll compressor, mounted in the unit with anti-vibration dampers
a. Ester oil charge
b. Soldering connection
c. Sight glass for oil level

2. Low pressure switch with automatic reset
3. High pressure switch with manual reset
4. Receiver
a. Safety valve
b. Shut off valve liquid line
5. Filter dryer
6. Sight glass with humidity indicator
7. Electronic expansion valve with pressure and temperature sensor in the suction line
8. Shut off valve pressure line
9. Shut off valve liquid line
10. Schrader valves for simplified maintenance and a service-friendly operation
11. Installation of all circuit components at the factory
12. Entire functionality of the refrigerant circuit at dispatch
O. Scroll-Compressor:
1. Smooth and even compression
2. Little vibrations at operation
3. Low noise level
4. Hermetic design
5. Suction gas cooling
6. Internal oil management
7. Internal motor protection incl. evaluation unit
8. Electrical type of protection according to VDE is IP 21
9. Non-return valve at connection piece, pressure side
10. Maintenance-free
11. High efficiency
12. Indifferent to malfunctions
P. RS485 (EIA485) Extension board (EBUS)
Q. Interface for internal component communication and BACS connection in controller
systems without C7000 Advanced
R. Tube insulation:
4. FCHC-free
7. Hardly inflammable according to DIN 4102-B1 ; PA-III 2, 768

S. Electric cabinet:
2. Filter monitor
ducts
T. Feeding direction:
U. Voltage:
V. C7000 Control System (CompTrol C7000):
W. System for control of A/C units consisting of C7000 - I/O-controller and, depending on
X. C7000-IO-Controller:
LED's
Y. C7000-IO-Controller installed in electrical cabinet of a unit with following properties:
circuits
60000 minutes
11. 1*common alarm
Z. If the unit is equipped with respective options, the following functions can be controlled
and supervised:
4. Refrigerant leakage protection. The refrigerant circuit low pressure shall be monitored at
the indoor unit controller. When the low pressure limit is reached an alarm shall be displayed,
the compressors shall be off and the electronic valves shut, so the refrigerant flow is not
allowed.
AA. Compressor soft start
Electronical motor controller designed to operate 3-phase motors consisting of:
• Soft start controller per compressor with following features:
- Setting of I max compressor (FLA) by means of a potentiometer
- Current limit start
- Current limitation at 350% of the nominal current
- Start time while keeping the current limitation: 2 s
Integrated overload protection
- Trip rating at 120% of I max compressor (FLA)
- Tripping class:15
- Necessary manual reset on the smart start module after overload tripping
Thyristor bypass after start phase
Thyristor temperature monitoring and cut off
Monitoring of the phase rotation L1, L2, L3
Start protection if one phase is missing
Symmetry monitoring between the phase currents
Check of all thyristors and load connections for shorts
Indication of following alarms by LED flash cycles:
- Overload protection
- Over-temperature
- Phase reversal protection
- Phase loss/ open load
- Phase imbalance
- Shorted thyristor
• Installed in the electrical box
At the compressor start the soft start controller limits the current increase to 350% of I max
compressor (FLA). The current limitation is kept for 2 seconds. Then the current must fall to
Imax compressor (FLA) or the overload protection is released.
Option cannot be used in combination with power factor correction.
BB. Documents:
c. Wiring diagrams
2.04 DX CRAC UNIT WITH ELECTRIC HEATING COIL
A. Equipment tags:
1. CRAC-IU-AG-TTP
2. CRAC-IU-CL-SGN
3. CRAC-IU-CL-MTE
B. General:
7. CE certification
C. A - type:
1. Cold production in the unit
2. One open refrigerant circuit
3. One evaporator
4. Condensation by external air-cooled condenser
5. Dehumidification by reducing the refrigerant mass flow and the fan speed
6. Hot gas and liquid line end pointing downwards in the unit
7. Connection to piping on site by soldered connections
8. Connections can be individually shut off
F. Frame, housing:
G. Panelwork:
extinguishing
9. Chemical-free
13. Decay-proof
16. Detergent-proof
18. UV-proof
H. Unit colour:
I. Filter:
J. Filter quality:
1. DIN EN 779 G4
2. Low vibration
4. Wear-resistant
5. Maintenance-free

6. Single suction
17. Impeller:
c. Corrosion-free
d. Colorfast
L. Evaporator coil:
1. High capacity evaporator
3. Pressed-on aluminium fins with hydrophilic coating
velocities
6. High efficiency
7. No dehumidification during normal cooling operation
9. Aluminium condensate tray and cover plates for entire condensate collection
M. Refrigerant:
1. Standard: R407C
2. Ternary blend: 23% R32, 25% R125, 52% R134a
3. ODP: 0
4. GWP: 1610
5. With the optional application of an alternative refrigerant (R134a, R410A) the standard
R407C refrigerant charge is omitted.
N. Refrigerating unit A/ ACW:
1. Hermetic scroll compressor, mounted in the unit with anti-vibration dampers
a. Ester oil charge
b. Soldering connection
c. Sight glass for oil level
2. Low pressure switch with automatic reset
3. High pressure switch with manual reset
4. Receiver
a. Safety valve
b. Shut off valve liquid line
5. Filter dryer
6. Sight glass with humidity indicator
7. Electronic expansion valve with pressure and temperature sensor in the suction line
8. Shut off valve pressure line
9. Shut off valve liquid line
10. Schrader valves for simplified maintenance and a service-friendly operation
11. Installation of all circuit components at the factory
12. Entire functionality of the refrigerant circuit at dispatch
O. Scroll-Compressor:
1. Smooth and even compression
2. Little vibrations at operation
3. Low noise level
4. Hermetic design
5. Suction gas cooling
6. Internal oil management
7. Internal motor protection incl. evaluation unit
8. Electrical type of protection according to VDE is IP 21
9. Non-return valve at connection piece, pressure side
10. Maintenance-free
11. High efficiency
12. Indifferent to malfunctions
P. RS485 (EIA485) Extension board (EBUS)
Q. Interface for internal component communication and BACS connection in controller
systems without C7000 Advanced
R. Tube insulation:
2. FCHC-free
5. Hardly inflammable according to DIN 4102-B1; PA-III 2, 768
S. Electric reheat.
1. A factory mounted and wired low-watt density, plated fin-tubular design electric
resistance heater shall be included to provide automatic sensible re-heating as required during
the dehumidification cycle and automatic heating mode.
2. Electric heaters shall be provided with miniature thermal/magnetic circuit breakers,
which shall protect each ungrounded conductor.
3. Also included will be one automatic reset and one manual reset over-temperature safety
device (pilot duty).
T. Electric cabinet:
2. Filter monitor
ducts
U. Feeding direction:
V. Voltage:
W. C7000 Control System (CompTrol C7000):
X. System for control of A/C units consisting of C7000 - I/O-controller and, depending on
Y. C7000-IO-Controller:

LED's
Z. C7000-IO-Controller installed in electrical cabinet of a unit with following properties:
circuits
60000 minutes
11. 1*common alarm
AA. If the unit is equipped with respective options, the following functions can be controlled
and supervised:
the indoor unit controller. When the low pressure limit is reached an alarm shall be displayed,
allowed.
BB. Compressor soft start
Electronical motor controller designed to operate 3-phase motors consisting of:
• Soft start controller per compressor with following features:
- Setting of I max compressor (FLA) by means of a potentiometer
- Current limit start
- Current limitation at 350% of the nominal current
- Start time while keeping the current limitation: 2 s
Integrated overload protection
- Trip rating at 120% of I max compressor (FLA)
- Tripping class:15
- Necessary manual reset on the smart start module after overload tripping
Thyristor bypass after start phase
Thyristor temperature monitoring and cut off
Monitoring of the phase rotation L1, L2, L3
Start protection if one phase is missing
Symmetry monitoring between the phase currents
Check of all thyristors and load connections for shorts
Indication of following alarms by LED flash cycles:
- Overload protection
- Over-temperature
- Phase reversal protection
- Phase loss/ open load
- Phase imbalance
- Shorted thyristor
• Installed in the electrical box
At the compressor start the soft start controller limits the current increase to 350% of I max
compressor (FLA). The current limitation is kept for 2 seconds. Then the current must fall to
Imax compressor (FLA) or the overload protection is released.
Option cannot be used in combination with power factor correction.
CC. Documents:

c. Wiring diagrams

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that flooring system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Coordinate installation of computer room air conditioning units with computer room
raised floor installer.
C. Provide adequate drainage connections for water cooled units and humidifier flushing
system.
D. Provide shut-off valves in condenser water inlet and outlet piping on water cooled units.
A. Provide the services of the manufacturer's field representative to start and adjust
systems and equipment and instruct operating personnel.
3.04 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Prepare and start systems. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of computer room air conditioning unit system for one
year from Date of Substantial Completion.
3.07 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.29 23 8127 Small Split-System Heating and Cooling:

A. Air cooled condensing units.
B. Indoor air handler (fan & coil) units for duct connection.
C. Controls.
A. HVAC Ducts and Casings.
B. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC: Thermostats, humidistats, time clocks.
C. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections and installation and
wiring of thermostats and other controls components.
G. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-
H. AHRI 520 - Performance Rating of Positive Displacement Condensing Units; Air-
Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2004.
I. ASHRAE Std 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
J. ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant
Compressors and Condensing Units that Operate at Subcritical Temperatures of the
Refrigerant; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;
2010.
K. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
L. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
M. UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical;
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical nameplate data,
and wiring diagrams.
B. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size of field
connections.
D. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in
Owner s name and registered with manufacturer.
1. Extra Filters: One for each unit.
2.01 SYSTEM DESIGN
A. Split-System Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched factory-engineered and
assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed.
1. Cooling: Outdoor electric condensing unit with evaporator coil in central ducted indoor
unit.
2. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor units, factory
cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line.
2.02 INDOOR UNITS FOR DUCTED SYSTEMS
A. Equipment tags:
1. DX-IU-F1-FUT-UPS
B. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of
cabinet, supply fan, heating and cooling element(s), controls, and accessories; wired for single
power connection with control transformer.
1. Air Flow Configuration: Horizontal.
2. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access doors with
safety interlock switches, glass fiber insulation with reflective liner.
C. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct or belt drive with adjustable
variable pitch motor pulley.
1. Motor: NEMA MG 1; 1750 rpm multiple speed, permanently lubricated, hinge mounted.
D. Air Filters: 25 mm (1 inch) thick urethane, washable type arranged for easy replacement.
E. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer drain pan
sloped in all directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted
distributor or thermostatic expansion valve.
1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL 207.
2. Manufacturers: System manufacturer.
2.03 OUTDOOR UNITS
A. Equipment tags:
1. DX-OU-F1-FUT-UPS
B. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet, with
compressor and condenser.
1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in accordance
with ASHRAE Std 23.1 and UL 207.
C. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; Aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive
axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard.
D. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure switch
(automatic reset), service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line).
1. Provide thermostatic expansion valves.
E. Operating Controls:
1. Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.
2.04 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Room Thermostat: Wall-mounted, electric solid state microcomputer based room
thermostat with remote sensor to maintain temperature setting; low-voltage; with following
features:
1. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint.
2. Thermostat display:
a. Actual room temperature.
b. System mode indication: cooling, fan auto, off, and on, auto or on, off.
B. Indoor units may be provided with an optional condensate pump.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on
shop drawings.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
C. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.
D. Pipe drain from cooling coils to nearest floor drain.
3.03 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.30 23 8129 Variable Refrigerant Volume HVAC System:

A. Variable refrigerant volume HVAC system includes:
1. Outdoor/Condensing unit(s).
2. Indoor/Evaporator units.
3. Branch selector units.
4. Refrigerant piping.
5. Control panels.
6. Control wiring.
A. Refrigerant Piping and Specialties: Additional requirements for refrigerant piping system.
C. Equipment Wiring: Power connections to equipment.
C. ASHRAE standards 62 - 2013, 55 - 2013.
I. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-
J. ASHRAE (FUND) - ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2013.
K. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc;
2013, Including All Addenda (ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Std 90.1).
L. UL 1995 - Heating and Cooling Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Design Data:
1. Provide design calculations showing that system will achieve performance specified.
2. Provide design data required by ASHRAE 90.1.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data sheets showing the following for
each item of equipment, marked to correlate to equipment item markings shown in the
contract documents:
1. Outdoor/Central Units:
a. Refrigerant Type and Size of Charge.
b. Cooling Capacity: W (Btu/h).
c. Heating Capacity: W (Btu/h).
d. Cooling Input Power: kW (Btu/h).
e. Heating Input Power: kW (Btu/h).
f. Operating Temperature Range, Cooling and Heating.
g. Air Flow: Cubic meters per second (Cubic feet per minute).
h. Fan Curves.
i. External Static Pressure (ESP): Pa (Inches WG).
j. Sound Pressure Level: dB(A).
k. Electrical Data:
1) Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA).
2) Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA).
3) Maximum Starting Current (MSC).
4) Full Load Amps (FLA).
5) Total Over Current Amps (TOCA).
6) Fan Motor: W (HP).
l. Weight and Dimensions.
m. Maximum number of indoor units that can be served.
n. Maximum refrigerant piping run from outdoor/condenser unit to indoor/evaporator unit.
o. Maximum height difference between outdoor/condenser unit to indoor/evaporator unit,
both above and below.
p. Control Options.
2. Indoor/Evaporator Units:
a. Cooling Capacity: W (Btu/h).
b. Heating Capacity: W (Btu/h).
c. Cooling Input Power: kW (Btu/h).
d. Heating Input Power: kW (Btu/h).
e. Air Flow: Cubic meters per second (Cubic feet per minute).
f. Fan Curves.
g. External Static Pressure (ESP): Pa (Inches WG).
h. Sound Pressure level: dB(A).
i. Electrical Data:
1) Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA).
2) Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA).
3) Maximum Starting Current (MSC).
4) Full Load Amps (FLA).
5) Total Over Current Amps (TOCA).
6) Fan Motor: W (HP).
j. Maximum Lift of Built-in Condensate Pump.
k. Weight and Dimensions.
l. Control Options.
3. Control Panels: Complete description of options, control points, zones/groups.
C. Specimen Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's warranties.
D. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on refrigerant
E. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings custom-made for this project; include as-designed
HVAC layouts, locations of equipment items, refrigerant piping sizes and locations,
condensate piping sizes and locations, remote sensing devices, control components, electrical
connections, control wiring connections. Include:
1. Detailed piping diagrams, with branch balancing devices.
2. Condensate piping routing, size, and pump connections.
3. Detailed power wiring diagrams.
4. Detailed control wiring diagrams.
5. Locations of required access through fixed construction.
6. Drawings required by manufacturer.
F. Operating and Maintenance Data:
1. Manufacturer's complete standard instructions for each unit of equipment and control
panel.
2. Custom-prepared system operation, troubleshooting, and maintenance instructions and
recommendations.
3. Identification of replaceable parts and local source of supply.
G. Project Record Documents: Record the following:
1. As-installed routing of refrigerant piping and condensate piping.
2. Locations of access panels.
3. Locations of control panels.
H. Warranty: Executed warranty, made out in Owner's name.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Company that has been manufacturing variable refrigerant volume heat pump
equipment for at least 5 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Trained and approved by manufacturer of equipment.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle equipment and refrigerant piping according to manufacturer's
recommendations.

2.01 HVAC SYSTEM DESIGN
A. System Operation: Cooling only.
1. Zoning: Provide capability for temperature control for each individual indoor/evaporator
unit independently of all other units.
2. Provide a complete functional system that achieves the specified performance based on
the specified design conditions and that is designed and constructed according to the
equipment manufacturer's requirements.
3. Conditioned spaces are shown on the drawings.
4. Required equipment unit capacities are shown on the drawings.
5. Connect equipment to condensate piping provided by others; condensate piping is
shown on the drawings.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. All Units: Factory assembled, wired, and piped and factory tested for function and safety.
1. Refrigerant: Use only refrigerants that have ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero and
global warming potential (GWP) of less than 50.
2. Performance Certification: AHRI Certified; www.ahrinet.org.
3. Safety Certification: Tested to UL 1995 by UL or Intertek-ETL and bearing the
certification label.
4. Provide outdoor/condensing units capable of serving indoor unit capacity up to 200
percent of the capacity of the outdoor/condensing unit.
5. Provide units capable of serving the zones indicated.
6. Energy Efficiency: Report EER and COP based on tests conducted at “full load” in
accordance with AHRI 210/240 or alternate test method approved by U.S. Department of
Energy.
B. System Controls:
1. Include self diagnostic, auto-check functions to detect malfunctions and display the type
and location.
the outdoor unit controller. When the low pressure limit is reached an alarm shall be displayed,
allowed.
C. Unit Controls: As required to perform input functions necessary to operate system;
provided by manufacturer of units.
D. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Refrigerant Flow Balancing: Provide refrigerant piping joints and headers specifically
designed to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow for optimum system capacity and
performance; T-style joints are prohibited.
2. Insulate each refrigerant line individually between the condensing and indoor units.
2.03 OUTDOOR/CONDENSING UNITS
A. Equipment tags:
1. DX-OU-AA-VRV-01
2. DX-OU-AA-VRV-02
B. Outdoor/Condensing Units: Air-cooled DX refrigeration units, designed specifically for
use with indoor/evaporator units; factory assembled and wired with all necessary electronic
and refrigerant controls; modular design for ganging multiple units.
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Scroll compressors, motors, fans, condenser coil, electronic
expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut
off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant regulator.
2. Refrigerant: Factory charged.
3. Variable Volume Control: Modulate compressor capacity automatically to maintain
constant suction and condensing pressures while varying refrigerant volume to suit
heating/cooling loads.
4. Capable of being installed with wiring and piping to the left, right, rear or bottom.
5. Capable of heating operation at low end of operating range as specified, without
additional low ambient controls or auxiliary heat source; during heating operation, reverse
cycle (cooling mode) oil return or defrost is not permitted, due to potential reduction in space
temperature.
6. Sound Pressure Level: As specified, measured at one meter (3 feet) from front of unit;
provide night setback sound control as a standard feature; three selectable sound level steps
of 55 dB, 50 dB, and 45 dB, maximum.
7. Power Failure Mode: Automatically restart operation after power failure without loss of
programmed settings.
8. Safety Devices: High pressure sensor and switch, low pressure sensor/switch, control
circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector,
thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and
anti-recycling timers.
9. Provide refrigerant sub-cooling to ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when
supplying to us indoor units.
10. Oil Recovery Cycle: Automatic, occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every
8 hours of operation; maintain continuous heating during oil return operation.
11. Controls: Provide contacts for electrical demand shedding.
C. Unit Cabinet: Weatherproof and corrosion resistant; rust-proofed mild steel panels
coated with baked enamel finish.
1. Designed to allow side-by-side installation with minimum spacing.
D. Fans: One or more direct-drive propeller type, vertical discharge, with multiple speed
operation via DC (digitally commutating) inverter.
1. Provide minimum of 2 fans for each condensing unit.
2. External Static Pressure: Factory set at 30 Pa (0.12 in WG), minimum.
3. Indoor Mounted Air-Cooled Units: External static pressure field set at 80 Pa (0.32 in
WG), minimum; provide for mounting of field-installed ducts.
4. Fan Airflow: As indicated for specific equipment.
5. Fan Motors: Factory installed; permanently lubricated bearings; inherent protection; fan
guard; output as indicated for specific equipment.
E. Condenser Coils: Copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins to form mechanical bond;
waffle louver fin and rifled bore tube design to ensure high efficiency performance.
F. Compressors: Scroll type, hermetically sealed, variable speed inverter-driven and fixed
speed in combination to suit total capacity; minimum of one variable speed, inverter driven
compressor per condenser unit; minimum of two compressors per condenser unit; capable of
controlling capacity within range of 6 percent to 100 percent of total capacity.
1. Multiple Condenser Modules: Balance total operation hours of compressors by means of
duty cycling function, providing for sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle,
completion of oil return, and completion of defrost, or every 8 hours.
2. Failure Mode: In the event of compressor failure, operate remaining compressor(s) at
proportionally reduced capacity; provide microprocessor and associated controls specifically
designed to address this condition.
3. Provide each compressor with crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and
internal thermal overload protector.
4. Provide oil separators and intelligent oil management system.
5. Provide spring mounted vibration isolators.
2.04 INDOOR/EVAPORATOR UNITS
A. Equipment tags:
1. DX-IU-UL-ITE-1
2. DX-IU-UL-ITE-2
3. DX-IU-CL-TSQ
4. DX-IU-CL-TSP
5. DX-IU-CL-ITE-1
6. DX-IU-F1-BAT
7. DX-IU-F1-ITE-1
8. DX-IU-UL-ITE-3
9. DX-IU-UL-ITE-4
10. DX-IU-CL-SCR
11. DX-IU-CL-ITE-2
12. DX-IU-AG-EMR
13. DX-IU-F1-ITE-2
14. DX-IU-F1-BAT-2
B. All Indoor/Evaporator Units: Factory assembled and tested DX fan-coil units, with
electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, factory wiring and piping, self-
diagnostics, auto-restart function, 3-minute fused time delay, and test run switch.
1. Refrigerant: Refrigerant circuits factory-charged with dehydrated air, for field charging.
2. Temperature Control Mechanism: Return air thermistor and computerized Proportional-
Integral-Derivative (PID) control of superheat.
3. Coils: Direct expansion type constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins
to form a mechanical bond; waffle louver fin and high heat exchange, rifled bore tube design;
factory tested.
a. Provide thermistor on liquid and gas lines.
4. Fans: Direct-drive, with statically and dynamically balanced impellers; high and low
speeds unless otherwise indicated; motor thermally protected.
5. Return Air Filter: Washable long-life net filter with mildew proof resin, unless otherwise
indicated.
6. Condensate Drainage: Built-in condensate drain pan with PVC drain connection.
8. Cabinet Insulation: Sound absorbing foamed polystyrene and polyethylene insulation.
C. Concealed-In-Ceiling Units: Ducted horizontal discharge and return; galvanized steel
cabinet.
1. Return Air Filter: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Sound Pressure: Measured at low speed at 1.5 m (5 feet) below unit.
3. Provide external static pressure switch adjustable for high efficiency filter operation
4. Optional Condensate Pump: Built-in, with lift of 229 mm (9 inches), minimum.
5. Switch box accessible from side or bottom.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that required electrical services have been installed and are in the proper
locations prior to starting installation.
B. Verify that condensate piping has been installed and is in the proper location prior to
starting installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
C. Coordinate with installers of systems and equipment connecting to this system.
3.03 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Prepare and start equipment and system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations.
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed components of dirt, finger marks, and other disfigurements.
3.05 COMMISSIONING
A. Perform commissioning as specified in Section 23 0800.
B. Replace components not functioning properly.
A. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.
B. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.
2. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components from subsequent construction operations.
B. Replace exposed components broken or otherwise damaged beyond repair.
3.08 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

8.31 23 8200 Convection Heating and Cooling Units:

A. Fan-coil units.
B. HVAC Equipment Insulation.
C. HVAC Piping Insulation.
D. Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC.
E. Hydronic Piping.
F. Hydronic Specialties.
G. HVAC Ducts and Casings.
H. Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. Installation of room
thermostats. Electrical supply to units.
B. ASHRAE standards 55 - 2013, 90.1 – 2013.
H. Volume 6, Architectural Branding Manual. Section 12 - Part 2. D 4 MEP.
I. AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and
Refrigeration Institute (AHRI); current edition at www.ahrinet.org.
J. AHRI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils; 2001
(R2011).
K. AHRI 440 - Performance Rating of Room Fan-Coil Units; 2008.
L. ASHRAE (HVAC) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; 2015.
M. ASHRAE Std 62.1 - Ventilation For Acceptable Indoor Air Quality; 2013.
N. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
2015.

manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate mechanical and electrical service locations and requirements.
C. Certificates: Certify that air coil capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures
meet or exceed specified requirements or coils are tested and rated in accordance with AHRI
410.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of
access doors in radiation cabinets required for access or valving.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,
operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
1. Extra Filters: One set of each type and size.

2.01 FAN-COIL UNITS
A. Equipment tags:
1. FCU-LA-RTG
-LA: Level abbreviation
-RTG: Room tag
B. Design
1. The unit shall be Eurovent certified and the process and production of the unit shall
comply with the ISO9001 regulation. The selection of the unit shall be made with a selection
program that corresponds to the Eurovent certified data. The selection program must give the
exact total and sensible cooling capacity, the heating capacity, the fan power input, the airflow
and the sound power level according to the unit configuration and installation. Each unit shall
be tested before leaving the factory to ensure it will continue to meet the specified
performance, with a minimum of maintenance, throughout its life. The design of the unit shall
give unhindered access to the serviceable items, namely filter, condensate tray, water coil,
fans / motors, controls and discharge spigots.
C. Packing
1. The units shall be stacked on a pallet with an individual identification sticker including
pictograms. The identification sticker shall clearly indicate important information such as the
customer order number, the unit model/size, and options. It shall be possible to have a
customer tag on each unit, which shall indicate where the units are to be installed.
D. Chassis
1. The unit chassis shall be of a one piece structure made of 0.8mm-thick galvanised steel
panels. The chassis shall include inlet and/or outlet duct connections to secure that the
performances are known at site. This will secure that external static pressure will not increase
due to the fact that outlet plenum is already included in the product. The casing shall be
designed in such a way that sound levels are minimized. The height of the unit shall not
exceed 225mm (277mm for FCD721). The unit casing shall be insulated with a fire retardant
M1 certified expanded foam for both thermal and acoustic insulation. The insulation shall not
emit particles into the airflow over time. The unit shall be equipped with outlying brackets to
facilitate fitting to the ceiling and rubber isolators to avoid vibrations. Units shall provide a full
flexibility in terms of air, hydraulic and electric connections in order to match various
installation constraints. The water coil connections and the control panel shall be located
either on the right side or on the left side independently. A circular duct from diameter 160mm
to 250mm or a rectangular duct could be connected either to the inlet or to the discharge of
the unit. The unit shall be delivered with a 125mm fresh air intake possibility without needing
an additional casing. The air intake shall be located on the same or on the opposite side than
water connections.
E. Coil
1. The coil shall be a high performance water coil, made of aluminum fins, WavyIII B-type,
mechanically crimped by expansion onto copper pipes. The maximum allowed temperature
shall be 95°C. Entering and leaving water connections shall be ½" or ¾’’ ISO/R7 female type.
Vents and drains are standard and shall be fitted with easily accessible slotted/hexagonal
plugs. Coils shall be factory leak tested at 21 bars and the recommended operating pressure
shall be up to 16 bars. The coil shall be designed in such a way that the water pressure drop
is at a minimum to lower the pumping cost. It must be easily removable either from the side or
from the bottom of the unit.
F. Condensate Collector
1. The condensate tray shall be a one-piece structure, made of 1mm-thick galvanized
sheet steel, insulated with polyethylene self-extinguishing foam (3mm thick, fire retardant
CSTB M1) and shall be fitted with a 16mm O/D galvanized steel tail for an easy connection. It
shall minimize the quantity of residual water inside the unit. Thanks to its position downward
from the fan, in the high air pressure zone, it shall avoid having foul air drawn through the
system of condensate drainage. The condensate tray shall be easily removable from the
bottom for inspection and cleaning without disturbing the connecting pipe work.
2. Fan-coil units may be provided with an optional condensate pump.
G. EC fan motor (on models FED/FEU)
1. EC fan motor wheels. Fans shall be double-air inlet double width; direct drive centrifugal
type, forward curved multi-blade, large diameter plastic impellers to ensure low sound levels.
Impellers shall be statically balanced.
2. EC motor fan housing. The fan housing shall be made of plastic, having a fire retardant
Class V0 according to UL94, and smoke Class F2 according to NF 16-101.
3. Impeller: Galvanized steel sheet or PA Plastic
4. Rotor: Galvanized
5. Electronics enclosure: Die-cast aluminum
6. Direction of rotation: Clockwise, seen on rotor
7. Type of protection: IP 44
8. Insulation Class: “B”
9. Mounting Position: Shaft horizontal
10. Rotor on top or rotor on bottom on request
11. Condensate discharges: None
12. Mode of operation: continuous operation
13. Bearings: Maintenance free balls bearings
14. Technical features:
15. PFC Passive, Control input 0-10V / PWM, Output 10 VDC max 1.1 mA, Tach output,
Over temperature protected electronics / motor
16. EMC:
17. Interference emission according to EN 61000-6-3, Interference immunity according to
EN 61000-6-1, Harmonics according to DIN EN 61000-3-2/3
18. Leakage current: < 3.5 mA according to EN 60950-1
19. Cable exit: Variable
20. Protection Class: I
21. Product conforms to standards: EN 60335-1, EN 61800-5-1, EN 60950-1, CE
22. Approvals: UL, CSA, CCC, GOST
H. Filters
1. Filter shall be EU3/G3 permanent synthetic, fire retardant CSTB M1, washable with tap
water (max 40°C), polyester media mounted on a metal frame. Filter withdrawal shall be very
easy by clips from the bottom or the back of the unit, without the need for any tools.
I. Control
1. The control panel shall be made of galvanized sheet steel, designed according to CEI
335-2-40 standard and class IP 23 protection and maintain full earth continuity. It shall be
easily accessible and shall include quick connection terminal blocks (spring terminals) for fast
and accurate commissioning of air volumes, an integral mains protection fuse.
2. Each fan-coil unit shall be provided with an individual control thermostat.
J. Fresh air connection
1. A fresh air connection could be added to the unit either at the inlet or at the discharge
side, with or without constant air flow controller.
K. Access
1. Access to the fan motor, the water coil and the electric heater option shall be possible
via easily accessible bottom panel.

2.02 TRENCH COOLING UNITS
A. Model: 2-pipe, trench height 130 mm.
B. Equipment tags:
1. TCU-LA-RTG (-LA: Level abbreviation, -RTG: Room tag)
C. Characteristics.
1. Floor duct: Made from sendzimir galvanized steel. Coated on both sides in graphite
grey
2. Grille frame profile: A colour to match the grille with protective strip on three sides
3. Connection and controller box: For quick and secure electrical connection; saves
installation time. Control or BMS interface
4. Condensate tray: For reliable draining of condensate and simultaneous air guiding,
specifically designed for easy cleaning in line with the hygiene guideline VDI 6022
5. High performance coil:
i. Made from round copper pipes with aluminium fins
ii. Coated in graphite grey
iii. Suitable for a maximum operating pressure of 10 bar at 120 °C
iv. With anti-twist protection
v. Eurocone connection
vi. For 2- and 4-pipe system
6. Separating panel: Acts simultaneously as finger protection for the cross-flow fan,
filter frame, air deflector, grille support and cross-brace to strengthen the trench
7. Filter.
8. High efficiency EC cross-flow fan:
i. Energy saving, with flow optimised impellers in a cascade arrangement as a
continuous fan arrangement
ii. Even flow through the convector
iii. Robust motor design for quiet running
iv. Variable speed control by means of external 0 – 10 V signal
v. Motor monitoring with internal fault processing
9. Cover plate: Acts as visual guard and protection against dirt
10. Height adjustable mounting bracket: For safely supporting the trench with sound
insulation
11. Condensate pump mounting set: As an accessory, for draining condensate, where
required. Supplied separately or fitted at the factory
12. Cross-flow fan fixing:
i. Easy maintenance of the cross-flow fan without tools
ii. New combined coupling/ball pin system
iii. Simultaneous sound insulation
13. Height adjustment: For height adjustment and support of the trench
14. Roll-up grille: aluminium, natural, anodised:
i. Grille dimensions 18 x 5 mm
ii. Made from corrosion protected steel spiral springs with colour matched
spacers
iii. Free area approx. 70 %
D. Test conditions.
1. Heating output and cooling capacities. Heating output and cooling capacities have
been tested in accordance with EN 16430 “Fan assisted radiators, convectors and
trench convectors”.
2. Acoustic performance. The sound power level is tested in line with EN ISO 3744
(Determination of sound power levels and sound energy levels of noise sources
using sound pressure – Engineering methods for an essentially free field over a
reflecting plane) in a semi low- reflection sound test chamber.
E. Water connections.
1. Valve body 1/2”, axial version. As a low noise, flow optimised design with stainless
steel shaft and double O-ring seal suitable with actuator, max. operating
temperature 120 °C, max. operating pressure 10 bar
2. Return Shut-off Valve, 1/2”, angle version. Brass, nickel plated body, with O-ring
seal max. operating temperature 120 °C, max. operating pressure 10 bar.
3. Valve Thermoelectric actuator, 24V. Power consumption approx. 3 W, supply
cable length approx. 1900 mm, total height 69 mm, diameter 42 mm, connection
fitting 30 x 1.5 mm.
F. Control.
1. Each trench cooling unit includes internal fuse protection. A powerful
microprocessor with programmable parameters covers all required functions.
Consequently, each trench cooling unit has its own “intelligence” and can be
operated in groups via networks.
2. Building automation hook-up. The trench cooling unit with Control can also be
equipped with plug-in communication interfaces for single room control via CAN
bus or for a hook-up to higher ranking control systems: KNX, Modbus and LON.
3. Control functions. The programmable Control offers many different functions:
i. Options: 5 fan stages, manually adjustable
ii. Valve control for 2-pipe/4-pipe applications (heating/cooling) for
thermoelectric valve drives 24 V DC Open/Close
iii. Motor monitoring with fault message processing
4. Temperature control with modulating fan support. On demand, the energy efficient
EC cross-flow fan is regulated with variable speed to back up the cooling function.
5. BMS interface. The units come on standard with BMS interface
i. Power supply 230 V / 50 Hz.
ii. Fan speed control 20-100% via 0-10 VDC BMS-signal.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are suitable for installation.
B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Do not damage equipment or finishes.
C. Fan-Coil Units:
1. Install as indicated.
2. Coordinate to ensure correct recess size for recessed units.
D. Units with Hydronic Coils:
1. Provide with shut-off valve on supply piping and tamper-proof, balancing valve with
memory stop on return piping.
2. If not easily accessible, extend air vent to exterior surface of cabinet for ease of
servicing.
3. Provide float operated automatic air vents with stop valve for fan coil units.
E. Units with Cooling Coils: Connect drain pan to condensate drain.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of units.
B. Install new filters.
3.07 SCHEDULES
END OF SECTION

9 Electrical System:
9.1 26 0500 Common Work Results for Electrical:
9.1.1 Part 1 Scope of Electrical Services Installation.

1.01 SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES INSTALLATIONS
A. This section provides an introduction to the services design which the MEP sub
contractor is required to supply, install, test and commission for the Qatar Integrated
Railway Project. The drawings and specifications indicate the full extent of the works
and this section is primarily to assist the subcontractor in understanding the design
concepts.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES
A. The Electrical services comprise the following:
1. Electrical Services
2. LV distribution and Switchgear
3. Submains distribution
4. Power Installation
5. Lighting Installation
6. Emergency Lighting
9.1.2 Part 2 Fixing to Building Structure

3.01 GENERAL
A. Mark-out, set-out and firmly fix all equipment, components and necessary brackets
and supports.
A. Ensure that the design, construction, materials and finishes of all equipment are
suitable for the location, climatic and operating conditions to which the installation
shall be exposed.
B. Ensure that the whole installation complies with the relevant standards, including the
following:
1. BS 5080 Part 1 (ed 1999) -Structural fixings in concrete and masonry. Method of
test for tensile loading
9.1.3 Part 3 Painting and Finishes

4.01 PAINTING GENERAL
A. Provide a painted finish to all steel pipework, fittings, ancillaries, supports including
plant and equipment such as:
1. Steel tanks and vessels.
2. Thermal insulation if specified elsewhere.
3. Areas of damage or deterioration of manufacturer's protective coatings
B. Following delivery storage and installations on site make good any damage to
finishes, by cleaning, degreasing and refurbishing.
C. Use a zinc rich metallic priming paint to BS4652:2015and gloss finishing coat where
indicated. Comply with requirements of BS5493 (ed 1977) and BS6150 (ed 2006).
D. Ensure that gloss finishing paints are of machine finish grade having high adhesion,
high resistance to solvents, mineral oils, chipping and impact damage.
E. Use heat resistant paints for surfaces over 80°C.
F. Ensure metal surfaces are thoroughly cleaned, all mill and welded scale removed and
finally degreased.
G. All ferrous metals used for the supports and brackets of pipework, ductwork and plant
items shall be cleaned by wire brushing to remove dirt, scale and corrosion, and all
grease shall be removed prior to painting to BS5493 (ed 1977). All brackets and
supports shall be painted two coats of zinc rich primer, prior to fixing, and a further
touch up coat immediately on fixing. An additional coat of oil based finish paint of
Approved colour shall be applied to all brackets and supports in plantrooms and
where visible, on final installation in lieu of the second coat of zinc rich primer. Where
materials are prefabricated off site, a coat of primer shall be applied immediately
following fabrication and prior to dispatch to site
4.02 PAINTING PIPEWORK
A. All black tube, fittings and black ferrous pipework ancillaries shall be cleaned by wire
brushing to remove dirt, scale and corrosion and all grease shall be removed all in
accordance with latest edition of BS7079:2009 prior to painting. Painting shall
comprise one coat zinc rich primer applied immediately on installation and a further
coat of oil based flat finish to an Approved colour prior to completion. Where pipework
is to be insulated however, the finish coat shall be a second coat of zinc rich primer
applied immediately before the insulation is applied. Where materials are
prefabricated off site, a coat of primer shall be applied immediately following
fabrication and prior to dispatch to site.
B. Where black, galvanised, plastic, cast iron or copper pipework is exposed to view and
is fixed immediately adjacent to wall or ceiling areas or rooms other than plantrooms
the finish coat of the pipework shall be painted using suitably based paints to match
the colour finish of the surrounding walls or ceilings if applicable.
C. Paint materials shall be suitable for the operating temperature of the pipework
installation
4.03 CLEANING AND PAINTING EQUIPMENT
A. All items of equipment shall be clean and free from dirt, rust, scale and corrosion, and
all excess grease shall be removed prior to painting.
B. Where equipment has been finish painted at works all minor marks or scratches on
the finished item shall be repaired on site by rubbing down filling and 'touch up'
painted by using the manufacturers specific paint to provide an exact colour match
and finish. Damage to finishes which in the Engineers opinion cannot be successfully
repaired in this manner or where colour matching is not satisfactory shall be replaced
by utilising new parts, panels, etc., or by an 'on site' complete respray or repainting of
the entire item of plant and equipment.
C. All other items of equipment primed or unpainted including pipework and ductwork
ancillaries shall be painted/sprayed on site with two coats oil based undercoat and
one coat oil based flat finish to an Approved colour.
4.04 GALVANIZED FINISHES
A. All materials which are galvanized finish shall be clean and free from dirt grease and
corrosion. Where minor remedial works are necessary and on Approval only the
repair to the finish shall be carried out using two coat application of a cold galvanising
zinc rich 2¬pack epoxy primer. If in the opinion of the Engineer the repair would not
be satisfactory or suitable then the item of work requiring repair shall be removed
from site and be galvanised by the hot dipped method or as otherwise Approved.
4.05 SPECIAL PAINT FINISHES
A. All ferrous metals exposed in areas of very high humidity, permanently damp
conditions or exposed to the weather shall be painted with 2 coats of zinc rich 2¬pack
epoxy primer and one coat flat finish to Approved colour. Where acidic or alkaline
atmospheric conditions prevail all ferrous metals shall be painted one coat of suitable
primer and two coats of chlorinated rubber finish.
4.06 CHROMIUM PLATED FINISH TO WASTES AND OVERFLOWS
A. All exposed to view wastes, overflows, brackets and ventilating pipes in toilets shall
be in copper with compression fittings and the whole installation shall be chromium
plated finish unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. All chromium plated traps
shall be in copper.
4.07 PAINTING WATER STORAGE TANKS.
A. All ferrous metal water storage, expansion or contraction tanks or cisterns shall be
cleaned internally by wire brushing to remove dirt, scale and corrosion and all grease
shall be removed prior to painting with 2 coats of Approved bitumastic paint to
BS3416 (ed 1991) suitable for the type of water and the storage temperature.
4.08 TYPES OF PAINT TO BE USED
A. The Contractor shall prepare for Approval a schedule of painting finishes before any
painting operations commence. The schedule shall indicate in detail the following:-
B. Item to be painted
C. Standard finish
D. Proposed primer and flat finish to be applied
E. Name and type of paint proposed
F. Proposed colour sample
G. The above Schedule shall be approved or alternative colours and type of paint
required shall be stated.In general the following types of paint and preparations will be
considered acceptable:-
1. Ferrous metal -Internal -zinc rich primer to BS 5493 Table 4F Type PF3A (min
40% zinc phosphate) plus oil based flat finish.
2. Ferrous metal -External or damp conditions -2 Pack epoxy zinc phosphate primer
to BS 5493 Table 4K Type KP1A.
3. Galvanised finishes -Patch repairs -2 Pack epoxy zinc rich primer to BS 12944
(ed 1999) Table 4K Type KP1B.
4. Galvanised ferrous metal -rubbed lightly with abrasive paper cleaned with white
spirit and one coat etching primer, one coat of zinc rich primer and one coat oil
based finish either gloss or flat to match the location.
5. Copper -Rubbed lightly with abrasive paper cleaned with white spirit and then
two coats of oil based undercoat and one coat oil based gloss finish or flat finish.
6. Plastic -cleaned and degreased then one coat undercoat and one coat gloss
finish or flat finish.
H. All paint shall be applied to the manufacturers recommended dry film thickness and
shall be suitable for the substrate/overcoating finish and intended operating
conditions. Conditions under which painting is carried out shall be within tolerance
limits set by the paint manufacturer for the particular application.
I. The installation shall be executed in such a manner that corrosion points are avoided.
J.The paint may be applied by dipping, flow-coating, spraying or brushing.
K. Layers of dirt, oil, grease as well as dampness shall be thoroughly removed
immediately before the application of each protective layer
4.09 HEALTH AND SAFETY
A. All products must comply with relevant British Standards and with the Environmental
Protection Act and local Qatar regulations.
B. Copies of manufacturers Health and Safety Guidance Notes for the products must be
held on site and be available for operatives. Manufacturers recommendations shall be
followed at all times.
C. The use of paint and other finishes materials shall follow the requirements of the
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations (COSHH) 1988.
END OF SECTION

9.2 26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables:

A. Low voltage cables (single core and multi core).
B. Single conductor building wire.
B. Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
C. Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for electrical service
conductors.
D. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
A. BS 7846: Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured, fire-resistant cables of
rated voltage 600/1000 V, having low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when
affected by fire.
B. BS 7655: Specification for insulating and sheathing materials for cables. General
introduction.
C . BS 8519: Selection and installation of fire-resistant power and control cable systems
for life safety and fire-fighting applications.
D. BS 7211:2012 Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated and thermoplastic sheathed
cables for voltages up to and including 450/750 V for electric power and lighting and
having low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire.
E. BS 6724 (ed1997+A3:2008) Electric cables. Thermosetting insulated, armoured
cables for voltages of 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V, having low emission of smoke
and corrosive gases when affected by fire.
F. BS 6387:2013 Specification for performance requirements for cables required to
maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions.
G. NFPA 130:2014:2014- Life Safety Code
H. Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Conditioning Equipment of KAHRAMAA
I. Shall be in compliance with Qatar Railway Safety Standards (QRSS) and/or specified
in Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 6)
K BS EN 50267-2-1: Common test methods for cables under fire conditions
L IEC 60754: Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from cables
M IEC 60228: Conductors of insulated cables
N IEC 61034: Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under defined
conditions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction,
ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
B. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum
conductors substituted for copper conductors. Include proposed modifications to
raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodate substituted
conductors.
C. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
D. Type test certificates for the proposed material from internationally known testing
body
E. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
Ashgal, Qatar Foundation, Qatar Petroleum, etc.
F. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
G. Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
H. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
I. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company
registration for supplier.
J. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on
non-complied items.
A. Conform to requirements of BS 6724 (ed1997+A3:2008) and BS 7211:2012 .
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with
A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures
lower than -10 degrees C (14 degrees F), unless otherwise permitted by
manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable,
notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work.

2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by BS
7211:2012 and BS 6724 (ed1997+A3:2008) and product listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise
indicated, permitted, or required.
C. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
D. Manufactured wiring systems are permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:
a. For branch circuits where concealed under raised floors, where concealed
above accessible ceilings for lighting, and in open ceiling areas for lighting.
2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. LS0H cables and wires rated 600/1000 V: shall comply with BS 7655, operating
conductor temperature of 90 deg. C, single core stranded plain annealed copper
conductors to IEC 60228. Cables are to have Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LS0H)
composite sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN 50267-2-1, no propagation
fire and complying with BS 7655 operating conductor temperature 90ºC. Cable used
as earth conductor is to have green or green/yellow striped colour.
B. Fire resistant LS0H cables rated 600/1000 V: shall be multi core or uni core plain
copper stranded circular or shaped conductor to IEC 60228 with fire resistant
insulation category CWZ to BS 6387, category F2 to BS 7846, and complying with BS
7655 operating conductor temperature 90ºC. Complying with BS 8519 cables
category 2 or 3. Cables are have single galvanized steel wire armour and extruded
low smoke zero halogen (LS0H) over sheath to IEC 61034 and IEC 60754 or BS EN
50267-2-1.
C. VFD Cables feeding life safety equipment such as; smoke / pressurization fans, etc.)
shall be of fire resistant type to IEC 60331:2009 with LS0H over sheath to IEC
61034:2005 for low smoke emission, IEC 60754-1:2011 for halogen acid gas content
and IEC 60754-2:2011 for degree of acidity of evolved gas.
D. All cables and wires shall be insulated LS0H, listed as being resistant to spread of fire
and shall have reduced smoke emission. Cables and wires shall be enclosed for their
entirety in armour sheaths, conduits, or enclosed raceways, boxes, and cabinets.
E. Cables installed exposed or surface mounted shall be of fire resistant type. Cables &
Wires in conduits, where not embedded in concrete shall be of fire resistant type.
F. Cable distribution network shall be designed to ensure that the voltage drop from the
transformer 415V terminal points and up to the farthest end of the final branch circuit
is within the limits accepted by KAHRAMAA.
G. Provide products that comply with requirements of BS 6724(ed1997+A3:2008),
BS7211:2012 and QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 6.
H. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
the purpose indicated.
I. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to
installation.
J. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
K. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for
cable tray use.
L. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and
labeled as sunlight resistant.
N. Conductors and Cables Installed Exposed in Spaces Used for Environmental Air (only
where specifically permitted): Plenum rated, listed and labeled as suitable for use in
return air plenums.
O. Conductor Material:
1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this
project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated
copper conductors.
P. Minimum Conductor Size:
1. Branch Circuits: 2.5mm².
2. Control Circuits: 2.5mm².
Q. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with BS 6724/7211:2012 or
QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 6 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements
specified.
R. Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority
having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
3. Color Code:
a. 415Y/220V-240V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:
1) Phase A: Brown.
2) Phase B: Orange.
3) Phase C: Yellow.

4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray.
b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.
c. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe.
2.03 SINGLE / MULTI CONDUCTOR
A. Description: Conductor insulated wire. All cables will be LS0H type, except on areas
remarked on drawings in which cable will be fire resistant rated to BS 6387.
B. Conductor Stranding:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Stranded.
2. Control Circuits: Stranded.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D. Insulation:
1. Low smoke zero halogen: LS0H
2.04 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with
the conductors to be connected.
B. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
terminations designed for terminal lugs.
2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished
with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
3. Copper Conductors Size 4mm² and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors where connectors are required.
4. Stranded Conductors Size 2.5mm² and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for
connections to terminal screws.
C. Mechanical Connectors: use only compression type terminal lugs as per QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 6.
D. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration
suitable for connection to be made.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly
sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70:2014.
D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
F. Execution shall be as per QCS 2014 Section 21 Part-6.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors
and cables.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 3.0 m (10 ft) of
location shown.
3. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling,
and power-limited circuits in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part-6.
4. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with QCS
2014 Section 21 Part-6.5. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated,
when branch circuits are shown as separate, combining them together in a single
raceway is not permitted.
6. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded
conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases
installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated
neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Installation:
(a) pull cable into position by hand, where possible using an adequate
number of operative roller guides suitably positioned along cable
length
(b) obtain approval of pulling cables by winch or similar appliance
(c) when pulling by winch or the like, fit a suitable tension gauge into
the haulage line between winch and cable. Pulling tension shall not
exceed the limit recommended by the cable manufacturer
(d) do not allow cable to twist or rotate about its longitudinal axis
(e) lay 3 phase groups of single core cables in trefoil formation. If this
is not possible obtain instructions
(f) install cables to allow any one cable to be subsequently removed
without disturbing the remainder
(g) underground cable horizontal separation shall be a minimum of 150 mm
(h) damaged cables shall be removed, unless the Engineer agrees to a repair.
(i) all cables shall be neatly run in all situations. Where two or more
cables are to be installed, cable tray must be provided.
(j) where power cables are surface run on the external faces of structures
or above ground level they shall be installed on cable tray. They shall
be protected from radiation of the sun by means of purpose made
sunshades, which shall be of an approved design, securely fixed
and fully ventilated.
(k) mechanical protection by cable tray covers shall be provided for all
cable trays above ground/floor level to a height of 1000mm.
(l) when more than one cable is to be terminated at particular items of
equipment special care should be taken to ensure that all cables to
that equipment are routed from a common direction and each is
terminated in an orderly and symmetrical fashion. Each and every
cable shall be permanently identified at each end by its cable number as
noted within the schedules. The identification label shall be of
adequate size and style to a pattern approved by the Engineer and
shall be securely fixed to its relative cable.
(m) identification labels shall also be fixed on cables at each and every
entry and exit point of buried ducts, exits and entry to any structure
and in such other positions as are necessary to identify and trace
the route of any site cable. The use of punch type adhesive labels
(Dymo-tape) will not be permitted.
(n) where cables enter or leave structures or panel plinths, the ducts
including spare ducts shall be sealed at the points of entry or exit.
Caulking shall be carried out with an approved asbestos
compound and followed by not less than 40mm of epoxy resin
two-mix cold waterproof compound or a weak sand/cement mixture
as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for
temporarily sealing all cable ducts into structures during the
installation stage to prevent accidental flooding of structures.
(o) during caulking care should be taken to ensure that the serving and/or
armouring of any cable is not damaged. Any damaged cables shall be
replaced entirely
(p) all cables entering or leaving hazardous areas (e.g. wet well), air
conditioned areas or areas protected by a fixed fire fighting
installation shall do so via approved proprietary manufactured cable
transits. Cables entering or leaving structures or passing between
rooms of the same classification may be sealed by alternative
means subject to the agreement of the Engineer.
(q) cables shall be free from kinks and the whole installation shall
present a neat appearance.
(r) ties of PVC, nylon, plastic or similar material will not be permitted
under any circumstances.
(s) protection of cables against possible mechanical damage shall be
provided wherever seen to be necessary by the Engineer. All cables
are to be run with particular regard to neatness. Multiple runs are to be
arranged so that cables entering or leaving the run do so in a logical
order.
(t) all power cables shall be terminated with palm type compression
terminals of the correct type and size.
(u) special terminals shall be provided where necessary. Standard
terminals which have palms/holes which are oversized for the
application will not be acceptable. Standard terminals which are
drilled out to a larger size, reducing the area of the palm will not be
acceptable.
(v) removal of strands or shaving of conductors to enable them to
be terminated at terminals which are not designed for the size of
cable necessary will not be permitted at any point.
(w) pneumatic crimping machines shall be employed with correctly
sized dies. Hand crimping shall not be used.
D. Bending Radius: as large as possible and cable shall not to bend to a radius less
than that specified in the relevant British Standard, QGEWC regulations or
manufacturer’s recommendation, whichever is largest.
E. Underground Cables in PVC-u Ducts:
(a) cables shall be installed in ducts where there is hard standing or vehicular
passage.
Ducts where there is vehicular passage or landscaped area shall be concrete
encased
(b) cable duct size shall comply with BS 3506 Class B or BS 4660.
(c) However the minimum duct wall thickness shall be as per the following:
DUCT SIZE DUCT WALL THICKNESS

(mm) (mm)
75 3.2
100 3.4
150 3.6
200 4.2
(d) run cables at least 300 mm clear of other services, whether the
latter run parallel or transversely to cable trench. use pulling
compound, or lubricant to avoid excessive stress on the cable, if
required
(e) run cables below intersecting piped services, unless the cable
would be at a depth exceeding 2 m, in which case seek instructions
(f) ducts shall not be filled with cables to more than 60 % of their capacity.
(g) nylon draw cords shall always be left in ducts
(h) cable duct pits shall be provided at each change in direction and
in any case at distances not exceeding 30 m
(i) ducts shall be suitably sealed with polyurethane foam or
proprietary cable sealing arrangements if specified
(j) empty ducts shall be plugged with removable plugs
(k) ducts shall have a minimum diameter of 50 mm.

F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the
same manner.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70:2014 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide
independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways,
piping, ductwork, or other systems.
H. Install conductors with a minimum of 300 mm (12 inches) of slack at each outlet.
I. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other
equipment enclosures.
J.Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded
conductors inside enclosures in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 6.
K. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into
raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections
without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove
corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated
connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's
recommended tools and dies.
L. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods
suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent
to unspliced conductors.
M. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
N. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400
O. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all
equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a
complete operating system.
P. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 6.
A. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
END OF SECTION

9.3 26 0526 Bonding System:

A. A.Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and
other electrical work.
A. Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.
B. Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.
C. Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior
luminaires.
A. BS 7430 Code of practice for earthing.
B. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 22
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying
with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.
3. For signal reference grids, coordinate the work with access flooring furnished
4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
bonding system components.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include locations of items to be bonded and methods of connection.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Field quality control test reports.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system
components and connections.
A. Conform to requirements of BS7430 and QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 22.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes
execution requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
D. Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum five years
documented experience with high frequency grounding systems.
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

2.01 REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
A. Reinforcing bars should be specified. This specification covers reinforcing steel with
protective zinc coatings applied by dipping the properly prepared reinforcing steel bars
into a molten bath of zinc.
B. Reinforcing bars shall have no bare spots and be free of blisters. Coated bars having
stuck together or exhibit sharp slivers or tears, which make the material dangerous to
handle, shall be rejected.
C. Reinforcing bars shall be of 16 mm of diameter and shall comply with all the
characteristics described in the table below:
Table 1. Steel reinforcement bars physical characteristics

D. Mechanical splices or coupling devices shall be hot-dip galvanized, mechanically
galvanized, or otherwise coated to resist corrosion.
E. Galvanized reinforcing bars shall be noted with a suffix “G”.
F. Embrittlement:
1. Strain-age embrittlement of galvanized reinforcing steel bars may occur when pre-
fabricated bars are galvanized.
2.02 EXOTHERMIC WELDING
A. Exothermic welding system produces molecular joint, is not detached, is not affected
by galvanic couple and can withstand equal or greater voltage and current than
welding conductors. This system shall be used for earthing grid in station and
substations of this project where referred.
B. The system ensures good and permanent connections, being of low weight and
volume.
C. Exothermic welding system will consist of the following components:
1. Mould:
a) The graphite mould is machined, precisely for the connection to be performed
and for the appropriate size of conductors.
b) Moulds shall be available for all the connection types as well as cable to cable
joints, wire to electrode joint, structure steel to wire joint, etc.
c) Each mould shall be supplied with a sheet of general safety instructions,
preparation of conductors and instructions for welding.
d) Each mould shall have a mark including; catalogue reference, the elements to
be welded and the welding load required.
e) The mould shall include at least the following elements:
 Cover: Close the mould while the exothermic reaction takes place.
 Crucible or cup: Holds the welding components before the reaction occurs.
 Disc Seat Retainer: At the bottom of the crucible there shall be a seat in
which the retaining disc is placed to hold the material in the crucible before
the reaction.
 Welding chamber: Machined cavity in which conductors or items to be
welded are precisely fitted. This welding chamber shall have a clearance
with a diameter greater than the elements to be welded.
 Duct or dump: The melt shall down by a pipeline from the crucible to the
welding cavity.
2. Welding:
a) The welding material shall be supplied identified with the catalogue number and
quantity.
b) The welding material shall be a mixture of copper and aluminium oxide which
shall require more than 870 ° C to ignite. In the other hand there shall be a
silver colour powder, named the INITIATOR or STARTER of the reaction, which
shall be ignited with the spark or lighter.
3. Disc:
a) It may be constructed of ferrous or non-ferrous material
b) It will allow the exothermic reaction in the crucible during the time required for
the resulting slag floats; the heat of the molten copper (liquid) melt the disc and
this flows to the cavity for welding.
4. Pliers:
a) Shall be designed according to the graphite moulds; for welding wire to wire,
wire to wire rods and bars.
b) Pliers shall adjust the mould making pressure between the mould parts. The
pressure can be varied.
2.03 CLAMPS
A. Copper rod coupling material shall be copper alloy containing not less than 80%
copper or bronze, and shall be suitable for direct burial. Hardware material must be
either stainless-steel or minimum 80% copper, suitable for direct burial and
compatible with the coupling material
B. The surface finish of the completed coupling shall be smooth and free of cracks,
burrs and sharp projections. Conformance to no sharp projections shall be tested
using a Technical Engineering Service Company, Sharp Edge Tester, Model SET-50
device.
C. The clamp in the assembled mode shall exhibit no less than 95% of the conductivity
of a soli The joined clamp/grounding conductor/rod electrode assembly must
withstand a pullout force of no less than 500 pounds before separation. This test
shall be performed by pulling on the grounding conductor with the rod held firmly in
place, the clamp providing a securing function only.
D. Bolted Clamp: Assembly torque requirements shall fall the following criteria with the
appropriate thread characteristics:
a) Standard Duty 350 inch-pounds 3/8-20 UNC
E. Compression Clamp: Hammer-on clamp shall provide sufficient force to facilitate a
compression connection between the clamp and rod electrode. The grounding
conductor shall be in direct contact with the rod electrode to assure a positive
grounding path.
F. Clamps shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark, and trade size.
Each clamp package shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark,
and trade size.
2.04 EQUIPOTENTIAL BARS
A. The equipotential bonding bars shall be of copper.
B. Dimensions
1. Equipotential Bar 16 ways:
Length : 825 mm
Height : 50 mm
Width : 61 mm
Bolts : 12 (M10) + 4 (M6)
2. Equipotential Bar 25 ways:

Length : 795 mm
Height : 50 mm
Width : 61 mm
Bolts : 15 (M10) + 10 (M6)

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has
been completed.
B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections
without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor
strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact
points, and contact surfaces.
3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for
the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's
recommended tools and dies.
C. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26
0553.
D. Circuit Wiring
1. shall have a green/yellow coloured insulated earth continuity cable connecting
the earth bus or earth terminal in switchboards, switchgears, motor control
centres and panel boards to the motor, equipment, outlet and other device by
earthing lugs. All hand rails and other metal works within 2 m of a potentially live
metal surface shall be earthed.
E. Main Earth Loops
1. Fix in mechanical equipment rooms and other areas indicated on the drawings, in
convenient locations, allowing two return paths to earth
2. Fix copper tape to structure with copper or brass saddles and/or screws. Make
tees and straight joints by riveting and seating
3. Make branch connections between main loop and major equipment, such as
switchboards, switchgears, motor control centres and large motors, with copper
tape of same size as main loop tape
4. Make other branch connections to equipment with copper conductors of size not
less than half that of the relative phase conductor.
F. Removable Earth Links
1. Fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected
for testing
2. Install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth
electrode
G. Exposed Earth Cables
1. Install and locate in a manner to provide maximum mechanical protection,
utilising ceiling corners, suspended ceiling and webs of beams as much as
possible.
H. Bolted Connections:
1. Multiple bolt type
2. Where bare copper is bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be
silver/tin electroplated.
I. Brazed Connections:
1. where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly
clean
2. metal prior to brazing and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.
J.Connections Between Dissimilar Metals: protect by:
1. painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
2. wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
K. Equipment Earthing:
1. connect all non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical
installation to the earthing system
2. non-current carrying metallic parts of the electrical installation include:
(i) metal conduit, cable armour, raceways, outlet boxes, cabinets, and the like
(ii) exposed metal parts of apparatus
(iii) enclosures, doors, grills, barriers and the like
protecting or shielding electrical equipment from direct
access
3. series earthing of one piece of equipment to another is not acceptable. Each
item shall be individually connected to earth system
L. Fire Fighting Equipment:
1. earth on a separate ring system.
M. Motors Earthing:
1. connect the motor terminal box to the relative earth loop. The terminal must be
mechanically connected to the frame or, where this is not feasible
2. extend the earthing conductor through an insulated bushed opening in the
connection box and connect to the frame.
N. Main Switchboards, Switchgears and Motor Control Centres Earthing:
1. connect the special earthing lug or busbars inside the cabinet to the main earth
copper tape.
2. connect all parts of the switchboards, switchgears and motor control centres other
than “live” parts, to the earth bar in the board in an approved manner.
3. The MV /MCC panel shall be connected at both end of the MV/MCC to a two separate
Earthing pits, (directly or through intermediary Earthing bar installed in MV/MCC
basement) or as approved by the Engineer. The earthing cable calculation shall be
performed with approved professional international recognised licensed software,
Subject to the Engineer’s approval
O. Distribution Boards Earthing:
1. connect an earthing conductor from the main distribution earth
busbar to an earth connector welded to the cabinet and earthing
bushings on the incoming and outgoing feeder conduits.
P. Earth Rod Electrodes:
1. extensible rods of the same diameter shall be installed in holes
drilled into the ground. If ground conditions permit, rods may be
driven into the ground either manually or mechanically. The
earth electrode shall be installed at such a depth that it penetrates
the summer water table by a minimum of 2 metres.
2. bolt earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number
to make connection with all incoming cables.
Q. Earth Pit:
1. Provide a concrete/PVC pit complete with a heavy duty
concrete, cast iron or PVC cover with recessed lifting hook to
the Engineers written approval, at the head of the earth rod, to
protect the rod and allow access to connections for testing.
A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting.
B. Perform ground conductors resistance tests under normally dry conditions.
C. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.
END OF SECTION

9.4 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems:

A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other
electrical work.
A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for
conduits.
B. Section 26 0537 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.
C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements
for interior luminaires.
A. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
Section 21.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
metal channel (strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-
installed concrete and masonry anchors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials
or methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
C. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by
ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports
upon request.
D. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
E. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
F. Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
G. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
H. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company
I. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on non-
complied items.
A. Comply with QCS 2014 Section 21.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
instructions.

2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories,
and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc.
(UL) or testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the
purpose indicated, where applicable.
3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated,
select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the
load to be supported with a minimum safety factor . Include consideration for
vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by QCS 2014
Section 21 and product listing.
5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports
unless specifically indicated or permitted.
6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the
environment where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless
steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to
be supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal
channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-
assembly of supports.
1. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized
steel.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.
2. Minimum Channel Thickness: 2.6 mm.
3. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 41 mm width by 21 mm height.
E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Equipment Supports: 13 mm diameter.
b. Busway Supports: 13 mm diameter.
c. Single Conduit up to 27mm trade size: 6 mm diameter.
d. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 10 mm diameter.
e. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 10 mm diameter.
f. Outlet Boxes: 6 mm diameter.
g. Luminaires: 6 mm diameter.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor
and fastener types indicated for the specified applications.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment
components.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
C. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from
suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from
roof deck.
E. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of
Structural Engineer.
F. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut)
to support equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-
mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-
out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it
relies on its own weight for support.
G. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0534.
H. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0537.
I. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.
J. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
K. Remove temporary supports.
L. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended
by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment
components.
END OF SECTION
9.5 26 0534 Conduits:

A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
C. Conduit fittings.
D. Accessories.
A. Section 07 8400 (See Architecture Specs) - Firestopping.
B. Section 26 0519 - Low Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal
clad cable (Type MC), armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems,
including uses permitted.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0535 - Surface Raceways.
E. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
F. Section 26 0540 - Underfloor Ducts.
G. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
A. BS EN 50086-1:1994 .Flexible steel conduits and adapters for the protection of electric
cable.
B. BS 2782. Method of testing plastics
C. BS 4568 Steel conduits and fittings, metric units
D. BS 4607 Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations rigid PVC conduits
and conduit fittings, metric units
E. BS EN 60423 IEC 423-A, Conduit diameters and threads for conduit and fittings.
F. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 7
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits
and fittings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.
C. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
D. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
E. Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
F. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
G. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company
H. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on
non-complied items.

2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. PVC conduits shall be utilized for embedded installations and rigid galvanized steel
conduits for all surface mounted installations including those concealed above
suspended ceiling or within cladding elements. Flexible steel conduits shall be utilized
with suitable IP rating dependent on the area of utilization.
B. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by
QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7 and product listing.
C. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types
indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application
applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a
particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
D. Underground:
1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid
PVC conduit.
2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metallic conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid
PVC conduit.
3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit, or rigid PVC conduit.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel
rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground.
5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 53 mm trade size is provided,
use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.
6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a
resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely
corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape
to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized
steel rigid metal conduit.
7. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection
tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 100 mm on
either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit.
8. All conduits shall be sized considering 15% adittional space capacity
D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
E. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
F. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
H. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete
raceway system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7
but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.
2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. Standards:
(a) all metallic conduits shall comply with BS 4568 and of Class 4 rigid steel
screwed type having an interior and exterior zinc coating of uniform quality and
appearance through all surfaces
B. Physical Properties:
(a) conduits shall not be less than 20 mm diameter size, and shall be complete with
all necessary threaded fittings, couplings and connecting devices having
galvanised equivalent finish.
(b) conduits and fittings shall be manufactured specially for electric wiring purposes.
When manufactured by a continuous weld process, weld heads both inside and
outside the tube shall be completely removed prior to galvanising
(c) all conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on delivery to the
site and shall be properly stored in covered racking so that it is protected from
mechanical damage and damage by weather and water whilst stored on the site
(d) all conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using brass male
bushes. All such bushes shall be hexagon headed, heavy duty long threaded type
(e) all conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal or
equivalent to that of the conduit with which the coupling is to be used, having
factory installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent entrance of moisture. All
coupling shall be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor
(f) all conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles giving not less than
3 mm clearance between the conduit and the surface to which it is fixed. Saddles
shall have finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be secured to the bar
by means of brass screws.
2.04 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT
A. Standards:
(a) Conduit and fittings shall comply with BS 4607: Part 1 and CEE Publication 26
or revised/amended/updated standards. In addition, conduit and fittings shall
comply with this specification where requirements are more stringent
(b) Conduit diameters shall comply with QGEWC regulations.
B. Physical Properties:
(a) conduit and fittings shall be:
(i) resistant to high temperatures
(ii) non-hygroscopic
(iii) self-extinguishing
(iv) of adequate insulation resistance and electric strength
(v) inert to all liquid normally discharged from residential, commercial and
industrial premises
(vi) suitable for installation, storage and transportation at temperature not
normally below -5 ° C. or above 85 ° C. and at these temperatures shall not:
 soften or suffer any structural degradation
 show signs of cracking, or deform so that cables cannot
be easily drawn in or are likely to be damaged when
drawing in, when bent, compressed or exposed to
extreme temperature
(vii) of adequate mechanical strength and thermal stability
(viii) suitably and indelibly marked and identified. Markings shall
include nominal size and be easily legible
(ix) Smooth inside and outside and free from burrs and sharp
edges. Surfaces and corners over which cables may be
drawn shall be smooth and well rounded.

C. Sizes of Conduit:
(a) minimum 20 mm, internal diameter unless otherwise indicated
(b) where size is not indicated: select in accordance with the
regulations and as proper to the number and size of conductors.
(c) The minimum conduit wall thickness shall be as per the following:
CONDUIT SIZE CONDUIT WALL THICKNESS

(mm) (mm)
20 1.8
25 1.9
32 2.3
38 2.5
50 3.1
D. Fittings: conduit entries shall be designed to ensure a watertight joint.

E. PVC Conduit Boxes:
(a) PVC Conduit Boxes can be used through PVC Conduit raceway
system and shall comply with BS 4607
(b) metallic conduit boxes as specified elsewhere in this section can be
used alternatively if required for PVC conduit raceway system
(c) all boxes shall be provided with tapped brass inserts for fixing the screws
(d) all boxes for switches, sockets, outlets, etc., shall be rigid PVC or
metallic type and their dimensions shall be suitable for fixing the
switches, sockets and other accessories.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 0.51 mm (20 mil).
B. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of
conduit and fittings to be installed.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Preparation:
(a) conduits up to 32 mm diameter; form on site with an approved bending machine
using proper formers, guides, springs, etc., taking care not to deform conduit.
Conduits over 32 mm diameter : use coupling fittings.
(b) Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings
and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
(c) Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
(d) Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.
Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
(e) Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
(f) Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible
point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.
(g) Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain
integrity of membrane.
(h) Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment
openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations.
Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve
integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations
of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
(i) Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other
elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400 (See
Architecture Specs)
C. Installation of Conduit:
(j) run conduit in square, symmetrical lines, parallel to or at right angles to walls and in
accordance with the accepted practice
(k) Install PV conduit system shall be mechanically continuous and watertight after
installation. All conduit system shall be arranged wherever possible to be self
draining
(l) conduit runs between draw-in positions shall conform to QGEWC Regulations
regarding no. of bends and lengths of straight run
(m) installation shall permit easy drawing in of cables
(n) keep conduits at least 100 mm from pipes and other non-electrical services
(o) install conduits so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, lights or ventilation outlets.
(p) install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
(q) arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
(r) support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable
hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
(s) group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel
channel ; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
(t) fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of
Section "Supporting Devices"
(u) do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for
temporary supports
(v) do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
(w) arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
(x) route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
(y) route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
(z) route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point.
(aa) maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
(bb) cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
(cc) bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
(dd) join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe
nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to
entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
(ee) use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to boxes and fittings.
(ff) install no more than equivalent of two 90-degree bends between boxes. Use
conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use
hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate and factory elbows for bends in metal
conduit larger than 2-inch (50-mm) size.
(gg) avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit
system
(hh) provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit
crosses seismic , control and expansion joints.
(ii) provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
(jj) use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
(kk) provide supports for fittings independently of any false ceiling for sunk and
concealed conduit systems.
(ll) size conduits, draw-in boxes and junction boxes in accordance with regulations.
(mm) swab whole of the conduit system to remove any loose matter or dirt before cables
are pulled in.
(nn) where conduits connect to switch boxes draw-in boxes and the like the conduits
must have a machined faced socket screwed on to the end which when tightened
is flush with the outside of the box. The conduit is then to be secured to the
apparatus by means of a hexagon smooth bore brass bush screwed from the
inside of the apparatus into the conduit socket in order to make a sound and tight
mechanical joint.
(oo) all horizontal runs shall be supported at no more than 900 mm. Vertical runs shall
be supported at no more than 1200 mm. Where directional changes occur support
shall be provided at no more than 150 mm either side of the bend.
(pp) hot bending shall be carried out on all non-metallic conduits. A bending spring of
the correct size shall be used in all cases. The heat source shall be provided by a
hot air torch. When the conduit is in a pliable state it shall be bent around a suitable
former and held in position until the conduit has set. No other method will be
approved.
(qq) (couplers, slip type bends and spouted fittings shall be made using semi permanent
mastic sealing compounds. Expansion couplers shall be used in surface
installations where straight runs exceed 8 meters.
(rr) standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and at sharp
changes of direction in addition to any special positions where they are required on
Site. Inspection couplers may be used in long runs to facilitate drawing in cables.
(ss) particular care must be taken to ensure that no water is allowed to enter conduit at
any time and all conduits shall be arranged with adequate ventilation and drainage
where necessary as directed by the Engineer. Inaccessible junction boxes will not
be allowed.
(tt) only continuous lengths of buried conduit shall be installed between boxes, no joint
boxes being allowed in the floor screeds. Conduits crossing expansion joints shall
be fitted with couplings of approved manufacture.
(uu) the ends of conduits laid or set in formwork prior to concreting shall be temporarily
sealed off with a coupler and a plug.
(vv) fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by means of spacer bar saddles securely fixed
by screws. Where conduits are concealed or laid in structural floors they shall be
held in position with substantial fixings of make and pattern to be approved by the
Engineer.
(ww) adaptable boxes shall be manufactured from PVC as previously detailed for conduit
boxes and sized to provide sufficient space factor.
(xx) weatherproof boxes and accessories shall be used outdoors where agreed on Site
by the Engineer or where indicated in this Specification or on the Drawings.
(yy) conduit shall be installed such as to permit complete rewiring without the need to
remove false ceiling or carry out builders work.
(zz) no single conduit serving phase socket outlets lighting points and switches shall
contain more than one phase.
(aaa) wiring shall be carried out on the looping-in system and no joints other than at
looping-in points will be allowed
(bbb) where the conduit system terminates at any equipment requiring a non-rigid
connection a flexible conduit shall be installed of the PVC or PVC sheathed metallic
type fully watertight with purpose made connection adapters.
(ccc) each flexible connection shall include not less than 400mm length of flexible
conduit and a separate earth conductor shall be run within the conduit connected to
the earth terminals in the equipment and the fixed conduit run. The flexible conduit
shall not be used as an earth continuity conductor.
D. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide
expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or
connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or
deflection.
2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
E. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound
at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is
not limited to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior
spaces.
F. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7.
END OF SECTION

9.6 26 0535 Surface Raceways:

A. Surface raceway systems.
B. Wireways.
C. Wall duct.
A. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes metal channel (strut) used as raceway.
B. Conduit.
C. Boxes.
E. Underfloor Ducts: Trench duct.
F. Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
G. Wiring Devices: Receptacles.
A. Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Section 21
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets
including dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details,
finishes, service condition requirements, and accessories.
1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors
and cables.
B. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
C. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
D. Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
E. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
F. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company
G. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on
non-complied items.
2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete
raceway system.
C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by QCS 2014 Section
21 and product listing.
2.02 WIREWAYS
A. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and
labeled.
B. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
C. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with QCS 2014 Section 21 but
not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.
2.03 WALL DUCT
A. Description: Metal raceways specifically designed for enclosure of wiring to X-ray
machines and similar medical equipment; listed and labeled.
B. Material: Steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and
are properly sized in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 to accommodate
raceways.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface
finishes are complete, including painting.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
C. Install raceways plumb and level.
D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with QCS 2014
Section 21, including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and
wireways used as pullboxes. Increase size of wireway where necessary.
E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 0529 at intervals
complying with QCS 2014 Section 21 and manufacturer's requirements.
F. Close unused raceway openings.
END OF SECTION

9.7 26 0536 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems:

A. Cable trays and accessories.
B. Firestopping within (not around) cable trays.
A. Section 07 8400 (See Architecture Specs) - Firestopping: Firestopping around
cable trays.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. Cable trays shall comply with BS 7671, and shall be constructed from mild steel hot
dip galvanized and of minimum thickness of 1.5 mm. All accessories and fixing
materials shall also be of galvanised sheet steel of not less than 1 mm thickness.
B. BS EN 10142 Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated low carbon steel
sheet and strip for cold forming: technical delivery conditions and BS EN 10147:2012
Pipes and fittings made of crosslinked polyethylene (PE-X). Estimation of the degree
of crosslinking by determination of the gel content.
C. Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Section 21 Part 9.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company registration
for supplier.
Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on non-
complied items.
A. Conform to requirements of QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7.
specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

2.01 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Description: ladder type tray according to BS 7671.
B. Material: mild steel hot dip galvanized and of minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.
C. Inside Width: As indicated on drawings.
D. Inside Depth: 90 mm
E. Straight Section Rung Spacing: 152 mm on center.
F. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors, and grounding straps.
G. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover.
2.02 TROUGH-TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Description: trough type tray according to BS 7671
B. Material: mild steel hot dip galvanized and of minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.
C. Inside Width: As indicated on drawings.
D. Inside Depth: 90 mm.
E. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
F. Covers: Flanged, solid, flush cover.
2.03 CHANNEL-TYPE CABLE TRAY
A. Description: solid bottom channel type cable tray according to BS 7671
galvanized and of minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.
C. Inside Depth: 90 mm.
D. Inside Width: As indicated on drawings.
E. Provide manufacturer's standard clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer
F. Covers: Flanged, solid cover.
2.04 WARNING SIGNS
A. Engraved Nameplates: 13 mm black letters on yellow laminated plastic nameplate,
engraved with the following wording: "WARNING! DO NOT USE CABLE TRAY AS
WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT. USE ONLY AS MECHANICAL SUPPORT FOR
CABLES AND TUBING!"

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Drilling, machining or cutting shall not be carried out after application of protective coat,
unless previously agreed by the Engineer. If cutting or drilling is necessary, edges shall be
cleaned up and painted with zinc based paint before erection.
B. Installation of vertical runs of tray along the line of vertical expansion joints in structure of
the facility shall not be allowed.
C. Cables shall be fixed to the trays by means of PVC covered saddles or straps secured with
brass or cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers.
D. 20 % spare capacity shall be maintained once all cables have been installed on trays.
Double banking of cables shall not be permitted. space between adjacent cables shall be
not less than the radius of the bigger cable.
E. Trays shall not be smaller than the minimum size stated on the Drawings or
specified later and shall be so sized; if not specified, the Contractor shall calculate the size
of the tray and submit to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall check the

minimum size as specified is large enough for his requirements and provide 20% spare
capacity for future use.
F. Support trays in conjunction with supporting devices as described under Section
"Supporting Devices". Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run,
and at other points to maintain spacing between supports of 1200 mm maximum.
G. Use expansion connectors where required.
H. Provide firestopping under provisions of relevant Section to sustain ratings when passing
cable tray through fire-rated elements.
I. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of the Earthing and Bonding Part of QCS.
(a) provide continuity between tray components.
(b) use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminium contact surfaces before assembly.
(c) provide specified cross section copper equipment grounding
conductor through entire length of tray; bond to each component.
(d) connections to tray may be made using mechanical or exothermic connectors.
J. Where specified, install warning signs at 1500 mm centres along cable tray, located to be
visible.
K. Where specified, install warning signs at 1500 mm centres along cable tray, located to be
visible.
L. Plastic tie-wraps of any description shall not be used for fixing cables to cable tray.
M. Saddle and cleat cables in position as they are installed along the route. Cables should be
neatly dressed and crossing of cables should be avoided by good detailed design of cable
routing.
N. All cable tray changes in direction or level shall be made via sets and adequately sized
angles to provide a support to the cables.
O. Single core cables of the same circuit shall be laid and mounted in purpose made trefoil
cleats.
P. In fire rated wall cross, cable trays will be sealed with fire rated foam.
END OF SECTION

9.8 26 0537 Boxes:

A. Outlet and device boxes up to 1,650 cu cm including those used as junction and pull
boxes.
B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 1,650 cu cm
(100 cubic inches).
C. Boxes for hazardous (classified) locations.
D. Floor boxes.
E. Underground boxes/enclosures.
A. Section 07 8400 - (See Architecture Specs) - Firestopping.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Conduit bodies and other fittings.
D. Section 26 0535 - Surface Raceways:
E. Section 26 0540 - Underfloor Ducts: Junction boxes for underfloor duct systems.
F. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
Section 21 Part 7.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
cabinets and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and
underground boxes/enclosures.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull
boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.
I. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on non-
complied items.

2.01 BOXES
1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as
permitted by QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7 and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete
raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose
intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7
but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding
conductors terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 1,650 cu cm (100 cubic inches), Including Those Used
as Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless
otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed
covers.
3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device
configuration where required.
6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
8. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type
and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate
mounting of luminaire where required.
9. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction.
Do not use field-connected gangable boxes.
10. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.
11. IP-65
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 1,650 cu
cm (100 cubic inches):
1. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 1,650 cu cm (100 cubic inches):
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
2. IP-65 for exterior.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7.
C. Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7.and
Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority
having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes
(other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit
connections in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7.. Do not provide
support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.
D. Install boxes plumb and level.
E. Flush-Mounted Boxes:
1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster,
etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from
finished surface more than 6 mm (1/4 inch) or does not project beyond finished
surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or
associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as
concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces
greater than 3 mm (1/8 inch) at the edge of the box.
F. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
G. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 150 mm (6 inches) deep.
2. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with
cover bolted in place.
H. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between
adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.
I. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
J. Close unused box openings.
K. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or
equipment installed or designated for future use.
L. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 7.
END OF SECTION

9.9 26 0540 Underfloor Ducts:

A. Underfloor duct.
B. Flush infloor duct.
C. Trench duct.
D. Cellular underfloor raceway.
E. Service fittings.
A. Surface Raceways: Wall duct.
B. Wiring Devices.
A. BS7671 Requirement for electrical installations IEE wiring regulations sisteenth
Edition.
B. Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
C. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 29.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating system
layout, connection locations and details, insert spacing and height, and service fitting
locations.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets
including dimensions, materials, fabrication details, finishes, conductor and cable fill
capacities, service condition requirements, and accessories.
C. Samples:
1. Trench Duct: One section including cover with trim to be installed.
2. Junction Boxes: One of each type including cover with trim to be installed.
3. Service Fittings: One of each type and finish specified.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of ducts, junction boxes,
and service fittings.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for locating preset inserts and
installing afterset inserts.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.
instructions.

2.01 DUCT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete
duct system.
C. Do not use duct systems for applications other than as permitted by QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 29.and product listing.
2.02 UNDERFLOOR DUCT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dennis Filges Company
2. Wiremold
B. Configuration: Distribution and header underfloor duct for single service or multiple
services as indicated on the drawings; for multiple services use multiple compartment
duct or parallel single compartment ducts positioned together.
C. Underfloor Duct:
1. Description: Steel duct with corrosion-resistant coating, designed for installation
beneath concrete floor surface; suitable for use as underfloor raceway and listed
and labeled.
D. Junction Boxes: Standard duty unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide junction box(es) for connections and intersections of duct runs as
indicated or as required for duct configuration installed.
2. Junction Boxes: Furnished with openings on four sides for duct connections and
openings on four corners for conduit connections; with partitions to separate
multiple services; with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to concrete
pour.
3. Height: Selected according to duct to be installed and depth of concrete cover.
4. Cover Plate: Furnished with trim suitable for flooring to be installed.
E. Duct Supports: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating, with integral means for leveling
adjustment prior to concrete pour; height to be selected according to duct to be
installed and depth of concrete cover.
F. Marker Caps: Preset insert caps with integral marker screw for indicating location of
duct run after concrete pour; provide different material screws for distinguishing
between power and communications duct runs.
2.03 FLUSH INFLOOR DUCT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Wiremold
B. Configuration: Distribution and header flush infloor duct for single service or multiple
services as indicated on the drawings.
C. Flush Infloor Duct:
flush with concrete floor surface; suitable for use as underfloor raceway and
listed and labeled.
2. Preset Openings:
a. Distribution Duct:
1) Type: Round, 41mm diameter threaded.
2) Spacing: 610 mm
3) Furnish with removable threaded plug.
b. Header Duct: None (blank duct).
D. Junction Boxes:
1. Provide junction box(es) for connections and intersections of duct runs as
indicated or as required for duct configuration installed.
2. Junction Boxes: Furnished with openings on four sides for duct connections and
openings on four corners for conduit connections; with partitions to separate
multiple services; with integral means for leveling adjustment prior to concrete
pour.
E. Duct Supports: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating, with integral means for leveling
adjustment prior to concrete pour.
2.04 TRENCH DUCT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dennis Filges Company
2. Schneider Electric
3. Wiremold
4. Source Limitations: Where the trench duct system includes connections to wall
duct, furnish trench duct and associated components produced by the same
manufacturer as the wall duct to be installed.
B. Trench Duct:
flush with concrete floor surface; furnished with removable gasketed covers for
lay-in installation of conductors and cables.
2. Compartments:
a. Provide adjustable compartment dividers for multiple services as indicated
on the drawings.
b. Compartment Size: As indicated on the drawings.
C. Duct Supports: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating, with integral means for leveling
D. Cover Plates: Minimum 6.4 mm thick steel, furnished with trim suitable for flooring to
be installed.
2.05 CELLULAR UNDERFLOOR RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers:
1. HH Robertson
2. Wiremold
B. Configuration: Distribution and header cellular underfloor raceway and trench header
duct for multiple services as indicated on the drawings.
C. Cellular Underfloor Raceway:
1. Description: Steel multiple compartment raceway with corrosion-resistant
coating, designed for installation beneath concrete floor surface; suitable for use
as cellular metal floor raceway and listed and labeled as complying with UL
209:2011.
2. Compartment Size:
a. Distribution Raceway: As indicated on the drawings.
b. Header Raceway: Same as specified for distribution raceway unless
D. Trench Header Duct:
flush with concrete floor surface; furnished with removable gasketed covers for
lay-in installation of wires and cables.
2. Cover Plates: Minimum 6.4 mm thick steel, furnished with trim suitable for
flooring to be installed.
E. Junction Boxes:
1. Provide junction box(es) for connections and intersections of raceway runs as
indicated or as required for raceway configuration installed.
2. Junction Boxes: Furnished with openings on four sides for raceway connections;
with partitions to separate multiple services; with integral means for leveling
F. Raceway Supports: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating, with integral means for
leveling adjustment prior to concrete pour.
G. Marker Caps: Preset insert caps with integral marker screw for indicating location of
raceway run after concrete pour.
2.06 SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of duct system to be installed.
B. Description: Service fittings compatible with duct system to be installed with all
components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange duct to be parallel or perpendicular to building
lines.
C. Install duct supports located according to manufacturer's recommendations, but not
exceeding 1.5 m between supports. Permanently fasten duct supports to the
supporting framework.
D. Provide expansion fittings with suitable bonding jumper where duct crosses structural
joints intended for expansion.
E. Make adjustments such that duct is level at the proper elevation. Unless otherwise
indicated, adjust as follows:
1. Underfloor Duct: Tops of inserts 3.2 to 9.5 mm below screed line or as required
by manufacturer.
2. Flush Infloor Duct: Top of duct even with screed line.
3. Trench Duct: Top of cover plate assembly flush with finished floor, accounting for
flooring material and associated trim.
4. Cellular Underfloor Raceway: Tops of inserts 3.2 to 9.5 mm below screed line or
as required by manufacturer.
F. Install marker caps in each insert adjacent to junction boxes, at end of each duct run,
on both sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change in direction of
duct. Adjust markers to be flush with finished floor except only extend through backing
material for carpeted areas.
G. Prior to concrete placement, seal duct system connections and openings with duct
tape or manufacturer's recommended compound to prevent entry of concrete.
H. Install service fittings after installation of floor finishes. Cut floors according to
manufacturer's instructions as required.
J. Install insert within 30 mm of edge of junction box. Align inserts on same centers for
all services
K. Use blank duct in permanent corridors, passages, lobbies, for connecting parallel
ducts less than 1.8 m apart, for feeder duct from cabinet or panelboard to first junction
box, and where indicated.
L. Join duct lengths using combination support couplers where practical. Provide
additional supports at intervals of not over 1.5 m, within 750 mm each side of junction
boxes, and as close as practical to elbows, bends, and terminations.
M. Install a duct marker in each insert adjacent to junction box, at end of each duct run,
on both sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change of direction of
duct. Install markers flush with finished floor material. In carpeted areas, install marker
screws level with carpet backing.
N. Install trench duct trims flush with coverplates. Maintain covering of factory-applied
tape for protection.
O. Clean ducts and fittings of debris and dust before installing wire and cable.
P. Pull wire and cable from outlet insert toward junction boxes.
Q. Install branch circuit conductors continuous between junction box and farthest fitting.
Do not cut conductor to make connections to receptacle devices.
R. Clean finished surfaces before and after the installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions
A. Inspect duct system components for damage and defects.
B. Service Fittings: Test each wiring device to verify operation and proper polarity.
C. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective duct system
components.
D. Repair or replace floors damaged as a result of work of this section.
END OF SECTION

9.10 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems:

A. Electrical identification requirements.
B. Wire and cable markers.
C. Voltage markers.
D. Underground warning tape.
E. Floor marking tape.
F. Warning signs and labels.
A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding
for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.
Section 21 Part 25.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product.
Samples:
1. Identification Nameplates: One of each type and color specified.
2. Warning Signs and Labels: One of each type and legend specified.
Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company registration for
supplier.
Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on non-
complied items.
A. Conform to requirements of QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than
recommended by manufacturer.

2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and

control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not
within sight of equipment.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch
device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
b. Motor Control Centers:
3) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch
device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
c. Panelboards:
4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for
panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil.
5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to
identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares
and spaces.
d. Transformers:
1) Identify kVA rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary.
e. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
f. Busway:
g. Time Switches:
1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include
location.
h. Transfer Switches:
2) Identify power source and circuit number for both normal power source
and standby power source. Include location when not within sight of
equipment.
2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify
the available fault current and the date calculations were performed.
3. Emergency System Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system
equipment in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify
type and location of on-site emergency power sources.
4. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where
permitted, in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
5. Use identification nameplate to identify switchboards and panelboards utilizing a
high leg delta system in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
6. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with
remote disconnecting means.
7. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of
door at each fused switch to identify fuse class and size.
8. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of
door at each motor controller to identify nameplate horsepower, full load
amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage, and phase of motor(s) controlled.
9. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash
hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial
control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely
to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
a. Minimum Size: 89 mm by 127 mm
b. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with QCS 2014 Section
21.based on equipment-specific data:
10. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and
other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V
nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized
personnel only" or approved equivalent.
B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:
1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26
0519.
2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for
ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each
piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has
feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
C. Identification for Raceways:
1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at
maximum intervals of 6.1 m.
D. Identification for Boxes:
1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.
2.02 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-
around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic
clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be
identified.
B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon
cable ties.
C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Minimum Text Height: 3 mm
F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
2.03 VOLTAGE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl
cloth, or vinyl snap-around type markers.
B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive
vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.
C. Minimum Size:
1. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be
identified.
2. Markers for Pull Boxes: 29 by 110 mm
3. Markers for Junction Boxes: 13 by 57 mm.
D. Legend:
1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.
E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.
2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 76 mm wide, with minimum thickness of 0.1 mm
unless otherwise required for proper detection.
C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.
D. Color:
2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Warning Signs:
1. Materials:
2. Minimum Size: 178 by 254 mm unless otherwise indicated.
B. Warning Labels:
1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or
self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant..
2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and
accessories recommended by label manufacturer.
3. Minimum Size: 51 mm by 102 mm unless otherwise indicated.

3.01 INSTALLATION
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment,
servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment
with rear access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.
8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.
9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being
identified.
D. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no
bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
E. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 150
mm below finished grade.

F. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.
G. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other
signs of improper adhesion.
END OF SECTION
9.11 26 0918 Remote Control Switching Devices:

A. Networked switching controls.
B. Programmable switching controls.
C. Remote control switching relays.
D. Remote switches.
E. Remote sensors.
F. Power supplies.
G. Relay cabinets.
A. Conduit.
B. Boxes: Switch outlets and installation of switch devices.
C. Panelboards.
Section 21
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data showing dimensions and ratings for components.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wiring diagrams of system, showing interface with branch
circuit wiring.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and record
circuiting and switching arrangements.
E. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts numbers.
C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2.01 NETWORKED LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Description: Distributed switching control using networking programmable relay
panels, with central computer for operator interface, programming control sequences,
and monitoring.
B. Networking Hardware and Software: Support 2-wire communications between
programmable relay panels, allow global switching and telephone control, and include
RS-232 serial data port for connecting central computer.
2.02 PROGRAMMABLE RELAY PANELS
A. Description: Relay cabinet with power supply, terminal blocks, and logic cards for the
specified programming functions.
B. Cabinet: Surface-mounted sheet metal cabinet.
2.03 REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHING RELAYS
A. Description: Heavy duty, two-coil momentary contact type remote control relays.
B. Contacts: Rated 20 amperes at 120 volts and with isolated and non-isolated pilot
contacts where indicated.
C. Line Voltage Connections: Clamp type screw terminals.
2.04 REMOTE SWITCHES
A. Wall Switch: Rocker type.
1. Description: Momentary contact, three position switches, ivory color, rated 3
amperes at 25 VAC.
B. Key Switches: Match non-key switch ratings.
1. Description: Spade key type.
C. Switches with Pilot Lamp:
1. Description: Momentary contact three position rocker type, ivory color, rated 3
amperes at 25 VAC, with integral red pilot light.
D. Switch Plates:
1. Description: Smooth plastic, ivory.
E. Master Sequencer:
1. Description: Electronic circuit module to allow single switch to control up to 8
relays.
2.05 REMOTE SENSORS
A. Exterior Lighting Sensor:
1. Description: Photodiode lighting sensor in weatherproof housing.
B. Interior Lighting Sensor:
1. Description: Photodiode lighting sensor suitable for mounting on wall or ceiling
and characterized with a dead band to eliminate ON-OFF cycling of relays in
response to its own switching action.
C. Skylight Lighting Sensor:
1. Description: Photodiode lighting sensor suitable for measuring direct daylight and
characterized with an averaging function.
D. Atrium Lighting Sensor:
1. Description: Photodiode lighting sensor suitable for averaging ceiling brightness.
E. Photocell Control Unit:
1. Photodiode control unit with PHOTOCELL ENABLE and MASTER OVERRIDE
inputs for remote control, 3-minute time delay.
2.06 RELAY CABINETS
A. Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls.
B. Interior Panel: Metal, suitable for mounting components, matte white.
C. Metal Barriers: Between wiring of different systems and voltages.
D. Power Terminals: unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw
connectors, rated 600 volts.
E. Signal and Control Terminals: modular construction type, suitable for channel
mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
F. Ground Bus Terminal Block: Bond each connector to enclosure.
G. Power Supply: NFPA 70:2014, Class 2 transformer.
2.07 POWER LIMITED WIRE AND CABLE
A. Remote Control Cable: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation rated 60 degrees C,
individual conductors twisted together and covered with PVC jacket.
B. Plenum Cable: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation rated 60 degrees C, individual
conductors twisted together and covered with nonmetallic jacket; suitable for use in
air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights
and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with QCS
2014 Section 21 Part 10.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection
to wiring devices.
G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.
H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0537 as required for
installation of wiring devices provided under this section.
B. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 150 mm long. Do not
connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
D. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal
and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use
push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
F. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
G. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
H. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
I. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely
covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or
improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this
requirement.
J. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices
installed or designated for future use.
K. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
B. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to
verify proper operation.
C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by
Architect.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to
match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION

9.12 26 0923 Lighting Control Devices:

A. Field elements related to lighting control system.
Note. Lighting control system has been modified from a DALI based system to a BACS
based system, so central and process equipments are related at specific BACS
specifications document.
A EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
B. EN 50121-5 Railway applications-Electromagnetic compatibility, for equipment
located less than 3m from track center line
C. Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical Equipment and Air
Section 21

2.01 BUS TCP-IP Wire
 Certified
 Recommended section 2x0.8 sq. mm
 Cat 5
 2,5KV test voltage.
 Not propagator of smoke or fire, halogen emission free and low emission of
opaque and corrosive smoke.
2.02 BUS Power supply

 Line with a maximum of 35 components of BUS.
 Integrated filter to disconnect the power supply of the BUS and switches to
interrupt the tension.
 To be mounted in rail DIN EN 50022.
 BUS connection through terminal BUS connection.
 Voltage output 15VCC, output intensity 640mA, protected against short-circuits.
 Electric power supply from UPS circuit (U). 240V 50Hz

2.03 PRESENCE DETECTOR
 Infrared detection technology .
 360º of coverage area
 8 meters radio range
2.04 LIGHT DETECTOR

 Integrated photocell, dimmable sensibility to light.
 Infrared detection technology .

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment
components.
3.02 INSTALLATION
B. Install control cabling according to engineer instructions.
C. BUS TCP-IP length is less than 1000 meters.
D. Sensors
 Luminosity detectors: Situated on the Bridge, Concourse Level and both
Platforms.
 Presence detectors: Situated in Toilets, corridors, Mihrab’s restrooms and
Mihrab.
 Presence detectors will be placed in both sides of the Bridge.
END OF SECTION

9.13 26 0919 Enclosed Contactors:

A. General purpose contactors.
B. Lighting contactors.
A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
C. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.
Section 21
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
C. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and
contacts.
A. Conform to requirements of QCS 2014 Section 21
B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2.01 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS
A. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.
2.02 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Configuration: Electrically held.
B. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.
C. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for
continuous loads.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
B. Indicating Lights: Transformer, incandescent type.
C. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
D. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary, in each enclosed contactor. Provide
fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
2.04 DISCONNECTS
A. Combination Contactors: Combine contactor with disconnect in common enclosure.
B. Disconnects: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Provide fuses for fusible switches.
END OF SECTION
9.14 Switchboards:

A. Switchboards.
B. Switchboard accessories.
A. Low-Voltage Busways.
B. Surge Protective Devices.
A. The incoming protective devices on main switchboards shall be withdrawable air
circuit breakers to BS EN 60947-2:2006+A2:2013.
B. QCS Code 2014.
C. IEC 60051-1:2015 - Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring
Instruments and Their Accessories - Part 1: Definitions and General Requirements
Common To All Parts;; 2015.
D. IEC 60051-2:1984 - Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring
Instruments and Their Accessories - Part 2: Special Requirements for Ammeters and
Voltmeters; 1984.
E. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; Institute of
Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2008.
F. The outgoing protective devices on main switchboards shall be 3 Pole moulded case
circuit breakers to BS EN 60947-2:2006+A2:2013 up to 800A.
G. Load break switches used as main isolators for switch boards and between separate
busbar (bus section isolators) shall comply with BS 5419, IEC 408 in particular as well
as other relevant standards quoted in this specification.
H. All main LV switchboards shall be factory built and Fully Type Tested Assemblies to
BS EN 61439-1:2009
I. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip
ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and
components.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and
number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument
details.
C. Test Reports: Indicate results of factory production tests.
project.
2. Enclosure Keys: Three of each different key.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
D. The following operations shall be performed when assembly is in service and under
voltage:
1. Visual inspection of switching devices and other apparatus.
2. Settings and indicators of relays and releases
3. Conductor connections and markings.
4. Adjusting and re-setting of relays, releases and electronic devices.
5. Replacement of fuselinks and indicating lamps.
6. Fault location by voltage and current measuring.
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris,
and traffic.

2.01 SWITCHBOARDS
A. Front-Connected, Front and rear accessible switchboards:
1. Main Devices: [Draw-out]
2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.
3. Sections front and rear aligned.
B. Ratings:
1. Voltage: 415/240V volts.
2. Configuration: Three phase, four wire, grounded.
3. Main Bus: 3000 amperes.
4. Frequency: 50 Hz.
5. Insulation level: 2.5 kV- 50 Hz, 1min
6. Rated Impulse Voltage: 8 kV-Upto 630 Amp and 12 KV - Upto 3200 Amp
7. Busbar rated current: As shown on the drawings.
8. Short-circuit current: As shown on the drawings
9. Degree of protection: IP 31 for indoor application
10. Impact strength IK08 for indoor application and IK10 for outdoor application.
C. Service conditions:
1. The switchboard shall be suitable for operations at a height of less than 2.000
meters above sea level.
2. The switchboards shall be capable of operating normally within the following
temperature range
a. Maximum ambient outdoor air temperature (shade): 53 °C
b. Minimum ambient temperature 0 °C
c. Maximum ambient relative humidity: 100% (at 30 °C)
3. Manufacturer shall declare whether switchboard is able to operate in air
temperature higher than + 40 °C and if current derating is necessary.
D. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted.
E. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted.
F. Bus Material: Copper, standard size.
G. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from rear only for maintenance.
H. Fully insulate load side bus bars in rear accessible compartments. Do not reduce
spacing of insulated bus.
I. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard.
J. The low voltage switchboard shall have a permissible asymmetrical short circuit
current up to short circuit current shown on the drawings for 1 second. The busbars
shall be designed for mounting on insulated supports that are sufficient in number to
accept the electro-dynamic forces resulting from the flow of the peak asymmetrical
short circuit current.
K. The low voltage switchboard shall have an earthing circuit including a bar that can be
removed for isolation purposes during the necessary insulation measurements
(removal of the bar shall require a tool): Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard
L. The switchboard shall be suitable for front or rear connections.
M. Cable entry shall be via the bottom or the top (as per drawings).
N. The low voltage switchboard shall not be higher than 2000mm.
O. Natural ventilation shall make it possible for the Switchboard components to operate
with in the recommended temperature ranges.
P. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall have small depths, thus optimizing layout
in electrical rooms:
1. Max. 400 mm for up to 1600A.
2. Max.1200 mm for up to 4000 A.
Q. The system shall make it possible to implement fixed or withdrawable distribution and
fixed motor control sections, positioned side by side, which together form an
assembly referred to as an electrical switchboard.
R. Selection of switchboard and motor control center components shall be made in
compliance with standard IEC 60947 and related specification in the contract
documents.
S. The low voltage electrical switchboard shall be made up of identified functional
volumes including the busbar compartment, switchgear and controlgear component
compartment, connection compartment and auxiliaries compartment.
1. The different busbar shall be the main busbars, distribution busbars and auxiliary
busbars.
2. The main busbars shall be made of electrolytic copper.
3. The compartment shall be located inside a metal enclosure with walls providing
protection against direct contact with live parts and guaranteeing a degree of
protection (IP) requested. The frame, the external panels (doors, side and rear
panels, tops) and internal elements (ducts) shall be made of folded metal steel
sheet and protected by epoxy polyester powder paint coating.
T. Withdrawable circuit breakers shall have four different positions:
1. Connected
2. Test
3. Disconnected
4. Removed
U. The switchboard shall be suitable for installation side by side and back to back and
capable of receiving lateral ducts for busbar, cables and terminals.
V. The switchboard cover panel shall be removable.
W. The construction system shall provide a complete set of elements for installing fixed
or Withdrawable switching and protective devices, measurement devices and control/
monitoring devices in the switchboard
2.02 SWITCHBOARDS ACCESORIES: DRAWOUT CIRCUIT BREAKER (FROM 800A TO
6.300A).
A. The present specification applies to optimized volume (70mm pole pitch) air circuit
breakers (ACB) from 800A to 6.300A for AC (50/60Hz) low voltage electrical
installation from 220V-240V to 690V.
This type of breaker shall be used for the incomings of the following switchboards:
SMDB, MCC, LS-SMDB, LS-MCC and for outgoing circuits with current between 800
A and 6300 A
B. Main characteristics:
1. ACB shall be equipped with a trip unit that offers the appropriate level of
protection performance to fit to the application. All trip units could be proposed
with versions that provide measurement, and communication functions.
2. ACB shall be available in fixed or withdrawable versions as well as in 3-pole and
4-pole versions. For withdrawable versions, a safety trip shall provide advanced
opening to prevent connection and disconnection of a closed circuit breaker
3. It shall be possible to supply power either from the top or bottom side without
reduction in performance.
4. For an ACB rating frame given, dimensions shall be the same whatever the
ultimate breaking capacity.
5. ACB shall have a rated operational voltage (Ue) of 690 V, a rated insulation
voltage (Ui) of 1000 V (AC 50/60 Hz) and a rated impulse voltage (Uimp) of
12kV,
6. ACB shall suitable for isolation according to IEC 60947-
1:2007+AMD1:2010+AMD2:2014 and -2 for the rated insulation voltage of 1000
V and for the overvoltage category IV.
7. No safety clearance shall be required around drawout circuit breakers. For fixed
circuit breakers, 150 mm of free space shall be provided above the arc chutes to
allow removal of the latter.
8. The operating mechanism shall be of the Open/Closed/Open stored-energy
spring type. The closing time shall be less than or equal to 70 milliseconds for
rating <4000A..
C. Circuit breaker Design:
1. Safety
a. Air circuit breakers main contact shall be encased in a reinforced polyester
casing and offer double insulation from the operators on the breaker front
face.
b. Air circuit breakers shall be equipped with metal filters to reduce effects
perceptible from the outside during current interruption
c. The circuit breaker shall be equipped with a safety interlock which keeps the
circuit breaker open if the trip unit is not installed.
d. Mechanical indicators on the front panel of Air circuit breakers shall indicate
the following status condition:
1) 1. “ON” (main contacts closed):Spring charged
2) 2. “ON” (main contacts closed):Spring discharged
3) 3. “OFF” (main contacts open):Spring charged - circuit breaker ready to
close
4) 4. “OFF” (main contacts open):Spring charged- circuit breaker not ready
to close
5) 5. “OFF” (main contacts open):Spring discharged
e. ACB shall be equipped with anti pumping function: If opening and closing
orders occur simultaneously, the circuit breaker shall remain in the open
position. After fault tripping or intentional opening using the manual or
electrical controls, the closing order must first be discontinued, then
reactivated to close the circuit breaker.
f. The drawout operation shall be possible through a closed door.
1) Three positions of the moving part shall be possible:
(a) connected position - all auxiliary and main circuits engaged
(b) test position - all auxiliary circuits engaged all main circuits
disconnected
(c) isolated position - all circuits disconnected
2) The positions shall be clearly indicated and no intermediate position
shall be possible
3) Each position shall be acknowledged before moving to a new position
4) The racking handle shall be stowed on the air circuit breaker in such a
manner as to be accessible without defeating the door interlocking.
5) The drawout mechanism shall be part of the fixed frame to reduce the
weight of withdrawable part.
g. A door interlock shall be provided so that it shall not be possible to open the
door until the air circuit breaker moving part is in the disconnected position.
h. Insulated safety shutters shall be provided over the incoming and outgoing
main circuits and over the auxiliary circuits. An interlocking shall be provided
to prevent insertion of a circuit breaker having a rating higher than the
current rating of the fixed part, into that fixed part.
i. In electronic trip units, protection functions shall be electronically managed
independently of measurement and communication function by a dedicated
ASIC.
2. Breaking capacity, durability, discrimation.
a. The ACB breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available for
category B according to IEC 60947-2:2006+AMD1:2009+AMD2:2013
standards. The test shall be carried out with a breaking performance during
operation (Ics) and admissible short time withstand (Icw) equal to the
ultimate breaking capacity (Icu).) up to 85kA
b. The rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of each ACB shall be equal to at
least the value of the short-circuit current (Isc) at the point of installation on
the electric circuit.
c. The ACB range will be 50kA @415V to fit to the application.
d. ACB’s manufacturer shall provide selectivity and coordination tables with
other devices such as other ACB, ACBs, switches etc.
e. Mechanical durability shall be at least 12500/ 10000 / 5000 operation for
ratings <1600 / <3200 / >4000
3. Auxiliaries and accesories: General topics.
a. All electrical auxiliaries including the motor spring charging mechanism shall
be field adaptable without adjustment or the necessity for any tool (except a
screwdriver). They shall be fitted into a compartment which under normally
loaded conditions has no metalwork energized from the main poles exposed
with it.
b. Any adaptation carried out shall not increase the breaker overall dimensions.
c. It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front face of the air
circuit breaker, this wiring shall be taken through a set of disconnecting
contacts, so that all auxiliary wiring is automatically disconnected in the
isolated position.
d. Screws that held removable parts shall be self-contained
4. Auxiliaries and accesories: Remote operation.
a. Coils:
b. The breaker could be equipped with one closing release, one shunt opening
release, one additional shunt or undervoltage opening release
c. Coils shall be designed for continuous-duty.
d. Voltage release auxiliary power supply
1) AC: 240 VAC
2) DC 48/60 VDC
e. Opening time with shunt opening release 50ms +/- 10ms
f. Closing time closing release 50ms +/- 10ms
g. Electric motor for spring charge
1) Motor auxiliary power supply:
(a) AC: 240 VAC
(b) DC: 48/60 VDC
2) Charging time: <=3sec
h. Operating frequency <=3 cycle / min.
5. Protections requirements
a. The ACB shall be available in 3-pole or 4-pole (neutral protection) versions.
On 4-pole circuit breakers, a 3-position switch shall be provided to set
neutral protection to any of the following levels: unprotected neutral (4P3D),
half-protected neutral (4P3D+N/2) or fully protected neutral (4P4D).
b. The trip units shall not increase overall circuit breaker dimensions
c. All electronic components shall withstand temperatures up to 105 °C.
d. Trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit lead seals to
prevent unauthorised access to the settings
e. Protection settings shall apply to all circuit breaker poles
f. It shall be possible to adjust protections with a knob without any power
supply or when the main is off
g. Electronic trip unit shall be fitted with thermal memory
h. It shall be possible to equip ACBs with an auxiliary contact signalizing an
electrical fault operated by the trip unit
i. The following monitoring functions shall be integral parts of electronic trip
units:
1) 1 LED for load indication lighted above 105 % of Ir
2) a test connector shall be installed for checks on electronic and tripping
mechanism operation using an external device
j. ACB shall be equipped with a trip unit that offers the appropriate level of
performance to fit to the application.
k. Basic protection (LI) with or without energy measurement
l. These trip units shall offer
1) Long time protection
(a) Adjustable Ir threshold settings from 40% to 100 % of the trip unit
rating
(b) Adjustable tr time delay
2) Instantaneous protection
(a) Adjustable Isd threshold settings from 1.5xIr to 10xIr
m. Selective protection (LSI) with or without energy measurement. These trip
units shall offer
rating
2) Short time protection
(b) Adjustable tsd time delay
(a) Adjustable Ii threshold settings from 2xIn to 15xIn with an OFF
position
n. Trip unit measurement function. If required by the application, the trip unit
shall offer measurement (including energy) without additional module
whatever the protection type (LI, LSI, LSIG). Minimum measurements shall
be:
1) Currents & Energy
2) Demand Current, Maxim Demand Current
3) Voltage, active power, reactive power, power factor,
4) Demand Power, Maxim Demand Power
5) Accuracies of the entire measurement system, including the sensors:
shall be
(a) Current: 1,5%
(b) Voltage: 0.5 %
(c) Power and energy: 2%
6) Rogowski current transformers shall be used to ensure accurate
measurements from low current up to high currents
7) For safety reason, protection functions shall be electronically managed
independently of measurement function by a dedicated ASIC.
8) The measurements shall be displayed on the breaker itself and on a
remote system via Modbus communication. In addition to these
solutions it shall be possible to connect a remote display
o. Selective protection & Ground fault or Earth leakage protection (LSIG) with
or without energy measurement. These trip units shall offer
rating
2) Short time protection
(b) Adjustable tsd time delay
(a) Adjustable Ii threshold settings from 2xIn to 15xIn with an OFF
position
4) Ground fault protection (GF) Or Earth leakage protection (Vigi))
(a) Adjustable Ig threshold settings or Adjustable I?n threshold settings
(b) Adjustable tg time delay or Adjustable time delay
D. Communications:
1. ACB shall be equipped easily with MODBUS communication.
a. - Whatever the trip unit is:
b. the following information shall be accessible:
1) - Open / Close position / fault-trip indication (SDE) / Ready to close/
Position in the Chassis (Withdrawable version).
c. the following commands shall be possible
1) - open / close.
d. - When trip units with measurement functions are used the following
information shall be accessible:
1) - instantaneous and demand values, maximeters/minimeters, Energy,
Current demand and power demand.
(a) - timestamp trip and alarm histories and event table.
(b) - Maintenance indicators.
2.03 SWITCHBOARDS ACCESORIES: MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (From I= 250A
to 630A (both included)).
A. With electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; UL
listed.
B. General Topics
1. MCCB shall be equipped with a trip unit that offers the appropriate level of
protection performance to fit to the application. All trip units could be proposed
with versions that provide measurement, and communication functions.
2. - MCCB shall be available in fixed or withdrawable versions as well as in 3-pole
and 4-pole versions. For withdrawable versions, a safety trip shall provide
advanced opening to prevent connection and disconnection of a closed circuit
breaker
3. - Fixed and manual MCCBs shall be designed for both vertical, horizontal or flat
mounting, without any adverse effect on electrical performance.
4. - For a MCCB rating frame given, MCCBs dimensions shall be the same
whatever the ultimate breaking capacity.
5. - MCCB shall have a rated operational voltage (Ue) of 690 V, a rated insulation
voltage (Ui) of 800V (AC 50/60 Hz) and a rated impulse voltage (Uimp) of 8kV
C. Safety:
1. The power contacts shall be insulated in an enclosure made of a thermosetting.
material from other functions such as the operating mechanism, the case, the trip
unit and auxiliaries
2. The molded case circuit breakers shall provide double insulation of the front face
to allow on-site installation of auxiliaries without de-energising the installation. All
electrical auxiliaries and accessories such as voltage releases, (shunt or
undervoltage type) and auxiliary contacts shall be designed for easy on-site
installation.
3. The operating mechanism of the molded case circuit breakers shall be of the fast
make and fast break type. Tripping on a fault shall be mechanically independent
of the operating handle. The operating mechanism shall be designed to operate
all poles of the circuit breaker simultaneously for making, breaking and tripping.
4. If required, the circuit breaker shall be equipped with a rotary handle.
5. The operating mechanism shall be designed in such a way that the position of
the operating handle of the circuit breaker indicates the real position of the main
contacts, even if the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle.
6. In order to ensure suitability for isolation complying with IEC 60947-
2:2006+AMD1:2009+AMD2:2013 § 7-27: The operating mechanism shall be
designed such that the handle can only be in OFF position (O) if the power
contacts are all actually separated, in OFF position, the handle shall indicate the
isolation position.
7. MCCBs shall be able to receive a device for locking in the “isolated” position, with
up to 3 padlocks, Ø8 maximum or keylock (for rotary handle).
8. MCCBs shall be designed to prevent access to live parts when the cover is
removed
9. MCCBs shall be equipped with a “push to trip” button in front to test operation
and the opening of the poles.
10. MCCB rating, “push to trip” button, performances and contact position indication
must be clearly visible and accessible from the front, through the front panel or
the door of the switchboard.
11. In electronic trip units, protection functions shall be electronically managed
independently of measurement and communication function by a dedicated
ASIC.
D. Breaking capacity, Current limitation, discrimination, durability.
1. The molded case circuit breakers (except for current-limiting circuit breakers)
shall belong to category B as defined in IEC60947-1. Certificates attesting to
compliance with these rules shall be established taking into account the following
performance levels for the test sequences: service breaking capacity (Ics) equal
to at least 50% of the rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) and a rated short-
time withstand current (Icw) of 25 kA / 0.5 s (except for current-limiting circuit
breakers)
2. If required current limiting circuit breakers shall be available.
3. The rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of each molded case circuit breaker
shall be equal to at least the value of the short-circuit current (Isc) at the point of
installation on the electric circuit, unless the upstream circuit breaker makes it
possible to ensure coordination (as defined in Appendix A of IEC 60947-
2:2006+AMD1:2009+AMD2:2013); in this case, the coordination between the two
circuit breakers shall be confirmed by manufacturer.
4. MCCB’s manufacturer shall provide selectivity and coordination tables with other
devices such as other MCCBs, ACB, switches and contactors.
E. Auxiliaries and accessories.
1. The operating mechanism shall be of the stored-energy type only
2. The addition of a motor mechanism or a rotary handle shall in no way affect
circuit breaker characteristics:
a. Only three stable tripping mechanism positions (ON, OFF and TRIPPED)
shall be possible with the motor mechanism,
b. Suitability for isolation shall be provided by positive contact indication (ON
and OFF) in front of the motor mechanism module
3. MCCBs shall be designed to enable safe on-site installation of auxiliaries such as
voltage releases (shunt and undervoltage releases) and indication switches as
follows:
a. same field installable auxiliary contacts for signalising different functions, as:
open/ closed position, fault signal, electrical fault (including electrical
leakage) signal, all auxiliaries shall be common for the entire range,
b. they shall be separated from power circuits,
c. all electrical auxiliaries shall be of the snap-in type and fitted with terminal
blocks,
d. Auxiliary function and terminals shall be permanently engraved on the case
of the circuit breaker and the auxiliary itself,
4. The trip units shall not increase overall circuit breaker dimensions
F. Remote Operations:Protection functions
1. Coils:
a. Manually operated circuit breaker could be equipped with one shunt opening
release or one undervoltage opening release.
b. Electrically operated circuit breaker could be equipped with one shunt
opening release or one undervoltage opening release in addition to opening
and closing order.
c. Coils shall be designed for continuous-duty.
d. Voltage release auxiliary power supply:
1) AC: 240 VAC
2) DC: 48/60 VDC
e. Opening time with shunt opening release 50ms +/- 10ms
f. Electrical closing time 60ms +/- 10ms
2. Electric motor for spring charge
a. Motor auxiliary power supply:
1) AC: 240 VAC
2) DC: 48/60 VDC
b. Charging time: <=4sec
c. Operating frequency <=3 cycle / min.
G. Electrically operated MCCB shall be equipped with anti pumping function: If opening
and closing orders occur simultaneously, the circuit breaker shall remain in the open
position.
H. Protection requirements
1. General recommendations
a. The high-current molded case circuit breakers shall be available in 3-pole or
4-pole (neutral protection) versions. On 4-pole circuit breakers, a 3-position
switch shall be provided to set neutral protection to any of the following
levels: unprotected neutral (4P3D), half-protected neutral (4P3D+N/2) or fully
protected neutral (4P4D).
b. The trip units shall not augment overall circuit breaker dimensions
c. Trip unit shall be easily interchangeable and easily secured to the MCCB
without removing the breaker from the panel
d. All electronic components shall withstand temperatures up to 105 °C.
e. Electronic and thermal-magnetic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be
possible to fit lead seals to prevent unauthorised access to the settings
f. Protection settings shall apply to all circuit breaker poles
g. It shall be possible to adjust protections with a knob without any power
supply or when the main is off
h. Electronic trip unit shall be fitted with thermal memory
i. It shall be possible to equip MCCBs with an auxiliary contact signalizing an
electrical fault operated by the trip unit.
j. The following monitoring functions shall be integral parts of electronic trip
units:
1) 1 LED for load indication lighted above 105 % of Ir
2) a test connector shall be installed for checks on electronic and tripping
mechanism operation using an external device.
2. Basic protection (LI) with or without energy measurement
3. These trip units shall offer
a. Long time protection
1) Adjustable Ir threshold settings from 40% to 100 % of the trip unit rating
2) Adjustable tr time delay
b. Instantaneous protection
1) Adjustable Isd threshold settings from 1.5xIr to 10xIr
4. Selective protection (LSI) with or without energy measurement. These trip units
shall offer
a. Long time protection
1) Adjustable Ir threshold settings from 40% to 100 % of the trip unit rating
2) Adjustable tr time delay
b. Short time protection
1) Adjustable Isd threshold settings from 1.5xIr to 10xIr
2) Adjustable tsd time delay
c. Instantaneous protection
1) Adjustable Ii threshold settings from 2xIn to 15xIn with an OFF position
5. Trip unit measurement function. If required by the application, the trip unit shall
offer measurement (including energy) without additional module whatever the
protection type (LI, LSI, LSIG). Minimum measurements shall be:
a. Currents & Energy
b. Demand Current, Maxim Demand Current
c. Voltage, active power, reactive power, power factor,
d. Demand Power, Maxim Demand Power
e. Accuracies of the entire measurement system, including the sensors: shall
be
1) Current: 1,5%
2) Voltage: 0.5 %
3) Power and energy: 2%
f. Rogowski current transformers shall be used to ensure accurate
measurements from low current up to high currents
g. For safety reason, protection functions shall be electronically managed
independently of measurement function by a dedicated ASIC.
h. The measurements shall be displayed on the breaker itself and on a remote
system via Modbus communication. In addition to these solutions it shall be
possible to connect a remote display
I. Communications:
1. ACB shall be equipped easily with MODBUS communication.
a. - Whatever the trip unit is:
b. the following information shall be accessible:
1) - Open / Close position / fault-trip indication (SDE) / Ready to close/
Position in the Chassis (Withdrawable version).
c. the following commands shall be possible
1) - open / close.
d. - When trip units with measurement functions are used the following
information shall be accessible:
1) - instantaneous and demand values, maximeters/minimeters, Energy,
Current demand and power demand.
(a) - timestamp trip and alarm histories and event table.
(b) - Maintenance indicators.
2.04 SWITCHBOARDS ACCESORIES: MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (I< 250 A).
A. Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
1. Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) shall comply with IEC 60947-
1:2007+AMD1:2010+AMD2:2014, IEC 60947-2:2006+AMD1:2009+AMD2:2013,
GB 14048-2, JIS C 8370 / 8201-2-1 Annex 1 and Annex 2.
2. They shall be of category A with a rated ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) of
minimum 10kA and service breaking capacities to be 50% of Icu - on all the
operational voltage ranges up to 415V,
3. They shall have a rated operational voltage of 550 V AC (50/60 Hz),
4. They shall have a rated insulation voltage of 690 V AC (50/60 Hz),
5. They shall be suitable for isolation, as defined by IEC 60947 -1 and -2, § 7-27 for
the Overvoltage Category III for a rated insulation voltage up to 690 V according
to IEC 60664-1.
6. Include shunt trip and undervoltage release where indicated.
7. Adjustable thermal protection:
a. Extended range, adjustable in amps from 0.7 to 1 times (TMD) or 0.5 to 1
times (electronic) the rating of the trip unit.
8. Additional insulation fault protection
9. Combining the MCCB with a ELCB module or Vigirex (ELCB+MCB) relays adds
earth-leakage protection with adjustable tripping thresholds and time delays.
10. Isolation capability
a. It must be suitable for isolation guaranteed as per IEC 60947.
B. Construction, operation, environment:

1. Production site organisation shall be certified to comply with ISO 9002 and ISO 14001
standards.
2. For maximum safety, the power contacts shall be insulated in an enclosure made of a
thermosetting. Material from other functions such as the operating mechanism, the
case, the trip unit and auxiliaries
3. Overriding manual operation. All poles shall operate simultaneously for circuit breaker
opening, closing and tripping.
4. MCCBs shall be actuated by a toggle or handle that clearly indicates the three
positions: ON, OFF and TRIPPED.
5. In order to ensure suitability for isolation complying with IEC 60947-
2:2006+AMD1:2009+AMD2:2013 § 7-27:
a. the operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or handle can
only be in OFF position (O) if the power contacts are all actually separated,
b. In OFF position, the toggle or handle shall indicate the isolation position.
6. MCCBs shall be able to receive a locking device in “isolated” position, with padlock,
Ø5.
7. MCCBs shall be equipped with a “push to trip” button in front to test operation and the
opening of the poles.
8. MCCB rating, “push to trip” button, outgoing circuit identification and contact position
indication must be clearly visible and accessible from the front, through the front
panel or the door of the switchboard.
9. The front cover for MCCB once opened in order to add/replace electrical auxiliaries,
should remain fixed on the MCCB.
C. Auxiliaries and accessories: Internal accessories.
1. Functions
2. 4 different types of auxiliaries shall be available:
3. Auxiliary Switch
4. Alarm Switch/fault indication
5. Shunt Trip
6. Undervoltage Release
7. Mounting electrical auxiliaries should not affect the performance of the breaker.
8. Each auxiliary shall be provided with a proper packaging and instruction notice.
9. Mounting and IP
10. The electrical auxiliaries shall be field installable.
11. Electrical auxiliaries shall be easily and rapidly snapped inside the breaker without
any tool, behind the auxiliary cover.
12. Lead-wires shall not affect the mounting of the breakers side by side.
13. When auxiliary cover is opened:
a. - Auxiliaries are held in place by themselves,
b. - When auxiliaries are mounted, protection against electric shock must be IP20 or
IP30.
D. Auxiliaries and accessories: External accessories.
1. Mounting accessory on the breaker shall not affect its performances.
2. Accessories shall be field installable.
3. Each accessory shall be provided with a proper packaging and instruction notice.
4. Phase barriers
5. 2 types of box lugs shall be available to fit on:
5mm termination screws (15A to 50A current ratings) à box lug (5mm)
8mm termination screws (60A to 160A current ratings) à box lug (8mm)
6. Terminal shield shall be made of an isolating material.
7. Direct rotary handle. Standard.
a. The rotary handle mounted on the breaker shall meet the IEC60947-2
requirements and will not affect the performance of the breaker.
b. The rotary handle shall meet IEC60447.
c. When the breaker is mounted with a rotary handle, the isolation function remains
and fulfils IEC60947-2.
8. Degree of protection IP40 as a standard and IP54 (with additional accessory when
indicated).
2.05 SWITCHBOARDS ACCESORIES: OTHER ACCESORIES.
A. Ground Fault Sensor: Zero sequence type.
B. Ground Fault Relay: Adjustable ground fault sensitivity from 200 to 1200 amperes (or as
indicated on drawings), time delay adjustable from 0 to 15 seconds. Provide monitor panel
with lamp to indicate relay operation, TEST and RESET control switches.

C. Metering Transformer Compartment: For utility company's use; compartment size, bus
spacing and drilling, door, and locking and sealing requirements in accordance with
Utility Company requirements.
D. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus
connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide
continuous current rating as indicated.
E. Provide thermostatically controlled electric heaters in each section, sized to prevent
condensation under expected weather conditions at project site.
1. Provide terminals for separate connection of heater power circuit.
2. Voltage Rating: 240V volts.
F. Main Switchboards to comply with BS EN 61439-1:2009 or BS EN
61439-3:1991+A2:2012 as appropriate, all MCB’s shall have a 16 KA rating.
G.All MCB distribution boards shall be provided with a fully shrouded main busbar
assembly which shall provide protection by insulating barriers to a minimum of IP2X
and (as defined in BSEN 60529), with the front cover removed. The removal of any
incoming or outgoing device shall not reduce the level of protection provided.
H. Busbar insulating barriers shall be factory fitted, permanently fixed and non-removable.
It should not be necessary to remove any part of the insulating barriers to connect any
incoming or outgoing device from the manufacturer. Busbar insulating barriers shall be
constructed so as to remain unaffected by removal of circuit protection devices and
system changes, ie IP2X must be maintain at all times in all ways, populated or spare.
It shall not be necessary to fit insulating boots or other removable accessories to
achieve and maintain the IP2X status on the busbar insulating barrier. Where spare
ways are available, it shall be possible to mount any DIN control product in those
outgoing ways without modification of the assembly.. To allow guaranteed connection
integrity, all outgoing devices intended for protection or isolation will be of the plug on
type.
I. All MCB distribution boards within apartments and shall be IP31. All distribution boards
within plant rooms or risers where sprinkler fire suppression is provided shall be
provided with IP54 enclosures.
J. Fit each distribution board with an isolating switch.
K. Install busbars in same position relative to their miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) for

each pole.
L. In TPN distribution boards supply neutral busbars with one outgoing terminal for each
outgoing circuit.
M. Provide a multi-terminal earthing bar for circuit protective conductors for both insulated
and metal-cased boards, with one terminal for each outgoing circuit.
N. Connect directly to earthing terminal without dependence on exposed conductive parts
of enclosure.
O.Identify each fuseway and MCB way by numbering.
P. Identify each terminal on neutral busbar and earthing bar with its respective fuseway or
MCB way.
Q.Provide spare ways, as shown on drawings/schedules.
R. Where specific ratings are indicated incorporate fuses or MCBs, otherwise leave ways
blank for future additions.
S. Enclosures finish
1. Finish -Manufacturer's standard.
2. Colour -Manufacturer's standard colour.
T. Provide combined 30mA MCB/RCD units for all outgoing ways feeding general power
BS 1363 socket outlets within residential apartments, offices and public areas.
2.06 SURGE (TRANSIENT) PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. See Section 26 4300 for factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices.
List and label switchboards containing surge protective devices as a complete
assembly including surge protective device.
B. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant externally mounted, UL
1449 3rd edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard
short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:
1. 1. Comply with Division 26 Section “Surge Protective Devices”.
2. 2. Provide a dedicated three pole circuit breaker for the SPD in the switchboard.
2.07 AMMETERS AND VOLTMETERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Schneider Electric.
2. ABB.
3. Eaton
B. Analog Ammeters: IEC 60051-1:2015 and IEC 60051-2:1984, direct reading, full range,
indicating ammeter with 115 mm (4.5 inch) square recessed case and 250 degree
scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, 5 ampere, 60 Hertz movement, 1
percent accuracy.
C. Analog Voltmeters: IEC 60051-1:2015 and IEC 60051-2:1984, direct reading, full range,
indicating voltmeter with 115 mm (4.5 inch) square recessed case and 250 degree
scale, white dial with black figures and pointer, 120 volt, 60 Hertz movement, 1
percent accuracy.
2.08 INDICATOR LIGHTS
A. Supply lamps of same type throughout. Provide indicator lamps with lamp test facility..
B. Supply interchangeable indicators for respective units.
C. Protect wiring to indicator lamp units by separate cartridge fuses.
D. Lens Colour in accordance with BS EN 60073.
E. Provide Indicator lamps on each LV board to indicate:

1. Mains available (ie transformer live)
2. Busbars Live (ie one per section indicating incoming transformer or generator
ACB closed)
3. Generator supply available (at each of the LV boards essential section)
2.09 POWER METERS (INTERMEDIATE METERING LEVEL).
A. Measured values: the P.M. shall provide the following measured values, true RMS
metered quantities:
1. Real time readings:
a. Current (Per-Phase, N (calculated), 3-Phase Avg, % Unbalanced )
b. Voltage (L-L Per-Phase, L-L 3-Phase Avg, L-N Per-Phase, 3-Phase Avg, %
unbalanced)
c. Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
d. Reactive Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
e. Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
f. Power Factor (True)(Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
g. Power Factor (Displacement)(Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
h. Frequency
i. THD (Current and Voltage)
2. Energy Readings
a. Accumulated Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent KVAh)
(Signed/Absolute)
b. Incremental Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent KVAh)
(Signed/Absolute)
c. Conditional Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent KVAh)
(Signed/Absolute)
d. Reactive Energy by Quadrant
3. Demand Readings:
a. Demand Current Calculations(Per-Phase, 3-Phase Avg, Neutral):
b. Present
c. Running Average
d. Last completed interval
e. Peak
f. Demand Real Power Calculations(3-Phase Total):
1) Present
2) Running Average
3) Last completed interval
4) Predicted
5) Peak
6) Coincident with peak kVA Demand
7) Coincident with kVAR Demand
g. Demand Reactive Power Calculations(3-Phase Total):
1) Present
2) Running Average
4) Predicted
5) Peak
7) Coincident kW Demand
h. Demand Apparent Power Calculations(3-Phase Total):
1) Present
2) Running Average
4) Predicted
5) Peak
7) Coincident kW Demand
i. Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident(True),(3-Phase
Total):
2) Coincident with kW peak
3) Coincident with kVAR peak
4) Coincident with kVA peak
j. Power Analysis Values
1) THD - Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
2) thd - Voltage, Current (3-Phase, Per-Phase, Neutral)
3) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
4) Fundamental Voltage, Magnitude and Angle (Per-Phase)
5) Fundamental Currents, Magnitude and Angle (Per-Phase)
6) Fundamental Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
7) Fundamental Reactive Power (Per-Phase)
8) (viii) Harmonic Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
9) Phase Rotation
10) Unbalance (Current and Voltage)
k. Harmonic Magnitudes & Angles for Current and Voltages (Per Phase) up to
the 31st on the PM820.
B. Demand calculations: All power demand calculations shall use any one of the following
calculation methods, selectable by the user:
1. Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every second for the present
demand and at the end of the interval for the last interval. The window length
shall be set by the user from 1-60 minutes in one minute increments.
2. Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window length shall be set by the
user from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The user shall be able to set the
sub-interval length from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The following Block
methods are available:
a. Sliding Block that calculates demand every second with intervals less than 15
minutes and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15 and 60 minutes.
b. Fixed Block that calculates demand at the end of the interval
c. Rolling Block that a subinterval is configured. Demand is calculated at the
end of each subinterval and displays at the end of the interval.
3. Demand can be calculated using a Synchronization signal:
a. Demand can be synchronized to an input pulse from an external source. The
demand period begins with every pulse. A synchronized input can be
configured to either a block or rolling block calculation
b. Demand can be synchronized to a communication signal. This can be
4. Demand can be synchronized to the clock in the Power Meter
C. Sampling
1. The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to
provide true rms accuracy to the 63rd harmonic (fundamental of 60 Hz).
2. The Power Meter shall provide continuous sampling at a minimum of up to 128
samples/cycle, simultaneously on all voltage and current channels in the meter.
D. Minimum and maximun values.

1. The Power Meter shall provide a monthly minimum and maximum values for the
following parameters:
a. Voltage L-L
b. Voltage L-N
c. Current per phase
d. Voltage L-L Unbalance
e. Voltage L-N Unbalance
f. True Power Factor
g. Displacement Power Factor
h. Real Power Total
i. Reactive Power Total
j. Apparent Power Total
k. THD Voltage L-L
l. THD Voltage L-N
m. THD Current
n. Frequency
2. For each min/max value listed above, the Power Meter shall record the following
attributes:
a. Date/Time of the min/max value
b. Min/Max. Value
c. Phase of recorded Min/Max (for multi-phase quantities)
3. Minimum and maximum values shall be available via communications and
display.
F. Harmonic Resolution
1. Advanced harmonic information shall be available via the Power Meter. This shall
include the calculation of the harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase
voltage and current through the 63rd harmonic(31st harmonic for the PM810 with
PM810LOG and the PM820).
2. Harmonic information shall be available for all three phases, current and voltage,
plus the residual current. To ensure maximum accuracy for analysis, the current
and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously from the
same cycle.
3. The harmonic magnitude shall be reported as a percentage of the fundamental or
as a percentage of the rms values, as selected by the user.
G.Current and voltage inputs
1. The Power Meter shall accept current inputs from standard instrument current
transformers with 5 amp secondary output and shall have a metering range of 0-
10 amps with the following withstand currents: 15 amp continuous, 50 amp 10
sec per hour, 500 amp 1 sec per hour.
2. Current transformer primaries through 327 kA shall be supported.
3. The circuit monitor shall allow connection to circuits up to 600 volts AC without
the use of potential transformers. The Power Meter shall also accept voltage
inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with 120 volt secondary
output. The Power Meter shall support PT primaries through 3.2 MV.
4. The nominal full scale input of the circuit monitor shall be 347 Volts AC L-N, 600
Volts AC L-L. The meter shall accept a metering over-range of 50%. The input
impedance shall be greater then 2 Ohm.
H. Accuracy
1. The Power Meter shall comply with ANSI C12.20 Class 0.2 and IEC 62053-22
Class 0.5S for Active Energy and revenue meters.
2. The Power Meter shall be accurate to 0.15% of reading + 0.015% of full scale for
power. Voltage and current shall be accurate to 0.075% of reading plus 0.025%
of full scale. Power factor metering shall be accurate to ±0.002 from 0.5 leading to
0.5 lagging. Frequency metering shall be accurate ±0.01 Hz at 45-67 Hz and 350-
450Hz.
3. These accuracies shall be maintained for both light and full loads.
4. No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this accuracy.
I. Waveform Capture
1. The Power Meter shall provide waveform captures of the voltage and current
channels. Waveform capability shall permit to configure the number of captured
cycles depending on the sampling rate and channels. The waveforms shall be
configurable from 185 cycles in one channel at 16 samples/cycle up to 3 cycles in
six channels at 128 samples/cycle. Waveform captures can be initiated with
alarms or manually using software.
2. The Power Meter shall be able to capture, and store in internal non-volatile
memory, 128 digitally sampled data points for each cycle of each phase voltage.
The number of waveform captures stored onboard the circuit monitor shall be at
least 5.
3. The Power Meter shall transmit the waveform samples over the network to the
personal computer workstation for display, archival, and analysis.
4. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms shall resolve harmonics
up to the 31st..
5. The data used for the three-cycle waveform capture display shall also be used to
derive metered quantities in order to provide meaningful additional data.
6. All waveforms must reflect actual circuit performance. Waveforms synthesized or
composed over time shall not be acceptable.
J. Input/Output
1. The Power Meter shall supply 1 digital input and 1 digital solid state output/KY
pulse output as standard.
2. The Power Meter shall be capable of operating a solid state KY output relay to
provide output pulses for a user definable increment of reported energy. Minimum
relay life shall be in excess of one billion operations. The standard KY output shall
operate up to 240 volt AC, 300 volt DC, 96mA max, and provide 3750 volt rms
isolation.
3. The Power Meter shall support multiple input/output options including digital
inputs, mechanical relay outputs, analog inputs, and analog outputs. This optional
I/O shall be in the form of an option module that can be field installable.
4. The digital inputs shall have four operating modes:
a. Normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs
b. Demand Interval Synch Pulse to accept a demand synch pulse from a utility
demand meter
c. Conditional Energy Control input to control conditional energy accumulation.
5. Input Metering Demand (WAGES) The power meter shall include five input pulse
metering channels. Each channel shall be able to add the consumption signals
from one of more digital inputs available in the unit.
6. The Power Meter shall be able to perform GPS time synchronization via any
digital inputs.
7. The optional relay output module shall provide a load voltage range from 20 to
240 VAC or from 20 to 30 VDC. It shall support a load current of 2A.
K. Output Relay Control
1. Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent over the communication
link, or in response to a user defined alarm or event.
2. Output relays will have normally open and normally closed contacts and can be
configured to operate in several modes:
a. Normal contact closure where the contacts change state for as long as the
signal exists
b. Latched mode when the contacts change state when a pick-up signal is
received and hold until a dropout signal is received.
c. Timed mode when the contacts change state upon receipt of a pick-up signal
and are held for a pre-programmed duration.
d. End of Power Demand Interval when the relay operates as a synch pulse for
other devices.
e. Energy pulse output. The Relay will pulse quantities used for Absolute kWh,
Absolute kVARh, kVAh, kWh In, kVARh In, kWh Out and kVARh Out
L. Logging
1. The Power Meter shall provide for onboard data logging. Each Power Meter shall
be able to log data, alarms and events, and waveforms. The Meter shall offer
80kB of on-board nonvolatile memory. Logged information to be stored in each
Power Meter includes the following:
a. Billing Log: The Power Meter shall store in non-volatile memory a
configurable billing log that is updated every 15 minutes. Data shall be
recorded by month, day and 15 minute interval. The log shall contain 24
months of monthly data, 32 days of daily data and between 2 to 52 days of
15 minute interval data depending on the number of quantities selected.
b. Custom Data Logs: The Power Meter shall provide 1 data log configurable by
the user. Each log entry shall be date and time stamped to the second. Each
log entry shall hold data of up to 96 parameters each. It shall be possible to
set up each log to take data at a different user defined schedule interval. In
addition, it shall be possible for a user to define an event. Data logs can be
configured by users to be Fill & Hold or Circular (FIFO). At lease one (1) data
log shall support log intervals as short as 1-second.
2. The Power Meter shall have default values for all logs loaded at the factory and
begin on device power up.
M. Alarming
1. Alarm events shall be user definable.
2. The user shall be able to define over 50 alarm conditions.
3. The following shall be available as alarm events:
a. Over/under current
b. Over/under voltage
c. Current imbalance
d. Phase loss, current
e. Phase loss, voltage
f. Voltage imbalance
g. Over kW Demand
h. Phase reversal
i. Digital Input OFF/ON
j. End of incremental energy interval
k. End of demand interval
4. For each over/under metered value alarm, the user shall be able to define a pick-
up, drop-out, and delay.
5. There shall be four alarm severity levels in order make it easier for the user to
respond to the most important events first.
6. Indication of an alarm condition shall be given on the front panel.
N. Control Power
1. The Power Meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control power
including 90-457 VAC or 100-300 VDC.
O.Communications
1. The Power Meter shall communicate via RS-485 Modbus or Jbus protocol with a
2-wire or 4-wire connection.
2. The Power Meter shall be able to communicate via RS-232 to a laptop or PC or a
4-wire RS-485 Modbus or Jbus protocols when a remote display is included.
3. Using an optional Ethernet Communication Card, the Power Meter shall provide
10/100baseTX Ethernet communications utilizing TCP/IP. Supported protocols
shall include ModbusTCP/IP, HTTP, SMTP, SNMP, SNTP, UDP and FTP.
a. The Power Meter shall provide the capability to serve as a Modbus master
and communicate to 31 additional Modbus devices connected to an RS-485
daisy chain. The Power Meter shall provide a direct connection between sub-
devices and application software across the Ethernet network via
ModbusTCP/IP.
b. The Power Meter shall have the capability to serve data over the Ethernet
network accessible through a standard web browser. Information shall be
available from the Power Meter and from Modbus sub-devices connected
downstream from the interface card. The Power Meter shall contain default
web pages from the factory and also allow the user to create web pages as
needed.
c. The Power Meter shall provide an SNMP solution with meter specific custom
MIB and MIB 2 support as well as traps for alarms.
d. The Power Meter shall allow time synchronization via the Ethernet network to
1-second accuracy or better utilizing SNTP.
e. The Power Meter shall provide the ability to announce alarms via e-mail
utilizing SMTP. The e-mail shall be compatible with paging and text
messaging systems allowing users to receive alarm notification on a standard
cellular phone. The e-mail notification shall support authentication providing a
user defined user’s name and password to the e-mail server.
f. The Power Meter Ethernet Communication Card shall be fully upgradeable in
the field across the Ethernet network utilizing FTP. No special software shall
be required to upgrade the Ethernet Communications Card. No disassembly
or changing of integrated circuit chips shall be required and it will not be
necessary to de-energize the circuit or the equipment to perform the upgrade.
P. Provide meters with appropriate multiplier tags.
2.10 METERING TRANSFORMERS
A. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13 and BS7626, 5 ampere secondary, wound type,
with single secondary winding and secondary shorting device, primary/secondary ratio
as required, burden and accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay
devices, 60 Hertz.
B. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13, 120 volt single secondary, disconnecting type
with integral fuse mountings, primary/secondary ratio as required, burden and
accuracy consistent with connected metering and relay devices, 60 Hertz.
C. Provide test links in secondary connections of all current transformers to facilitate testing
of instruments, meters and protection devices.
A. Shop inspect and test switchboard.
B. Make completed switchboard available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify Owner at least 7 days before inspection is allowed.

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide concrete housekeeping pad under the provisions of QCS 2014 Section 5.
B. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings.
B. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner.
C. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing
switchboard.
D. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and QCS 2014 Section 21..
F. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
G. Install panelboards plumb.
H. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and
rough opening completely covered.
I. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or
switches does not exceed 2000 mm above the floor or working platform.
J.Provide minimum of six spare 27 mm trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard
stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
L. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.
M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
N. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing
essential loads where indicated.
O. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions as required by QCS 2014 Section 21..
B. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated
components.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's
B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION

9.15 26 2416 Panelboards:
9.15.1 part 1 general

A. Power distribution panelboards.
B. Lighting and appliance panelboards.
C. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.
D. Secondary Panelboards power meter accesories.
B. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices.
C. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014
A. QRSS and QCS Code (2014)
B. IEC 61439-1:2009 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-Part 1: Type
tested and partially type tested assemblies
C. IEC 61439-6:2012 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies-Part 2.
D. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed
components and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus
ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current
ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features
and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and
actual installed circuiting arrangements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
project.
G. Enclosure Keys: Three of each different key.
H. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
I. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
J.Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
K. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
L. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company
M. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on
non-complied items.
C. Assembly Manufacturer Requirements. To complete the standard requirement, the
Assembly Manufacturer (panel builder) has to achieve routine verifications. Hereafter
details of the routine verifications to be performed by the Assembly Manufacturer:
1. Degree of protection of enclosures through visual inspection.
2. Clearances and creepage distances through visual inspection.
3. Protection against electric shock and integrity of protective circuits through visual
inspection of basic and fault protection also random verification of tightness of
the connections of protective circuit.
4. Incorporation of built-in components through visual inspection.
5. Internal electrical circuits and connections through visual inspection and also
random verification of tightness.
6. Terminals for external conductors through number, type and identification of
terminals
7. Mechanical operation through visual inspection and effectiveness of mechanical
actuating elements.
8. Dielectric properties through power-frequency dielectric test.
9. Wiring, operational performance and function through verification of
completeness of information & markings, also inspection of wiring where relevant
and function test where relevant.
and traffic.
B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid
damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of
panelboards:
1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 0 degrees C and 53 degrees
C.

2.01 ALL PANELBOARDS
A. Provide products listed and labeled by testing firm acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated. Each board must have a specifications
plate displaying, as a minimum, the following:
 The board developer’s details.
 The board’s identification details.
The plates shall follow IEC 61439-1, EN 61439-1 and IEC 60617, EN 60617standards
which specify the markings that must appear on all boards:

 On the front part of the board.
 On the switchgear located inside the board.
These markings must be clearly legible, of durable quality and properly positioned close
to the switchgear. The external markings on the board’s covers will be made from rigid
white plastic plates with lettering in black. Components will be secured using rivets or
other systems to ensure their permanence. The interior markings of the switchgear will
be indelible adhesive labels be made from aluminium sheeting or bakelite.
Displays prohibiting access to live components must be marked with a “DANGER” label.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under
the following service conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 2,000 m (6,600 feet).
2. The panel boards shall be designed and tested for the following electrical values:
3. Rated voltage 1000 V three-phase.
4. Rated operating voltage 690V
5. Frequency 50 Hz.
6. Insulation level 2.5 kV- 50 Hz, 1min
7. 8kV-1,2/50microsecs
8. Ambient Temperature:
a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 0 degrees C and 53
degrees C.
C. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Listed series ratings are acceptable only where specifically indicated.
3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by QCS 2014 Section 21.
D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent
devices.
F. Bussing:
1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a
suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H. Enclosures:
1. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
2. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal
rough opening.
c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless
3. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
J.Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective
devices are provided in accordance with Section 26 4300, list and label panelboards
as a complete assembly including surge protective device.
K. Panelboard Contactors: Where panelboard contactors are indicated, provide
electrically operated, mechanically held magnetic contactor.
: Not less than ampere rating of panelboard bus.
2. Short Circuit Current Rating: Not less than the panelboard short circuit current
rating.
3. Coil Voltage: As required for connection to control system indicated.
L. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system
listed and labeled.
1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection
are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
M. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as
required to achieve selective coordination.
N. Multi-Section Panelboards: Provide enclosures of the same height, with feed-through
lugs or sub-feed lugs and feeders as indicated or as required to interconnect sections.
O. Devices installation
1. All the devices must be installed onto dedicated mounting plate designed for one
or several switchgears of the same type. The objective of that point is to group
protection equipment of the same type, as well as distinguish inside the
switchboard the function of each device or group of devices and avoid
identification mistakes.
2. Theses mounting plates will have an independent fixing system affording them to
be transformed and moved anywhere in the switchboard and especially to allow
easy evolution of the installation.
3. To ensure the maximum protection of people around the electrical installation,
front plates must be installed in front of all control and protection equipments with
both IP3x and IPxxB level, in order to avoid direct access to the devices and
consequently to the active parts.
P. Electrical distribution and architecture
1. For safety reasons and especially if the door is opened during the switchboard
working, all busbars have to be covered by barriers onto the whole perimeter of
the busbars zone.
2. To achieve that requirement, the switchboard specification must comply with the
partitioning rules at the minimum level of form 2.
3. To supply electricity inside the switchboard, the installation of distribution blocks
systems, using spring terminal technology (IPxxB compliant), ensures the
maximum protection of people.
4. To simplify the implementation in compliance with the IEC 61439 1&2, the
original manufacturer should supply prefabricated connections that are perfectly
rated and coordinated to work with the devices.
5. Vertical distribution systems should be designed to allow tightened connection by
front access only. Horizontal and Vertical distribution system should be designed
to allow connection (with self breaking nuts) all along the length thanks to a
continuous connection track and this without any drilling.
6. For higher readability of distribution, horizontal busbars should be designed with
only one single bar per phase.
7. For future evolution in the switchboard, busbars should allow the possibility to
add all outgoers required without any disassembly.
Q. Framework and cover panels.
R. In order to facilitate the access within the switchboard for the maintenance, its
covering panels must be dismountable on all surfaces what ever the IP
degree.Switchboards associations should be possible in all directions without any
impact on the IP level and when upgrading the maintenance of the original
performance levels is guaranteed. The switchboard should be easily combined with
switchboards already in service. By design the system should ensures electrical
continuity of moving parts without additional earthing braids.
S. Earth and earth/neutral terminal blocks in enclosures shall comply with standard IEC
947-7-1. It shall be possible to install the earth and earth/neutral terminal blocks and
distribution devices either at the top or bottom of enclosures, near the incoming
cables, in the rear or on rails, e.g. near the RCCBs.
1. Terminal blocks shall be designed to secure cables in compliance with standards
IEC 60947-1:2007+AMD1:2010+AMD2:2014, section 8.2.4, IEC 60998-1 and
IEC 60998-2-1. For cable cross-sections up to 6 mm² (rigid or flexible without
ferrules), cable connection shall not require tightening by the installer. Terminal-
block extensions, e.g. for installation modifications, must be easy to add and
dependable.
2. The connection between earth and neutral terminal blocks must be rigid and
removable only using a tool.
T. Protective Devices
1. Protective devices shall be of the modular type (DIN profile). To maintain the best
cost/performance ratio between continuity of supply and safety, all devices shall
be from the same range and the same manufacturer.
a. Main incoming switches, incoming circuit breakers
b. Circuit breakers
c. RCCBs
d. RCBOs
e. Surge arresters
U. Moving parts and doors must be earthed.
V. The nature and section busbars should enable the specified currents to circulate for a
particular heat flow, in order to ensure the proper functioning of the board.
Additionally, the capacity of the busbars must ensure proper convection heat
dissipation and prevent points of heat accumulation from occurring in the board’s
interior.
Between busbars of the same phase a clearance equivalent to at least the thickness
of the busbars shall be maintained.
Busbar supports must be completely or partially non-magnetic in order to prevent
overheating from the circulation of induced currents.
2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker type, and
listed and labeled; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper
conductors only.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C. Busbar:
1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
2. Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
D. Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.
E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
2. Enclosures shall provide Class II total insulation (as per IEC / EN 61439-3:2012,
section 7.4.3.2) between outer space and all live components inside.
3. The impact strength as per IEC 62262 shall be IK08. Large enclosures (24
modules wide) shall be fitted with metal reinforcements to increase the rigidity of
equipped enclosures for shipping, handling, installation, etc.
G. Assembly Manufacturer Requirements.
2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed
and labeled; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper
conductors only.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C. Busbar:
1. Phase Bus Material: Copper.
2. Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2. Enclosures shall provide Class II total insulation (as per IEC / EN 61439-3:2012,
section 7.4.3.2) between outer space and all live components inside.
3. The impact strength as per IEC 62262 shall be IK08. Large enclosures (24
modules wide) shall be fitted with metal reinforcements to increase the rigidity of
equipped enclosures for shipping, handling, installation, etc
4. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
G. Provide column-width panelboards with accessory column-width cable trough and
pullbox where indicated.
2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB):
1. Shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case, suitable for installation inside
switchboards and rated in accordance with BS EN 60947-2. MCCB’s shall have a
combination of thermal and magnetic tripping (for ratings below 250A) an inverse
time delay protection against sustained overloads and instantaneous tripping
under heavy overloads and short circuits. MCCB’s shall have a minimum short
circuit rating of 25 kA.
2. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with IEC/EN 60898; ratings,
configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
3. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the
short circuit current rating indicated on single line diagrams or electrical
calculations
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not
less than the short circuit current rating indicated.
4. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide compression lugs where indicated.
c. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
5. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping
element for short circuit protection.
a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit
breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.
6. All modular circuit breakers shall have the same profile and total height, for all
ratings from 1 to 125 A, to ensure optimum installation and connection
conditions. They shall also be capable of receiving the same indication and
tripping auxiliaries.
7. Contact positions shall be clearly indicated on the front of devices and marked:
a. - "I - ON", standing for device contacts closed, circuit energised,
b. - "O - OFF" with a green background, standing for device contacts open,
circuit disconnected.
7. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true
rms sensing trip units.
8. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
9. Circuit breakers rated up to 32 A shall be the current-limiting type (category 3 as
per EN 60898 appendix ZA). For circuit breakers rated 16 to 25 A, the thermal
stress during a short-circuit, dissipated in the concerned circuits shall not exceed:
a. - 17000 A2s for a prospective short-circuit current of 6 kA rms (415 V three-
phase),
b. - 30000 A2s for a prospective short-circuit current of 10 kA rms (415 V three-
phase).
10. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by
NFPA 70:2014.
B. Miniature circuits breakers (MCB):
1. Shall be completely enclosed in a moulded case, suitable for installation inside
switchboards and rated in accordance with BS EN 60947-2. MCB’s shall have a
minimum short circuit rating of 9 kA.
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with IEC/EN 60898; ratings,
3. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the
short circuit current rating indicated on single line diagrams or electrical
calculations
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not
less than the short circuit current rating indicated.
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide compression lugs where indicated.
c. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
5. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping
element for short circuit protection.
6. All modular circuit breakers shall have the same profile and total height, for all
ratings from 1 to 125 A, to ensure optimum installation and connection
conditions. They shall also be capable of receiving the same indication and
tripping auxiliaries.
a. - "I - ON", standing for device contacts closed, circuit energised,
b. - "O - OFF" with a green background, standing for device contacts open,
circuit disconnected.
8. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
9. Circuit breakers rated up to 32 A shall be the current-limiting type (category 3 as
per EN 60898 appendix ZA). For circuit breakers rated 16 to 25 A, the thermal
stress during a short-circuit, dissipated in the concerned circuits shall not exceed:
a. - 17000 A2s for a prospective short-circuit current of 6 kA rms (415 V three-
phase),
b. - 30000 A2s for a prospective short-circuit current of 10 kA rms (415 V three-
phase).
10. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by
NFPA 70.
2.05 RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES.
A. Residual current circuit breakers (RCCBs).
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying IEC/EN 61008; ratings,
2. For each device, the characteristics shall be indicated on the single-line diagram
as per standard IEC / EN / …. 61008:
a. number of poles (section 4.3),
b. rated current (section 5.2.2),
c. rated residual operating current (section 5.2.3).
3. The rated making and breaking capacities (sections 5.2.6 and 5.2.7) shall be at
least equal to:
a. 1.5 kA for fault currents between live conductors (Im),
b. 2.5 kA for earth-fault currents (IDm).
4. The rated conditional short-circuit currents (Inc et IDc, sections 5.4.2 and 5.4.3)
shall be greater than or equal to the prospective short-circuit current at the point
of installation (Isc as per IEC 60364). These values shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer, taking into account the circuit breaker providing short-circuit
protection and the RCCB.
5. To ensure a highly robust installation, connections between the RCCB and the
circuit breakers located immediately downstream shall be rigid (comb busbars).
6. RCCBs located upstream of the following loads shall have a reinforced level of
performance to restrict power outages to the strict minimum required for user
safety:
a. sets of fluorescent lighting, halogen lighting supplied with LV or ELV power,
b. groups of PCs and work stations,
c. motors driven by single-phase variable-speed drives,etc.
7. The reinforcement in performance means that the RCCB shall not trip in the
following situations:
a. Continuous 1 kHz leakage current, 8 times higher than the rated tripping
threshold (as per IEC 60479-1),
b. Leakage currents and transient overvoltages due to lightning strikes,
switching, decoupling capacitance discharges, etc.:
1) 5 kV peak voltage for a 1.2/50 ms wave (IEC/EN 61000-4-5)
2) 5 kÂ leakage current for an 8/20 ms wave (IEC/EN 61008),
3) 400 Â leakage current for a damped sinusoidal 0.5 ms / 100 kHz ring
wave (IEC/EN 61008),
4) residual current equal to 5 times the rated residual operating current for
a duration less than or equal to 10 ms,
5) very high-frequency inducted or conducted disturbances (starting at 150
kHz).
8. The RCCBs must trip for fault currents with a DC component (type A as per IEC
60755).
9. The same is required of residual current devices located downstream of UPSs.
10. RCCBs protecting three-phase variable-speed drives shall be type B as per IEC
60755.
B. Residual Circuit Breakers with overcurrent protection (RCBOs).
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying IEC/EN 61009; ratings,
2. For each device, the characteristics shall be indicated on the single-line diagram
as per standard IEC / EN / …. 61009:
a. - number of poles (section 4.3),
b. - rated current (section 5.2.2),
c. - type according to instantaneous tripping classification (§ 4.5)
d. - rated residual operating current (section 5.2.3).
e. - breaking capacity (§ 5.2.4)
f. - residual current sensitivity
3. If not specified on the diagram, the minimum breaking capacity shall be at least
6000 A.
4. The rated residual current making and breaking capacity (IDm) shall be of the
same value as the phase-to-phase breaking capacity (Icn).
5. RCBOs shall have the same profile and total height as other protective devices
(MCBs, RCCBs) to ensure optimum installation and connection conditions. They
shall also be capable of receiving the same indication and tripping auxiliaries.
a. "I - ON", i.e. device contacts closed, circuit energised,
b. "O - OFF", i.e. device contacts open, circuit disconnected.
7. The handling parts of the RCBOs shall provide, in the event of a trip, indication of
the type of fault: overcurrent or residual current.
8. RCBOs shall be the current-limiting type (category 3 as per EN 61009 appendix
ZA).
9. To ensure the longest possible service life, circuit-breaker operating mechanisms
shall be designed to make the contact-closing speed totally independent of the
action of the operator.
10. The protection system must be capable of heavy-duty operation and to that end,
the manufacturer shall guarantee the following performance levels, defined by
IEC / EN 60947-2:
a. rated insulation voltage (section 4.3.1.2): 415 V
b. pollution degree (Part 1, section 6.1.3.2): 3
c. rated impulse-withstand voltage (section 4.3.1.3): 4 kV
d. mechanical endurance: 20,000 OC cycles.
11. RCBOs located upstream of the following loads shall have a reinforced level of
performance to restrict power outages to the strict minimum required for user
safety:
a. sets of fluorescent lighting, halogen lighting supplied with LV or ELV power,
b. groups of PCs and work stations,
c. motors driven by single-phase variable-speed drives, etc
12. The reinforcement in performance means that the RCBO shall not trip in the
following situations:
a. Continuous 1 kHz leakage current, 8 times higher than the rated tripping
threshold (as per IEC 60479-1),
b. Leakage currents and transient overvoltages due to lightning strikes,
switching, decoupling capacitance discharges, etc.:
1) 5kV peak voltage for a 1.2/50 ms wave (IEC/EN 61000-4-5)
2) 5kA leakage current for an 8/20 ms wave (IEC/EN 61008),
3) 400 Â leakage current for a damped sinusoidal 0.5 ms / 100 kHz ring
wave (IEC/EN 61008),
4) residual current equal to 5 times the rated residual operating current for
a duration less than or equal to 10 ms,
5) very high-frequency inducted or conducted disturbances (starting at 150
kHz).
13. The RCBOs must trip for fault currents with a DC component (type A as per IEC
60755).
14. The same is required of residual current devices located downstream of UPSs
2.06 POWER METERS (BASIC METERING LEVEL).
A. Measured values: the P.M. shall provide the following measured values, true RMS
metered quantities:
1. Real time readings:
a. Current (Per-Phase, N (calculated), 3-Phase Avg, % Unbalanced )
b. Voltage (L-L Per-Phase, L-L 3-Phase Avg, L-N Per-Phase, 3-Phase Avg, %
unbalanced)
c. Real Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
d. Reactive Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
e. Apparent Power (Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
f. Power Factor (True)(Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
g. Power Factor (Displacement)(Per-Phase, 3-Phase Total)
h. Frequency
i. THD (Current and Voltage)
2. Energy Readings
a. Accumulated Energy (Real kWh, Reactive kVarh, Apparent KVAh)
(Signed/Absolute)
3. Demand Readings:
a. Demand Current Calculations(Per-Phase, 3-Phase Avg, Neutral):
1) Present
2) Peak
b. Demand Real Power Calculations(3-Phase Total):
1) Present
2) Peak
c. Demand Reactive Power Calculations(3-Phase Total):
1) Present
2) Peak
d. Demand Apparent Power Calculations(3-Phase Total):
1) Present
2) Predicted
e. Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident(True),(3-Phase
Total):
2) Coincident with kW peak
3) Coincident with kVAR peak
4) Coincident with kVA peak
f. Power Analysis Values

3) Displacement Power Factor (Per-Phase, 3-Phase)
B. Demand calculations: All power demand calculations shall use any one of the
following calculation methods, selectable by the user:
1. Thermal demand using a sliding window updated every second for the present
demand and at the end of the interval for the last interval. The window length
shall be set by the user from 1-60 minutes in one minute increments.
2. Block interval, with optional sub-intervals. The window length shall be set by the
user from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The user shall be able to set the
sub-interval length from 1-60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The following Block
methods are available:
a. Sliding Block that calculates demand every second with intervals less than
15 minutes and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15 and 60
minutes.
b. Fixed Block that calculates demand at the end of the interval
c. Rolling Block that a subinterval is configured. Demand is calculated at the
end of each subinterval and displays at the end of the interval.
3. Demand can be calculated using a Synchronization signal:
a. Demand can be synchronized to an input pulse from an external source. The
demand period begins with every pulse. A synchronized input can be
b. Demand can be synchronized to a communication signal. This can be
4. Demand can be synchronized to the clock in the Power Meter
C. Sampling
1. The current and voltage signals shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough
to provide true rms accuracy to the 15th harmonic (fundamental of 50 Hz).
2. The Power Meter shall provide continuous sampling at a minimum of up to 32
samples/cycle, simultaneously on all voltage and current channels in the meter.
D. Minimum and maximun values.
1. The Power Meter shall provide a monthly minimum and maximum values for the
following parameters:
a. Voltage L-L
b. Voltage L-N
c. Current per phase
d. Voltage L-L Unbalance
e. Voltage L-N Unbalance
f. True Power Factor
g. Real Power Total
h. Reactive Power Total
i. Apparent Power Total
j. THD Voltage L-L
k. THD Voltage L-N
l. THD Current
m. Frequency
2. For each min/max value listed above, the Power Meter shall record the following
attributes:
a. Min/Max. Value
b. Phase of recorded Min/Max (for multi-phase quantities)
3. Minimum and maximum values shall be available via communications and
display.
E. Current and voltage inputs
1. The Power Meter shall accept current inputs from standard instrument current
transformers with 5 amp secondary output and shall have a metering range of 0-
10 amps with the following withstand currents: 10 amp continuous, 50 amp 10
sec per hour, 120amp 1 sec per hour.
2. Current transformer primaries through 327 kA shall be supported.
3. The circuit monitor shall allow connection to circuits up to 600 volts AC without
the use of potential transformers. The Power Meter shall also accept voltage
inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with 120 volt secondary
output. The Power Meter shall support PT primaries through 3.2 MV.
4. The nominal full scale input of the circuit monitor shall be 347 Volts AC L-N, 600
Volts AC L-L. The meter shall accept a metering over-range of 50%. The input
impedance shall be greater then 2 Ohm.
E. Accuracy
1. The Power Meter shall comply with IEC62053-22 Class 0.5S (PM750).or IEC
62053-21 Class 1 (PM700) for Real Energy and IEC62053-23 Class 2 for
Reactive Energy
2. No annual calibration shall be required to maintain this accuracy.
G. Waveform Capture
1. The Power Meter shall provide waveform captures of the voltage and current
channels. Waveform capability shall permit to configure the number of captured
cycles depending on the sampling rate and channels. The waveforms shall be
configurable from 185 cycles in one channel at 16 samples/cycle up to 3 cycles
in six channels at 128 samples/cycle. Waveform captures can be initiated with
alarms or manually using software.
2. The Power Meter shall be able to capture, and store in internal non-volatile
memory, 128 digitally sampled data points for each cycle of each phase voltage.
The number of waveform captures stored onboard the circuit monitor shall be at
least 5.
3. The Power Meter shall transmit the waveform samples over the network to the
personal computer workstation for display, archival, and analysis.
4. Harmonic analysis performed on the captured waveforms shall resolve
harmonics up to the 31st..
5. The data used for the three-cycle waveform capture display shall also be used to
derive metered quantities in order to provide meaningful additional data.
6. All waveforms must reflect actual circuit performance. Waveforms synthesized or
composed over time shall not be acceptable.
F. Input/Output
1. The Power Meter shall supply 2 digital input and 1 digital solid state output/KY
pulse output as standard.
2. The Power Meter shall be capable of operating the KY relay outputs to provide
output pulses for a user definable increment of reported real energy. The
standard KY relay outputs shall operate from 3 to 240 V DC or 6 to 240 V AC,
100 mA at 25 °C, 2.41 kV rms isolation, 30 W on-resistance at 100 mA.
3. It shall allow for the following operation modes:
a. External-This is the default setting. The output can be controlled by a
command sent over the communications link.
b. Alarm-The output is controlled by the power meter in response to a Setpoint
controlled alarm condition. When the alarm is active, the output will be ON.
Multiple alarms can be associated with the same output simultaneously.
c. kWh Pulse-In this mode, the meter generates a fixed-duration pulse output
that can be associated with the kWh consumption.
4. The digital inputs shall have four operating modes:
a. Normal mode for simple on/off digital inputs
b. Demand Interval Synch Pulse to accept a demand synch pulse from a utility
demand meter
c. Conditional Energy Control input to control conditional energy accumulation.
5. Input Metering Demand (WAGES) The power meter shall include five input pulse
metering channels. Each channel shall be able to add the consumption signals
from one of more digital inputs available in the unit.
6. The Power Meter shall be able to perform GPS time synchronization via any
digital inputs.
7. The optional relay output module shall provide a load voltage range from 20 to
240 VAC or from 20 to 30 VDC. It shall support a load current of 2A.
G. Display
1. The Power Meter display shall be back lit LCD for easy viewing, display shall
also be anti-glare and scratch resistant.
2. The Display shall be capable of allowing the user to view four values on one
screen at the same time. A summary screen shall also be available to allow the
user to view a snapshot of the system.
3. The display shall include two different modes of visualization, IEEE and IEC for
all quantities.
4. The Power Meter display shall provide local access to the following metered
quantities:
a. All quantities in Section B
b. Minimum and Maximum readings in Section E
c. Any of the Active Alarms from Section P
d. I/O Status
5. Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the Power
Meter display:
a. Peak demand current
b. Peak demand real power (kW) and peak reactive demand (kVAR).
c. Energy (MWh) and reactive energy (MVARh)
6. Setup for system requirements shall be allowed from the Power Meter display.
Setup provisions shall include:
a. CT rating
b. PT rating (Single Phase, 2-Wire)
c. System type [three-phase, 3-wire] [three-phase, 4-wire]
d. Watt-hours per pulse
e. Alarms (PM750)
f. Digital I/O (PM750)
g. Demand calculation mode settings
h. Bar graphs
i. And Passwords for Setup and Reset
H. Control Power
1. The Power Meter shall operate properly over a wide range of control power
including 100-415 VAC, +/-10%, 5VA; 50 to 60Hz. Or 125-250 VDC, +/-20%,
3W..
K. Communications
1. The Power Meter shall communicate via RS-485 Modbus or Jbus protocol with a
2-wire at speeds up to 19.2kBaud.
2.07 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Description: magnetic lighting contactor.
B. Configuration: Electrically held.
C. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function.
D. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for
continuous loads.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated
components are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
3.02 INSTALLATION
instructions and QCS 2014 Section 21.
C. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
D. Install panelboards plumb.
E. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no
gaps and rough opening completely covered.
F. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit
breakers or switches does not exceed 2000 mm (79 inches) above the floor or
working platform.
G. Provide minimum of six spare 27 mm (1 inch) trade size conduits out of each flush-
mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
H. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
I. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as
indicated.
J. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
K. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-
energizing essential loads where indicated.
L. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
as required by QCS 2014 Section 21.
B. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated
components.
3.04 ADJUSTING
B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION

9.16 26 2419 Motor-Control Centers:

A. Motor control centers.
A. Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
B. Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and adjustment of
equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
C. Fuses.
D. Surge Protective Devices.
A. QRSS and QCS Code (2014)
B. IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and
size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions,
and enclosure details.
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and
number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including
voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time/current curves of all
equipment and components.
C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

2.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Main Overcurrent Protection: Molded case circuit breaker.
B. Feeder Tap Units: Molded case thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.
C. Configuration: Units front mounting only, accessible from the front only.
D. Front and rear access
E. Capable to withstand a fault current of 44 kA for 3 seconds symmetrical
F. Vertical sections shall contain adequate space for connecting the incoming power
supply circuits, outgoing branch circuits, motor circuits and control circuits to
terminals, horizontal and vertical power bus bars, horizontal earth bus, circuit
breakers, magnetic starters, contactors, control stations, pilot lights, timers, terminals,
transformers, panels, relays, ammeters, voltmeters, meter switches, earth leakage
protection, space heaters, thermostats, fans, vents, screens, filters and switches. All
starters shall utilize motor circuit protectors.
G. Shall be properly equipped for the connection to BACS and fire alarm systems as
needed.
H. Shall have 15% spare circuit breakers above their initial requirements.
2.02 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Reversing Controllers: Include electrical interlock and integral time delay transition
between FORWARD and REVERSE rotation.
B. Two-Speed Controllers: Include integral time delay transition between FAST and
SLOW speeds.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Indicating Lights: Transformer, incandescent type.
B. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
2.04 DISCONNECTS
A. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip
in each pole.
2.05 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. List and label motor control centers containing surge protective devices as a complete
assembly including surge protective device.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are suitable for motor control center installation.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing motor
control center.
END OF SECTION

9.17 26 2501 Low-Voltage Busways:

A. Feeder busway type from 1.000A to 5.000A.
A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping.
A. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); International
Electrotechnical Commission; 2013-08.
B. IEC 61439-1&2 Assembly of switchgears.
C. Shall be in compliance with standards QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the arrangement of busway with structural members, ductwork,
piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or
by others. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid installation of
obstructions within busway required clearances.
2. Coordinate arrangement of busway with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for
mounting.
4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
5. Where busway extends through roof, coordinate the work with other trades to
provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do
not void the roof warranty.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to performing field measurements
for busway fabrication drawings; require attendance of all affected installers. Review
proposed routing, sequence of installation, and protection requirements for installed
busway.
C. Sequencing:
1. Perform field measurements prior to busway fabrication. Where necessary,
perform field measurement for custom lengths after installation of adjacent
sections.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
busway system components and accessories. Include dimensions, weight, materials,
fabrication details, finishes, and service condition requirements. Indicate voltage and
current ratings, short circuit current ratings, configurations, and installed features and
accessories.
1. Include busway resistance, reactance, and impedance data and voltage drop
ratings.
2. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker plug-
in device upon request.
3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or,
where acceptable, series rated systems.
4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating proposed
busway routing, required clearances, and locations and details of supports, fittings,
building element penetrations, and equipment connections.
C. Where roof penetrations are provided, certify that work does not void roof warranty.
D. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
A. Store products indoors in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent
condensation (including outdoor busway, which is not weatherproof until completely
and properly installed). Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
and traffic.
B. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and
finish.
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after
installation.

2.01 BUSWAY SYSTEM
A. Provide new busway system consisting of all required components, fittings, devices,
supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.
B. Description: Prefabricated sectionalized enclosed bus assemblies and associated
fittings and devices; listed and labeled.
C. The busbar trunking system, both feeder and plug-in, shall be of low impedance and
sandwiched construction meaning no air gap shall exist between busbars expect at
plug-in opening. It shall be totally enclosed pre-painted galvanized steel and be of the
non-louvered type maintaining an overall degrees of ingress protection. All the
insulation materials shall be halogen free. The busbar trunking system shall be
suitable for a 3 phases 5 wires system with full size neutral and continuous internal
copper earth bar of half size.
D. All busbar trunking system including all fittings (elbows, zeds, end-feed units, tap-off
units, etc.) shall be IP55 in accordance to IEC 60529 and sprinkler proof without any
extra accessory. All fittings and tap-off units shall be from the same manufacturer as
the busbar trunking system.
E. The busbar trunking system shall be capable of being mounted in any position. Plug-
in and feeder sections shall be interchangeable without the use of special adapter
joint covers. The complete installation shall be coordinated throughout and where
possible, shall consist of standard 4m sections with special sections and fittings
provided to suit the installation. Fittings shall be the most compact and light weight as
possible in order to make the design and the installation easier.
F. Horizontal runs of busbar trunking system shall be supported by hangers at every 3
meters. Vertical runs of busbar trunking system shall be supported by hangers not
more than 4m apart.
G. Busbar trunking system shall be terminated by ‘end closure’.
H. The busbar trunking housing shall be non-ventilated and at least of 1.5 mm thick for
protection against dust accumulation and mechanical damage. The enclosure shall be
of hot dip galvanized and pre-painted sheet steel. Busbar trunking system without
paint protection shall not be acceptable. In order to limit magnetic field around the
busway system, aluminium enclosures are not recommended.
I. Expansion Joints: Busbar expansion units shall be use in cases when it crosses a
building expansion joint or as recommended by the vendor to reduce the stress on the
system by differential expansion between the busbars and the casing; particularly for
long run of the busbar. It shall be consist of a flexible joint in the middle on the
conductors and a sliding casing in 2 sections which can absorb the relative
movements of each section of the length.
J.Busway General Requirements:
1. Busway Type: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated; suitable for installation in any
mounting orientation the busway is designed for (e.g horizontal flatwise,
horizontal edgewise, vertical) without derating.
2. Temperature Rise: Not exceeding 55 degrees C, when operating at continuous
rated current in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.
3. Busbars and stabs to be suitably plated at all electrical contact points.
4. Busbar Insulation: rated 130 degrees C.
5. Housing: Steel or aluminum, with manufacturer's standard finish unless
6. Single-Bolt Type Joints:
a. Use torque-indicating bolts with visual indication that proper torque has been
applied.
b. Bolts to be at ground potential to allow adjustment without requiring de-
energizing of busway.
c. Designed such that tightening of joints only requires access to one side of
busway.
d. Allows for length adjustment of plus/minus 3.2 mm.
1. Provide busway system and associated components suitable for operation under
the following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude: Less than 2,000 m (6,600 feet).
b. Ambient Temperature:
1) Busway Lengths and Fittings: Between -30 degrees C and 50 degrees
C.
2) Circuit Breaker Plug-In Units: Between 0 degrees C and 50 degrees C.
2. Provide busway system and associated components suitable for operation at
indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
L. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide busway system and associated components with listed short circuit
current rating as indicated on the drawings.
2. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by QCS 2014 Section 21.
3. The whole busbar trunking system shall be capable of withstanding the short
circuit capacity of the electrical installation without damaging the electrical,
mechanical and thermal stress under fault condition at a service voltage of 415V
50Hz.
2.02 FEEDER BUSWAY
1. Outdoor Feeder Busway: Weatherproof, IP 55, with sealed joint covers and drain
holes with removable plugs.
2. Indoor Feeder Busway: Standard (not splash resistant), with IEC 60529 rating of
IP 40.
B. Feeder Busway Busway 1000-5000A rated.
1. Rated Operating voltage: 1000V 3PH 4W.
2. Rated insulation voltage (A/C): 1.000 volts.
3. Ampere Rating: 1.000-5.000A.
4. The insulation used on the busbar shall be class”B” polyester material rated at
130°C and halogen free.
5. Configuration:
a. 3 phase, 4-wire (100 percent capacity neutral), with 50 percent capacity
integral housing ground.
6. Busbar Material:
a. Copper.
C. Feeder Busway: Busway 100-1.000A rated.
3. Ampere Rating: 100-1.000 A.
4. Configuration: 3 phase, 4-wire (100 percent capacity neutral), with 50 percent
capacity integral housing ground.
5. Busbar Material: Copper.
2.03 PLUG-IN BUSWAY
1. Provide cover at each unused plug-in opening.
2. Provide means for mechanical support and alignment of plug-in units.
3. IEC 60529 Protection Rating: Splash resistant, with minimum rating of IP 54.
B. Plug-In Busway: Busway 1.000A-5.000A rated.
3. Ampere Rating: 1.000-5.000A.
4. Configuration:
a. 3 phase, 4-wire (100 percent capacity neutral), with 50 percent capacity
integral housing ground.
5. Busbar Material:
a. Copper (99,9% purity electrolytic copper).
6. Plug-In Opening Spacing: 610 mm nominal between openings; 10 openings (5
per side) for standard straight lengths of 3 m

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.
B. Verify that the ratings of busway system components are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive busway and associated supports.
3.02 INSTALLATION

B. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange busway to be parallel or perpendicular to building
lines.
C. Arrange busway to provide required clearances and maintenance access.
D. Install busway plumb and level, with sections aligned and with horizontal runs at the
proper elevation.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, orient horizontal plug-in busway with plug-in openings on
sides (edgewise orientation).
F. Maintain proper phase sequence throughout busway system, accounting for phase
transitions where applicable.
G. Provide suitable expansion fittings where busway is subject to movement, including
but not limited to:
1. Where busway crosses structural joints intended for expansion.
2. Long straight busway runs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Provide end closures at unconnected ends of busway runs.
I. Busway Support:
1. Use manufacturer's recommended hangers and supports, located at intervals
complying with QCS 2014 Section 21.and manufacturer's requirements. Provide
required support and attachment components, where not furnished by busway
manufacturer.
2. Use suitable spring hangers for vertical riser applications where busway
penetrates and is supported by building floors.
3. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
4. Provide sway bracing as indicated or as required to keep busway runs straight
and prevent rotation and movement, accounting for unbalanced weight
distribution of plug-in units where applicable.
J.Penetrations:
1. Provide suitable flanges where busway penetrates building elements. Use
weatherproof flanges for exterior wall or roof penetrations. Seal roof penetrations
as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain
roof warranty.
2. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of building elements.
3. Where busway penetrates floor, provide 100 mm high concrete curb constructed
in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 5 around openings in accordance with
QCS 2014 Section 21.
K. Outdoor Feeder Busway: Arrange busway to prevent water infiltration through drain
holes from rain or snow. Seal joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and remove drain hole plugs.
L. Plug-In Units:
1. Install plug-in units on plug-in busway in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Provide independent supports where recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, final connections from plug-in units to loads to be
provided by Contractor.
M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
1. Where integral housing ground is utilized, verify joint covers and other
components required for continuity are properly installed.
N. Identify busway in accordance with Section 26 0553.
A. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation
and assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's reports with submittals.
B. Electrically isolate busway system before energizing and perform insulation
resistance testing:
1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high
potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing
with SPDs connected.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective busway system components.
D. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.
3.04 ADJUSTING
B. Adjust supports as required to minimize strain on busway and associated
components.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from busway enclosure and components in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Do not use compressed air or a blower in order to prevent
debris infiltration.
B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to
A. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented
with additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of four hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect busway system from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION

9.18 26 2717 Equipment Wiring:

A. Electrical connections to equipment.
A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
B. Section 26 0534 - Conduit.
C. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.
E. Section 26 2818 - Enclosed Switches.
A. Shall be in compliance with standards in QCS 2014 Section 21.
A. Coordination:
1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,
and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
2. Determine connection locations and requirements.
B. Sequencing:
1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is
required.
2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing
dimensions, configurations, and construction.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
C. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
D. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
E. Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
F. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
G. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company
H. Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on
non-complied items.

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cords and Caps:match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
1. Cord Construction: QCS 2014 Section 21.multiconductor flexible cord with
identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
2. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of
branch circuit overcurrent protection.
2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
1. Electrical Connection: Flexible conduit.
2. Electrical Connection: Cord and plug.
3. Provide field-installed disconnect switch.
4. Voltage: 240 Volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible
conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes
and equipment connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to
complete equipment wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to
complete equipment wiring requirements.
J. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls,
floor, and ceilings.
END OF SECTION

9.19 26 2726 Wiring Devices:

A. Wall switches.
B. Wall dimmers.
C. Fan speed controllers.
D. Receptacles.
E. Wall plates.
F. Wall box service fittings.
A. Section 09 6900 - Access Flooring (See Architecture Specs).
B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables:
Manufactured wiring systems for use with access floor boxes with compatible pre-
wired connectors.
C. Section 26 0540 - Underfloor Ducts.
D. Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Shall be in compliance with standards in QCS 2014
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical
requirements of actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face
block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to
obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,
colors, and configurations.
1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.
2. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include surge current rating, voltage protection
rating (VPR) for all protection modes, and diagnostics information.
B. Samples: One for each type and color of device and wall plate specified.
I . Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on
non-complied items.
A. Conform to requirements of BS 5733:2010+A1:2014 and QCS 2014 Section 21 Part
10.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing firm
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for
installation.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. MK.
B. Legrand
C. Berker
D. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products
produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.
2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load
served.
B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with
ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.
C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all
receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for all receptacles installed in dwelling units.
E. Provide isolated ground receptacles for all receptacles serving computers and
electronic cash registers.
F. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
2.03 WIRING DEVICE FINISHING
A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.
C. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Orange.
D. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate.
E. Above-Floor Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with satin aluminum housing.
F. Flush Floor Box Service Fittings: Gray wiring devices with aluminum cover and
ring/flange.
G. Access Floor Boxes: Gray wiring devices with gray steel cover with insert to match
floor covering.
2.04 WALL SWITCHES
A. Standard Wall Switches: Residential grade, 10A A, 220V-240V V with standard toggle
type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole
single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
B. Lighted Wall Switches: Residential grade, 10A A, 220V-240V V with illuminated
standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load
off; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as
indicated on the drawings.
C. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Residential grade, 10A A, 220V-240V V with red illuminated
standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load
on; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as
D. Locking Wall Switches: Residential grade, 10A A, 220V-240V V with cylinder type
keyed switch actuator and maintained contacts; all switches keyed alike; single pole
single throw as indicated on the drawings.
E. Watertight Wall Switches: IP55 switch, 10A A, 220V-240V V with toggle type three
position switch actuator and momentary contacts; single pole double throw, off with
switch actuator in center position.
F. Local switches shall be provided in BOH offices, service rooms and the like
2.05 WALL DIMMERS
A. All Wall Dimmers: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square
law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset
memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate; types and ratings
suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings.
B. Control: Slide control type with separate on/off switch.
C. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated
on the Drawings:
1. Magnetic Low-Voltage: 600 VA.
2. Electronic Low-Voltage: 415 VA.
3. Fluorescent: 600 VA.
D. Provide locator light, illuminated with load off.
2.06 SOCKET OUTLETS
A. 13 amperes, 240V single and double socket outlets shall be provided as indicated on
drawings, and shall have two pole and earthing to BS 1343 and an incorporated
ground fault interrupter (GFI).
B. 13 amperes, 240V socket outlets for connection to equipment requiring UPS supplies
shall be similar to above described but coloured red and shall not be provided with
GFI protection as standard
C. Sockets outlet to be installed at technical rooms shall be mounted in tough and impact
resistant receptacles
D. Weatherproof single socket outlets shall be provided with a push-on cap and cap
retaining ring.
E. Industrial sockets shall have 2 poles and earthing or 4 poles and earthing as shown in
drawings layouts. These type of sockets shall be according to BS EN 60309.
F. Plugs shall be provided with all socket-outlets, and handed over to the Owners
representative.
G. Where metal cover plates are specified as a metal type (not metalclad) the cover
plate shall be fabricated from solid metal. All accessories shall be fitted to adjustable
grids over lapping standard BS 4662 boxes.
H. Each ring main shall be connected to its own circuit on the distribution board using 4
mm2 P.V.C. cable for the earth conductor and shall be protected by a 30 Ampere
MCB. All conductors shall complete the ring for each circuit, including the earth
conductor
2.07 FAN SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Description: 220V-240V AC, solid-state, full-range variable speed, slide control type
with separate on/off switch, with integral radio frequency interference filtering, fan
hum elimination circuitry, power failure preset memory:
1. Current Rating: 1.5 A unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load
2.08 RECEPTACLES
A. All Receptacles: Self-grounding; types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding
clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
B. Convenience Receptacles:
1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Residential grade, 2P+G, 13A 240V; single
or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
2. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 2P+G, 45A
240V; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
3. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Residential grade, 2P+G, 13A
240V,, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498
Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex
as indicated on the drawings.
2.09 WALL PLATES
A. All Wall Plates: where two or more switches are grouped together and connected to
the same phase, multi-gang devices and common plates shall be used
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of
corresponding wiring devices.
2. Size: Standard; According to drawings.
3. Screws: Metal with tamper-resistant heads finished to match wall plate finish.
2.10 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26
0537 with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
B. Above-Floor Service Fittings:
1. Single Service Pedestal Convenience Receptacles:
a. Configuration: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.
2. Single Service Pedestal Communications Outlets:
a. Configuration: One 1 inch bushed opening.
b. Voice and Data Jacks: As specified in Section 27 1005.
3. Dual Service Pedestal Combination Outlets:
a. Configuration:
1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle.
2) Communications: One 1 inch bushed opening.
3) Voice and Data Jacks.
b. Provide barrier to separate line and low voltage compartments.
C. Flush Floor Service Fittings:
1. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets:
a. Cover: Rectangular.
b. Configuration:
1) Power: Two standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap
opening(s). One for regular power, one for uninterrupted power.
2) Communications: 2 RJ-45 outlets.
b. Configuration:
3) Voice and Data Jacks: 1 VGA DB15 and 1 JACK AUDIO 3.5 outlet.
3. Dual Service Flush Furniture Feed Combination Outlets:
b. Configuration:
b. Configuration:
1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s) with duplex flap
opening(s). For regular power.
b. Configuration:
opening(s). For uninterrupted power.
b. Configuration:
opening(s). For uninterrupted power.
2.11 WALL BOX SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Description: Service fittings compatible with wall boxes provided under Section 26
0537 with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
1. Single service power Outlets:
b. Configuration: One standard convenience receptacle for 20 A socket outlet
protected by Ground Fault Circuit- Interrupter (GFCI) .
c. Colours:White for regular power, red for uninterrupted power.
1. Dual service power Outlets:
b. Configuration: One standard convenience receptacle for two 20 A socket
outlets protected by Ground Fault Circuit- Interrupter (GFCI)
c. Colours:White for regular power, red for uninterrupted power.
3.01 EXAMINATION

B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting
heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in
accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 10.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.
H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03 INSTALLATION
installation of wiring devices provided under this section.
1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 1.2 m above finished floor.
b. Wall Dimmers: 1.2 m above finished floor.
c. Fan Speed Controllers: 1.2 m above finished floor.
d. Receptacles: 450 mm above finished floor or 150 mm above counter.
2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the
same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a
common wall plate.
4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 80 mm from
edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to
5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking
fountain according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between
adjacent devices exceeds 300 V.
E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 150 mm long. Do
not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw
terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where
present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated
binding.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
H. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
I. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
J. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
K. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally
mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left.
L. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening
completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed
outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in
lieu of meeting this requirement.
M. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices
installed or designated for future use.
N. Shall be in compliance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 10.
A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
B. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized
to verify proper operation.
C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed
by Architect.
3.06 CLEANING
END OF SECTION

9.20 26 2813 Fuses:

A. Fuses.
A. Switchboards: Fusible switches.
B. Panelboards: Fusible switches.
C. Centers: Fusible switches.
D. Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.
A. BS88 HRC Fuses.
G. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 3.
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for
compatibility with indicated fuses.
a. Fusible Switches for Switchboards: See Section 26 2413.
b. Fusible Switches for Panelboards: See Section 26 2416.
c. Fusible Switches for Motor Control Centers: See Section 26 2419.
d. Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 26 2818.
e. Fusible Switches for Enclosed Motor Controllers: See Section 26 2913.
2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and
nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and
current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.
1. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Include dimensions.

2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders:
1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay.
B. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.
C. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay.
D. In-Line Protection for Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Class CC, time-delay.
E. Primary Protection for Control Transformers: Class CC, time-delay.
2.02 FUSES
A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for
the purpose indicated.
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as
required for a complete operating system.
C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.
D. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
E. CARTRIDGE FUSES
1. A. Cartridge fuse links shall be of the high rupturing capacity type and are to
comply with BS88.
2. Each HRC fuse link shall be certified for its claimed breaking capacity and shall
be so mounted that the current rating on each fuse link is clearly visible.
3. On completion of the works, the Contractor shall supply 2Nº off spare HRC
cartridge fuse links for every current rating of HRC cartridge fuse links that are
used. The Contractor shall hand over these spares to the Owner upon
completion of the project.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's
recommendations and nameplate data for equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.
B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
END OF SECTION

9.21 26 2818 Enclosed Switches:

A. Enclosed safety switches.
D. Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of equipment and
associated protective devices specified in this section.
D. Low-Voltage Busways: Fusible switch busway plug-in units.
E. Fuses.
F. Enclosed Controllers: Manual motor controllers.
G. Transfer Switches: Automatic and non-automatic switches listed for use as transfer
switch equipment.
A. Shall be in compliance with standards in QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 3.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current
ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal
information, and installed features and accessories.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.
D. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.

2.01 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as
complying; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the
drawings.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under
the following service conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 2,000 m.
2. Ambient Temperature: Between -30 degrees C and 40 degrees C
D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.
E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
F. Short Circuit Current Rating:

1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side
overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current
rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated
on the drawings.
G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.
H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
I. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a
suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
J.Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position
with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
K. Heavy Duty Switches:
a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors.
2. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position,
capable of accepting three padlocks.
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 3.
D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Install enclosed switches plumb.
F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount
enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not
exceed 2000 m above the floor or working platform.
END OF SECTION

9.22 26 2913 Enclosed Controllers:

A. Manual motor controllers.
B. Magnetic motor controllers.
C. Combination magnetic motor controllers and disconnects.
C. Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and adjustment of
equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
D. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.
Section 21 Part 3.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
B. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
stipulated by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Maintenance Data: Replacement parts list for controllers.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Product
B. General Electric Company
C. Schneider Electric
2.03 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Reversing Controllers: Include electrical interlock and integral time delay transition
between FORWARD and REVERSE rotation.
B. Two-Speed Controllers: Include integral time delay transition between FAST and
SLOW speeds.
C. Coil Operating Voltage: 240 Volts, 50 Hertz.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
B. Indicating Lights: Transformer, incandescent type.
C. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
D. Control Power Transformers: in each motor starter. Provide fused primary, secondary,
and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
2.05 DISCONNECTS
A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with disconnects in common
enclosure. Obtain IEC Class 2 coordinated component protection.
B. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip
in each pole.
C. Motor Circuit Protector: Circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in
each pole.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Provide supports in accordance with Section suports.
C. Provide fuses for fusible switches; refer to Section fuses for product requirements.
D. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed
motor characteristics.
END OF SECTION

9.23 26 2916 Electronic Soft-Start Controllers:

1.01 SUMMARY
A. This specification provides the requirements for an RVSS factory integrated with
branch circuit protection, power circuit components, control components, and door
mounted operator devices into an enclosure, herein referred to as RVSS panel.
1.02 REFERENCES
Section 21 Part 3.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. A submittal package shall be furnished to the Engineer for approval prior to factory
assembly of the RVSS. The submittal package shall consist of the following:
1. Elementary diagrams showing factory power and control wiring along with field
wiring connections for line and load power connections and control wiring
connections.
2. Outline diagrams showing the overall enclosure and mounting dimensions with
front and side views and weights as a minimum. The outline drawings shall also
include conduit entry/exit locations along with intended conduit sizes.
3. Voltage, horsepower, current rating, and product features will be furnished from
standard catalog sheets.
1.04 INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Manufacturer shall provide a copy of installation, operation and maintenance
procedures to owner.
B. Instruction manual shall include programming manuals, wiring diagrams, operating,
and maintenance instructions.
A. Manufacturer shall have specialized in the manufacture and assembly of low voltage
control panels for [25] years.
B. Low voltage RVSS shall be listed and/or classified by Underwriters Laboratories in
accordance with standards listed in Article 1.03 of this specification.
C. All RVSS shall be 100% factory tested to ensure proper performance.
A. Contractor shall store, protect, and handle products in accordance with recommended
practices listed in manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Contractor shall inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within 48 hours.
C. Contractor shall store in a clean, dry space. Cover with heavy canvas or plastic to keep
out dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. Heat enclosures to prevent
condensation.
D. Contractor shall handle in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to avoid
damaging equipment, installed devices, and finish. [Lift only by installed lifting eyes.]
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS (SITE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS)
A. Follow (standards) service conditions before, during and after installation.
B. Equipment shall be located in well - ventilated areas, free from excess humidity, dust
and dirt and away from hazardous materials. Indoor locations shall be protected to
prevent moisture from entering enclosure.
C. The RVSS panel shall be designed to operate in an ambient temperature range from
0°C to 40°C.
D. Storage temperatures shall be between -25°C to 65°C.
E. The RVSS panel shall be suitable for operation at altitudes up to 3,280 feet without de-
rating.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer warranty the materials and workmanship of the RVSS to be free
from defect for a period of twelve (12) months after start-up or eighteen (18) months
after shipment, whichever occurs first.
1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment shall
fit in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances specified in
QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 3.
9.23.2 Part 2: Product

2.01 ELECTRICAL RATINGS
A. Provide equipment rated as indicated on drawings or as specified below.
B. Input voltage ratings shall be 415/240VAC +10% and –15%.
C. Input frequency shall be from 45Hz to 65Hz with Auto Tracking Frequency range.
D. The RVSS panel output current ratings shall be capable of continuous operation at a
minimum of 100% rated motor full-load current in accordance with QCS 2014 Section
21 Part 3.
E. The RVSS shall provide Class 10 overload current capacity.
2.03 DESCRIPTION
A. Refer to Contract Drawings for actual layout and location of equipment and
components; current ratings of devices, bus bars, and components; voltage ratings of
devices, components and assemblies; interrupting and withstand ratings of devices,
buses, and components; and other required details.
B. The soft starter shall be microprocessor controlled and shall consist of a power section,
logic board, and field wiring interface terminal board for ease of access to control and
power wiring as well as maintenance requirements. The soft starter shall consist of the
following general components:
1. Three sets of back-to-back phased controlled power semiconductors rated 1400
PIV to 500V, 1600 PIV to 600V and 1800 PIV to 690V.
2. Integral thermal sensor to trip and disengage the soft starter on heat sink over
temperature.
3. Programmable keypad and alphanumerical LCD display that indicates present
mode of operation. The LCD keypad shall display programming and diagnostic
data in full text.
4. LED indicators to show the following: On, Start, Run, Soft Stop, Stop, Save/Slow
Speed, Dual Set/Reverse, & Fault.
5. Modbus RTU communications port.
C. The soft starter input power section shall be designed to operate at either 240Vac,
415Vac three phase input voltages.
D. RVSS panels will include control power that is Vac via a control power transformer.
E. The RVSS panel shall include an input disconnect with a through-the-door handle
interlocked to the enclosure door to provide a local and lockable means of removing all
input power from the RVSS panel.
F. Branch circuit protection fuses shall be provided to protect the RVSS and bypass
starter. Fuses shall be sized to provide proper branch circuit protection and be
coordinated with other power circuit components.
G. The RVSS panel will include door mounted operator devices and a through the door
keypad to facilitate programming, control functions and diagnostics.
H. The RVSS panel will include a line isolation contactor to remove three phase power
from the starter and motor during stop and fault conditions.
I. An AC3 rated Bypass Starter with Class 10 motor overload relay will be included and
controlled to allow cooler and more efficient operation during run conditions. This will
also allow the RVSS panel to run the motor using a full voltage, non-reversing starter in
the event the RVSS trips.
J. Soft-start controllers shall be housed in a separate cubicle compartment of the relevant
motor control centre.
2.03 PROTECTIVE AND DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES
In the event of a fault, the soft starter will have tripped. Faults must be reset to restart
operation once their cause has been rectified. The soft starter shall offer the following
Faults list:
A. External Fault (by a digital input)
B. Frequency out of Range
C. Heat Sink Over Temperature
D. Long Start Time
E. Overcurrent / Jam
F. Overload
G. Overvoltage
H. Phase Loss
I. Phase Sequence
J. Shorted SCR
K. Slow Speed Time
L. Thermistor Trip
M. Too Many Starts
N. Undercurrent
O. Undervoltage
P. Wrong Motor Connection
Q. Wrong Parameters
R. Wrong Wiring Connection
2.04 FEATURES AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. The RVSS panel will be factory programmed to operate all specified optional
devices.
B. The RVSS will include four (4) user selectable Start (4) user selectable and Stop
curves to match starting characteristics to load.
C. The RVSS will include an 80% Kickstart voltage with adjustable Kickstart time.
D. The RVSS will include user programmable Starting Voltage.
E. The RVSS will include user programmable Starting Current.
F. The RVSS will include user programmable Current Limit.
G. The RVSS will include user programmable Acceleration and Deceleration times.
H. The RVSS will include user programmable Auto Reset for Phase Loss and
Undervoltage Fault.
I. The RVSS will include Dual Setting functionality to allow setting a second set of basic
motor parameters.
J. For diagnostic assistance, the RVSS shall record and store in its memory run status
and fault type of the past 10 faults and provided detailed information on soft starter
operating conditions at the time of fault.
K. The RVSS shall contain an energy savings function that when selected, automatically
reduces the RVSS output voltage at steady state operation to the level only required to
meet the torque requirement of the load. This function is not available with bypass
style panels.
L. Three user programmable inputs with the following functions:
1. Energy Savings Mode, Slow Speed or Reset.
2. Dual Adjust, Reversing or Reset.
3. External Fault
M. The Soft Starter shall have one (1) dedicated thermistor input that is programmable for
PTC or NTC type thermistors.
N. The RVSS shall provide an adjustable 4-20ma analog output signal that is proportional
the motor current.
O. Multiple configurations and all parameters can be save to a computer file via a PC
communication kit.
2.05 OPERATOR CONTROLS
A. All ASTAT XTs will include pull a-part terminals for its control connections.
B. The RVSS panel shall have a control terminal strip for field I/O wiring.
C. The RVSS will include four (4) customer safety interlocks.
D. The RVSS will include an Auto Run Input.
E. The RVSS will include fault relay outputs.
F. The RVSS will include auxiliary run relay outputs.
G. The RVSS will include three (3) programmable logic inputs.
H. The RVSS will include one (1) scalable analog output.
I. All RVSS panel door mounted operators will be 22mm industrial rated devices.
1. Operator controls and indicating devices shall include: RVSS Keypad, Fault Light.
2.06 KEYPAD INTERFACE AND STATUS LEDS
A. The Soft Starter shall be supplied with a backlit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD) Multi-Function Keypad. The Keypad shall be capable of programming and
monitoring the Soft starter.
B. Keypad shall be divided into 3 functional groups:
1. Graphical display shall two lines of 16 alphanumeric characters each with full text
programming. Codes are not accepted.
2. LED’s – To display soft starter functions.
3. Navigation keys to program soft starter, display operational data, and faults.
C. The Soft Starter shall have Indication LED’s as follows:
1. Green – The soft starter is “On”.
2. Red – The soft starter is in “Stop” mode.
3. Yellow – The soft starter is in “Start” mode.
4. Yellow – The soft starter is in “Save” or “Slow Speed” mode.
5. Green – The soft starter is in “Run” mode.
6. Green – The soft starter is in “Reverse” mode.
7. Yellow – The soft starter is in “Soft Stop” mode.
8. Red – The soft starter is in “Fault” mode.
D. The Soft Starter shall display operating data, fault information, and programming
parameters in English with other languages - Spanish, German and Italian available by
parameter setting.
E. The keypad shall display the last 10 faults and provides detailed information on soft
starter operating conditions at the time of fault occurrence.
2.06 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS
A. The RVSS shall include Modbus RTU communication protocol.
9.23.3 Part 3: Execution

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. The contractor shall perform the following procedures:
1. Examine installation area to assure there is enough clearance to install panel.
2. Check mounting surfaces for uniformity and level surface.
3. Inspect for any physical damage
4. Verify that equipment is ready to install.
5. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.
6. Verify that required utilities and control interfaces are available, in proper location
and ready for use.
7. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
3.02 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall perform the installation.
1. The contractor shall install RVSS in accordance with standards listed in Article
1.08 of this specification.
2. Install per manufacturer's instructions outlined in installation, operation and
maintenance documentation.
3. Install required safety labels.
3.03 START-UP AND TRAINING
A. Manufacturer shall have Factory Trained personnel at Field locations convenient to the
installation site, available for Trouble-Shooting and/or Start-Up assistance.
B. RVSS operational and maintenance Training and/or Start-Up Service shall be
provided.
1. Product installation must be complete prior to Start-Up Services being provided.
C. Personnel performing Start-Up must check / adjust RVSS settings for proper operation.
END OF SECTION

9.24 26 2923 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers:

A. Variable frequency controllers.
A. Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
B. Fuses.
Section 21 Part 5.
B. The VFD shall conform to the requirements of IEC 146.
C. The VFD shall comply with EMC requirements such as EC directive 89/336/EEC.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
and weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate
legends.
C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
stipulated by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
project.
1. Extra Air Filters: Two of each type.
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with
service facilities within 160 km (100 miles) of Project.
C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
and traffic.
B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs
provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components,
enclosure, and finish.

2.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the
indicated loads.
1. Employ microprocessor-based inverter logic isolated from power circuits.
2. Employ pulse-width-modulated inverter system.
3. Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output.
4. Design to attempt five automatic restarts following fault condition before locking
out and requiring manual restart.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.03 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
A. Rated Input Voltage: 415 volts, three phase, 50 Hertz.
B. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 415 volts, three phase, 50 Hertz.
C. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of
operating speed and load.
D. Operating Ambient: 0 degrees C to 53 degrees C.
E. Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent.
F. Current Limit Adjustment: 60 to 110 percent of rated.
G. Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 to 30 seconds.
H. Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 to 30 seconds.
I. Input Signal: 4 to 20 mA DC.
J.Capable of at least 20 starts per hour at 100 % full
load torque
2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency,
and output current.
B. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for overcurrent, overvoltage, ground fault,
overtemperature, and input power ON.
C. Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control.
D. Include undervoltage release.
E. Control Power Source: Separate circuit.
F. Door Interlocks: Furnish mechanical means to prevent opening of equipment with
power connected, or to disconnect power if door is opened; include means for
defeating interlock by qualified persons.
G. Safety Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both
manual and automatic mode.
H. Control Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic
mode.
I. Manual Bypass: Furnish contactor, motor running overload protection, and short circuit
protection for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor. Include isolation
switch to allow maintenance of inverter during bypass operation.
J.Emergency Stop: Use dynamic brakes for emergency stop function.
K. Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of
each controller.
L. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
A. Shop inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller.
B. Make completed controller available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify Owner at least 7 days before inspection is allowed.
C. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify
Owner at least 7 days before inspections and tests are scheduled.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the
service conditions required by the manufacturer.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
B. Provide fuses in fusible switches; refer to Section 26 2813 for product requirements.
C. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed
motor characteristics.
D. Identify variable frequency controllers in accordance with Section 26 0553.
E. Variable frequency controllers shall be housed in a separate cubicle compartment of
the relevant motor control centre.
A. Provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start
controllers.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load
system. Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads.
A. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
B. Provide service and maintenance of controllers for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION

9.25 Central Battery System:

A. Remote trouble alarm indicator.
Section 21 Part 12
B. BS 7671 Requirements for electrical Installations
C. BS EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).
D. ISO 9000 Quality management and assurance standards
A. Perform Work in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 12

2.01 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
A. Battery chargers:
1. battery chargers shall be installed in purpose-made metallic
enclosures with an index of protection IP 31 in accordance with BS
EN 60529 suitable for wall or floor mounting, depending on size
2. battery charger enclosures may house the system batteries
providing the design of the enclosure ensures safe operation with
the batteries specified. This arrangement should normally be
restricted to smaller systems e.g. for circuit breaker tripping supplies
for power supply to emergency lighting system, central battery units
shall be wall or floor mounted as required, conforming to BS 4533
Section 102.22, and be of robust, high quality construction.
Enclosures shall be metal, with hinged lockable doors and with
suitable ventilation provided
3. battery charger shall operate from a 415 V, three phase or 240 V, 50
Hz single phase supply, unless otherwise specified
4. battery charger shall be rated to supply trickle charge and any
standing loading plus any additional recharging load that may be
imposed
5. battery charger shall use an uncontrolled bridge as the input stage to
minimise harmonic generation on the supply system. The
characteristics of each charger shall match the requirements of the
specific batteries selected and the duty cycle
6. battery charger shall be suitable for fully automatic charging of the
appropriate battery and shall be provided with:
(i) Mains „ON‟ lamp
(ii) Main ON/OFF switch

(iii) Charge Ammeter Discharge Ammeter
(iv) Battery voltmeter
(v) Test switch facilities
(vi) Contactor/relays to BS 5266 Part 3
(vii) fault protection
(viii) output current limitation
(ix) lamp indication for appropriate faults e.g. charger fail, low volts
etc., with lamp colours in accordance with BS EN 60073
(x) common fault contact for use with a central alarm system or BMS.
7. units shall be provided with composite output distribution boards
of the sizes and types indicated on the Project Drawings
8. units shall be installed complete with all necessary fixings,
maintenance equipment and instructions.
B. Batteries:
1. batteries shall be suitable for the discharge duty they will be

required to perform. Batteries shall be of the lead acid, sealed re-
combination type or Nickel Cadmium depending on the duty
requirements and as indicated on the Project Drawings. The
contractor shall submit calculation to justify the Ampere-Hour
capacity of the batteries for approval to the Engineer
2. battery system shall be provided with a suitably rated switch disconnector
3. Batteries shall be mounted on suitable tiered galvanized steel
shelving with moulded plastic trays to contain any leakage from
the battery cells and, to allow safe easy access for maintenance
4. battery terminals shall be coated with the battery manufacturer‟s
approved grease, and shrouded if not enclosed.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The manufacturer‟s recommendation/instructions shall always be followed.
B. Insulated tools shall be used.
C. Personnel erecting battery banks shall remove metallic objects from their person
i.e. watches, rings etc.
D. Eye and hand protection shall be provided.
E. Batteries shall not be left on site for prolonged periods without being trickle charged to
maintain their condition i.e. if delivery is some weeks before commissioning of the
charger.
F. Due care shall be observed when handling acidic substances

Verify operation of each unit by simulating outage.
A. Demonstrate normal operation of unit.
END OF SECTION
9.26 26 3513 Low Voltage Power Factor Correction:

A. Capacitors for low voltage (600 V or less) power factor correction applications:
Fixed capacitors.
B. Automatic capacitor systems.
A. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.
E. Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of equipment and associated
protective devices specified in this section.
F. Motor-Control Centers.
G. Fuses.
H. Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
A. IEEE 18 - Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors; Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers; 2012.
Section 21 Part 16
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
capacitor assemblies, including ratings, configurations, materials, fabrication details,
dimensions, finishes, weights, and service condition requirements.
C. Fixed Capacitors for Individual Motor Applications: Include motor manufacturer's capacitor
sizing recommendations.
D. Automatic Capacitor Systems: Include quantity and size of switched steps and information
on control and monitoring functions.
E. Shop Drawings: Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, reactive power
(kVAR), and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, and installed features and
accessories.
F. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of capacitor assemblies and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
G. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
H. Fixed Capacitors for Individual Motor Applications: For each application, include wiring
diagrams showing proposed capacitor connection method in relation to motor starter
contacts and overload devices.
I. Capacitors with Inductors/Reactors (Harmonic Filters): Include frequency tuning
information.
J. Motor Overload Protective Device Calculations: Where capacitors are to be connected on
the load side of motor overload protective devices (when permitted), indicate overload
device ratings adjusted for reduced current.
K. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in IEEE 18 as
design and routine tests.
L. Specimen Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty.
M. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
N. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.
O. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
P. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed ratings and locations of capacitors,
and final equipment settings.
Q. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include information on equipment programming and
setup, replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
R. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in
S. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
T. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
U. Capacitor Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.
V. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience with power factor correction systems of similar
size, type, and complexity.
E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Capacitor Assemblies: Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair
or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.
C. Capacitor Cells: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or
replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.
9.26.2 Part 2 products

2.01 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
A. Provide complete power factor correction capacitor system consisting of all required
equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as
necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.
a. Total System Power Factor: as indicated in calculations.
b. Power Factor Correction Capacitors Required: as indicated in calculations.
c. Voltage: As indicated on drawings.
d. Capacity: Size per motor manufacturer's recommendations.
e. Capacitor Assemblies: Manufactured units consisting of capacitor cells,
enclosures, and associated components specifically designed for three phase
power factor correction applications. Comply with IEEE 18.
C. Provide capacitors and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings
under the service conditions at the installed location.
D. Capacitor Cells:
a. Construction: Self-healing, metalized polypropylene film; dry (resin-encapsulated)
or liquid-impregnated with non-PCB, non-toxic, biodegradable dielectric fluid;
provide three phase cells (configurations utilizing factory-wired single phase
capacitor cells are not accetpable).
b. Losses: Not greater than 0.5 W per kVAR.
c. Furnished with pressure-actuated interrupter to prevent cell rupture.
d. Rated Life: 20 years.
e. Discharge Resistors: Provide discharge resistors as required to reduce residual
voltage to less than 50 V within one minute after capacitor is disconnected from
source of supply in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 16
f. Fuses: Provide fusing for all three phases; provide replaceable fuses
(inaccessible fuse links are not acceptable).
E. Contactors: Suitable for high inrush currents associated with capacitor switching.
F. Enclosures:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 12.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.
c. Hinged Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.
d. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
G. Short Circuit Current Rating: Provide capacitor assemblies with listed short circuit current
rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the
drawings.
H. Capacitors With Inductors/Reactors (Harmonic Filters):
a. Furnished with iron core inductors/reactors and harmonic rated capacitor cells,
specifically designed for power factor correction application in harmonic
environments.
b. Filter Tuning: Tuned below 5th harmonic unless otherwise indicated.
c. Furnish inductors/reactors with integral thermistor.
I. Fixed Capacitors:
a. Description: Capacitor assemblies that supply a fixed amount of reactive power
(kVAR).
b. Capacitors for Installation Within Motor Control Centers (MCCs): Suitable for
installation in equipment to be provided in accordance with Section 26 2419.
J. Alarm Indications:
a. Blown fuse, visible from exterior of enclosure.
K. Automatic Capacitor Systems:
L. Description: Capacitor assemblies that supply a variable amount of reactive power (kVAR)
in discrete kVAR steps by switching capacitor cell groups using contactors and
microprocessor-based controllers as required to maintain selected power factor.
M. Provide current transformers (CTs) with appropriate ratio as required for system
measurement.
N. Control Functions:
a. Manual and automatic modes.
b. Adjustable target power factor with range of 0.80 inductive to unity.
c. Adjustable step time delay.
d. Status Indications:
e. Power factor.
f. Voltage.
g. Current.
h. Real power (kW).
i. Reactive power (kVAR).
j. Apparent power (kVA).
k. Frequency.
l. Number of energized steps.
m. Total harmonic distortion.
O. Alarm Indications:
a. Blown fuse, visible from exterior of enclosure.
b. Power factor over compensation.
c. Power factor under compensation.
d. Overcurrent.
e. Undervoltage.
f. Overvoltage.
g. Capacitor overload.
h. Overtemperature.
i. Loss of capacitance.
j. High total harmonic distortion (THD).
P. Features:
a. Integral circuit breaker or disconnect where indicated or required.
b. Integral surge protective device.
a. Remote monitoring capability via PC.
Q. Product(s):
R. Fixed Capacitors:
S. Fixed Capacitors With Inductors/Reactors (Harmonic Filters):
T. Automatic Capacitor Systems:
U. Automatic Capacitor Systems With Inductors/Reactors (Harmonic Filters):
A. Factory test capacitors according to IEEE 18, including the following production tests on
each unit:
B. Short-time overvoltage test.
C. Capacitance test.
D. Leak test.
E. Loss determination test.
F. Discharge resistor test.
G. Fuse capability test for internally fused capacitors.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that the ratings of capacitors are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive capacitors.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install capacitors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.
C. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
D. Install capacitor assemblies plumb and level.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted capacitor assemblies on properly sized 3
inch (80 mm) high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
F. Capacitor Connections at Individual Motors:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, connect capacitors to only be in service when motor
is energized. Provide additional contactors as required.
b. Unless otherwise indicated or required, connect capacitors on the load side of
motor starter contacts and on the line side of motor overload protective devices.
G. Exceptions where capacitor is to be connected on line side of motor starter/controller
include, but are not limited to:
H. Reversing motors.
a. Multi-speed motors.
b. Plugging.
c. Jogging/Inching.
d. Soft-start starters.
e. Variable frequency drives.
I. If the circuit is not accessible between the starter contacts and motor overload protective
devices, capacitor may be connected on the load side of overloads provided that overloads
are resized for reduced current.
J. Submit wiring diagrams of proposed capacitor connections for approval prior to starting
work.
K. Automatic Capacitor Systems: Locate current transformers (CTs) on line side of capacitor
connection so that measurements include power factor correction.
L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
M. Where not furnished by manufacturer, provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 as
indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
N. Remove capacitor fuses prior to bumping motors for testing purposes to prevent blowing
fuses caused by energizing capacitor that has not yet discharged.
O. Identify capacitors in accordance with Section 26 0553.
A. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field
reports with submittals.
B. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.
Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective capacitors or associated
components.
E. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.
3.04 CLEANING
A. See Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of automatic capacitor systems to Owner,
and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
automatic capacitor systems.
D. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
E. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
F. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
G. Location: At project site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed capacitors from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
9.27 26 3600 Transfer Switches:

A. Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated
accessories:
B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.

A. IEC 62310: Transfer Systems Standards
Section 21.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
each product, including ratings, configurations, dimensions, finishes, weights, service
condition requirements, and installed features.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of
system components, required clearances, and field connection locations. Include
system interconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
C. Specimen Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty.
D Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.
E. Manufacturer's certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Source quality control test reports.
G. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.
H. Maintenance contracts.
A. Comply with the following:
1. QRSS and QCS 2014 Section 21.
2. IEC 62310
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store transfer switches in accordance with
B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
and traffic.
C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to
transfer switch components, enclosure, and finish.
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and
after installation.

2.01 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (LOW VOLTAGE A.T.S.)
A. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit,
boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated
B. Automatic Transfer Switches (ATS) of 400A-800A-1.000A.
1. Transition Configuration: Open-transition (with neutral position).
2. Voltage: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Ampere Rating: As indicated on the drawings.
4. Neutral Configuration: Switched neutral.
C. Mechanically Held Transfer Switch
1. The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
electrical operator shall be a single-solenoid mechanism, momentarily energized.
Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices will not be
accepted. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only one of two
possible positions, normal or emergency.
2. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages so
that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and temperature rise at
the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life.
3. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and
above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand current
capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts.
4. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without
disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power
conductors. A manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance
purposes. The handle shall permit the operator to manually stop the contacts at
any point throughout their entire travel to inspect and service the contacts when
required.
5. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or
parts thereof which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or
transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable.
6. Where neutral conductors must be switched, the ATS shall be provided with fully-
rated neutral transfer contacts.
7. Where neutral conductors are to be solidly connected, a neutral terminal plate
with fully-rated copper pressure connectors shall be provided
D. Fabrication: Enclosure
1. Provide strip heater with thermostat for Type 3R enclosure requirements.
2. Controller shall be flush-mounted display with LED indicators for switch position
and source acceptability. It shall also include test and time delay bypass switches
E. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed
for power transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.
F. Load Classification: Classified for total system load (any combination of motor,
electric discharge lamp, resistive, and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads
not exceeding 30 percent of the continuous current rating) unless otherwise indicated
or required.
G. Switching Methods:
1. Open Transition:
a. Provide break-before-make transfer without a neutral position that is not
connected to either source, and with interlocks to prevent simultaneous
connection of the load to both sources.
2. Neutral Switching: Use simultaneously switched neutral (break-before-make)
method. Overlapping neutral method is not acceptable.
3. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the
load is to be transferred.
H. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at
indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
I. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Withstand and Closing Rating: Provide transfer switches, when protected by the
supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed withstand
and closing rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location
as indicated on the drawings.
J.Automatic Transfer Switches:
1. Description: Transfer switches with automatically initiated transfer between
sources; electrically operated and mechanically held.
2. Control Functions:
a. Automatic mode.
b. Test Mode: Simulates failure of primary/normal source.
c. Voltage and Frequency Sensing:
1) Undervoltage sensing for each phase of primary/normal source;
adjustable dropout/pickup settings.
2) Undervoltage sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
3) Underfrequency sensing for alternate/emergency source; adjustable
dropout/pickup settings.
d. Outputs:
1) Contacts for engine start/shutdown (except where direct generator
communication interface is provided).
2) Auxiliary contacts; one set(s) for each switch position.
e. Adjustable Time Delays:
1) Engine generator start time delay; delays engine start signal to override
momentary primary/normal source failures.
2) Transfer to alternate/emergency source time delay.
3) Retransfer to primary/normal source time delay.
4) Engine generator cooldown time delay; delays engine shutdown
following retransfer to primary/normal source to permit generator to run
unloaded for cooldown period.
f. In-Phase Monitor (Open Transition Transfer Switches): Monitors phase
angle difference between sources for initiating in-phase transfer.
g. Engine Exerciser: Provides programmable scheduled exercising of engine
generator selectable with or without transfer to load; provides memory
retention during power outage.
3. Status Indications:
a. Connected to alternate/emergency source.
b. Connected to primary/normal source.
c. Alternate/emergency source available.
d. Primary/normal source available.
4. Automatic Sequence of Operations:
a. Upon failure of primary/normal source for a programmable time period
(engine generator start time delay), initiate starting of engine generator
where applicable.
b. When alternate/emergency source is available, transfer load to
alternate/emergency source after programmable time delay.
c. When primary/normal source has been restored, retransfer to
primary/normal source after a programmable time delay. Bypass time delay
if alternate/emergency source fails and primary/normal source is available.
d. Where applicable, initiate shutdown of engine generator after programmable
engine cooldown time delay.
K. Networking
1. Built-in, two-wire RS-485 serial and 10/100 base-T Ethernet.
2. Open protocols - Modbus RTU (Serial) and Modbus TCP.
3. Supports simultaneous communications on both.
4. Serial and 10/100 base-T ports.
5. Easily interfaces with third-party building management systems.
6. USB programming port accessible with ATS enclosure door closed.
L. Monitoring
1. Plug-&-Play, PC-based monitoring is available using
2. GE Multilin’s EnerVista™ Viewpoint Monitoring software.
3. Viewpoint Monitoring is a simple-to-use and full-featured monitoring and data
recording software package.
4. EnerVista™ Viewpoint Monitoring provides a complete HMI package with the
following functionality.
5. Plug & Play Device Monitoring
6. System Single-Line Monitoring & Control
7. Annunciator Alarm Screens with e-mail notifications
8. Trending Reports
9. Automatic Event and Waveform Retrieval

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the
indicated requirements.
B. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches.
E. Visual Inspection
1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2. Verify installation per drawings.
3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4. Verify neutral (if used) and ground conductors are properly sized and configured.
5. Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly.
F. Mechanical Inspection
1. Check all control wiring connections for tightness.
2. Check all power wiring connections for tightness.
3. Check all terminal screws, nuts and spade lugs for tightness.
G. Electrical Inspection
1. Check all fuses for continuity.
2. Confirm input voltage and phase rotation is correct.
3. Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance
access.
C. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
D. Install transfer switches plumb and level.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transfer switches on properly sized
80 mm high concrete pad constructed in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 5.
Concrete (Architecture Specs).
F. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26
0553.
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system
complies with contract documents.
3.04 CLEANING
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed transfer switches from subsequent construction operations.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide to Owner a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, a separate maintenance
contract for the service and maintenance of transfer switches for two years from date
of Substantial Completion; Include a complete description of preventive maintenance,
systematic examination, adjustment, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
B. Conduct site visit at least once every three months to perform inspection, testing, and
preventive maintenance. Submit report to Owner indicating maintenance performed
along with evaluations and recommendations.
C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Provide on-site response within 4 hours of notification.
2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra
cost to Owner.
3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly
basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include
hourly rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.
END OF SECTION
9.28 26 4113 Lightning Protection System:

A. Air terminals.
B. Down conductors and grounding & bonding for lightning protection.
A. Grounding and Bounding.
B. Surge Protection Devices.
A. BS 7430: Code of practice for earthing.
B. IEEE Std 80 – 2000: IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
C. BS EN IEC 62305-1:2011 - Protection against lightning. Part 1 - General principles.
D. BS EN IEC 62305-2:2012 - Protection against lightning. Part 2 - Risk management.
E. BS EN IEC 62305-3:2011 - Protection against lightning. Part 3 - Physical damage to
structures and life hazard.
F. BS EN IEC 62305-4:2011 Protection against lightning. Part 4 - Electrical and
electronic systems within structures.
G. Shall be in compliance with standards listed in QRSS and/or specified in QCS 2014
Section 21 Part 21.

A. Coordination with Concrete Work: Coordinate the embedding of lightning protection
components in concrete.
B. Coordination with Roofing Work: Ensure adequate attachment of strike terminals and
conductors without damage to roofing.
C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least at least two weeks prior to
commencement of any work affected by lightning protection system requirements to
discuss prerequisites and coordination required by other installers; require attendance
by representatives of installers whose work will be affected.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes,
and bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal,
electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and termination details.
1. Where conductors or grounds are to be embedded or concealed in other
construction, submit shop drawings at least 30 days prior to start of construction.
2. If concrete-encased grounds are to be used and are not shown in the contract
documents, provide sufficient data to determine concrete encasement
dimensions and location.
3. Include data on actual ground resistance determined by field measurement.
4. Include engineering analysis of equalization of potential to metal bodies within
the structure.
5. Include access panels, test holes, and disconnecting means for maintenance.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions and materials of each component, indication of
testing agency listing, and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
E. Installation Certification: Submit copy of certification agency's approval.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide recommended inspection and testing plan,
including recommended intervals, to achieve periodic maintenance as recommended
in NFPA 780; provide customized plan reflecting actual installation configuration with
specific installed components identified.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding
electrodes, bonding connections, and routing of system conductors in project record
documents.
A. Maintain one copy of each referenced system design standard on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment
with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Designer Qualifications: Person or entity, employed by installer, who specializes in
lightning protection system design with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection system design
with minimum three years documented experience.
E. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: Firm capable of and experienced
in grounding and bonding testing with documented experience and minimum of three
project references.
F. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

2.01 AIR TERMINAL MESH CONDUCTOR
A. High conductivity,
B. 25x3mm tinned copper tape PVC sheathed
C. Forming mesh indicated at drawings
D. Conductor holder every 2 metres
2.02 AIR TERMINAL ROD
A. High conductivity.
B. Tinned copper.
C. 800mm length.
D. 15 mm diameter.
2.03 DOWN CONDUCTOR
A. High conductivity,
B. 25x3mm tinned copper tape PVC sheathed.
C. Termination joints for connection with air terminal and earth.
D. Welded to reinforcement steel at their upper and lower extremities.
2.04 TEST LINKS
A. Two-bolt split-coupling, copper-alloy, made to join two ends of down conductor
specified. Plate indicating position and number of electrodes is to be fitted above each
test link.

3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination network, down
conductors, earthing and bonding to prevent side flashing.
B. All the service entries to the structure i.e. power line, telecom line, water line etc. shall be
protected by installing current surge protectors (either 25KA or 18.75KA or 12.5 KA rating),
depending on the Lightning Protection Level (LPL) to be used to bring down the risk (R)
below the tolerable risk level ( RT ).
C. All the fixing clips for the copper tape shall be metallic (complying with Class ‘H’ of the
electrical testing based on BS EN 50164) and shall be fixed at an interval of 1000 mm.
D. A minimum of 3000 mm solid copper electrode shall be provided with each down conductor
separately. However, the Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall submit the
calculation for deciding the number of earth rods in each earth pit.
E. The complete Lightning Protection System measured at any point, should not exceed 10
Ωs. With the test clamp disconnected, the resistance of each individual earth should be no
more than ten times the number of down conductors in the complete system.
F. The IT earth should in no case exceed 1 Ω.
G. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer also has to ensure, based on BS EN 62305 – IV,
that suitable co-ordinated over-voltage surge protection devices with an extra low let –
through voltage are used for protecting any terminal devices i.e. DBs feeding critical
services or even the local critical electrical gadget.
H. All metallic parts protruding outside the extended air termination network (e.g. balcony
hand rails etc) shall be connected to the air termination using suitable clamps (material
complying to BSEN 50164) at every floor wherever the horizontal conductor is applied.
I. The equipments on the roof shall be protected using vertical air terminals of suitable height
so that it provides the zone of protection. This air terminal shall be installed at a suitable
separation distance so that the partial lightning current doesn’t flow through the equipment.
The cable from the equipment shall be protected using an over – voltage protector. The
equipment shall not be bonded to the air termination network. Specialist Lightning
Protection Installer shall give the calculation of the suitable separation distance.
J. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall install suitable surge protectors at local power
distribution boards feeding vulnerable equipment (IT, LC, etc.), in order to protect these
against transients generated downstream of the protectors. (These transients may be the
result of inductive coupling or electrical switching.)
K. Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:
 BS EN 62305:2006 – Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within structures
(Part 4).
 BS 2914:1972 ‘Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power circuits’.
 IEEE C62.41-1991 ‘Recommended practice on surge voltages in low voltage AC
power circuits’.
L. Protectors for a given Location Category shall be rated for a High Exposure Level (as
defined by BS EN 62305 - 4), unless contrary information is available. The protector must
not interfere with or restrict the system’s normal operation. It should not:
 corrupt the normal mains power supply
 break or shutdown the power supply during operation
 have an excessive earth leakage current.
M. The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA (8/20:s
waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth and neutral to
earth). The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility
levels. Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600
volts, for protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in
accordance with BS EN 62305 Part - 4 (6kV 1.2/50 μs open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20μs
short circuit current).This peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all
combinations of conductors
 phase to neutral
 phase to earth
 neutral to earth.
N. Mains protectors (installed in shunt/parallel) should have continuous indication of its
protection status and the presence of power. Status indication should clearly show per
phase:
 full protection present
 reduced protection - replacement required
 no protection - failure of protector.
O. Remove indication of status (including loss of phase/supply) should also be possible via a
volt free contact. The status indication should warn of protection failure between all
combinations of conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous
short circuit between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time.) This should
include early warning of excessive neutral to earth voltages. The protector shall be supplied
with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with the installation practice
detailed by the protector manufacturer.
P. Specialist Lightning Protection Installer shall also install transient overvoltage protectors on
all data communication/signal/telephone lines in order to protect equipment connected to
the line, against transient overvoltages. (Where data lines link equipment in separate
buildings, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at both ends of the line in
order to protect both pieces of equipment.) Protectors shall be tested in accordance with
the requirements of:
 BS EN 62305:2006 – Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within structures
(Part 4).
 CCITT IX K17 ‘Tests on power fed repeaters using solid-state devices in order to
check the arrangements for protection from external interference’.
Q. Protectors shall be rated for Location Category - High Exposure Level (as defined by BS
EN 62305 – 4: 2006), unless contrary information dictates a lower Exposure Level. The
protector must not impair the system’s normal operation. It should not:
 suppress the system’s normal signal voltage
 restrict the system’s bandwidth or signal frequency
 introduce excessive in-line resistance
 cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (high frequency systems only).
R. The protector will have a low transient let-through voltage for tests conducted in
accordance with BS en 62305 -4: 2006 (5kV 10/700μs test). This let-through performance
will be provided for all combinations of conductors:
 • signal line to signal line
 • signal line to screen/earth.
S. The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA. The protector shall be
supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must comply with the
installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
T. The protector manufacturer shall allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers of
protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.
U. The Water and other metallic systems shall all be bonded directly to the equipotential bar
located inside but close to the outer wall near the ground floor or basement level. The
power cable shall be bonded to the equipotential bonding bar via a suitable SPD (surge
protection devices).
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing earthing systems by the earth megger test.
B. The resistance of any one point in the lightning protection earth continuity
system to the main earth electrode shall not exceed 10 ohms, without
taking account of any bonding to other services.
END OF SECTION

9.29 26 4300 Surge Protective Devices:

A. Surge protective devices for service entrance locations.
B. Surge protective devices for distribution locations.
C. Surge protective devices for branch panelboard locations.
A. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles with integral surge protection.
B. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards.
C. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.
D. Motor Control Centers.
E. Low-Voltage Busways.
F. Wiring Devices: Receptacles with integral surge protection.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. EMI/RFI: Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference.
B. SPD: Surge Protective Device.
A. BS EN 62305 - Standard for Lightning Protection
Section 21.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed component information, voltage, surge current ratings,
repetitive surge current capacity, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection
modes, maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV), nominal discharge current
(I-n), short circuit current rating (SCCR), connection means including any required
external overcurrent protection, enclosure ratings, outline and support point
dimensions, weight, service condition requirements, and installed features.
B. Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections
with wire and circuit breaker/fuse sizes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations
E. Previous approval on Q-Rail projects or other government authorities like Kahramaa,
F. List of projects in GCC region wherein the proposed material had been used.
G. Certification of the supplier that they a certified dealer of the manufacturer.
H. Material manufacturer and/or supplier warranty and estimated lifetime durability
I. Manufacturer and Supplier ISO Certificates, Company profile and company registration
for supplier.
J.Compliance statement with the QCS 2014/project specification with justification on non-
complied items.


2.01 ALL SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 50 Hz service,
listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated; system voltage as indicated on the drawings.
B. Equipment Containing Factory-installed, Internally Mounted SPDs: Listed and labeled
as a complete assembly including SPD.
2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE LOCATIONS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally mounted or factory-
installed, internally mounted SPDs.
B. Provide SPDs utilizing field-replaceable modular or non-modular protection circuits.
C. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.
D. Diagnostics:
1. Protection Status Monitoring: Provide indicator lights to report the protection for
each phase.
2. Alarm Notification: Provide indicator light and audible alarm to report alarm
condition. Provide button to manually silence audible alarm.
2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR DISTRIBUTION LOCATIONS
D. Diagnostics:
1. Protection Status Monitoring: Provide indicator lights to report the protection
status for each phase.
2.04 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR BRANCH PANELBOARD LOCATIONS
D. Diagnostics:
1. Protection Status Monitoring: Provide indicator lights to report the protection
status.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that the service voltage and configuration marked on the SPD are consistent
with the service voltage and configuration at the location to be installed.
C. Verify that electrical equipment is ready to accept connection of the SPD and that
installed overcurrent device is consistent with requirements of the drawings and
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install SPD in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
instructions and QCS 2014 Section 21.
C. Provide conductors with minimum ampacity as indicated on the drawings, as required
by QCS 2014 Section 21., and not less than manufacturer's recommended minimum
conductor size.
D. Install conductors between SPD and equipment terminations as short and straight as
possible, not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length.
Breaker locations may be reasonably be rearranged in order to provide leads as short
and straight as possible. Twist conductors together to reduce inductance.
END OF SECTION

9.30 26 5013 Luminaire Schedule:

A. Specific requirements for individual luminaire types.
Types and models related shall be confirmed and validated at further stages of the project,
when architectural finishes are defined.
A. Interior Lighting: General requirements applicable to products specified in this section.
Section 21 Part 11 & 12..

2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
Lighting Fixture L32
1. Dimmensions: 1498x 298x 86 mm.
2. Voltage: 220V-240V.
3. Mounting: recessed in ceiling
4. Optic border in high quality aluminium.
5. Diffusor: PMMA.

1. Dimmensions: 1594x112x112 mm.
3. Mounting Provisions: Ceiling or Wall mounting.
4. Power; 47 W.
5. Diffusor: polycarbonate.

1. Dimmensions:1594x112x112 mm.
3. Mounting Provisions: Ceiling or Wall mounting.
4. Power; 547 W.
5. Diffusor: polyethylene methacrylate.

1. Dimmensions: 200m diameter.
2. Housing: extruded aluminium profile with polycarbonate reflector.
3. Efficience: 2400lm
5. Mounting: recessed

1. Light source: LED 36 W
2. Housing, profiled steel sheet
3. Reflector: polycarbonate
4. Correlated Color Temperature: 4100K.

1. light source: 36 Leds/44W
2. Beam angle: 50ºx10º.
3. Color Temperature: Dynamic white 2700-6500K.
5. Housing: aluminium:
6. Cover lens: tempered glass cover
7. Control: 0-10V ballast

1. Housing: polycarbonate with polycarbonate cover.
2. Optic; Fresnel lens.
3. Lamp: LED type.
4. Voltage 220-240 V, 50 Hz
5. Mounting: Recessed or surface
6. Lumenoutput in emergency: 450 lm

7. K1H4-300, suspension kit with steel wiring for K1 luminaire up to 3m length for
suspended mounting
8. without battery inside

2. Optic; Fresnel lens wide angle.
3. Lamp: LED type.
4. Voltage 220-240 V, 50 Hz
5. Mounting: surface
6. IP65

2. Optic; Fresnel lens wide angle.
3. Lamp: LED type.
4. Voltage 220-240 V, 50 Hz
5. Mounting: surface
6. IP65
8. K2H4-300, suspension kit with steel wiring for K2 luminaire up to 3m lenght

3.02 ATTACHMENTS
A. Luminaire cutsheets.
END OF SECTION

9.31 Interior Lighting:

A. Interior luminaires.
B. Emergency lighting units.
C. Exit signs.
D. Ballasts and drivers.
E. Fluorescent emergency power supply units.
F. Lamps.
G. Luminaire accessories.
A. Boxes.
C. Remote Control Switching Devices: Remote controls for lighting, including network
lighting controls, programmable relay panels, and remote control switching relays.
D. Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.
E. Exterior Lighting.
F. Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.
G. Luminaire Schedule.
A. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-
Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012).
B. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
C. BS EN 12464-1:2011 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work places
Section 21 Part 11 & 12.
E. EN 60598.2.1. Fixed Luminaries for general lighting
F . EN 60598.2.2. Recessed Luminaries
G. EN 60598.2.3. Luminaries for urban lighting
H. EN 60598.2.4. Portable Luminaries for general lighting
I. EN 60598.2.5. Projector luminaries
J.EN 60598.2.6. Luminaries with integrated transformer
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under
other sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports,
anchors, etc. required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and
associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork,
piping, equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or
other potential obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.
4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard
product of the manufacturer.
2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution
upon request.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets
including detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes,
mounting requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance,
installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature
clearly marked with all proposed features.
1. Provide electronic files of photometric data.
2. Ballasts: Include wiring diagrams and list of compatible lamp configurations.
3. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and
initial and mean lumen output.
4. Fluorescent Emergency Power Supply Unit: Include list of compatible lamp
configurations and associated lumen output.
5. Air Handling Luminaires: Include air handling performance data.
C. Samples:
1. Provide one sample(s) of each specified luminaire where indicated.
2. Provide one sample(s) of each custom luminaire.
3. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request.
4. Provide one sample(s) of each product finish illustrating color and texture upon
request.
D. Certificates for Dimming Ballasts: Manufacturer's documentation of compatibility with
dimming controls to be installed.
E. Field Quality Control Reports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information
on replacement parts.
A. Conform to requirements of QCS 2014 Section 21 Part 11 & 12.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Receive, handle, and store products according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until
ready for installation.
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and
after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Provide two year manufacturer warranty for all linear fluorescent ballasts.
B. Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units.
C. Provide ten year pro-rata warranty for batteries for self-powered exit signs.
D. Provide three year full warranty for fluorescent emergency power supply units.

2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
B. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2.02 COMPONENTS
Drivers
 Regulated power supplies that fed electrically the LEDs of the light sources.
 Electric intensity controller dimmable between 1 and 100%.
 Protection against short-circuit.
 Protection against electrical overload.
 Thermic protection.
 Constant light output function.
 Regulations to comply with: EN 61347-2-13, EN 61347-1; EN 61547; EN 60555.P2; EN
61000.3.2 2006+A1 2009 + A2 2009; EN61547; EN 55015 2006 + A1 2007 + A2 2009
and RoHS
Light sources
 LED Technology. Main characteristics:
 LED Light sources installed in luminaires.
 Compact fluorescent lamps for egress luminaires
 High efficiency (>70 lm/w)
 Excellent chromatic reproduction (Ra>80)
 Different colour temperatures used: 4000/5000K.
 Dimmable luminous flux (10-100%)
 Regulations to comply with: EN 62031:2008+a1:2013; EN62471:2008; ROHS
Chassis
 Manufactured in different materials, preferably in aluminium that favours heat
dissipation.
 Externally painted in colour of the surface on which they are located, and internally
painted in matt white, to increment the performance of the luminaires and their
luminance uniformity.
 Removable for maintenance or available to register in order to reach other facilities,
unless the contrary is specified.
 They will support the diffusers and the union between them will have a protection
degree to solid penetration IP>4X.
Diffusers and Reflectors
 Manufactured in opal acrylic materials, resistant to aging by IR and UVR.
 They adapt to the chassis that incorporate them and to the designed forms without
suffering deformations.
 Perfect fit in the joints that prevents the direct light from escaping abroad
 They will not modify the colour temperature of the light sources inside.
 They will not suffer deformations over time.
 Transmittance of opal diffusers >65%
 They will be removable when specified in the description of the luminaire for

maintenance labours.
 Manufacturer will ensure replacements for the next 20 years.
 Manufacturer shall provide the necessary special tools to remove the diffusers.
 As long as it is possible, they will be one-piece.
 Junctions between diffusers will be designed to avoid luminance spots.
 Reflectors will be made of specular aluminium, iridescence-free and anodically
protected.
Wiring and connectors
 All the luminaires will be wired from factory.
 In case that dimensions of the luminaires prevent them from being transported in one
piece (L01, L03, L21, etc.) and have to be mounted directly in factory, wirings will come
finished from factory.
 Wirings of the luminaires will not be visible and will not produce shadows in the
diffusers. They will be adhered to chassis along their entire length.
 All the connectors between luminaires and their drivers will be Wieland Gesis GST18.
Two red poles certified according to IEC 61535.
 All the connectors of the power supply to the drivers’ boxes will be Wieland Gesis
GST18. Three black poles certified according to IEC 61535.
 Wiring shall comply with UNE 211002 standards.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: Steel tubing, minimum 12.5mm size, factory
finished to match luminaire or field-painted as directed.
B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel, minimum 5mm size,
field-painted as directed.
C. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in plaster ceilings.
D. Tube Guards for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Provide clear virgin polycarbonate
sleeves with endcaps where indicated.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting
heights and are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with QCS
2014 Section 21 Part 11 & 12.
C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to luminaires.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03 INSTALLATION
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
D. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:
1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.
2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling
support system is certified as suitable to do so.
3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or
framing members or to building structure.
4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.
5. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at
four corners.
6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s),
minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire
to building structure.
7. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for
additional requirements.
E. Recessed Luminaires:
1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.
2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and
combustible materials according to listing.
3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and
firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
F. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of
luminaire.
2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and
accessories as required for specified mounting height.
3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet
in length, with no more than 1.2 m (4 feet) between supports.
4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.
G. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are
to center of luminaire.
H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
J. Air Handling Luminaires: Interface with air handling accessories furnished and
installed under Section 23 3600.
K. Emergency Lighting Units:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from circuit
indicated. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.
2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.
L. Exit Signs:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit
feeding normal lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors,
or other lighting controls.
2. Install lock-on device on branch circuit breaker serving units.
M. Identify luminaires connected to emergency power system in accordance with Section
26 0553.
N. Install lamps in each luminaire.
O. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's

recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail
prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency
power supply units to verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.
E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products.
Repair or replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Architect.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or
as directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum
illumination of egress path as required or as directed by Architect or authority having
jurisdiction.
C. Air-Handling Luminaires with Air Control Blades or Heat Removal Dampers: Adjust as
indicated or as required for proper airflow as directed by Architect.
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION

9.32 14 2010 Passenger and Service Elevators:

A. Complete elevator systems.
B. Elevator maintenance.
A. QCS 2014 Section 5. Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Includes elevator machine
foundation.
B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Masonry hoistway enclosure; building-in and grouting
hoistway door frames. (See Architecture Specs)
C. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Fire rated access doors into hoistway.
(See Architecture Specs)
D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum shaft walls. (See Architecture
Specs)
E. Section 21 1300 - Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads in hoistway. (See
Architecture Specs)
F. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment: Pit drain.
G. Section 23 3423 - HVAC Power Ventilators: Mechanical fan for pressurization of
elevator hoistway.
H. Section 26 0534 - Conduit:
1. Empty conduit to elevator equipment devices remote from elevator machine
room or hoistway.
2. Empty conduit from controller cabinet in machine room to remote group
supervisory panel in lobby.
I. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring:
1. Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
2. Electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room.
3. Emergency power transfer cabinet.
4. Electrical power for elevator installation and testing.
5. Electrical disconnecting device to elevator equipment prior to activation of
sprinkler system.
6. Electrical service for machine room.
7. Lighting in elevator pit.
8. Empty conduit for telephone service to machine room.
J.Section 28 3100 - Fire Detection and Alarm:
1. Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices.
2. Fire alarm signal lines to elevator controller cabinet.
A. QCS - Qatar Construction Standard 2014 Section 21 Part 20 - Elevators/Escalators
B. QRSS - Qatar Railway Safety Standards
C. QIRP - Qatar Integrated Railway Project HVAC/MEP Design for Stations -Part 36 -
Elevators
D. GSAS - Global Sustainability Assessment System
E. BS EN 54 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems

F. BS EN 81-20 - Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Lifts for the
transport of persons and goods - Part 20: Passenger and goods passenger lifts
G. BS EN 81-28 - Remote alarms on passenger lifts and goods passenger lifts
H. BS EN 81-50 - Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Examinations
and tests - Part 50: Design rules, calculations, examinations and tests of lift
components
I. BS EN 81-58 - Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts – Examination
and tests. Part 58: Landing Doors Fire Resistance test
J.BS EN 81-70 - Accessibility to lifts for persons including persons with disabilities
K. BS EN 81-71 - Vandal resistant elevators (Applies to lifts designated Vandal
Resistant)
L. BS EN 81-72 - Firelighters lift (Applies to fire-fighting lifts only)
M. BS EN 81-73 - Behaviour of elevators in a fire
N. BS EN1011 - Pat 11: Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials.
Arc welding of ferritic steels
O. BS EN 1461 - Hot Dip Galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles –specifications
and test methods.
P. BS EN 1993 - Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures
Q. BS EN 1993 - 1-9 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures: Fatigue
R. BS EN 1999 - 1-1 Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures: General structural
rules
S. BS EN 1999 - 1-3 Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures: Structures susceptible
to fatigue.
T. BS EN 12015 - Electromagnetic compatibility. Product family standard for lifts,
escalators and moving walks. Emission
U. BS EN 12016 - Electromagnetic compatibility. Product family standard for lifts,
escalators and moving walks. Immunity
V. BS EN 13015 - Maintenance for lifts and escalators - rules for maintenance
instructions
W. BS EN 50125 - Part 2: Railway applications – Environmental conditions for equipment
– Part 2: Fixed electrical installations
X. BS EN 50126 - Part 1: Railway applications – The specification and demonstration of
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety (RAMS)
Y. BS EN 50268 - Common test methods for cables under fire conditions
Z. BS EN 60204 - Part 1: Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines General
requirements
AA.BS EN 61508 - 1 to 7 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety related systems
BB.BS EN 61511 - Part 1 Functional safety. Safety instrumented systems for the process
industry sector. Framework, definitions, system, hardware and software requirements
CC. BS EN 627 - Specification for data logging and monitoring of lifts, escalators
and passenger conveyors
DD. BS 476-6 - Fire tests for building materials and structures – Method of tests
for fire propagation for products
EE.BS 476-7 - Fire tests for building materials and structures –Method of tests to
determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of product.
FF. BS 5655 - Lifts and service lifts, all relevant parts
GG. BS 7255 - Code of practice for safe working on lifts
HH. BS 6472 - Guide to evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings
(1Hz to 80Hz).
II. BS 7010 - Safety signs and symbols
JJ. BS 7608 - Code of practice for fatigue design and assessment of steel structures.
KK.BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations - IEE wiring regulations
LL. BS 8118 - Part 1: Structural use of aluminium
MM. BS 8300 - Design of buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of
disabled people – Code of Practice
NN. BS8486-1 - Specification for examination and test of new lifts before putting
into service - On site testing for electric traction lifts
OO. BS9999 - Code of practice for fire safety in the design, management and use
of buildings
PP.BS ISO 4190 - Lift Installation Part 1: Class I, II, III and VI Lifts
QQ. BS ISO 4190 - Lift Installation Part 2: Class IV Lifts
RR. BS ISO 7010 - Safety signs and symbols
SS.BS ISO 7465 - Passenger lifts and service lifts – guide rails for lifts and counterweights
TT. BS ISO 18738 - Lifts (Elevators) – Measurement of lift ride quality
UU. ISO 22201 - Lifts (Elevators), escalators and moving walks -Programmable
electronic systems in safety related applications - Part 1: Escalators and moving walks
(PESSRAL)
VV.NFPA13 - Standard for installation of sprinkler systems
WW. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and signalling code
XX. NFPA130 - Standard for Fixed Guide and Transit and Passenger Rail Systems
YY.NFPA 70:2014 - National Electrical Code; National fire Protection Association; Most
Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
ZZ. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
AAA. Regulations for the Installation of Electrical Wiring, Electrical
BBB. Equipment and Air Conditioning Equipment, issued by KAHRAMAA.
CCC. BS EN 115-1, Safety of escalators and moving walks.
DDD. BS 5655, BS ISO 4190, BS 7255 & EN 81 for Lifts.
EEE. BS EN 115 Safety rules for the construction and installation of escalators
and passenger conveyors.
FFF. Durable interior materials; selected surface materials are to fulfil EN81-71 vandal
code requirements
GGG. Accessibility standard: to meet the requirement of EN81-70 “Accessibility to lifts for
persons including persons with disability.
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting one week prior to starting work.
1. Review schedule of installation, installation procedures and conditions, and
coordination with related work.
2. Review use of elevator for construction purposes, hours of use, scheduling of its
use, cleanliness of cab, employment of operator, maintenance of system.
B. Construction Use of Elevator: Not permitted.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on the following items:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators.
2. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components.
3. Cab and hoistway door and frame details.
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information:
1. Locations of Machine Room Equipment: Driving machines, controllers, governors
and other components.
2. Hoistway Components: Car, counterweight, sheaves, machine and sheave
beams, guide rails, buffers, ropes, and other components.
3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load
transfer to building structural framing.
4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support.
5. Loads on hoisting beams and location of trolley beams.
6. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight.
7. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections for
car light.
8. Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames.
9. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room.
10. Applicable seismic design data; certified by a licensed Professional Structural
Engineer.
11. Interface with building security system.
13. Show arrangement of equipment in machine room so rotating elements,
sheaves, and other equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced without
disturbing other components. Arrange equipment for clear passage through
access door.
C. Samples: Submit two samples, 1500 x 1500 mm in size illustrating cab floor material.
E. Maintenance Data: Include:
1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each
entry with equipment description and identifying code.
2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment.
3. Legible schematic of hydraulic piping and wiring diagrams of installed electrical
equipment and changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to
identity or markings on machine room and hoistway apparatus.

A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this
section.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors
under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design
of work of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC
360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. Perform seismic design in
accordance with applicable code.
D. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80.
E. Perform electrical work in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
F. Maintain one copy of each quality standard document on site.
G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.
H. Installer Qualifications: Employees and supervisor on payroll of elevator equipment
manufacturer.
I. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
and approved by elevator equipment manufacturer.
J.Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
1.07 WARRANTY AND LIFETIME EXPECTANCY
A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for elevator operating equipment and
devices.
B. The min. lifetime expectancy for different components shall be as follows:
1 Door operator 5:7 years
2 Door locks 15:20 years
3 Car safety gear 15:20 years
4 Lift car bodywork/finishes fabricator 25 years
5 Push button 5:7 years
6 Landing and car indicator 7:10 years
7 Lift motor 20:25 years
8 Winding unit 20:25 years
9 Controller 20:25 years
10 Car over speed governor 20 years
11 Counterweight safety gear 20 years
12 Travelling cable 20 years
13 Suspension rope 7:10 years
14 Compensation rope/ 20 years
15 Guide rail 25 years

2.01 ELEVATORS
A. Elevators type and A and B: Passenger, geared electric.
1. Minimum load of passengers elevators to 1600 kg- 21 passengers
2. Minimum load of service elevators to 2000 kg
3. Speed 2 m/s
4 Rise 10.15 m, two stops.
5 Hoistway size: 2500x2550 mm, pit size 2500x2550x1750 mm.
6. Operation and Controls: Two-stop automatic.
7. Additional Service Controls: In addition, provide:
a. Independent service.
b. Freight service, with separate riser.
c. Hospital service.
d. Limited access service.
e. Independent riser service.
f. Restricted service.
8. Shaft construction front, left, rear and right in steel and glass
9. Door jamb in stainless steel
10. Internal side wall finish: laminated glass
11. Internal rear wall finish: translucent glass
12. Internal floor finish: terrazzo
13. Pit size: 2500 x 2550x1750 mm
14. Hoistway size: 2500x2550 mm
15. Cabinet shall be provided with normal and emergency lighting and exhaust fan
2.02 CONTROLS
A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing buttons and hall lanterns.
B. Door Controls:
1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor.
2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching
terminal with doors open.
3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because of an
obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more
slowly until obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer.
4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation;
equip with photo-electric light rays.
C. Landing Buttons: Stainless steel type, one for originating UP and one for originating
DOWN calls, one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows.
D. Landing Position Indicators: Illuminating white.
E. Car Direction Indicators: Illuminating white.
F. Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems.
G. Provide "Firefighter's Operation" in accordance with applicable code.
2.03 EMERGENCY POWER
A. Arrange elevator operation to operate under emergency power when normal power
supply fails.
B. During power failure, car lighting and car alarm is to be supplied with standby power
via a car-mounted battery elevator, including solid state charger, with testing means,
installed in common metal container. Batteries are to be rechargeable with 10-year
minimum life expectancy. Car mounted elevators are to operate alarm bell and light
only
C. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to
emergency power.
D. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance one elevator at a time to a pre-selected
landing, stop car, open doors, disable operating circuits, and hold in standby
condition.
E. After the above operation has completed one complete cycle, operate one pre-
selected elevator in normal operation from the emergency power supply. If the pre-

selected car fails to operate, automatically select another car to operate.
F. Provide manual switch to override the automatic selection procedure.
2.04 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Elevators shall have 3-phase, solid state, and variable-voltage variable-frequency
(VVVF) power drive with regulated closed loop speed monitoring control system
B. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Power consumed on standby: 1.3 kw
2. Power consumed on full load up: 23.12 kw
3. Power consumed on half load down: -2.6 kw while regen function turn on
4. RPM: 567
5. 17.8 kW
6. Refer to Section 26 2717 for additional requirements.
2.05 POWER MACHINE
A. All elevators shall be of machine-room-less type and, powered by gearless machines
with permanent magnet synchronous motors mounted in the overhead inside the
elevator’s shaft.
B. Motor shall be controlled by variable frequency drive
C. Key Cabinet: Wall-mounted, lockable, keyed to building keying system, for
control/operating panel keys.
1. Provide two extra key cabinet keys.
2. Provide two extra control/operating panel keys.
3. Provide two extra card access keys.

3.01 EXAMINATION
B. Verify that hoistway, pit, and machine room are ready for work of this section.
C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts.
E. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator
components.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities.
B. Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories.
C. Install hydraulic piping between cylinder and pump unit.
D. Mount machines on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place
on structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent
lateral displacement.
E. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.
F. Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers under nuts.
Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.
G. Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates.
H. Bolt or weld brackets directly to structural steel hoistway framing.
I. Bolt brackets to inserts placed in concrete form work that will perform to four times the
rated pull-out load.
J. Field Welds: Chip and clean away oxidation and residue, wire brush; spot prime with two
coats.
K. Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.
L. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set
entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.
M. Fill hoistway door frames solid with grout in accordance with Section 04 2000.
N. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent;
prime two coats.
O. Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of
enamel.
P. Wood Surfaces not Exposed to Public View: Finish with one coat primer; one coat enamel.
Q. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other within 3 mm.
B. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no objectionable lateral
or oscillating movement or vibration.
A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion.
1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Owner and Architect.
2. Obtain permits required to perform tests.
3. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies.
4. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger
discomfort.
B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 6 mm from flush.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning.
B. Protect installed products until project completion.
C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
B. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision
and in the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.
C. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor
without prior written consent of Owner.
D. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from
Date of Substantial Completion.
E. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment.
Maintain hydraulic fluid levels. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts
produced by the manufacturer of the original equipment. Replace wire ropes when
necessary to maintain the required factor of safety.
G. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.
H. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this maintenance period.
I. Maintain an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes locally, near
the place of the Work. Have personnel available to ensure the fulfillment of this
maintenance service, without unreasonable loss of time.
END OF SECTION

9.33 14 2010 Escalators:

A. Complete escalator assemblies.
B. Balustrade railings at floor openings.
C. Escalator maintenance.
A. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring:
1. Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
2. Electrical service to main disconnect in machine pit at upper end of truss for
lights and drive motor including electrical power for elevator installation and
testing.
3. Electrical disconnecting device to equipment prior to activation of sprinkler
system.
4. Electrical service for machine pit, machine pit convenience outlets.
5. Lighting in machine pit.
A. QCS - Qatar Construction Standard 2014 Section 21 Part 20 - Elevators/Escalators
B. QIRP - Qatar Integrated Railway Project HVAC/MEP Design for Stations - Part 37
Escalators
C. QIRP - Qatar Integrated Railway Project HVAC/MEP Design for Stations - Part 38
Moving Walks
D. GSAS - Railway Design Assessment
E. BS EN 54 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
F. BS EN 115 - Part 1: Safety of escalators and moving walks Part 1: Construction and
installation
G. BS EN1011 - Pat 11: Welding. Recommendations for welding of metallic materials.
Arc welding of ferritic steels
H. BS EN 1993 - Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures
I. BS EN 1993 - 1-9 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures: Fatigue
J.BS EN 1999 - 1-1 Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures: General structural rules
K. BS EN 1999 - 1-3 Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures: Structures susceptible
to fatigue.
L. BS EN 12015 - Electromagnetic compatibility. Product family standard for lifts,
escalators and moving walks. Emission
M. BS EN 12016 - Electromagnetic compatibility. Product family standard for lifts,
escalators and moving walks. Immunity
N. BS EN 13015 - Maintenance for lifts and escalators - rules for maintenance
instructions
O. BS EN 50125 - Part 2: Railway applications – Environmental conditions for equipment
– Part 2: Fixed electrical installations
P. BS EN 50126 - Part 1: Railway applications – The specification and demonstration of
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability and Safety (RAMS)
Q. BS EN 50268 - Common test methods for cables under fire conditions
R. BS EN 60204 - Part 1: Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines General
requirements
S. BS EN 60812 - Analysis techniques for system reliability. Procedure for failure mode
and effects analysis (FMEA)
T. BS EN 61508 - 1 to 7 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable
electronic safety related systems
U. BS EN 61511 - 1 Functional safety – Safety instrumented systems for the process
industry sector
V. BS EN 627 - Specification for data logging and monitoring of lifts, escalators and
passenger conveyors
W. BS EN 1461 - Hot Dip Galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles – specifications
and test methods.
X. BS 476-6 - Fire tests for building materials and structures – Method of tests for fire
propagation for products
Y. BS 476-7 - Fire tests for building materials and structures –Method of tests to
determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of product.
Z. BS 5656 - Part 1: Safety rules for the construction and installation of escalators and
moving walks. Examination and test of new escalators before putting into service:
Specification for means of determining compliance with BS EN 115-1:2008+A1:2010
AA.BS 5656 - Part 2: Escalator and moving walks- safety rules for the construction and
installation of escalators and moving walks.
BB.BS 6472 - Guide to evaluation of human exposure to vibration in buildings (1Hz to
80Hz).
CC. BS 7010 - Safety signs and symbols
DD. BS 7608 - Code of practice for fatigue design and assessment of steel structures.
EE.BS 7671 - Requirements for electrical installations, IEE Wiring Regulations
FF. BS 7801 - Code of Practice for safe working on escalator and passenger conveyors in
use.
GG. BS 8118 - Part 1: Structural use of aluminium
HH. BS 8300 - Design of Buildings and Their Approaches to meet the Needs of Disabled
People – Code of Practice
II. BS 8800 - Occupancy Health and Safety Management Systems
JJ. BS 9999 - Code of practice for fire in the design, management and use of buildings
KK.ISO 606 - Short pitch transmission precision roller and bush chains, attachments and
associated chain sprockets
LL. BS ISO 7010 - Safety signs and symbols
MM. BS ISO 18738 - Measurement of Ride Quality: Part 2 Escalators and Moving Walks
NN. ISO 22201- Lifts (elevators), escalators and moving walks – Programmable electronic
systems in safety related applications -- Part 2: Escalators and moving walks
(PESSRAE)
OO. ISO-TS 25740-1 Safety requirements for escalators and moving walks
PP.98/37/EC. Directive 98/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22
June 1998 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to
machinery
QQ. NFPA 13 (ED. 2016) - Standard for installation of sprinkler systems

RR. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and signalling code
SS.NFPA 130:2014 - Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems
A. Coordinate construction and dimensions of floor openings and machine spaces.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators.
3. Operating panels and indicators.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Driving machine, controller, selector, governor, and other component locations.
2. Machine and supporting components.
3. Support bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed requiring load transfer to
building structural framing.
4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support.
5. Loads on support beams.
6. Clearances.
7. Location of components in machine pit.
8. Expected heat dissipation of equipment in machine pit.
9. Interface with building security system.
11. Show arrangement of equipment in machine pit so rotating elements and other
equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced without disturbing other
components. Arrange equipment for clear passage through access door.
C. Samples:
Submit all scale and full scale mock up’s, samples 2 ,5 m length in size, illustrating
finish. The units are to be manufactured and tested at the factory of origin and are to
be sample inspected by the Employer and/or Contractor at this factory in sufficient
time to incorporate any comments and achieve the requirements
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Operation Data: Include description of escalator system's method of operation
and control and special features provided. Provide technical information for
servicing operating equipment.
2. Maintenance Data: Provide parts catalogs, legible schematic wiring diagrams,
one copy of master schematic and lubrication chart.
A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable code and as supplemented in this
section.
B. Perform electrical work in accordance with QCS 2014 Section 21.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum ten years of experience.
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for thgc<ghhjg.
1. Include coverage for escalator operating equipment and devices.

2.01 ESCALATOR DESCRIPTION
A. Escalators Type 60A, 60B, 60C, 60D y 60E
Extra heavy duty escalator.
Escalator angle of inclination: 30 º
1000 mm wide step
Balaustrade height from step nosing: 1100 mm
1. Rated Speed: 0.50 m/sec.
2. Vertical Rise (nominal):
o Escalator type A: Rise=6.55 m
o Escalator type B: Rise=6.55 m
o Escalator type C: Rise=9.00 m
o Escalator type D: Rise=7.75 m
o Escalator type E: Rise=7.75 m
3. Nominal Tread Width: 1.640 mm.
4. Control: Reversible with overspeed governor.
5. Lighting: Full length in skirts.
6. Maintenance speed is to be less than or equal to 0.2 m/s
7. Units are to operate in either direction as required by the station operator
8. The number of escalator steps on the top and bottom landings of the escalators
is to be a minimum of 3 and a maximum of 4
9. Load rating shall be at least 140kgs per step
10. The units are to interface with the station BACS systems for provision of
functions, including fault and status reporting. Coordinate the system with the
Contractor to ensure all signals are correctly relayed and received.
11. To be interfaced with station Fire Detection systems
12. The units are to be capable of running continuously at the specified speed for 24
hours per day, 7 days per week, and 365 days per year.
The following duty cycle is to be applied to each daily period of twenty four hours:
a) 100% of full load for 3.5 hours
b) 65% of full load for 3.5 hours
c) 50% of full load for 5 hours
d) 30% of full load for 8 hours
e) 2% of full load, where a unit is running during 4 engineering hours
13. Each unit is to have a predicted availability of at least 99.5% of the duty cycle
specified above for its full design life. The duty rating is to be calculated at
140kgs per exposed step.
14. The units are to be equally operable in either direction. During its whole duty
cycle the units are to be reversed at regular intervals by the operator
2.02 OPERATION
A. Operation: Constant speed under light to heavy load conditions in either direction,
transit speed of handrail same as treads.
B. Switching: Key operated "On/Off" and reversing direction, control and emergency
"Stop" buttons located at each end of unit.
C. Machine and Drive: Direct current motor, transmission, chain sprocket drive, electro-
magnetic brake, drive chain tension adjustment.
2.03 FINISH MATERIALS
Finishes and claddings will be scope of another specification document. In general:
A. Metal Surfaces Concealed From View: Clean surfaces of contaminants, wipe clean
with solvent; prime one coat.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean with neutralizing solvent; prime one coat.
C. Enamel on Steel: Clean and degrease metal surface; apply one coat of primer; two
coats of enamel; sprayed and baked;
E. Skirts: Stainless steel, following brand manual
F. Decks: Stainless steel, following brand manual
2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Structural Steel Components: Truss frame and end bearing plates, tracks, attachment
brackets, and anchors.
B. Extruded Aluminum Components: Ribbed moving treads with ribbed risers and comb
plate thresholds.
C. Decks: Stainless steel.
D. Steps and pallets
1. Steps are to be constructed of rigid high tensile die cast aluminium alloy with front
edges grooved vertically so that edges of the tread surfaces enmesh. They are to
be suitably reinforced and braced to carry the step treads and the maximum load
per step under eccentric load conditions without distortion. Cleated treads and
risers are to be provided. Thread and front surfaces of the steps are not to end in
a groove under the balustrade skirting. The front edge between the thread and
the front face is to be rounded or bevelled.
2. Pallets are to be constructed of the torsion resistant design which must be one
piece, high tensile die-cast aluminium. They must be a minimum depth of 400mm
with enmeshing front and rear edges. The thread should also be constructed of
transverse diagonal scoring with narrow grooves in order to provide a non-slip
surface. The groove beds of the pallet threads are to be black anodized with
upper surfaces
3. The step threads are to be at least 15mm thick and 25 mm wide.
4. All castings are to be free from blow holes, sand inclusion, porosity and chilled
spots. They are to be examined for rounded, linear and planar defects using an
appropriate NDE technique and are to be proven sound to a declared
acceptance level. All steps are to be dimensionally consistent and fully
interchangeable without the use of shims, spacers, etc.
5. Steps are to run on a minimum of four wheels designed for quiet operation and are
to be of the type, which is to ensure their rotation and prevent flat spots. The
support rollers to each step are to be at least 75mm outside diameter and are to
run on ball bearings completely encapsulated against dust and water. They are
to be mounted so as to minimise tilting and rocking of the steps and are to have
bearings of the 'lubricated for life' type. Step chain rollers are to be fitted outside
the chain link plates and are to be at least 100mm. Only rollers and/or wheels are
to be used to guide steps and step chains. A broken step or step chain wheel is
to operate a contact within the truss to stop the unit. The step rollers are to be
non-ageing, hardwearing, noise-dampening and oil and acid-resistant synthetic
rubber and are to have sealed bearings, which are to be permanently
greaselubricated.
6. The design of steps is to be such as to permit the steps to be readily removed from
the passenger side without removing the skirting, inside balustrades or
dismantling any part of the drive chains. Flat steps are to be provided at both
landings as identified elsewhere in this specification, or as may be required.
7. Each step is to be provided with an electronic tag (micro-chip) permanently
attached in a position that will enable the tag to be read by a transponder. The
tag is required to store information which includes the step type, step part
number, manufacturer, serial number and date of manufacture. The tag is to be
of robust construction and have its serial number marked in a position where it
can be easily read on site by maintenance staff. The tag is to consist of a passive
RFID on metal tag, with a UHF tag inside a fully encapsulated body. The
operational frequency range of the tag is to be 865 - 868 MHz and the read
range is to be 4 - 8 metres. It is to have a memory capacity of at least 96 bit EPC
inlay. It is the sub contractor’s responsibility to write to the tags and validate the
data by reading the tags.
8. Until the completion of the maintenance period, step inspections for integrity or
damage are to be undertaken at regular intervals and as agreed with the
Contractor to achieve the maintenance requirements.
9. Steps are to be powder coated in a champagne metallic finish to an agreed RAL
number, to achieve the architectural branding concept.
10. Steps are to have a slip co-efficient of friction greater than 0.36.
E. Handrails and drive
1. Handrails are to be of the pre-stretched continuous high quality vulcanised rubber
type incorporating high-grade steel tape lining to maximise life provided with an
automatic tensioning device. The handrail moulding is to be of the V wedge type
and the width of the handrail is to be between 75-85mm.
2. Handrails are to be black and the tensile strength of the handrail and all clearances
is to be in accordance with BS EN115-1. Handrail jointing is to be carried out in
the factory prior to delivery to site and installation.
3. Handrails are to be designed with a minimum breaking load of at least 25kN at all
joint locations.
4. Handrail drive systems are to be driven directly from step chains via drive sockets
and reinforced toothed belts. They are to be located on both sides of the units,
close to upper landings.
5. Handrails are to be supported on sealed bearing rollers and operate on formed
guides except when in contact with the driving sheaves. Handrail inlets and
outlets are to be protected by close fitted rubber boots with micro switches which
are to stop the unit in the event of anything coming in contact with the newel
entry point.
6. Handrail guides are to be constructed from stainless steel or extruded aluminium
profiles, with polymer covers throughout the length to minimise friction between
guides and the handrails.
7. The handrail drive is to be automatically tensioned and is to ensure synchronization
with the step band under all loading and operational conditions. Asynchronous
running of the handrails is not to exceed 2% of the step band speed.
F. Balustrades and Skirt Panels: Stainless steel with reinforced backing.
1. Close co-ordination with the contractor’s provisional sum designer for the
architectural works is required to achieve the Employer’s branding intent (refer to
volume 8 for brand images).
2. Toughened laminated clear low iron safety glass balustrades of the impact resistant
type are to be incorporated into the design. The panels are to be selfsupporting
without mullions and are to meet the required mechanical strength and rigidity
identified in BS EN 115-1 to form a rigid enclosure either side of the units.
3. The panels are to be separated into standard lengths with the joints arranged
perpendicular to the angle of incline. The vertical height of the balustrade, both

on the incline and the ends, are to be a minimum of 1100mm. The subcontractor
is to provide a design risk assessment to ensure passenger safety and that all
replacement methods are catered for.
4. The public side of all glass balustrades are to be protected against graffiti and
scratching by glass cutters, diamond rings, etc. The balustrade design is to
ensure that the panel is correctly installed so as not to allow deformation of the
panel and to prevent them from becoming loose or falling out.
5. The balustrade design is to include for ‘top hat’ angled section to retain the
panelling. There are to be no sharp edges that could cause damage or injury to
the unit user.
6. Provide a frit or vanity coating to the outer glass surface of the balustrade, in
accordance with architectural branding requirements design.
G. Operating Equipment: Motor and transmission drive, endless step drive chains;
handrail drive; brake, safety devices, and drip pan to meet system criteria.
H. Electrical Components: Controller, switches, conduit and conductors.
1. Each unit is to interface with the station Electrical Supply system for provision of a
415V A.C. 50Hz three phase and a 240V A.C. 50Hz single phase power supply,
including main isolator and lighting.
2. The units are to be fed from the station power supply system, which is backed up
under power failure. The subcontractor is to ascertain that the power source,
provided by others is in compliance with the requirements.
3. Each unit is to be separately fed from the main supply into the escalator electrical
components space. The individual supply to each unit is to be protected by a
circuit breaker. The circuit breaker provides short circuit protection and overload
protection for the feeder installation. The feeder installation provided by others is
to be terminated in a lockable maintenance isolation switch located adjacent to
the unit control panel.
4. The lighting of Escalators shall be connected to the Central Battery System. Rest of
elevators consumers (controller, motor and small power loads will be supplied
from the corresponding SMDB.
I. Lighting
1. Balustrade skirting lighting using LED technology is to be provided on all units, to
illuminate the unit steps. The balustrade lighting power supply is to be
independent of the unit power supply. All lighting is to be maintainable from the
unit steps. Close co-ordination with the contractor’s provisional sum designer for
the architectural works is required to achieve the Employer’s branding intent
(refer to volume 8 for brand images).
2. Step gap lighting by a green neon light source is to be located at each end of the
units to focus light through steps to visibly identify the change in angle at each
end of the inclined section.
3. The step gap and comb plate lighting is to be fed from the stations emergency
power supply.
4. Traffic light signalling is also to be provided at both the upper and lower ends in the
vicinity of the newels to indicate to the travelling public which units are available
and the direction of operation. The traffic light system is to be flush mounted built
into the newel ends, clearly visible by pedestrians.
5. Provide each unit with a flashing light system that indicates the unit has stopped
due to activation of a safety device. The lights are to be clearly visible from all
points on the unit.
6. The lighting control system is to interface with the station BACS system for fault
monitoring and is to be fed through the stations UPS system.
2.05 OPERATING CONTROLS
A. Buttons: Stainless steel, key operated switch type, capable of operating escalator in
either direction.
2.06 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Escalators. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Power consumed on standby: kilowatts per hour: 3.73 kw/ hr
2. Power consumed on half load up: kilowatts per hour: 11.5 kw/ hr
3. Power consumed on half load up: kilowatts per hour: -4.38 kw/ hr (feed back to
grid)
4. RPM: 1000 RPM
4. 18.5 kW
6. Refer to Section 26 2717.
C. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
2.07 LUBRICATION
A. Grease Fittings: For lubricating bearings requiring periodic lubrication.
B. Grease Cups: Automatic feed type.
C. Lubrication Points: Visible and easily accessible.

3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that floor openings, pit and machine space is of the correct dimension, within
tolerance, and ready for work of this section.
B. Verify location and layout of machine pit and position of machine foundation bolts.
C. Verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of escalator
components.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Align components within manufacturer's allowed tolerances to obtain operation without
objectionable noise, squeaks, pulsations, jumping, vibration, or roughness.
B. Install components to permit orderly servicing, ease of component replacement, and
minimum service down time.
C. Connect equipment to building utilities.
D. Field Welds: Chip and clean away oxidation and residue, wire brush and apply two coats
of primer.
E. Provide ready access to lubrication points.
3.04 TESTS BY REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by jurisdictional authorities.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected surfaces.
B. Do not permit use of escalator during construction.
3.07 MAINTENANCE
B. Perform maintenance work using competent personnel, under the supervision and in the
direct employ of the escalator manufacturer or installer.
C. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor
without prior written consent of Owner.
D. Provide complete service and maintenance of escalator system and components during
the for one year after Date of Substantial Completion.
E. Examine monthly, clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.
F. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the
original equipment.
G. Provide emergency call back service at all hours during this maintenance period.
END OF SECTION

10 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems (FRD):
10.1 28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems:

A. This Section specifies the requirements for fire detection and alarm systems.
B. The Clauses in this Specification and all other information provided in the Project
Documentation shall be considered to be a minimum requirement for performance and
quality.
C. The station fire detection and alarm system shall achieve Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 2.
Certification shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement and BS EN
61508 and all targets stated in Qatar Rail System Reliability, Availability, Maintainability
(RAM) Plan (RAMS>=99.995%)
D. The system and all its equipments shall be UL listed, FM approved or LPC certified
(QCDFSS 1.1.10) or another testing authority acceptable to QCD.
E. This part specifies the requirements for the material, installation, testing and
commissioning of services for analogue addressable fire alarm systems for use within
buildings. It covers all the system components for efficient operation.
F. Fire alarm panels, repeater panels, detection components, alarm components, cables,
other materials and their installation shall be approved by Civil Defence Department,
Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar.
G. The fire alarm system contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved contractors
list of, the Civil Defence Department, Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar.
H. The Contractor shall provide and install the system in accordance with the Project
Documentation, applicable codes and manufacturer’s recommendations.
I. The fire alarm and automatic detection systems shall meet the requirements and comply
with the relevant British Standards and shall meet the requirements of National Fire
Protection Association.
J. The system shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz power supply and be complete with
standby sealed lead acid gas-recombination type long life batteries and charger to provide
a 24 V DC for detection and alarm system.
K. Where the installation extends beyond more than one building the system in each building
shall be self-contained with visual and audible alarms. A common fire alarm and common
fault signal from each system shall be displayed on the control room repeater panel.
A. Fire alarm system design and installation, including all components, wiring, and conduit.
B. Transmitters for communication with supervising station.
C. Circuits from protected premises to supervising station, including conduit.
D. Replacement and removal of existing fire alarm system components, wiring, and conduit
indicated.
E. Maintenance of fire alarm system under contract for specified warranty period.
A. Drawings, QCS 2014, Sections 1 and 23, and general conditions of Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions apply to work of this section.
B. Architecture and Structure specs
C. Fire Suppression specs
D. Electrical specs
E. Ventilation and Air Conditioning specs
F. Smoke Management specs
G. All electrical and electronic equipment shall be designed, manufactured, erected and
tested to the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) standards.
H. All electrical installations shall comply with all the relevant provisions of the regulations of
the following:
1. Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation
2. Institution of Electrical Engineers.
H. The entire fire detection and alarm system including all materials, components, equipment
and accessories and their installation shall conform to the requirements of Civil Defence
Department of the Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar. Particular attention should be made
with respect to the time required by the Civil Defence Department for approval of
schematic and wiring diagrams, layout diagrams etc.
I. The fire alarm system contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved list of, the
Civil Defence Department.
A. Stations shall be provided with a fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 130.
B. The fire alarm system is to be designed in accordance with NFPA 72.
C. The fire alarm system, its installation, testing and commissioning shall comply with the
relevant provisions standards of the Qatar Civil Defence Fire Safety Standards (QCDFSS
1.1 and 6.3) and of the Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS 2014 Section 23, part 2
and 3). It shall be approved by the Qatar Civil Defence in accordance with the Qatar Civil
Defence Fire Safety Handbook 1.
D. The fire alarm systems shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with the relevant
Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS, section 23, part 5).
E. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system
shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:
o NFPA- 12. Extinguishing Systems (low and high)
o NFPA- 12A. Halon 1301 Extinguishing Systems
o NFPA- 13. Sprinkler Systems
o NFPA- 15. Water Spray Systems
o NFPA- 16. Foam / Water Deluge and Spray Systems
o NFPA- 17. Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems
o NFPA- 17A. Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems
o NFPA- 2001. Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems
o NFPA- 70. National Electric Code
o NFPA- 72. National Fire Alarm Code
o NFPA- 90A. Air Conditioning Systems
o NFPA- 92A. Smoke Control Systems
o NFPA- 92B. Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, Large Areas
o NFPA- 101. Life Safety Code
o NFPA- 130. Fixed guideway transit and passenger rail systems
o NFPA- 170. Fire Safety and Emergency Symbols
o NFPA 601. Standard for Security Services in Fire Loss Prevention; 2015.
2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:
o UL- 268. Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
o UL- 864. Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
o UL- 2572. Mass Notification Systems
o UL- 217. Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
o UL- 228. Door Closers - Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
o UL- 268A. Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
o UL- 521. Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
o UL- 464. Audible Signaling Appliances
o UL- 38. Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
o UL- 1481. Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
o UL- 346. Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
o UL- 1076. Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling
Systems
o UL- 1971. Visual Notification Appliances
o UL- 2017. Standard for General-Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems
o UL-60950. Safety of Information Technology Equipment
3. British Standards (BS):
o BS 5839. Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings:
o BS 5445. Components of automatic fire detection systems: detectors
o BS 5501. Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres
o BS 7671. IEE Wiring regulations
o BS EN 61508 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems
F. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Employer’s requirements and
Civil Defence Standards and Codes, etc)
G. Local and State Building Codes. QCS 2014
H. Others:
1. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines;
current edition.
2. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible
Design; 2010.
3. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-
Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits;
4. EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-4 electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
5 EN 50121-5 Railway applications-Electromagnetic compatibility, for detectors and
modules located less than 3 meters from track centre line
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. QCS 2014, Sections 1 and general conditions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions apply to work of this section. Including required document and
proposal by Qatar Civil Defence and Qatar Rail.
B. Proposal Documents: Submit the following with cost/time proposal:
1. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
2. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each control unit, initiating device, and
notification appliance.
3. Certification by Contractor that the system design will comply with the contract
documents.
4. Proposed maintenance contract.
C. Drawings must be prepared using AutoCAD Release 2013 or higher.
1. Owner will provide floor plan drawings for Contractor's use; verify all dimensions on
Owner-provided drawings.
D. Evidence of designer qualifications.
E. Design Documents: Submit all information required for plan review and permitting by
authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser diagrams, and
description of operation:
1. Copy (if any) of list of data required by authority having jurisdiction.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion", filled out to the extent known at the time.
3. Clear and concise description of operation, with input/output matrix similar to that
shown in NFPA 72 Appendix A-7-5-2.2(9), and complete listing of software
required.
4. System zone boundaries and interfaces to fire safety systems.
5. Location of all components, circuits, and raceways; mark components with
identifiers used in control unit programming.
6. Circuit layouts; number, size, and type of raceways and conductors; conduit fill
calculations; spare capacity calculations; notification appliance circuit voltage drop
calculations.
7. List of all devices on each signalling line circuit, with spare capacity indicated.
8. Manufacturer's detailed data sheet for each component, including wiring diagrams,
installation instructions, and circuit length limitations.
9. Description of power supplies; if secondary power is by battery includes
calculations demonstrating adequate battery power.
10. Detailed drawing of graphic annunciator(s).
11. Certification by either the manufacturer of the control unit or by the manufacturer of
each other component that the components are compatible with the control unit.
12. Certification by the manufacturer of the control unit that the system design complies
with the contract documents.
13. Certification by Contractor that the system design complies with the contract
documents.
14. Do not show existing components to be removed.
F. Evidence of installer qualifications.
G. Evidence of instructor qualifications; training lesson plan outline.
H. Evidence of maintenance contractor qualifications, if different from installer.
I. Inspection and Test Reports:
1. Submit inspection and test plan prior to closeout demonstration.
2. Submit documentation of satisfactory inspections and tests.
3. Submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Test Form," filled out.
J. Operating and Maintenance Data: Revise and resubmit until acceptable; have one set
available during closeout demonstration:
1. Original copy of NFPA 72 with portions that are not relevant to this project neatly
crossed out by hand; label with project name and date.
2. Complete set of specified design documents, as approved by authority having
jurisdiction.
3. Additional printed set of project record documents and closeout documents, bound
or filed in same manuals.
4. Contact information for firm that will be providing contract maintenance and trouble
call-back service.
5. List of recommended spare parts, tools, and instruments for testing.
6. Replacement parts list with current prices, and source of supply.
7. Detailed troubleshooting guide and large scale input/output matrix.
8. Preventive maintenance, inspection, and testing schedule complying with NFPA
72; provide printed copy and computer format acceptable to Owner.
9. Detailed but easy to read explanation of procedures to be taken by non-technical
administrative personnel in the event of system trouble, when routine testing is
being conducted, for fire drills, and when entering into contracts for remodelling.
K. Project Record Documents: Have one set available during closeout demonstration:
1. Complete set of floor plans showing actual installed locations of components,
conduit, and zones.
2. "As installed" wiring and schematic diagrams, with final terminal identifications.
3. "As programmed" operating sequences, including control events by device,
updated input/output chart, and voice messages by event.
L. Closeout Documents:
1. Certification by manufacturer that the system has been installed in compliance with
his installation requirements, is complete, and is in satisfactory operating condition.
2. NFPA 72 "Record of Completion” filled out completely and signed by installer and
authorized representative of authority having jurisdiction.
3. Certificate of Occupancy.
4. Maintenance contract.
5. Report on training results.
M. Maintenance Materials, Tools, and Software: Furnish the following for Owner's use in
maintenance of project.
1. See Product Requirements, for additional provisions in QCS2014 and Contract’s
General and Particular requirements.
2. Furnish spare parts of same manufacturer and model as those installed; deliver in
original packaging, labelled in same manner as in operating and maintenance data
and place in spare parts cabinet.
3. In addition to the items in quantities indicated in PART 2, furnish the following:
o All tools, software, and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm
system using Owner's personnel; minimum modification capability to include
addition and deletion of devices, circuits, and zones, and changes to system

description, operation, and evacuation and instructional messages.
o One copy, on CD-ROM, of all software not resident in read-only-memory.
o Extra Fuses: Two for each installed fuse; store inside applicable control cabinet.
N. Shop Drawings:
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance
with drawings and specifications.
2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements,
equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams,
and conduit layouts.
3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.
O. Manuals:
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and
maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data
sheets.
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the
interconnections between the items of equipment.
3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the
information required to properly operate the equipment and system.
4. Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with shop
drawings.
P. Software Modifications
1. Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to perform all
system software modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the
technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.
2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary
to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion
of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label
changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no
limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software
shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while
modifications are being made.
Q. Certifications:
1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major
equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation
and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized
representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses
in the certification.
R. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and
limitations.
S. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
T. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
U. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
V. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics.
1.05 APPROVALS
A. The system shall be UL listed, FM approved or LPC certified (QCDFSS 1.1.10) or another
testing authority acceptable to QCD.
A. This part specifies the requirements for the material, installation, testing and
commissioning of services for analogue addressable fire alarm systems for use within
buildings. It covers all the system components for efficient operation.
B. Fire alarm panels, repeater panels, detection components, alarm components, cables,
other materials and their installation shall be approved by Civil Defence Department,
Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar.
C. The fire alarm system contractor shall be registered with, and on the approved contractors
list of, the Civil Defence Department, Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar.
D. The Contractor shall provide and install the system in accordance with the Project
Documentation, applicable codes and manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. The fire alarm and automatic detection systems shall meet the requirements and comply
with the relevant British Standards and shall meet the requirements of National Fire
Protection Association.
F. The system shall be suitable for 240 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz power supply and be complete with
standby sealed lead acid gas-recombination type long life batteries and charger to provide
a 24 V DC for detection and alarm system.
G. Where the installation extends beyond more than one building the system in each building
shall be self-contained with visual and audible alarms. A common fire alarm and common
fault signal from each system shall be displayed on the control room repeater panel.
2.01 REFERENCES AND COMPLIANCE
A. The following standards are referred to in this Part:
1. BS 5839. Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings:
2. BS 5445. Components of automatic fire detection systems: detectors
3. BS 5501. Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres
4. BS 7671. IEE Wiring regulations
5. BS 5306. Fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises
6. BS6360. Conductors in insulated cables and cords
5. NFPA 72. National Fire Alarms and Signalling Code
6. NFPA 130. Standard for Fixed Guideway Transit and Passenger Rail Systems
7. BS EN 61508. Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems
8. QCDFSS Qatar Civil Defence Safety Standards
9. QCS 2014. Qatar Construction Specifications 2014
B. Where applicable, the fire detection and alarm system and its installation shall comply with
the relevant standards, regulations, rules and recommendations of the following:
1. BS British Standards
2. NFPA National Fire Prevention Association
3. UL Underwriters Laboratory, Inc
4. LPC/LPCB Loss Prevention Council, Loss Prevention Certification Board
C. Where applicable, the fire detection and alarm system and its installation shall comply with
the relevant standards, regulations, rules and recommendations of the Civil Defence
Department, Ministry of the Interior, State of Qatar.
2.02. GENERAL
A. The control and indicating equipment shall form the central processing unit of the system.
It shall receive and analyse signals from fire sensors, providing audible and visual
information to the user. It shall also initiate automatic alarm response sequences and
providing the means by which the user interacts with the system. The housing enclosure
shall be constructed to IP22 unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Project
Documentation.
B. The control and indicating equipment shall be modular in construction to allow for future
extension of the system.
C. The control and indicating equipment shall be easily configurable so as to meet the exact
detection zone and output mapping requirements of the building.
D. The control and indicating equipment shall be microprocessor based and operate under
multitasking software program. Operating programs and configuration data must be
contained in easily up-datable non-volatile memory (EPROM).
E. The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate a real-time clock to enable events
to be referenced against item and date. This clock shall be accurate to within 1 minute per
year under normal operating conditions.
F. It shall be possible for an engineer to perform configuration updates on site by plugging a
portable personal computer in to the control and indicating equipment. Configuration data
shall be retained in an electronic (disk) format.
G. The company responsible for the installation shall operate an approved document control
system for the retention of configuration data.
H. The control and indicating equipment shall meet the requirements of BS 5839 Part 4 and
shall be approved, together with associated ancillary equipment, by the Loss Prevention
Certification Board (LPCB) or another testing authority acceptable to QCD.
I. The control and indicating equipment shall comprise separate processors, cross-
monitoring each other’s correct operation, for the major functions of the system. In
particular, different processors must be used for the main control function, the detection
input and alarm output functions, and the display and control function.
J. No more than 200 addressable input or output points shall be controlled by a single
processor.
K. To ensure continuous stability of the system, the setting of the address code in each
addressable device shall be by either a DIL switch in the detector base or small card
technology in addition to the adjustment provision in the central control panel.
L. In the case of plug-in analogue addressable detectors, the address code shall be set in the
base to prevent unauthorised and potentially dangerous reconfiguration of the system.
M. The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate a key-switch with three positions
“Normal”, “Trapped Normal” and “Enable” to prevent unauthorised use of the manual
controls.
N. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of operating with any of the
following types of automatic detection equipment:
1. Conventional detectors
2. Two-state addressable detectors
3. Analogue addressable detectors
O. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of operating with intrinsically safe
conventional detectors and intrinsically safe analogue addressable detectors suitable for
installation in hazardous areas.
P. Addressable input and output devices shall be connected to addressable loops capable of
accepting up to 99 devices for cable lengths not exceeding 1 km.
Q. The control and indicating equipment shall have a minimum capacity for operating 1 fully
loaded addressable loop. This shall be extendible up to a maximum capacity of 10
addressable loops.
R. Provision shall be made for each addressable loop to be sub-divided into different
geographical zones. The section of wiring corresponding to each zone circuit shall be
protected from faults in other sections by line isolator modules. It shall be possible to
allocate all 99 addressable devices on the loop to a single zone.
S. In order to facilitate re-configuration and system extension, the allocation of addresses to
devices shall be independent of their physical arrangement on the loops.
T. The control and indicating equipment shall have provision to drive and monitor up to 20
repeater panels providing a repeat of the indications on the control and indicating
equipment display and up to a further three (3) repeater panels also incorporating the full
set of system manual user controls.
U. The control and indicating equipment shall have provision to house the main power supply
unit and the batteries required to power a system of up to sixteen (16) zones.
V. The control and indicating equipment shall have provision for the connection of external
power supplies, either local to the control and indicating equipment or distributed
throughout the system, to supply power in excess of that stated as above.
W. The control and indicating equipment shall have provision for the connection of an 80
character line printer, either locally via a parallel port or remotely via a serial port. The fire
alarm control panel shall be provided with a built-in printer, if specified in the Project
Documentation.
X. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of interfacing directly to an
electronic radio paging system and of being interfaced with the similar control and
indicating equipment without locking up or being affected by feedback signals.
Y. It shall be possible to connect a VDU monitor to the control and indicating equipment to
display the information that would otherwise appear on the printer referred to in Clause
2.02-W.
Z. The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to enable an on board
communications module to be added to allow local area networking to other controllers.
2.03. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall arrange for an approved sub-contractor, to supply, install, wire and
commission the complete manual/automatic fire alarm system comprising manual fire
alarm call points, alarm bells and sounders, smoke and heat detectors optical smoke
detectors, combined smoke and heat detectors, duct mounted smoke detectors, flame
detectors, alarm heights (xenon beacon), remote indicating lights‟ and control panels as
indicated on the drawings. The system shall be designed, installed and maintained in
accordance with the recommendations of BS 5839.
B. Items and equipment specified in this part shall be provided by experienced and approved
manufacturers and contractors as designated in the Project Documentation (Volume 3
Appendix 6 clause 2.3) or to the written approval of the Engineer. All equipment shall be
UL listed, or another testing authority acceptable to QCD, and shall be supplied from the
same manufacturer who has a minimum of 10 years experience in the active
manufacturing of fire alarm systems.
2.04. CONTROL PANEL
A. The main fire alarm control panel shall be located in the main control room and shall be
wall mounted. The fire alarm system shall protect all risk areas within the premises by
giving warning of a fire condition when detected by an automatic detector or by the manual
operation of a break glass call point. The risk area shall be divided into zones and each
zone shall have its own fire indicator on the control unit. The control and indicating
equipment, power supply unit and repeater panels shall comply with the electro-magnetic
compatibility (EMC) test requirements described in BS 5839 and the Electronic Engineers
Commission (EEC) requirements for the EMC directive 89/336/EU and the subsequent
amendment 92/31/EU.
B. A diagram shall be provided adjacent to the control panel showing the general layout of the
building and the fire zones. The diagram shall be engraved with black paint filling on a
white ebonite sheet of thickness not less than 2 mm. The letter height shall be 5 mm. The
diagram shall be coloured to show the extent of the area covered by each fire zone. A
different colour shall be used for each zone.
C. Upon receipt of an alarm, the control units shall perform the following actions:
1. Illuminate fire zone detector
2. Activate alarm warning devices within the building
3. Operate internal fire sounder
4. Operate ancillary devices as appropriate
D. Alarm warning devices shall be de-activated by operation of the „Silence Alarms‟ switch.
The internal sounder will continue to operate and the fire indicators remain lit until the key
switch controlled push switch is operated. This should only be achieved if the alarm
initiating device is no longer in alarm.
E. Reset of the controller, after the fire incident has been investigated, will be achieved by
operation of the “Reset‟ switch.
F. The fire alarm panel shall comply with BS 5839 Part 4 and requirements herein and be
suitable for installation of fire detection and alarm systems to BS 5839 Part 1.
G. The fire alarm panel shall comply with the applicable and relevant EMC standards and
requirements.
H. The panel shall be of the multi-zone, modular type and capable of extension. The number
of zones shall be related to the requirements of the individual buildings and shall be
agreed with the Engineer. As a minimum, the fire alarm panel is to be wall mounted and
suitable for 6 zones with all modules installed.
I. A lockable smoked glass door shall protect the face of the panel from access by
unauthorised personnel.
J. The enclosures of panels shall be fabricated from sheet steel, minimum thickness 1.5 mm
and shall be provided with a hinged lockable door. Protection to at least IP54 shall be
provided.
K. Control panels shall as a minimum requirement be equipped with the following:
1. Mains supply on indicator
2. DC supply faulty indicator
3. Alarm indicator for each zone
4. Alarm accept push-button to acknowledge fire alarm signals, silence external
audible alarms and energise an internal bleeper unit or sounder
5. Reset push-button to restore monitoring systems to the inactive condition
6. Integral sealed battery and trickle battery charger where appropriate
7. Alarm transmission facilities via the telephone alarm system (this facility shall be
provided for future use if not utilised under this Contract)
8. Termination for incoming and outgoing wiring systems
9. Voltage free normally closed circuits which shall open in the event of an alarm to
shutdown ventilation and air conditioning equipment in the immediate vicinity of the
alarm
10. Suitable fault indication (both visual and audible)
11. Interfacing facility to connect to Civil Defence Department system
12. Interfacing facility to control elevator system
13. Interfacing facility to control air handling units (AHU) of the HVAC systems
14. Interfacing facility to control fire doors/dampers.
15. Interfacing facility with the PA system provided by the Rail Systems Contractor.
16. Interfacing facility with the Clean Agent Suppression Systems.
L. Alarm indicators shall be of the light emitting diode type. Indicators shall be provided in
pairs for each function.
M. Control panels shall continuously monitor all alarm circuits, including wiring and control
devices. When a fault monitoring circuit has been energised it shall not rest until the fault
condition is cleared.
N. The control panel shall include the following:
1. Power supply normal light (green LED)
2. Power supply fault light (amber LED)
3. Battery charger fault light (amber LED)
4. General evacuate push button
5. Silence alarm push button
6. Reset push button
7. Common fire light (twin red LED)
O. Repeat facilities shall be available for common fire and fault conditions. In addition, two
normally open/normally closed (NO/NC) volt free auxiliary contacts each rated at 2.5 amps
(inductive) for 24 V DC and 240 V AC shall be available
P. Cable entries are to be made from knock-outs located on top and bottom of the fire alarm
panel.
Q. The removal of any detector(s) shall not affect the performance of other detectors in the
system.
R. The sensitivity of any of the sensors shall be adjustable from the control panel.
2.04.01 System Management Facilities
A. The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate the following system management
facilities:
1. Isolate/reconnect a particular addressable point
2. Isolate/reconnect a particular detector zone
3. Isolate/re-connect a particular sounder zone
4. Walk test of a selected zone to verify detectors and sounders
5. View the number of alarms since power up
6. View the number of software initialisation since power up
7. View common alarm status
8. View common fault status
9. View common disabled status
10. View zonal alarm status
11. View zonal fault status
12. View zonal isolated status
13. View point address status
14. Print event log
15. Print points isolated
16. Print points in detector condition monitoring fault
17. Print point status
B. Access to the facilities described in clause above shall be restricted to authorised
personnel using coded password.
C. The control and indicating equipment shall have an event log capable of storing up to the
last 500 events that have occurred. It shall be possible to view the content of the log via an
alphanumeric display. Events shall be displayed in chronological order in any of the
following three options:
1. Newest event first
2. Oldest event first
3. Highest priority event first
D. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of isolating a group of selected
detectors in areas of the building where maintenance work is carried out via a suitable
timer unit. The detectors shall be automatically reinstated after a predetermined time.
E. The control and indicating equipment shall have a facility to enable the user to easily
change the time and date settings of the system real-time clock.
2.04.02. Technical specification
A. The enclosure used to house the control and indicating equipment, standard system power
supply and standard repeater panel shall not exceed the following overall dimensions
unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation:
1. Height: 400 mm
2. Width: 550 mm
3. Depth: 200 mm
B. The control and indicating equipment shall be light in weight. The complete unit including
standard power supply unit and standard repeater unit shall not exceed 7 kg excluding the
weight of batteries unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
C. The control and indicating equipment shall operate on a mains power supply rated for 240
V AC +/-10% @ 50Hz +/-4%
D. The control and indicating equipment, standard power supply unit and standard repeater
unit shall comply with the following environmental conditions unless otherwise stated
elsewhere in the Project Documentation:
1. Operating temperature range 0o C to 55oC
2. Storage temperature 0o C to 65oC
3. Relative humidity up to 95% (non-condensing)
4. IEC protection category IP22 minimum
E. The control and indicating equipment, standard power supply unit and standard repeater
unit shall comply with the EMC test requirements described in BS 5839 Pt.4 and the EEC
requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EU and subsequent amendment 92/31/EU.
F. All equipment, including the fire alarm components and the control panel, shall be UL
listed, or another testing authority acceptable to QCD, and shall be supplied from the same
manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 (ten) years active experience
in the manufacturing of fire alarm systems.
2.04.03. Fire monitoring
A. The control and indicating equipment shall monitor the status of all devices on the
addressable loops for fire short-circuit fault, open-circuit fault, incorrect addressing,
unauthorised device removal or exchange, pre-alarm condition and contaminated detector
condition.
B. The control and indicating equipment shall monitor the status of all internal connection and
interfaces, including charger, battery and remote signalling functions.
C. The control and indicating equipment shall provide the following discrete visual indications:
1. Power on Green LED indicator
2. Fire alarm Dual red LED indicator
3. Fault Yellow LED indicator
4. Disabled/isolated Yellow LED indicator
5. Fire zones Red LED indicator per zone
D. In addition to the indications (A, B and C) the control and indicating equipment shall also
have an integral LCD alphanumeric back-lit display unit. In order that an easy identification
of different information is provided, the LCD display shall be arranged in the following
categories:
1. Event type
2. Zone message
3. Addressable point message
4. Circuit identifier point number/zone number of events in the system
E. The control and indicating equipment shall provide a set of push button controls to enable
an authorised operator to perform the following:
1. Evacuate - actuates ALL alarm sounders in the system
2. Silence - stop all currently actuated alarm sounders
3. Reset - return and control and indicating equipment to quiescent condition
F. The control and indicating equipment shall provide a facility to manually check all the
discrete LED indicators. This shall be clearly marked LAMP TEST and be accessible at all
time.
G. The control and indicating equipment shall provide a simple to operate keypad to enable
the user to access the various built-in functions, and interact with the information displayed
on the LCD. For security reasons, the control and indicating equipment shall provide a
customer configurable password code facility in accordance with the relevant provisions of
BS 5839 for the following levels of access:
1. User operator Access Level 3
2. User engineer Access Level 1
3. User manager Access Level 2
4. Civil defence engineer Access Level 3
5. Alarm company engineer Access Level 3
H. The control and indicating equipment shall provide facilities to drive visual indication LED
mimic displays for each of the following zonal status:
1. Alarm
2. Fault
3. Isolated
I. The control and indicating equipment shall provide facilities for signalling the following
system conditions to a remote (Central Station) and/or an on-site monitoring centre:
1. Alarm
2. Pre-alarm
3. Fault
4. Zone isolated
J. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring and controlling remote
site devices, such as door release unit and relays for the control of plants and dampers,
directly from the addressable loops.
K. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring fire doors such that, in
the event of a fire alarm condition, an event is generated to warn of the failure of fire door
to close.
L. The control and indicating equipment shall interrogate each addressable device at least
once every 5 seconds.
M. The control and indicating equipment shall incorporate fire decision algorithms specifically
adapted to the response characteristics of the analogue addressable detectors employed.
N. The algorithms shall perform a trend analysis of the signal received from the analogue
addressable detectors in order that non-fire events may be differentiated.
O. The control and indicating equipment shall be designed so that, each type of analogue
addressable detector, the overall responses time, including that for the sensor, the signal
transmission system and the fire decision algorithm, meets the requirement of the relevant
provisions of BS 5445 (EN 54).
P. The response time of the control and indicating equipment to two-state addressable
detectors and conventional detectors shall not exceed 10 seconds.
Q. The control and indicating equipment shall have a special scanning sequence so that
designated manual call points provide alarm indication and warning within 1 second of
operation.
R. The control and indicating equipment shall have a facility to automatically adjust the
sensitivity of analogue detectors to a higher level for periods of time when the building is
unoccupied.
S. The control and indicating equipment shall have, as an optional software enhancement,
the ability to automatically adjust the alarm and pre-alarm threshold levels to compensate
for changes in detector sensitivity due to contamination over a period of time.
T. The control and indicating equipment shall have, as an optional software enhancement,
the ability to provide automatic warning that a detector has reached a level of
contamination which requires that it be replaced or serviced.
U. The control and indicating equipment shall monitor all critical system components and
interconnections (internal and external). In the event of a failure occurring which prevents
correct operation of the alarm functions, a FAULT indicator will light and message shall be
given on the alphanumeric display within 100 seconds of occurrence.
V. The following faults shall be reported.
1. Loop short circuit
2. Loop open circuit
3. Un-configured device
4. Addressable device failure

5. Device not responding
6. Incorrectly configured device
7. Detector condition monitoring warning
8. Conventional call point wiring open circuit
9. Conventional call point wiring short circuit
10. Conventional detector circuit wiring fault
11. Repeater/repeater LCD, remote printer failure
12. Power supply unit (PSU) fault
13. Charger fault
14. Battery fault
15. Battery critical
16. Mains failure
17. Auxiliary power supply unit (PSU) failure
18. Relay output stuck
19. Signalling fault
20. Sounder wiring open circuit
21. Sounder wiring short circuit
W. To help rapid fault finding and repair, the control and indicating equipment shall provide
text messages to indicate the precise location of where a fault has occurred in the system.
X. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of monitoring and indicating the
status of auxiliary units, such as a remote signalling transmitter. This shall be achieved
using a suitable addressable contact monitor module.
Y. The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to delay the generation of an
event to confirm operation of the monitored device. This shall be either 6 seconds for
normal non-fluctuating contacts, or 40 seconds for fluctuating contacts, e.g. sprinkler flow
valve switches.
2.04.04. Alarm Output Functions
A. The control and indicating equipment shall provide the necessary outputs to separately
operate two monitored circuits of common system sounders. Each output shall be capable
of driving a sounder load of up to 1 Amp.
B. The control and indicating equipment shall be able to monitor and control the integrity of
zonal sounder circuits via a suitable addressable module.
C. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of providing a two stage alarm
sounder facility that can be programmed, either on a zonal basis or common system basis,
to meet the requirements of the fire authority. Three possible sound output signals shall be
available as follows:
1. Alert pulsed tone (1 second ON, 1 second OFF)
2. Evacuate continuous tone
3. User definable tone for specialised events (e.g. boom alert).
D. The control and indicating equipment shall have the facility to change, on a per sounder
zone basis, the sound output dependent upon whether the source of alarm is:
1. An automatic detector (e.g. smoke or heat)
2. A manual call point
3. An evacuate command
4. A non-fire event (e.g. plant alarm)
E. The control and indicating equipment shall be capable of generating customer definable
time delay sequences to upgrade alarm sounder responses, without the need for external
timers, as follows:
1. Silent to alert
2. Alert to evacuate
3. Silent to user defined tone
F. The control and indicating equipment shall have the ability to delay the transmission to the
Civil Defence Department of fire alarm signals from automatic detectors in pre-determined
detection zones. The time delay shall be configurable up to a maximum time of 2 minutes.
G. The control and indicating equipment shall provide the facility to automatically inhibit the
delay function described in clause above when the building is unoccupied.
2.05. BATTERIES AND CHARGING EQUIPMENT
A. The system shall be of the 24 V DC, monitored, open circuit type utilising transformed and
rectified mains voltage supply under all normal circumstances but with stand-by provision
in the form of rechargeable sealed lead-acid batteries.
B. Batteries shall have a capacity capable of maintaining the system in normal working
condition for at least 24 hours and in the alarm state for at least 30 minutes without
recharging unless otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
C. Battery chargers are to be of sufficient capacity to power the system whilst recharging a
fully discharged battery. The battery shall be fully charged within 8 hours.
2.06. CABLING
A. Unless specified elsewhere in the Project Documentation, the cabling and wiring used in
the fire alarm system shall comply with the provisions this Clause.
B. The cabling and wiring to be used in the system shall be fire resistant and approved to
British Standard and LPCB specifications, or another testing authority acceptable to QCD,
for use in fire detection and alarm systems.
C. Wiring used for driving devices requiring high currents (e.g. bells) shall limit the voltage
drop to less than 10% of the nominal operating voltage.
D. Cables used for the transmission of system data and alarm signals shall be in accordance
with the types recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
E. The ends of all cables shall be sealed by means of proprietary seals and associated
glands. No heat shall be applied to any seal or termination. Cable tails shall be insulated
by means of gland PVC sleeving anchored and sealed into the seal.
F. Where protection of the cable glands is required or terminations are on display, the glands
shall be enclosed in red coloured shrouds of the appropriate British Standard colour.
G. All cables to brick/concrete shall be securely fixed by means of copper saddles sheathed
with red PVC. These saddles shall be provided near bends and on strength runs at
intervals no greater than recommended in the British Standards or by the manufacturer.
H. Where multiple cables are to be attached to a wall or soffit, copper saddles shall enclose
all cables and shall be secured by means of suitable masonry plugs and two round head
plated wood screws.
I. Where multiple cables are to be attached to the top of horizontal trays they shall be neatly
run and securely fixed at suitable intervals. Copper or plastic cable fixings shall be used
J. The wiring size shall be not less than 1.5 mm2 for call/detector circuits and 2.5 mm2 for
bell and battery circuits. The system shall be of the two wire type.

K. Cabling in fire alarm detection systems shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS
6883 and BS 5839.
L. In enclosed work areas and accommodation areas, zero halogen type cables shall be
used.
M. Cables shall be able to withstand the IEC 331 gas flame test, enhanced to 3 hours at
950oC.
N. Conductors shall be circular tinned wires complying with the relevant provisions of BS
6360, Class 2.
O. The Contractor shall provide and install the system in accordance with Project
Documentation, applicable standards and manufacturer‟s recommendations. All wiring
shall be in a conduit system which is separate from other building wiring. Junction boxes
shall be sprayed red and levelled “Fire Alarm”.
P. Fire alarm cables shall be rated for 600/1000 V grade unless otherwise stated in the
Project Documentation.
Q. Fire alarm system cables shall have the following type of insulation as specified in the
Project Documentation:
1. Pressure packed magnesium oxide insulation
2. A composite insulation of mica impregnated glass tape beneath an extruded layer of
ethylene propylene rubber (EPR)
3. Silicone rubber insulation.
2.07. FIRE ALARM DETECTORS
2.07.01. General
A. The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by means of plug-in detector
bases.
B. The addressable base must incorporate all the circuitry required for communicating
detector status to the control and indicating equipment, including the address setting
switch.
C. Addressable detectors and modules must be able to transmit to the control and indicating
equipment a pre-set and unique identifier to detect unauthorised changes in the system
configuration.
D. It shall be possible to program and adjust the sensitivity of any of the detectors in the
system from the central panel in addition to the local setting facilities. Removal of any
detector shall not affect the performance of other detectors in the system
E. It shall be possible to program for automatic adjustment of sensitivity settings of the
detectors on time-zone features, if required, for different hours of the day, for different days
of the week, or for different months of the year.
F. The Contractor shall provide standard accessories for installing detectors in air ducts. This
equipment shall be designed to accommodate the manufacturer‟s standard smoke
detectors and bases, both conventional and addressable. All such detectors to be installed
in the air duct system shall be approved by the Air Conditioning Section of QGEWC, Qatar.
G. It must be possible to connect and mix automatic detectors, manual call points and
addressable modules within the same zone sub-division of an addressable loop.
H. All types of automatic detectors, the plug-in bases and the line isolator shall be intrinsically
safe
I. The addressable contact monitoring module for connection of “simple apparatus‟ such as
conventional manual call points shall be intrinsically safe.
J. The intrinsically safe devices shall be designed to comply with the relevant provisions of
BS 5501: Pt 7 and be certified by BASEEFA (British Approval Service for Electrical
Equipment in Flammable Atmosphere) to EEx i IIC T5.
K. It shall be possible to connect several circuits of intrinsically safe addressable devices to a
standard addressable loop via standard BASEEFA approved safety barriers from the loop
as spurs.
L. All equipment connected to the system addressable loops, either directly or via interfaces,
shall be proofed against electrical noise, high frequency pulses and electromagnetic
influences from other equipment.
M. Both the conventional and addressable detector base shall be capable of driving a
separate alarm LED indicator module.
N. Detectors shall conform to the relevant provisions of BS 5445 and be fully compatible with
the system offered and shall comprise a fixed base which can be used with other types of
detector head.
O. The base shall have fixed non-corroding terminals and contain no electronic components.
P. The head shall comprise the sensing elements which shall be housed in a corrosion proof
enclosure which can be fixed to the base by a bayonet or plug-in twist-lock mechanism.
Q. The sensing elements shall be exposed to the atmosphere through a protective cover
which will allow free movement of air but provide a high degree a resistance to dust and
insects. A small drain hole shall be included to allow any condensation to drain.
R. Integral LED‟s shall be provided which will confirm operation and also permit detector
testing.
S. The removal of a detector from its base shall cause a fault signal to be indicated.
T. It shall be clearly stated on the head of the detector the type of element it contains or the
principle on which the detector operates.
U. All detectors shall operate at a nominal voltage of 24 V DC and shall exhibit long-term
stability and reliability under the prevailing conditions at the installation location.
2.07.02. Optical Smoke Detectors
A. The optical smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting visible combustion gases
emanating from fires.
B. The optical smoke detectors shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5445: Pt.7 (EN
54: Pt.7).
C. The optical smoke detector shall have a sensitivity sufficient to be classified as „A‟ in BS
5445: Pt.9 (EN 54: Pt.9) test fires for TF2 and TF3.
D. The optical smoke detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention
E. The optical smoke detectors shall employ the forward light scatter principle, using optical
components operating at a wavelength of approximately 4.35 nm.
F. The design of the optical smoke detector sensing chamber shall be optimised to minimise
the effect of dust deposits during a long period of operation.
G. The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate screens designed to prevent insects from
entering the sensing chamber.
H. The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate a fin structure designed to totally eliminate
the effect of very small insects such as thunder flies.
I. The optical smoke detectors shall be designed to have high resistance to contamination
and corrosion.
J. The optical smoke detectors shall include RF1 screening and feed through connecting
components to minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical interference.
K. The system may include, but not be limited to, the following versions of optical smoke
detectors as required to meet different applications:
1. Analogue addressable
2. Analogue addressable intrinsically safe
3. Two state addressable normal sensitivity
4. Conventional high sensitivity
5. Conventional normal sensitivity
6. Conventional normal sensitivity delayed response
7. Conventional low sensitivity
8. Conventional normal sensitivity intrinsically safe
L. The optical smoke detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to
provide indication of alarm actuation.
M. High Performance Optical Smoke Detectors shall comply, in addition to the above:
1. The high performance optical smoke detectors shall have a sensitivity sufficient to
be classified as „B‟ or better in accordance with BS 5445: Part 9 (EN 54: Part 9) test
fires TF2 to TF5 inclusive and as „C‟ in test fire TF1.
2. The high performance optical detectors shall monitor and use rapid changes in
temperature to increase the normal sensitivity of the light scatter optical sensor to
obtain an improved response to fast burning fires.
3. The high performance optical detectors shall not generate an alarm condition from a
rate of rise of temperature or absolute temperature alone.
N. The sensors shall utilise the light scattering principle. They shall employ a photoelectric
cell and light source so arranged that only light scattered by smoke particles falls on the
photoelectric cell.
O. The Optical smoke detector shall respond to the visible smoke produced by smoldering or
burning materials.
P. The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any maintenance.
2.07.03. Beam Smoke Detectors
A. The beam smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting the presence of smoke in large
open type interiors.
B. The beam smoke detectors shall project a modulated infrared light beam from a transmitter
unit to a receiver unit. The received signal shall be analysed and, in the event of smoke
being present for a predetermined period an alarm condition be activated.
C. The detectors shall be capable of providing cover in open areas up to 100 m in length and
up to 14 m wide, giving an effective protection area of up to 1400 m2.
D. The fire alarm output of the detectors shall be activated in the event of smoke reducing the
signal strength between 40% and 90% for a period of approximately 5 seconds.
E. In the event of a power failure at the transmitter unit or if the transmitted signal is reduced
by more than 90% for a period in excess of 1 second, then a fault alarm condition shall be
indicated. This condition shall inhibit the fire alarm until the signal is restored.
F. The receiver unit of the detectors shall be capable of performing an automatic reset,
approximately 5 seconds after a fault is indicated, if the fault is no longer present.
G. The detectors shall include Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuitry capable of providing
compensation for long-term degradation of signal strength caused by component ageing or
build-up of dirt on the optical surfaces of the transmitter and receiver unit lenses.
H. The beam smoke detectors shall comply with the relevant provisions of either BS 5445:
Part 5 (EN 54: Part 5) for detectors suitable for use in normal environments or BS 5445:
Part 8 (EN 54: Part 8) for detectors designed for use in high ambient temperatures.
I. The beam smoke detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention
J. The receiver unit of the detectors shall incorporate an alarm/fault lamp, clearly visible from
the outside, to provide indication of both alarm and fault conditions.
2.07.04. Combined Smoke and Heat Detectors
A. Combine smoke and heat detector shall comprise of two chambers. One chamber
containing the photoelectric smoke detector and the other chamber shall contain the heat
detector.
B. The smoke detector shall utilise a horizontal optical bench construction which houses the
detector and the optical sensor. The detector shall be arranged for radial detection of
forward scattered light.
C. The heat detector shall operate at fixed temperatures set at 57 oC, 71 oC or 99 oC to trigger
the alarm. The setting shall depend on the application and as specified in the Project
Documentation.
D. The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any maintenance.
2.07.04.01. Smoke detector
A. The smoke detector fulfils specification 2.07.02.
2.07.04.02. Heat Detector
A. The heat detectors shall be capable of detecting both rapid rise in temperature and fixed
absolute temperatures.
B. The beam smoke detectors shall comply with the relevant provisions of either BS 5445:
Part 5 (EN 54: Part 5) for detectors suitable for use in normal environments or BS 5445:
Part 8 (EN54: Part 8) for detectors designed for use in high ambient temperatures.
C. The heat detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Certification Board
(LPCB) or another testing authority acceptable to QCD.
D. The heat detector shall employ two heat sensing elements with different thermal
characteristics to provide a rate of rise dependent response.
E. The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors shall be coated with
epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.
F. The heat detectors shall include RF1 screening and feed through connecting components
to minimise the effect of radiated and conducted electrical interference.
G. The system may include, but not be limited to, the following versions of the heat detector
as required to meet different applications:
1. Analogue addressable
2. Analogue addressable intrinsically safe
3. Two state addressable grade 1
4. Conventional grade 1
5. Conventional grade 1 intrinsically safe
6. Conventional grade 3
7. Conventional grade 3 intrinsically safe
8. Conventional range 2 (98oC)
9. Conventional range 2 intrinsically safe
10. Conventional static 60oC (grade 2)
11. Conventional static 90oC
H. The heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide
indication of alarm actuation.
I. The detector shall be a combined unit including both fixed temperature element and rate of
rise temperature element.
J. Each heat detector shall incorporate a dual thermal element which responds to either an
excessively high temperature or a rate of rise of temperature which is unacceptable.
K. The heat detector shall operate on the principle that one element is exposed to the
atmosphere whilst the other is contained in such a way that it is not so readily affected by
increasing temperature. At a certain rate of rise of temperature or at a pre-set fixed
temperature, the imbalance between the two elements shall cause the detector to trigger.
L. The fixed element of the heat detector shall be the type that can be reset for renewed
detection. The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any
maintenance
2.07.05. Linear heat detectors
A. The linear heat detectors shall be capable of detecting fire (or overheat) conditions in
confined or polluted areas.
B. The sensor capable of the linear heat detectors shall be unaffected by dust, moisture or
vibration and require little maintenance.
C. The detectors shall have a calibration switch mounted internally to set the alarm sensitivity
threshold.
D. The detectors shall generate an alarm condition if the pre-determined alarm threshold is
exceeded.
E. The detectors shall initiate a fault condition if the sensor cable has an open or short circuit
condition present.
F. The detectors, upon detecting a cable open or short circuit or fault, shall be capable of
signalling the condition to the main fire controller.
G. The linear heat detectors shall meet the requirements of either BS 5445: Part 5 (EN 54:
Part 5) for detectors suitable for normal environment or BS 5445: Part 8 (EN 54: Part 8) for
detectors designed for high ambient temperatures.
H. The linear heat detectors shall be approved and listed by the Loss Prevention Certification
Board (LPCB) or another testing authority acceptable to QCD.
I. The detectors shall be suitable for use in hazardous areas and have mechanical protection
for cables in areas where damage may occur.
J. The detectors shall incorporate red (fire) LED and yellow (fault) LED, clearly visible from
the outside, to provide indication of alarm and fault condition.
2.07.06. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors

A. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided in the main return air duct adjacent to each air
handling unit (AHU).
B. They shall be of the duct mounted type and initiate alarm in case of a developing fire.
These shall be provided with two sampling tubes. The first, an inlet tube for intake of air
from the duct to the sensor assembly. The second, an exhaust tube to allow air to leave
the assembly.
C. Duct smoke detectors shall be interlocked with the air handling unit motor and volt free
contact shall also be provided to raise an alarm on the main fire alarm panel. Installation of
duct mounted detectors shall be approved by the Air Conditioning Section of QGEWC.
2.08. MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. The manual fire alarm pull stations shall monitor and signal to the control and indicating
equipment the status of a switch operated by manual pulling down of a handle or lever.
B. The stations shall be capable of operating by hand pull and does not require special
instrument.
C. The stations shall be capable of being mounted in weather-proof affording protection to
IP65.
D. The pull station shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the normal addressable loop
scan to provide an alarm response within less than 1 second.
E. The points shall be capable of being tested using a special „key‟ without actually initiating
the alarm signal.
F. A glass cover shall be provided to deter the accidental or malicious activation of the
manual call stations. After actuation, the cover can be replaced, and the system reset by
use of a key only.
2.09. MODULES
2.09.01. Remote Indicator Module
A. The remote indicator module shall provide a remote indication for any conventional or
analogue addressable detector that may be located in an enclosed or locked compartment.
B. The remote indicator module shall be driven directly from its associated local detector.
C. The connection to the remote indicator module shall be monitored for open and short-
circuit.
D. All fire detectors shall be provided with remote indicator facility. The remote indicator
output shall diode gated for protection against electrical interference generated along the
remote indicator wiring and to enable one remote indicator to be connected to a number of
detectors. The remote indicator shall be polarity independent and operate at constant
brightness over the range of 8-28 V.
2.09.02. Addressable Contact Monitoring Module
A. The addressable contact monitoring module shall provide monitoring of the status of
switched input signals from either normally open or normally closed contacts.
B. The addressable contact monitoring module shall provide a red LED indication when the
contact has operated.
C. The addressable contact monitor module shall derive its power directly from the
addressable loop.
2.09.03. Line Isolator module
A. Provision shall be made for each addressable loop to be sub-divided into different
geographical zones. The section of wiring corresponding to each zone circuit shall be
protected from faults in other sections by line isolator modules. It shall be possible to
allocate all 99 addressable devices on the loop to a single zone.
2.10. NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
2.10.01. Combined sounder and flasher (horn/strobe)
A. Red underdome indoor fire alarm bells shall be installed in locations complying with the
relevant provisions of BS 5839 and in locations as indicated in the Project Documentation.
Each bell shall be suitable for 24 V DC operation and shall be polarised. The output shall
not be less than 90 dBA at 1 m distance. 150 mm diameter underdome bells shall be used
indoors and 225 mm diameter underdome bells shall be used outdoors. Outdoor
underdome bell shall be to IP44.

B. Alarm bells shall be of the gong type. They shall be continuously rated and mounted 2200
mm above finished floor level.
C. Bells shall be painted red and marked with the words “FIRE ALARM”.
D. Each bell or sounder circuit shall have a separate fuse at the fire alarm control unit.
E. Electronic Sounders shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 5389 and BS 5306
and shall be suitable for 24 V DC use. These sounders shall be coloured red and be
polarised, suppressed and suitable for line monitoring. Electronic sounders are to have a
low current consumption of approximately 30 mA but have a minimum output of 100 dBA
at 1 m.
F. The electronic sounder shall be capable of providing at least two distinct and different
sounds and be suitable for “on site” adjustments.
G. Visual flashing alarm lights shall be located above doors and openings as indicated in the
Project Documentation. They shall be of the xenon flashing type and suitable for 24 V DC.
The wording “Fire” shall be prominently displayed when this alarm is activated.

3.01. INSTALLATION
3.01.01. General
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, BS 5839: part 1 and BS 7671,
local and state codes, contract document, as shown on the drawings, and as
recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished
areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed
prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this
period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and
physical damage.
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall
be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when
located in unfinished areas.
D. Manual fire alarm boxes shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as
shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more
than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.
E. Obtain Owner's approval of locations of devices, before installation.
F. Install instruction cards and labels.
G. Correct installation, combined with the use of high quality equipment, components and
cabling ensures that the fire detection and alarm system shall operate as designed and
provide many years of trouble free service.
H. The Contractor shall install the alarm system in accordance with the manufacturer‟s
documented installation instructions.
I. The Contractor shall provide all relevant installation documentation required for each
component of the system.
J. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct sitting of all equipment and components
of the system in accordance with the Project Documentation.
K. All cabling and wiring shall be tested before they are connected to the fire controller and its
associated devices. The Contractor shall note that if the tests are carried out after the
cables and wires have been connected to the controller and its devices, components within
the controller and devices will be damaged by high voltages used during testing.

L. At detector and sounder locations, cables shall be terminated in approved black
enamelled/galvanized junction boxes. All other devices forming part of the system shall
utilise dedicated/custom back boxes.
3.01.02. Installation of Detectors
A. All detectors shall be installed in accordance with the relevant provisions of applying
standards and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer.
B. The number and type of detectors required to be installed shall be as detailed on the
Project Drawing. The location of each type of detector installed shall generally be as
shown on the Project Drawings but their final position shall be determined on site.
C. All detector bases shall be securely fixed to boxes and allow for easy fitting and removal of
detectors.
D. Cable and wire entries to detector bases shall be fitted with grommets to prevent possible
damage to the insulation.
E. Cable and wire strain relief clamps shall be provided at all entries to detector bases.
F. Cable entries of detector bases used in environments with abnormal atmospheric or
operating conditions shall be appropriately sealed to prevent ingress of dust, water
moisture or other such contaminants.
3.01.03. Installation of Control Devices
A. All control devices (e.g. call points, sounders, interface modules, etc.) shall be installed in
accordance with the relevant provisions of applying standards and the installation
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
B. The location of control devices and associated modules to be installed shall generally be
as shown on the Project Drawings but their final position shall be determined on site.
C. The type of control device installed in each particular location shall be the type specified in
the Project Documents.
D. All control devices and associated modules shall be securely fixed, and if required, marked
with appropriate notices, warnings, signs as applicable.
E. Cable and wire entries to all control devices and associated modules shall be fitted with
grommets or glands so as to prevent possible damage to the insulation.
F. Cable entries of control devices and associated modules used in environments with
abnormal atmospheric or operating conditions shall be appropriately sealed to prevent
ingress of dust, water, moisture or other such contaminants.
3.01.04. Installation of Fire Controller Equipment
A. The fire controller equipment shall be installed in accordance with the relevant provisions
of applying standards and the installation instructions provided by the manufacturer.
B. The installation location of the fire controller and its associated component parts shall
generally be as shown on the Project Drawings but their final position shall be determined
on site.
C. The type of fire controller and its associated component parts installed shall be the type
specified in the Project Documentation.
D. The fire controller equipment shall be securely fixed, and if required, marked with
appropriate notices, warnings, signs as applicable.
E. Cable and wire entries to the fire controller and associated devices shall be fitted with
grommets or glands to prevent possible damage to the insulation.
F. The fire alarm system mains power connections to the fire controller equipment shall be
accordance with the guidelines set out in the relevant British Standards and the installation
G. The fire alarm system mains power isolating switch shall be coloured red and clearly
labelled “FIRE ALARM: DO NOT SWITCH OFF”.
H. Each circuit of the system shall be connected to the fire controller via associated fuse or
circuit breaker devices located within the fire controller unit.
I. All cables from the fire controller equipment to the detection and alarm devices shall be
clearly labelled as part of the fire detection and alarm system.
3.02. INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR COMPLETION
3.02.01. General
A. The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and
participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in
accordance with applying standards.
B. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short
circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
C. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
D. Verify activation of all waterflow switches.
E. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
F. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
G. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
H. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
I. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
J. Check installation, supervision, operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk
test.
K. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on
the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP
and the correct activation of the control points.
L. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be
consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such
items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices,
sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
M. Notify Owner 7 days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.
N. Owner will provide the services of an independent fire alarm engineer or technician to
observe all tests.
O. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling
inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.
P. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to
supervise inspection and testing, correction, and adjustments.
Q. Prepare for testing by ensuring that all work is complete and correct; perform preliminary
tests as required.
R. Provide all tools, software, and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.
S. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with applying standards (NFPA, BS) and
requirements of local authorities (QCD); document each inspection and test.
T. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies
with contract documents.
U. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, operate system in
normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions.
1. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction.
3. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule
training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties.
4. At end of successful diagnostic period, fill out and submit "Inspection and Testing
Form" according to QCD and applying standards (NFPA, BS)
V. At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the manufacturer of the major
equipment shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in every respect.
W. The Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel and equipment required to
commission the various items of plant and equipment comprising the various systems
included in the Works.
X. Any specific requirements relating to the commissioning of each system shall be carried
out as detailed in the Project Documentation. All costs associated with providing the
requirements shall be included within the Contractor’s rates.
Y. Both the installation and the commissioning activities shall be undertaken as a single
continuous operation. Upon completion of the installation activity, the Contractor shall test,
start-up, commission and hand over the system.
3.02.02. Engineer and Contractor
A. The Engineer shall be present at the tests and be at liberty to participate in them. Such
participation shall not relive the Contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the tests
satisfactorily.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing all the components of the
system. Such components shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detectors
2. Call points
3. Alarms
4. Ancillary devices
5. Fire controller equipment and associated devices
6. Auxiliary equipment
7. Operating and control software.
C. The fire controller and associated devices and modules shall be tested in accordance with
the guidelines set out in applying standards (QCD, NFPA and BS) and the testing
D. The Contractor shall start up and operate the system for a trial period to ensure that it
operates correctly. The duration of the trial period shall be as stated in the Project
Documentation.
E. The Contractor shall test all performance of the completed system, including the software,
to ensure that it operates in accordance with the requirements of the Specification, all
relevant standards ad the manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. The Contractor shall undertake an audibility test of the alarms. The duration and
performance assessment criteria shall be determined on-site by the Engineer unless
otherwise stated in the Project Documentation.
G. The Contractor shall start-up the system, or parts thereof, and makes the necessary
adjustments to ensure correct functioning.
H. The Contractor shall at his own expense carry out alterations to the system if the testing
fails to demonstrate the satisfactory nature of the system, or parts thereof.
I. The Engineer shall call for further tests when such alterations have been made and his
decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final. The cost of all such further
testing shall be at the Contractors own expense.
3.03. INSTRUCTION
A. Provide the following instruction to designated Owner personnel:
1. Hands-On Instruction: On-site, using operational system.
2. Classroom Instruction: Owner furnished classroom, on-site or at other local facility.
3. Factory Instruction: At control unit manufacturer's training facility.
B. Administrative: One-hour session(s) covering issues necessary for non-technical
administrative staff; classroom:
1. Initial Training: 1 session pre-closeout.
2. Refresher Training: 1 session post-occupancy.
C. Basic Operation: One-hour sessions for attendant personnel, security officers, and
engineering staff; combination of classroom and hands-on:
D. Detailed Operation: Two-hour sessions for engineering staff; assume NICET level I
qualifications or equivalent; combination of classroom and hands-on:
E. Maintenance Technicians: Detailed training for electrical technicians, on programming,
maintaining, repairing, and modifying; factory training:
1. Initial Training: One 3-day session, pre-closeout.
2. Refresher Training: One 1-day session post-occupancy.
F. Furnish the services of instructors and teaching aids; have copies of operation and
maintenance data available during instruction.
G. Provide means of evaluation of trainees suitable to type of training given; report results to
Owner.
H. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on
demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including
program changes and functions shall be provided.
I. The contractor and/or the systems manufacturer's representatives shall provide a type-
written "Sequence of Operation."
J. The Contractor shall provide details of the training required by personnel to operate and
maintain the fire detection and alarm system.
K. The Contractor shall provide two levels of training:
1. System supervision training
2. Another staff training.
L. System supervision training shall include technical training sessions and on-site training
given during installation and commissioning of the system.
M. An experienced and competent engineer familiar with the fire system being installed shall
give system supervision training.
N. The scope of training provided shall depend on the type, size and complexity of the
system.

O. The Contractor shall initially provided technical training in all aspects of the system. The
trainee shall then be given full instructions in the use, operation and maintenance of the
system. This shall include instruction in the procedures to be followed in the event of fire
and false alarms, routine maintenance and testing procedures, and how to keep the Log
Book.
P. Other staff training shall include training sessions provided on-site after hand over of the
system.
Q. An experienced and competent engineer familiar with the fire system installed shall give
the training sessions.
R. The scope of training provided shall include full operating instructions in the use of the fire
system. This shall include instruction in the procedures to be followed in the event of fire
and false alarms.
3.04 CLOSEOUT
A. Closeout Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of all functions to Owner.
1. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
2. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, preliminary copy of
project record drawings, input/output matrix, and operator instruction chart(s)
available during demonstration.
3. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during
demonstration.
4. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by authority
having jurisdiction; notify authority having jurisdiction in time to schedule
demonstration.
5. Repeat demonstration until successful.
B. Occupancy of the project will not occur prior to Substantial Completion.
C. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is
successful and:
1. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed.
2. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered.
3. Spare parts, extra materials, and tools have been delivered.
4. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Owner.
5. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having
jurisdiction.
6. Occupancy permit has been granted.
7. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete.
D. Perform post-occupancy instruction within 3 months after Substantial Completion.
3.05 SUBMITTALS
3.05.01. Record Drawings
A. The Contractor shall submit record drawings of installed fire detection and alarm system,
including equipment data in accordance with the relevant provisions of this section.
B. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the drawings shall include but not be limited to the
following:
1. Arrangement drawings of each complete installation to a scale of not less than 1:50
2. Outline dimensioned drawings of each of the principal items of plant; each be
accompanied by a schedule with full particulars of fittings, instruments and

components
3. Sectional drawings of each of the major items of plant with parts named and
numbered to facilitate maintenance and overhauls; these drawings shall also show
the type of fit and running clearance for fitted and running parts and with them shall
be included such detailed workshop drawings as may be necessary for the
manufacture of replacement components during the working lifetime of the plant
4. Electrical and operational diagrams as may be necessary.
3.05.02. Test Records
A. The format of recording tests shall be agreed with the Engineer. The Engineer shall be
present at the tests and be at liberty to participate in them.
B. The Contractor shall make all records during the test and on completion thereof, shall
provide the Engineer with a Test Report.
C. Test Reports shall be arranged and collated in a logical order. This data shall form a
permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting and
commissioning.
D. Test Records shall comply with the relevant provisions of this section.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. See Execution and Closeout Requirements in QCS2014 and Contract’s General and
Particular Requirement, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.
B. Provide to Owner, at no extra cost, a written maintenance contract for entire
manufacturer's warranty period, to include the work described below.
C. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, for a maintenance contract
for entire warranty period, to include the work described below; include the total cost of
contract, proposal to be valid at least until 30 days after date of Substantial Completion.
D. Perform routine inspection, testing, and preventive maintenance required by QCD and
standard applying (NFPA, BS), including:
1. Maintenance of fire safety interface and supervisory devices connected to fire alarm
system.
2. Repairs required, unless due to improper use, accidents, or negligence beyond the
control of the maintenance contractor.
3. Record keeping required by QCD and standard applying (NFPA, BS).
E. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Provide on-site response within 2 hours of notification.
2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost
to Owner.
3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly
basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly
rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.
F. Provide a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination,
adjustment, cleaning, inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
G. Maintain a log at each fire alarm control unit, listing the date and time of each inspection
and call-back visit, the condition of the system, nature of the trouble, correction performed,
and parts replaced. Submit duplicate of each log entry to Owner's representative upon
completion of site visit.
H. Comply with Owner's requirements for access to facility and security.
I. The Contractor shall submit complete details of all materials and labour required to
maintain the system in correct working order. The Contractor shall also include details of
the testing procedures that need to be carried out and specify a maintenance schedule.
J. The Contractor shall provide a detailed list of the system spare parts that should be kept
on- site for maintenance of the system. The system spare parts which should be
considered for inclusion in the list include the following:
1. Heat detectors
2. Smoke detectors
3. Flame detectors
4. Call points
5. Alarms
6. Beacons
7. Door retention units
8. Fuses
9. Circuit breakers.
K. The quantity of each of spare part kept on-site shall be sufficient to last for the duration of
the maintenance period and in addition, for a further period of two (2) years unless
otherwise stated elsewhere in the Project Documentation.
L. Details of the system spare parts that are to be kept on-site for maintenance of the system
shall be stated in the Operations and Maintenance Manual.
M. The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of all system spares for a period of not less
than ten (10) years.
N. The Contractor shall provide a detailed list of system test equipment and consumables that
should be kept on-site for maintenance of the system. The system test equipment and
consumables which should be considered for inclusion in the list include the following:
1. Detector head removal tool
2. Detector base skirt removal tool
3. Call point testing tool
4. Detector test smoke canister
5. Detector test adapter
6. Aerosol dispensing tube
7. Spare log book.
O. The quantity of each of spare part kept on-site
P. The quantity of each item of test equipment required and the quantity of each type of
consumables required shall be sufficient to last for the duration of the maintenance period
and in addition, for a further period of two (2) years unless otherwise stated elsewhere in
the Project Documentation.
Q. Details of the system test equipment and consumables that are to be kept on-site for
maintenance of the system shall be stated in the Operations and Maintenance Manual
R. The Contractor shall guarantee the availability of all system test equipment and
consumables for a period of not less than ten (10) years.
END OF SECTION
END OF DOCUMENT


M002-RLR-MEP-SPE-27005 Rev 3

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

M002-RLR-MEP-SPE-27005 Rev 3

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CONTENTS

1 Definitions and Abbreviations: 14

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

3.1 Scope of work:

4.1 General Clauses

4.2 Local Market Availability

Document No. Revision Title

5.1 Codes and Standards:

Document No. Revision Title

5.2.1 Part 1 General

Document No. Revision Title

5.2.2 Part 2 Products

Document No. Revision Title

2.02 WHEELED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Document No. Revision Title

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

Document No. Revision Title

5.2.3 Part 3 Execution

Document No. Revision Title

5.3.1 Part 1 General

A. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; the American Society of Mechanical

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

5.3.2 Part 2 Products

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

5.3.3 Part 3 Execution

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

5.4.1 Part 1 General

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

5.4.2 Part 2 Products

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

2.06 BRONZE OS&Y GATE VALVES

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

2.11 Automatic Filling tank Hydraulic Valve

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

Document No. Revision Title

5.5.1 Part 1 General

5.5.2 Part 2 Products

Document No. Revision Title

5.5.3 Part 3 Execution

Document No. Revision Title

5.6.1 Part 1 General